Owner's Manual

(11.20) Inglés 5FF012720BC FORMENTOR

(11.20)

FORMENTOR

5FF012720BC Owner’s manual

Inglés Vehicle identification da a Confirmation of eceipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no Date: right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Signature of owner: Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. Service advisor: All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.20 Introduction

Thank you for your trust choosing a CUPRA WARNING vehicle. Read and always observe safety infor- With your new CUPRA, you will be able to en- mation concerning the passenger's joy a vehicle with state-of-the-art technolo- front airbag ››› page 33, Fitting and us- gy and top quality features. ing child seats. We recommend reading this Instruction Manual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving. Information about handling is complemen- ted with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment. We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring. CUPRA ® Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab- Note About this manual sence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark. Texts after this symbol contain addition- This manual describes the features of the al information. vehicle at the time of drafting this text. Some  It indicates that the section continues of the features described below will be intro- on the next page. duced in the future or will only be available in You can access the information in this man- certain markets. ual using: Some of the features described here are not included in all the types or variations ● Thematic table of contents that follows the of the model and they can be varied or manual’s general chapter structure. modified based on technical or marketing ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics requirements without it being considered to indicate the pages containing “essential” misleading advertising. information, which is detailed in the corresponding chapters. Some details on the drawings may vary from its vehicle and must be interpreted as a ● Alphabetical index with many terms and standard representation. synonyms to help you find information.

The direction indicators (left, right, for- WARNING wards, backwards) in this manual refer to the travel direction of the vehicle unless other- Texts after this symbol contain informa- wise stated. tion about safety and warn you about possible accident or injury risks. The audiovisual material is only meant to help the users better understand some features of the car. It is not a replacement for CAUTION the instruction manual. Access the instruc- Texts after this symbol indicate possible tion manual to see the complete information damage to the vehicle. and warnings.  The features marked with an asterisk For the sake of the environment are included by default only in certain Texts after this symbol contain informa- versions of the model, supplied as option about the protection of the envi- tional only for certain versions or only ronment. offered in certain countries. Digital instruction manual The digital version of the manual can be found on the official CUPRA website:

Fig. 1 CUPRA website

● scan the QR code Fig. 1 ››› ● OR enter the following address in the navi- gator website:

http://www.cupraofficial.com/owners/cupra-car- model-manuals.html and select your vehicle.

Table of Contents

Jump start ...... 51 Transport and practical equipment ...... 130 Table of Contents Tow start and towing ...... 53 Storing objects ...... 130 Fuses and bulbs ...... 58 Luggage compartment ...... 131 General views of the vehicle ...... 7 Fuses ...... 58 Roof carrier ...... 136 Exterior view ...... 7 Changing bulbs ...... 61 Storage compartment ...... 138 Exterior view ...... 8 Power sockets ...... 141 Overview (left hand drive) ...... 9 Operation ...... 63 Air conditioning ...... 143 Overview (right hand drive) ...... 10 Controls and displays ...... 63 Heating, ventilation and cooling ...... 143 Interior view ...... 11 Interior view ...... 63 Auxiliary heating (additional heating)* ...... 152 Instruments and warning/control lamps ...... 64 Safety ...... 12 Instrument panel ...... 64 Infotainment system ...... 156 Safe driving ...... 12 Using the instrument panel ...... 78 Introduction ...... 156 Advice about driving ...... 12 Control lamps ...... 80 First steps ...... 156 Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants ...... 13 Infotainment system ...... 82 Overview and controls ...... 160 Pedal area ...... 16 Multifunction steering wheel* ...... 87 General instructions for use ...... 161 Seat belts ...... 16 Opening and closing ...... 88 Data transfer ...... 167 The whys and wherefores of seat belts ...... 16 Set of vehicle keys ...... 88 CUPRA CONNECT ...... 167 How to properly adjust your seat belt ...... 19 Central locking ...... 91 Full Link ...... 172 Seat belt tensioners ...... 21 Anti-theft alarm system* ...... 97 WLAN access point* ...... 176 PreCrash system* ...... 22 Doors ...... 100 Infotainment operation ...... 178 Airbag system ...... 23 Rear lid ...... 101 voice control* ...... 178 Brief introduction ...... 23 Window controls ...... 106 Radio/Multimedia ...... 180 Operation of the airbags ...... 25 Sunroof* ...... 108 Navigation* ...... 187 Transporting children safely ...... 31 Lights ...... 110 Telephone interface ...... 194 Child safety ...... 31 Vehicle lighting ...... 110 Multimedia ...... 200 Emergencies ...... 42 Interior lights ...... 116 Driving ...... 201 Self-help ...... 42 Visibility ...... 119 Start and driving ...... 201 Information, assistance and emergency call serv- Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys- Starting and stopping the engine ...... 201 ice* ...... 42 tems ...... 119 Start-Stop system ...... 205 Emergency equipment ...... 43 Mirrors ...... 121 DSG automatic transmission ...... 207 Tyre repairs ...... 44 Sun protection ...... 123 Gear-change recommendation ...... 213 Changing a wheel ...... 46 Seats and headrests ...... 124 Hill Descent Control (HDC) ...... 214 Changing the windscreen wiper blades ...... 50 Adjusting seats ...... 124 Steering ...... 215 Headrest ...... 125 Driving modes (Drive Profile)* ...... 215 Seat functions ...... 127 Driving tips ...... 218 5 Table of Contents

Driver assistance systems ...... 221 Engine management and emissions control sys- General notes ...... 221 tem ...... 288 Driver assistance sensors and cameras ...... 222 Engine compartment ...... 290 Cruise control system (CCS) ...... 225 Engine oil ...... 292 Speed limiter ...... 226 Cooling system ...... 295 emergency brake assistance system (Front As- Brake fluid ...... 297 sist)* ...... 228 Windscreen washer reservoir ...... 298 ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* ...... 232 12-volt battery ...... 299 Proactive speed adjustment ...... 238 Energy management ...... 302 Lane Assist* ...... 240 Wheels ...... 303 Driving Assist (Travel Assist) ...... 242 Wheels and tyres ...... 303 Emergency Assist ...... 244 Tyre pressure monitor system ...... 310 Lane departure warning (Side Assist) with rear Spare wheel ...... 312 cross traffic alert (RCTA) and door opening warning (Exit Assist)* ...... 246 Maintenance ...... 314 Braking and parking ...... 252 Service ...... 314 Braking system ...... 252 Service intervals ...... 314 Stabilisation and brake assistance systems ...... 256 Additional service offers ...... 316 Parking ...... 260 Warranty ...... 317 Help with parking and manoeuvring ...... 261 Vehicle maintenance ...... 317 Assisted parking system (Park Assist)* ...... 261 Maintenance and cleaning ...... 317 Parking aid parking and manoeuvring (ParkPi- Accessories and modifications to the vehicle . . . 322 lot) ...... 268 Accessories, spare parts and repair work ...... 322 Parking System Plus* ...... 269 Information for the user ...... 325 Rear parking aid* ...... 272 Information for the user ...... 325 Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)* ...... 273 Information stored by the control units ...... 325 Towing bracket device* ...... 276 Other important information ...... 325 Trailer mode ...... 276 Information about the EU Directive Electrically unlocking trailer hook* ...... 282 2014/53/EU ...... 326 Retrofitting a towing bracket ...... 284 Technical data ...... 329 Practical tips ...... 286 Indications about the technical data ...... 329 Checking and refilling levels ...... 286 Important information ...... 329 Refuelling ...... 286 Fuel types ...... 287 Index ...... 333

6 General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

A Levels control C Towing the vehicle Driving assistance sensors ››› page 221 – Oil ››› page 292 – Towline anchorage ››› page 56 1 Front multifunction camera – Brake fluid ››› page 297 – Tow-start ››› page 54 2 Front camera “Area View” – Battery ››› page 299 3 Front radar

B Bonnet 4 Parking aid sensors

– Unlocking lever ››› page 291 5 Park assist sensor

– Open/close ››› page 291

7 General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

A Rear lid D Fuel tank Driving assistance sensors ››› page 221 – Opening from outside ››› page 102 – Fuel capacity ››› page 329 1 Rear view camera – Emergency opening ››› page 105 – Open/Close cap ››› page 286 2 Parking aid sensors B Towing the vehicle E Action in the event of a puncture 3 Rear radars – Towline anchorage ››› page 56 – Anti-puncture kit ››› page 44 4 Park assist sensor – Tow-start ››› page 54 – Wheel change ››› page 46 C Opening and closing

– Doors ››› page 100

– Central locking ››› page 91

– Emergency lock ››› page 100 8 General views of the vehicle

Overview (left hand drive)

1 Electric windows ››› page 106 8 Infotainment system ››› page 82 , page 156 2 Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 121 ››› 3 Control for lighting and demisting win- 9 Open bonnet lever ››› page 291 dows ››› page 110 10 Fuses ››› page 58 4 Turn signal and main beam lever 11 Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15 page 112 ››› 12 Hazard warning lights ››› page 115 5 Warning lamps page 80 ››› 13 Starter button ››› page 201 6 Wipers and rear window wiper 14 Electronic parking brake ››› page 254 ››› page 119 15 Central locking ››› page 91 7 Driver information system ››› page 78

9 General views of the vehicle

Overview (right hand drive)

1 Infotainment system ››› page 82 , 5 Driver information system ››› page 78 10 Starter button ››› page 201 page 156 ››› 6 Control for lighting and demisting win- 11 Central locking ››› page 91 2 Turn signal and main beam lever dows page 110 ››› 12 Electronic parking brake ››› page 254 ››› page 112 7 Exterior mirror adjustment page 121 ››› 13 Hazard warning lights ››› page 115 3 Warning lamps ››› page 80 8 Electric windows page 106 ››› 14 Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15 4 Wipers and rear window wiper 9 Open bonnet lever ››› page 291 15 Fuses page 58 ››› page 119 ›››

10 General views of the vehicle

Interior view

1 Armrest ››› page 136 7 Electronic parking brake ››› page 254 2 Isofix anchors ››› page 34 8 Seat adjustment ››› page 124 3 Seat belts ››› page 16 4 Panoramic roof ››› page 108 5 Interior mirror ››› page 121 6 Disconnecting the front passenger front airbag ››› page 27

11 Safety

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and – Always pay attention to traffic and do not Safety good view of the surroundings. get distracted by passengers or telephone calls. – Make sure all luggage is secured Safe driving ››› page 130. – Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). – Make sure that no objects can interfere Advice about driving with the pedals. – Observe traffic laws and speed limits. – Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors – Always reduce your speed as appropriate Safety first! properly according to your size. for road, traffic and weather conditions.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rear – When travelling long distances, take breaks WARNING seats always have the headrests in the in- regularly - at least every two hours. ● This manual contains important informa- use position ››› page 125 . tion about the operation of the vehicle, – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired both for the driver and the passengers. The – Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests or stressed. other sections of the on-board documen- according to their height. WARNING tation also contain further information that – Protect children with appropriate child you should be aware of for your own safety seats and properly applied seat belts Driving under the influence of alcohol, and for the safety of your passengers. ››› page 31. drugs, medication or narcotics may result ● Ensure that the on-board documentation in severe accidents and even loss of life. – Assume the correct sitting position. In- is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- ● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics struct your passengers also to assume a pecially important when lending or selling may significantly alter perception, affect proper sitting position page 13 . the vehicle to another person. ››› reaction times and safety while driving, – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct which could result in the loss of control of your passengers also to fasten their seat the vehicle. Before driving belts properly ››› page 16 .

For your own safety and the safety of your Safety equipment passengers, always note the following points Factors influencing safety before every trip: Never put your safety or the safety of your – Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn As a driver, you are responsible for yourself passengers in danger. In the event of an ac- signals are working properly. and your passengers. cident, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The following points cover – Check tyre pressure.

12 Safe driving part of the safety equipment in your CU- and your passengers are sitting in a correct PRA1): position and use this equipment properly.

● three-point seat belts, Safety is everyone's business! ● belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats, ● belt tensioners for the front and rear side Correct sitting position of vehi- seats, cle occupants ● front airbags, ● knee* and central* airbags for the driver Correct position on the seat Fig. 3 Correct belt web and headrest positions ● side airbags in the front seat backrests, ● side airbags in the rear seat backrests*, The correct sitting positions for the driver and passengers are shown below. ● head-protection airbags, ● “ISOFIX” anchor points on the front pas- If your physical constitution prevents you senger seat and on the rear seats for child from maintaining the correct sitting position, seats with the “ISOFIX” system, contact a specialised workshop for help with any special devices. The seat belt and airbag ● 2) height-adjustable front head restraints , can only provide optimum protection if a ● rear headrests with in-use position and correct sitting position is adopted. CUPRA non-use position, recommends taking your car in for technical ● service. adjustable steering column. Fig. 2 The correct distance between the driver The safety equipment mentioned above and the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm (10 For your own safety and to reduce the risk of works together to provide you and your pas- inches). injury in the event of an accident or sudden sengers with the best possible protection in braking or manoeuvre, CUPRA recommends the event of an accident. However, these the following positions: » safety systems can only be effective if you

1) Depending on the version/market. 2) The front seats with built-in headrests do not require adjustment. 13 Safety

Valid for all vehicle occupants: bent and with a distance between the knees the event of sudden braking or manoeu- ● Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in- vring, in case of collision or accident and if is at the same level as the top of your head, ches) ››› Fig. 2 . the airbags deploy. or as close as possible to the same level as ● Adjust the height of the seat so that you ● Before starting the car, all passengers the top of your head and under no circum- can reach the top of the steering wheel. must be sitting in a correct position and stances below eye level. Keep the back of ● Always keep both feet in the footwell so stay like that for the entire journey. This al- your neck as close as possible to the head- that you have the vehicle under control at all so applies to a correct use of the seat belt. rest ››› Fig. 3 . times. ● The maximum amount of people in the ● Short people must lower the headrest vehicle is the same as the amount of seats completely, even if your head is below its up- For the passenger, the following applies: with seat belts. ● per edge. ● Move the seat backrest to an almost up- For children, always use a certified protection system, certified and suited for ● Tall people must raise the headrest com- right position so that your back rests com- their weight and height page 31 . pletely. pletely against it. ››› ● While driving, always keep your feet in ● Always keep your feet in the footwell while ● Move the seat as far back as possible (mini- the footwell. Never place them over the the vehicle is in motion. mum 25 cm between the chest and the seat or the dashboard, for example, or out- ● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly dashboard check translation). If you are sit- side the window. Otherwise the airbag and ››› page 19. ting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system seat belt may offer insufficient protection cannot protect you properly. and also increase the risk of injury in the The following also applies to the driver: event of an accident. ● Move the seat backrest to an almost upright position so that your back rests com- Number of seats pletely against it. Risks of sitting in an incorrect position The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 in ● Move the steering wheel so it is at least the rear. All seats are equipped with a safety If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, 25 cm (10 inches) away from the ster- belt. the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases. num Fig. 2 and you can hold it with both ››› Seat belts can provide optimal protection hands on both sides, on the outer part, with In some versions, your vehicle is approved only if the belt web is properly worn. Incor- your arms slightly bent. only for 4 seats. 2 front seats and 2 rear seats. rect sitting positions substantially reduce the ● The steering wheel must always point to- protective function of seat belts and, there- wards the chest and never towards the face. WARNING fore, increase the risk of severe or even le- ● Move the seat in such a way that you can thal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal inju- Sitting in an incorrect position may in- step on the pedals with your knees slightly ries is especially heightened when a crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries in 14 Safe driving deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant WARNING ● Pull the ››› Fig. 4 1 lever down, move the who has assumed an incorrect sitting posi- steering wheel to the desired position and lift tion. The driver is responsible for all people, Sitting in an incorrect position increases the lever back up until it locks. the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the particularly children, inside the vehicle. event of accidents and sudden braking or WARNING The following list contains examples of in- manoeuvres. Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust- correct sitting positions that could be dan- ● All occupants must sit correctly during ment function and an incorrect adjustment gerous for all vehicle occupants. the journey and wear the seat belt correct- of the steering wheel can result in severe or ly. fatal injury. When the vehicle is in motion: ● Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit- ● After adjusting the steering column, push ● Never stand in the vehicle. ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or the lever Fig. 4 1 firmly upwards to en- are not at a proper distance of the airbag ››› ● Never stand on the seats. sure the steering wheel does not acciden- risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries, tally change position while driving. ● Never kneel on the seats. especially if the airbags deploy and strike ● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the them. ● Never adjust the steering wheel while the rear. vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in ● Never lean against the dash panel. motion, stop safely and make the proper ● Never lie on the rear seats. Steering wheel position adjustment adjustment. ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. ● The adjusted steering wheel should be facing your chest and not your face so as ● Never sit sideways. not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro- ● Never lean out of a window. tection in the event of an accident. ● Never put your feet out of a window. ● When driving, always hold the steering ● Never put your feet on the dash panel. wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi- ● Never place your feet on the bench or on tions to reduce injuries when the driver's the backrest of the seat. front airbag deploys. ● Never travel in a footwell. ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 ● Never sit on the armrests. o'clock position or in any other manner Fig. 4 Lever in the lower left side of the steering (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt. column. such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, ● Never travel in the luggage compartment. you may sustain injuries to your arms, Adjust the steering wheel before your trip hands and head. and only when the vehicle is stationary.

15 Safety

Pedal area ● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor Seat belts coverings over the original floor mats. This Pedals would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident. The whys and wherefores of – Ensure that you can always press the accel- ● Never place objects in the driver footwell. seat belts erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation. to the floor. Control lamps – Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial positions.  It lights up red

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- The driver or one of the passengers have not fastened tened during the trip and do not obstruct their seat belts. the pedals ››› . The control lamp  lights up to remind the Only use floor mats which leave the pedals driver to fasten their seat belt. clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor Before starting the vehicle: mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- ● Fasten your seat belt securely. ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells. ● Instruct your passengers to fasten their If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must seat belts properly before driving off. be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop ● Protect children by using a child seat ac- the vehicle. cording to the child's height and weight ››› page 31. Wear suitable footwear Always wear shoes which support your feet When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed properly and give you a good feeling for the exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the pedals. seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened while driving, a warning sound will be heard WARNING for a few seconds. The warning light will also flash . ● Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving. The lamp  goes out when the ignition is on and all occupants have fastened their seat belts. 16 Seat belts

Rear seat belts fastened display* seconds. The indication can be hidden by energy released in a collision. Taken togeth- pressing the  button on the dash pan- er, all these features reduce the releasing ki- el. netic energy and consequently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just The protective function of seat belts driving around the corner". Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival when involved in a serious accident. Furthermore, Fig. 5 Instrument panel: left rear seat occupied properly worn seat belts improve the protec- and corresponding seat belt fastened display. tion provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt Depending on the model version, when the is required by law in most countries. ignition is switched on, the seat belt status display Fig. 5 on the instrument panel in- Although your vehicle is equipped with air- ››› Fig. 6 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will bags, the seat belts must be fastened and forms the driver whether the passengers in not be thrown forward in the event of sudden the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. braking. worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some cases of head-on colli-  It indicates that the corresponding seat Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants sion. The front airbags will not be triggered is empty. in the proper position. They also help pre- during minor frontal or side collisions, rear-  Indicates that the seat is occupied and vent uncontrolled movements that may re- end collisions, overturns or accidents in the occupant is wearing the seat belt. sult in serious injury and reduce the risk of which the airbag trigger threshold value in being thrown out of the vehicle in case of an the control unit is not exceeded. The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of accident. 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. Important safety instructions for the An audible warning will also be heard if the correctly benefit greatly from the ability of vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph). the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addi- use of seat belts tion, the front part of your vehicle and other If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while passive safety features (such as the airbag – Always wear the seat belt as described in driving in some of the rear seats, the seat system) are designed to absorb the kinetic this section. » belt status is displayed for approximately 30 17 Safety

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened the buckle could cause severe injuries in at all times and are not damaged. the event of an accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at WARNING regular intervals. ● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at ● Seat belts which have been worn in an ac- all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The cident and have been stretched must be re- optimal protection from seat belts can be placed by a specialised workshop. Renewal achieved only if you use them properly. may be necessary even if there is no appa- ● Never allow two passengers (even chil- rent damage. The belt anchorage should dren) to share the same seat belt. also be checked. ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat Fig. 8 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- thrown forward violently, hitting the driver who is moved or modified in any way. wearing a seat belt. ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or ● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, The effects of the laws of physics in the case the retractors may not work properly. etc.) because this can cause injuries. of a head-on collision are easy to explain: ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged the moment a vehicle starts moving, a type or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. of energy called “kinetic energy” starts act- ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or Head-on collisions and the laws of ing on both the vehicle and its passengers. in any other incorrect position. physics The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on ● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as the speed of the vehicle and on the weight an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the of the vehicle and of its passengers. The proper fit and function of the seat belts, re- higher they are, the more energy there is to ducing their capacity to protect. be “absorbed” in the event of an accident. ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not The most significant factor, however, is the be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from en- speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles gaging securely. from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the corresponding kinetic en- ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings ergy is multiplied by four. or similar items to alter the position of the belt webbing. Given that the passengers of the vehicle in ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to Fig. 7 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown our example do not have their seat belts fas- the connections, belt retractors or parts of forward violently. tened, in the event of a collision the entire

18 Seat belts amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will How to properly adjust your Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- be only absorbed by the mentioned impact. cupants in the position that most protects seat belt them in the event of an accident or sudden Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to braking . 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- ››› ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne Fastening and unfastening the seat Fastening the seat belt (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are belt even higher. Fasten your seat belt before each trip.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are ● Adjust the front seat and headrest correct- not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on ly ››› page 13 . collision, they will move forward at the same ● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in speed their vehicle was travelling just before an upright position . the impact. This example applies not only to ››› head-on collisions, but to all accidents and ● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web- collisions. bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not twist the seat belt when doing so ››› . Even at low speeds the forces acting on the ● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the body in a collision are so great that it is not corresponding seat ››› Fig. 9 . possible to brace oneself with one's hands. Fig. 9 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt into In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are the buckle. ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is thrown forward and will make violent contact securely engaged in the buckle. with the steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen or whatever else is in the way Releasing the seat belt ››› Fig. 7. Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle It is also important for rear passengers to has come to a standstill ››› . wear seat belts properly, as they could oth- ● Press the red button on the buckle erwise be thrown forward violently through Fig. 10. The latch plate is released from the vehicle interior in an accident. Passen- ››› the buckle. gers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls the front occupants ››› Fig. 8 . up easily and the trim will not be damaged. » Fig. 10 Release the seat belt's buckle.

19 Safety

WARNING ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec- any slack. tion unless the seat backrest is in an upright position and the seat belt is worn correctly, In the case of pregnant women, the seat according to your size. belt must lie evenly across the chest and as ● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi- low as possible over the pelvis, never across cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal in- the stomach and must be worn properly at juries in the event of an accident or sudden all times during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 12 . braking. ● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt, Adapting the position of the belt webbing can cause severe injuries if the belt moves to your size from hard areas of the body to soft areas Fig. 12 Position of seat belt during pregnancy. The position of the seat belt can be adapted (e.g. the stomach). by adjusting the height of the front seats. Seat belts offer their maximum protection in the event of an accident and reduce the risk WARNING Correct seat belt position of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when they are properly positioned. Further- An incorrectly worn seat belt web can more, if the webbing is correctly positioned, cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. the seat belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the optimum position to ensure the airbag ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must provides the maximum protection. The seat lie on the centre of the shoulder, never belt must therefore always be worn and the across the neck or the arm. webbing correctly positioned. ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort- ably on the torso Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even fatal injuries ››› page 13, Correct sit- ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie ting position of vehicle occupants. across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie bly on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if neces- Fig. 11 Correct seat belt and headrest positions, sary to take up any slack. viewed from front and the side. on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm, under the arm or be- ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the hind the shoulder. seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding” the ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across stomach Fig. 12 . the pelvis, never across the stomach. ››› 20 Seat belts

● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas- hicle overturning in the plug-in hybrid ver- So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tened. sion of the vehicle. tensioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environ- ● Once the seat belt is positioned correctly, This retracts and tightens the seat belts, re- mental pollution, regulations, which are don't pull it away from your body with your ducing the forward motion of the occupants. known to the specialised workshops, must hand. The belt pre-tensioners work in combination be observed. ● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or with the airbag system. The belt pre-tension- fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys. ers activate in combination with some of the WARNING ● Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings airbags, depending on the collision type. ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by or similar instruments to alter the position qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- of the belt webbing. Note vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a may fail to trigger or may trigger in the Note fine dust is produced. This is normal and it wrong circumstances. If your physical constitution prevents you is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au- from maintaining the correct position of ● The relevant safety requirements must be tomatic retractor cannot be repaired. the belt webbing, contact a specialised observed when the vehicle or components ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat workshop for help with any special devices of the system are scrapped. Specialised belts, including the removal and refitting of to ensure the optimum protection of the workshops are familiar with these regula- system parts in conjunction with other re- seat belt and airbag. CUPRA recommends tions, which are also available to you. pair work, must be performed by a special- taking your car in for technical service. ised workshop only. ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- Maintenance and disposal of seat belt tection for one accident and must be Seat belt tensioners tensioners changed if they have been activated.

How the seat belt tensioner works The belt tensioners are components of the For the sake of the environment seat belts that are installed in the seats of Airbag modules and belt tensioners may your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- The seat belts for the front seats and the side contain perchlorate. Observe the legal re- rear seats are equipped with belt tensioners. ers or remove and install parts of the system quirements for their disposal. when performing other repair work, the seat The belt tensioners are activated by sensors, belt may be damaged. The consequence although only in severe head-on, lateral and may be that, in the event of an accident, the rear-end collisions, or in the event of the ve- belt tensioners function incorrectly or may not function at all.

21 Safety

PreCrash system* Depending on how critical the driving situa- ignition is turned on), the system is fully acti- tion is, the belts are either tightened individ- vated. ually, or both belts at the same time. How it works Driving profile selection settings In addition to Front Assist The PreCrash system is an assistance system In vehicles with driving profile selection, that actives a series of measures to protect In vehicles with Front Assist ››› page 228 , PreCrash adapts to suit the special vehicle the occupants of the vehicles in potentially within the limits of the system, information is configuration of the corresponding profile risky situations, but which cannot prevent a assessed on the risk of collision with the ve- ››› page 215. collision. hicle in front. The functions of the PreCrash system may also be activated if there is a high Limited operation It only works completely if no special driving likelihood of a rear-end collision, or during profile is selected and if there are no operat- The PreCrash system is not available or only the activation of Front Assist. ing anomalies. has limited availability in the following situations: In addition to the Emergency Assist system Basic features In vehicles with emergency assist, driver sta- ● When the TCS and/or the ESC are discon- Depending on the legal provisions of the tus information is assessed within the limita- nected. country and the features of the vehicle, in tions of this system. The following PreCrash ● When driving in reverse. critical situations (e.g. in certain cases of systems may be activated if a lack of activity emergency braking or loss of control of the ● When the airbag control unit is not operat- is detected: vehicle by the driver) the following functions ing properly. can be activated separately or at the same ● Reversible seat belt tensioning of the driv- ● When there is a fault in the system itself, in time when the vehicle is travelling faster than er's seat belt. the ESC or in the Front Assist. approximately 30 km/h (20 mph). ● Automatic closing of the windows until Problems and solutions ● Reversible tensioning of front seat belts they are just cracked open and, depending that are fastened. on the equipment, of the sunroof. If the PreCrash is not working correctly, the message System unavailable or System ● Operation of the hazard warning lights. Activation of the PreCrash system with limited features is shown perma- ● Automatic closing of the windows until nently on the dashboard display. Go to a The PreCrash system can be partially deacti- they are just cracked open and, depending specialized CUPRA Service or Official SEAT vated by deactivating the traction and / or on the equipment, of the sunroof. Service and ask for the system to be stability control, depending on the equip- checked. ● In the event of overturning, depending on ment. When these vehicle safety controls the equipment, activation of the belt ten- are switched on (by default, every time the sioners.

22 Airbag system

WARNING thrown forward into the area of the deploy- Airbag system ing airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag The PreCrash system cannot overcome the may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the oc- limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only Brief introduction cupant. This also applies to children. works within the limits of the system. Risks that compromise safety are never justified Always maintain the greatest possible dis- by the use of this system. The system is not Why is it so important to wear a seat tance between yourself and the front airbag. a replacement for driver awareness and belt and to sit correctly? This way, the front airbags can completely cannot prevent a collision. deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to For the inflating airbags to achieve the best mum protection. the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit protection, the seat belt must always be The most important factors for triggering the the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- worn properly and the correct sitting posi- airbag are the type of accident, the angle of ditions. tion must be assumed. impact and the vehicle speed. ● The system is not always able to recognise The airbag system is not a substitute for seat Whether or not the airbags are activated de- objects. belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration ● The system may not react to people or overall passive safety system. Please bear in rate resulting from the collision and detected animals or objects that cross length-wise or mind that the airbag system can only work by the control unit. If the vehicle decelera- that are hard to detect. effectively when the vehicle occupants are tion occurring during the collision and meas- ● Metallic objects (e.g. fences) or other el- wearing their seat belts correctly and have ured by the control unit remains below the ements of the public road or adverse adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, specified reference values, the front, side weather conditions can hinder its opera- it is most important to properly wear the seat and/or head-protection airbags will not be tion and thus its ability to detect collision belts at all times, not only because this is re- triggered. Take into account that the visible risk. quired by law in most countries, but also for damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, ● Never ignore the warning lamps that light your safety page 16, The whys and ››› no matter how serious, is not a determining up or the messages shown on the dash- wherefores of seat belts. factor for the airbags to have been activated. board. The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so if you are not properly seated when the air- WARNING WARNING bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as- Distracting the driver in any way can lead to ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle suming an incorrect sitting position can an accident and cause injuries. occupants assume a correct sitting position lead to critical or fatal injuries. while travelling. ● Never change settings on the Infotain- ● All vehicle occupants, including children, ment System while driving. Sharp braking before an accident may cause who are not properly belted can sustain a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is »

23 Safety

triggered. Children up to 12 years old The airbag system operation is monitored tem may fail to trigger, or not trigger cor- should always travel on the rear seat. Never electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- rectly. transport children in the vehicle if they are luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- not restrained or the restraint system is not nition is switched on (self-diagnosis). appropriate for their age, size or weight. Airbag activation ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat- There is a fault in the system if the control lamp : ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop- The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within erly ››› page 16 . ● does not light up when the ignition is thousands of a second, to provide additional switched on ››› page 25 , protection in the event of an accident. A fine ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition dust may develop when the airbag deploys. Description of the airbag system is switched on, This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. ● turns off and then lights up again after the The airbag system offers additional protec- ignition is switched on, The airbag system is only ready to function tion for the occupants in combination with when the ignition is on. the seat belts. ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is moving. In special accidents instances, several air- The airbag system comprises the following bags may activate at the same time. modules (as per vehicle equipment): The airbag system is not triggered if: Airbags do not activate in the event of mi- ● Electronic control unit ● the ignition is switched off nor head-on and side collisions or rear-end ● Front airbags for driver and passenger ● there is a minor frontal collision collisions. Airbags only activate if the vehicle overturns in the hybrid plug-in version of the ● Knee airbag for the driver ● there is a minor side collision vehicle. ● Side airbags ● there is a rear-end collision ● Central airbag for the driver Activation factors WARNING ● Head airbag The conditions that lead to the airbag system ● The seat belts and airbags can only pro- activating in each situation cannot be gener- ● Airbag control lamp  on the instrument vide maximum protection if the occupants alised. Some factors play an important role, panel ››› page 25 are seated correctly ››› page 13 . such as the properties of the object the ve- ● Key-operated switch for front passenger ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- hicle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehi- airbag tem, have the system checked immediately cle speed, etc. ● Control lamp for disabled/enabled status by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- of the front passenger airbag. is a danger that during a collision, the sys- vation.

24 Airbag system

The control unit analyses the collision trajec- In an accident with airbag activation: Several warning and control lamps light up tory and activates the respective restraint ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- system. light switch is in the courtesy light position); ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- If the deceleration rate is below the prede- ● the hazard warning lights switch on; onds. fined reference value in the control unit the ● all doors are unlocked; airbags will not be triggered, even though If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system the accident may cause extensive damage to ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut; control lamp  remains on or flashes, it indi- the car. ● in hybrid vehicles, the high voltage system cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat is switched off; belt tensioner system ››› . Have the system The following airbags are triggered in seri- ● an emergency call is started*. checked immediately by a specialised work- ous head-on collisions: shop. ● Driver airbag. If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, ● Front passenger front airbag the warning lamp      re- Operation of the airbags mains lit on the dash panel to remind you ● Knee airbag for the driver.* that the airbag is deactivated. If, with the ● Head airbags (depending on the severity of Airbag system control lamps front passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp the crash). does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the  It lights up on the combi-instrument control lamp  on the instrument panel, In the event of serious side collisions, there is a fault in the airbag system ››› . If some (or all) of the following airbags can Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners . the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in Have the system checked immediately by a specialised be activated (depending on the severity of the disabling of the airbag system . Have workshop. ››› the collision): the system checked immediately by a speci- ● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- alised workshop.   It lights up on the roof console cident. WARNING ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- Front passenger front airbag deactivated. dent. Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat ● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-   It lights up on the roof console belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to dent*. trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly. ● Central airbag*. Front passenger front airbag activated. ● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus- The control lamp turns off automatically 60 seconds taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the after the ignition is switched on system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. » 25 Safety

● Do not mount a child seat in the front WARNING passenger seat or remove the mounted ● The deployment space between the front child seat! The front passenger front airbag passengers and the airbags must not in any may deploy during an accident in spite of case be occupied by other passenger, pets the fault. and objects. ● The airbags provide protection for just CAUTION one accident; replace them once they have Always pay attention to any lit control deployed. lamps and to the corresponding descrip- ● It is also important not to attach any ob- tions and instructions to avoid damage to jects such as cup holders or telephone the vehicle or harm to the occupants. Fig. 14 Front passenger airbag located in dash mountings to the surfaces covering the air- panel. bag units. The driver's front airbag is housed in the Front airbags steering wheel and that of the front passenger, on the dash panel. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”. When the driver and front passenger airbags are deployed, the covers remain attached to the steering wheel and dashboard, respectively ››› Fig. 13 ››› Fig. 14 . In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision ››› . Fig. 13 Driver airbag located in steering wheel. Their special design allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.

26 Airbag system

Activate and deactivate front passen- CUPRA recommends fitting the child seat in WARNING ger front airbag* the rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the front passenger airbag. ● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for disabling or switching on the airbag. When the front passenger airbag is deacti- ● Always switch off the ignition before disa- vated, this means that only the front passen- bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other do so could result in a fault in the airbag de- airbags in the vehicle remain activated. activation system. ● Never leave the key in the airbag disa- Deactivate and activate the front passen- bling switch as it could get damaged or en- ger front airbag able or disable the airbag during driving. ● Switch the ignition off. ● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, ● Open the door on the front passenger reactivate it as soon as possible so that it side. can fulfil its protective function. Fig. 15 Switch for activating and deactivating the front passenger airbag. ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag ››› Fig. 15. About 3/4 of the key should enter; this is as far as it will go. ● Turn the key gently to change its position to  (deactivate) or to  (activate). If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. ● Close the front passenger door. ● When deactivating the airbag, switch the ignition on and check that the control lamp   remains lit where it says    Fig. 16 On the roof console: control lamp for the deactivation of the front passenger front airbag. in the roof console ››› Fig. 16 . ● When reactivating the airbag, check that Deactivate the front passenger front airbag when the ignition is switched on, the   only if you have to use a rear-facing child control lamp does not light up and the   seat in the front passenger seat. lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turns off.

27 Safety

Knee airbag* it is deployed. Objects should never be placed or mounted in this area.

WARNING ● The knee airbag is deployed in front of the driver's knees. Always keep the deployment areas of the knee airbags free. ● Never not fix objects to the cover or in the deployment area of the knee airbag. ● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be- Fig. 20 Fully inflated central airbag (deployment tween your knees and the location of the zone). Fig. 17 On the driver side: location of the knee this airbag. If your physical constitution airbag prevents you from meeting these require- The central airbag is installed for the front ments, make sure you contact a specialised seats and is located in the inner padding of workshop. the driver's seat backrest. The location of the central airbag is indicated by the inscription “AIRBAG” ››› Fig. 19 . Central airbag* When triggered, the central airbag fills the marked zone (deployment zone) ››› Fig. 20 . For this reason, never place or fix objects in this zone ››› . The central airbag triggers in the case of a side collision or if the vehicle overturns*, re- Fig. 18 On the driver side: airbag action radius for ducing the risk of vehicle occupants suffer- the knees. ing injuries.

The knee airbag is located on the driver side WARNING below the dash panel ››› Fig. 17 . Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”. When triggered, the airbag inflates at high Fig. 19 In the inner padding of the driver's seat speed in milliseconds. The framed area (deployment area) backrest: central airbag. ● Always keep the central airbag deploy- ››› Fig. 18 is covered by the knee airbag when ment zone clear.

28 Airbag system

● Never attach objects to the central airbag Side airbags* Its location is marked with the word “AIR- cover or the deployment zone. BAG” on the upper part of the back of the seats or on the lower coverings with the word ● Do not allow other people, animals or ob- AIRBAG in relief. jects to get between the occupants of the front seats and the airbag deployment In conjunction with the seat belts, the side zone. Make sure that all vehicle occupants, airbag system provides additional protection including children, follow this rule. for the upper body in the event of a severe ● Never use upholstery or seat covers that side collision ››› . have not been explicitly authorised for the In a side collision, the side airbags reduce seats of the vehicle. Otherwise, the side the risk of injury to passengers to the areas airbag will not be able to deploy if triggered. of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal protection, the seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side WARNING Fig. 21 Side airbag in driver's seat. collision; this is how these airbags provide Improper manipulation of the driver and maximum protection. front passenger seats can prevent the central airbag from operating correctly and WARNING cause serious injuries. ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean ● Never remove the front seats from the forward, or are not seated correctly while vehicle or modify their components. the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater ● If the backrest side bolsters are subjected risk of injury if the side airbag system is trig- to a lot of force, the central airbag may not gered in an accident. trigger correctly,it may not trigger at all or ● In order for the side airbags to provide if may trigger unexpectedly. their maximum protection, the prescribed ● Have a specialised repair shop immedi- sitting position must always be maintained ately repair any damage to the original seat Fig. 22 Illustration of completely inflated side air- with seat belts fastened while travelling. upholstery or seams in the area of the cen- bags on the left side of the vehicle. ● In a side-on collision the side airbags will tral airbag module. not work if the sensors do not correctly The side airbags are located in the backrests measure the pressure increase on the inte- of the front seats and in the sides of the rear rior of the doors, due to air escaping seat, depending on the vehicle's configura- through the areas with holes or openings in tion ››› Fig. 21 , ››› Fig. 22 . the door panel. »

29 Safety

● Never drive if the interior door panels struct the side airbag, seriously reducing The head-protection airbags are located on have been removed or if the panels have the airbag's effectiveness. both sides in the interior above the doors Fig. 23 and are identified with the text not been correctly fitted. ● Any damage to the original seat uphols- ››› “AIRBAG”. ● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak- tery or around the seams of the side airbag ers in the door panels have been removed, units must be repaired immediately by a In combination with the seat belts, the Side unless the holes left by the loudspeakers specialised workshop. Curtain Protection® airbags provide addi- have been closed properly. ● The airbags provide protection for just tional protection for the upper part of the ● Always check that the openings are one accident; replace them once they have body of vehicle occupants in the event of se- closed or covered if loudspeakers or other deployed. rious side collisions or the vehicle overturn- equipment are fitted inside the door pan- ● Any work on the side airbag system or re- ing* ››› . els. moval and installation of the airbag compo- The framed area is covered by the head-pro- ● Occupants of the outer seats must never nents for other repairs (such as removal of tection airbag when it is deployed (deploy- carry any objects or pets in the deployment the front seat) should only be performed by ment area) Fig. 23 . Therefore, objects space between them and the airbags, or al- a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults ››› should never be placed or mounted in this low children or other passengers to travel in may occur during the airbag system opera- area . this position. It is also important not to at- tion. ››› tach any accessories (such as cup holders) In the event of a side collision the head-pro- to the doors. This would impair the protec- tection airbag is triggered on the impact side tion offered by the side airbags. Head-protection airbags* of the vehicle. ● The built-in coat hooks should be used The head-protection airbags reduce the risk only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave of injury to passengers in the front and rear any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. side seats facing the impact. ● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, WARNING must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- ster because the system may be damaged. ● In order for the head-protection airbags In this case, the side airbags would not be to provide their maximum protection, the triggered. prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while ● Under no circumstances should protec- travelling. tive covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been approved ● For safety reasons, the head-protection for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag Fig. 23 Location of head-protection airbags. airbag must be disabled in those vehicles deploys from the side of the backrest, the fitted with a screen dividing the interior of use of conventional seat covers would ob- 30 Transporting children safely the vehicle. See your technical service to aged, the airbag system may not work cor- Transporting children safely make this adjustment. rectly. All work carried out on the front ● There must be no other persons, animals door must be done in a specialised work- or objects between the occupants of the shop. Child safety outer seats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the Introduction head-protection airbag can deploy completely without restriction and provide the For safety reasons, as we have learned from greatest possible protection. Therefore, accident statistics, we recommend that chil- sun blinds which have not been expressly dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear approved for use in your vehicle may not be seats. Depending on their age, height and attached to the side windows. weight, children travelling in rear seats must ● The built-in coat hooks should be used use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave sons, the child seat should be installed in the any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on in the centre back seat. coat hangers. The physical laws involved and the forces ● The airbags provide protection for just acting in a collision apply also to children one accident; replace them once they have page 18. But unlike adults, children do not deployed. ››› have fully developed muscle and bone struc- ● Any work on the head-protection airbag tures. This means that children are subject to system or removal and installation of the a greater risk of injury. airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be To reduce the risk of injuries, children must performed by a specialised workshop. Oth- always use special child restraint systems erwise, faults may occur during the airbag when travelling in the vehicle. system operation. We recommend the use of child safety prod- ● The side and head airbags are managed ucts from the Original Accessories Pro- through sensors located in the interior of gramme, which includes systems for all ages the front doors. To ensure the correct op- made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see eration of the side and head-protection www.seat.com). » airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is dam-

31 Safety

These systems have been especially de- Child seats group classification Child seats that have been tested and ap- signed and approved, complying with the proved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129 ECE-R44. regulation. standards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circle CUPRA recommends securing the child with the test number below it). seats shown on the website as described below: Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- ● Child seats in the opposite direction of stalling and using child seats. travel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support peg (ROMER BABY SAFE PLUS SHR II + ISOFIX We recommend you to always include the BASE / PEKE G0 I-SIZE + I-SIZE BASE). manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation. ● Child seats in the direction of travel (group 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (ROMER DUO Fig. 24 Examples of child seats. CUPRA recommends you use child seats PLUS + TOP TETHER / PEKE G1 TRIFIX I- from the Original Accessories Catalogue. SIZE). Use only child seats that are officially ap- These child seats have been designed and proved and suitable for the child. ● Child seats directed towards the front of tested for use in our vehicles. You can find the vehicle (group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 or the right child seat for your model and age (ROMER BRITAX KIDFIX2 S). ECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco- group at our dealers. ● Child seats directed towards the front of nomic Commission for Europe Regulation. Child seats by approval category the vehicle (group 3): safety belt (TAKATA MAXI). Child seats by weight group Child seats may have the approval category The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific Follow the manufacturer's instructions and ries: (all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i- observe any statutory requirements when in- Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard). stalling and using child seats. Always read Age group Weight of the child and note ››› page 33 . ● Universal: child seats with universal appro- Group 0 Up to 10 kg val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no We recommend you always carry the manu- need to consult any list of models. In the facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- Group 0+ Up to 13 kg case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the gether with the on-board documentation. Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg child seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether belt. Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg ● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg in addition to the standard requirements of

32 Transporting children safely universal approval, requires safety devices to ● To correctly use a child seat in the back, lock the child seat, which require additional the front backrest must be adjusted so that testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- there is no contact with the child seat in the proval include a list of vehicle models for back in the case that it goes opposite to the which they can be installed. direction of the car. In the case of front fac- ● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval ing restraint systems, the front backrest must requires a dynamic test of the child seat for be adjusted so that there is no contact with each vehicle model separately. Child seats the child's feet. with vehicle-specific approval also include a ● For a correct assembly of the child's seat list of vehicle models for which they can be on the rear seats, adjust or dismount the installed. headrest, in order to prevent contact with ● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must the seat. Fig. 26 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the meet the requirements prescribed in the passenger side door ● If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal- ECE-R 129 standard in relation to installation led, in which the method of attachment to and safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell Warnings about fitting a child seat the car is through the seat belt and support you which seats have i-Size approval for this bracket, it should never be installed in the Take the following general warnings into ac- vehicle. central rear seat as the ground clearance is count if you are going to fit a child seat. They lower than in other places and the support are valid for all child seats regardless of their bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi- attachment system. Fitting and using child seats ciently stable. ● Please read and follow the child seat man- ● When fitting a child seat on the front pas- ufacturer's operating instructions. senger seat, the seat must be moved back- ● The child seat should preferably be fitted wards as far as possible and placed in the » to the rear seat behind the front passenger seat so that the child can exit the vehicle on the pavement side. ● Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt Fig. 25 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sun visor height regulator must be used with rear-facing child seats.

33 Safety

highest position. The backrest must also be abled with a key-operated switch ››› page 27 . when an adult wants to sit in the front pas- 1) put in a vertical position . When transporting children, use a child seat senger seat. suitable for the age and size of each child ● Never allow a child to be transported in a page 32. Important information about the front ››› vehicle without being properly secured, or passenger front airbag to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- WARNING A sticker with important information about ling. In an accident, the child could be flung the passenger airbag is located on the pas- ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- injuries to themselves and to the other ve- side door frame ››› Fig. 25 . ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an hicle occupants. accident increases. ● Never leave a child alone in the child seat Read and always observe the safety informa- ● An inflating front passenger airbag can or in the vehicle. tion included in the following chapters: strike the rear-facing child seat and project ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall ● Safety distance with respect to the passen- it with great force against the door, the roof must not wear a normal seat belt without a ger airbag ››› page 23 . or the backrest. child seat, as this could cause injuries to the ● abdominal and neck areas during a sudden ● Objects between the passenger and the Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat unless braking manoeuvre or in an accident. passenger side airbag in Front airbags ››› the front passenger front airbag has been on page 26. ● When a child seat is mounted in the rear disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to seats, the door child-proof lock should be The passenger side front airbag, when ena- the child! However, if necessary, the front activated ››› page 101 . bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing passenger front airbag must be deactivated page 27. If the passenger seat has a backward since the airbag can strike the seat ››› height adjustment option, move it to the with such force that it can cause serious or highest, most upright position. If you have a Attachment systems fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old fixed seat, do not install any child restraint should always travel on the rear seat. system in this location. Depending on the country, different attachment systems are used for safely installing Therefore we strongly recommend you to ● For those vehicles that do not include a transport children on the rear seats. This is key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the child seats. the safest location in the vehicle. Alterna- vehicle must be taken to a technical serv- tively, the front passenger airbag can be dis- ice. Do not forget to reconnect the airbag

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. 34 Transporting children safely

Attachment systems overview Additional attachment: Recommended systems for attaching child ● seats ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- ● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided ment system allowing quick and safe attach- over the back of the rear seat and attached CUPRA recommends attaching child seats as ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor follows: tachment establishes a rigid connection be- points are located at the back of the rear tween the child seat and the car body. ● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo- seat backrest on the boot side ››› page 38 . site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, The rings for retaining the Top Tether belt bracket or i-Size. are marked with an anchor symbol. called connectors. These connectors are fit- ● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO- ● ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found Support bracket: some child seats rest on FIX and Top Tether. between the seat cushion and the backrest the floor of the vehicle with a support brack- of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO- et. The support bracket prevents the child WARNING FIX attachment systems are used mainly in seat from tipping forward in the event of im- Europe ››› page 36 . If necessary, ISOFIX at- pact. Child seats fitted with a support brack- Incorrect use of the support bracket can tachment may have to be supplemented et should only be used in the passenger seat cause serious or fatal injury. with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket. and side rear seats ››› . For the assembly of ● Make sure the support bracket is correct- this type of seat you should also consult the ly and safely installed. ● Automatic three-point seat belt. When- list of approved vehicles for this assembly, ever possible, it is preferable to attach the available in the instructions for child restraint child seats with the ISOFIX system rather systems. than attaching them with an automatic three-point seat belt ››› page 40 .

35 Safety

Fit a child seat with the ISOFIX / i-Size and Top Tether system

Fig. 27 Rear seat: die cut slots to access the ISO- Fig. 28 Front passenger seat: ISOFIX/i-Size secur- FIX / iSize securing rings. ing rings.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily rings are secured to the seat frame and, in seats (behind the seat backrest or in the and safely on the rear side seats with the others, they are secured to the rear floor. boot) ››› page 38 . “ISOFIX” and Top Tether system. The “ISOFIX” rings are located between the To understand the compatibility of the “ISO- rear seat backrest and the seat cushioning Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the table Fig. 27. The Top Tether rings are located each rear side seat. In some vehicles, the ››› below. on the rear part of the backrests of the rear

36 Transporting children safely

Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Electrical Front passenger seat Weight group Size classa) Rear side seat Rear central seat equipment airbag enabled airbag disabled

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL IL X

E ISO/R1 X IL IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 X IL IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL IL X

D ISO/R2 X IL IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

B1 ISO/F2X X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X

Group II 15 to 25 kg B2/B3 ISO/B2/B3b) X IL IL X

Group III 22 to 36 kg B2/B3 ISO/B2/B3b) X IL IL X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class. a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the class according to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat. b) The headrest must be removed and the backrest reclined to install it on front seats. »

37 Safety

Vehicle i-Size positions Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat airbag enabled airbag disabled

X i-U i-U X

i-U: Position suitable for forward- or rear-facing i-Size child restraint systems with universal certification. X: Position not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i- WARNING Top Tether securing belts Size” system The retaining rings are designed only for You must follow the child seat manufactur- use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether system er's instructions. child seats. ● Open the cut-out section behind the ● Never secure other child seats that do marked grooves to access the retaining rings not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether system, or retaining belts or objects to the fas- ››› Fig. 27. tening rings – this can result in potentially ● Press the child seat onto the “ISO- fatal injuries to the child. FIX/iSize” retaining rings until it is heard to ● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- engage securely. If the child seat is equipped rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether with Top Tether anchor points, secure it to securing rings. the correspondent ring ››› page 38 . Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether attachment system are available from Tech- nical Services.

Fig. 29 Rear seats: adjustment and assembly according to the Top Tether belt.

38 Transporting children safely

cle anchor point, located at the back of the lift or remove the headrest if necessary) rear seat backrest and provide greater re- ››› Fig. 29 /, ››› Fig. 30 /. straint. ● Slide the strap and secure it properly with The objective of this strap is to reduce for- the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 29 , ward movements of the child seat in a crash, ››› Fig. 30 . to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from ● Firmly tighten the strap following the man- hitting the inside of the vehicle. ufacturer's instructions.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun- Releasing the retaining strap ted seats ● Loosen the strap following the manufac- Currently, there are very few rear-facing turer's instructions. child safety seats that have Top Tether. ● Push the lock and release it from the an- Please carefully read and follow the seat choring support. manufacturer instructions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap. WARNING

Securing the retainer strap An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the event of a ● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to crash. deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining ● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in strap. Fig. 30 Front passenger seat: adjustment and as- the luggage compartment. sembly according to the Top Tether belt. ● Position the belt under the headrest (de- ● Never secure or tie luggage or other pending on the instructions of the seat itself, Child seats with the Top Tether system come items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- the upper ones (Top Tether).

39 Safety

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

If you want to fit a universal approval category (U) child seat in your vehicle, you must check that the seat is approved for your vehicle. You will find any necessary information on the child seat’s orange ECE approval label. The following table shows the different fitting options.

Fig. 31 On the rear seats: installing the child seat.

Front passenger seata) Weight group Rear side seat Rear central seatb) Airbag enabled airbag disabledc)

Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration. U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat. c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

40 Transporting children safely

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt ● Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-facing child seats. ● Put the seat belt in place and pass it through the child seat according to the instructions of the child seat manufacturer. ● Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted. ● Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle until you hear the engagement click.

WARNING When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age, weight and size. ● Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats ››› page 33.

41 Emergencies Emergencies ● information call  Assistance call1) ● assistance call With the assistance call you can directly re- ● emergency call service. quest specialised help in the event of a Self-help breakdown. A built-in control unit establishes the con- Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data is nection. Information, assistance and transmitted, e.g. your current location. When a voice service is activated, a connec- emergency call service* tion is established with a phone line.  Emergency call service1) If an emergency call is conducted manually How it works Control lamp or activated automatically in the event of an The control has a warning lamp ››› Fig. 32 accident with an airbag triggering, informa- (arrow). It shows the following statuses: tion relevant to the emergency is broadcast, e.g. the current location of the vehicle ● Off: the eCall service is not available. ››› page 325. ● Flashes red, approx. 20 seconds after If the call is public, the person on the other switching on the ignition: the eCall service end of the line uses the language of the is off. country in which you are located. ● Lights up red: system failure. The eCall service is available with certain restrictions. If the call is private, the person on the other CUPRA suggests going to a specialised work- end of the line will assist you in the language shop. you have configured in the Infotainment sys- Fig. 32 On the roof console: voice service con- tem. If the configured language is not availa- ● Lights up green: the eCall service is availa- trols ble, English will be used. ble. The system works correctly. Depending on the equipment, there is a ● Flashes green: There is an ongoing voice Diversion to 112 emergency number control on the roof console. connection. In some situations where the emergency call    By pressing the buttons , and service is limited or cannot be carried out, an Information call1) ››› Fig. 32, you can run the following voice  emergency call is made to 112. services: With the information call, a call is made to SEAT, S.A. customer service.

1) Only available in certain countries. 42 Self-help

The following conditions may cause the Emergency equipment Some of the items listed are only provided in emergency call service to function in a limi- certain model versions, or are optional ex- ted manner or the call to be diverted to the tras. 112 emergency number: Vehicle tool kit WARNING ● The emergency call is made from an area with weak or no mobile and GPS signal, as When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set and spare wheel are loose in the interior well as e.g. tunnels, between very tall build- they can be violently thrown in case of a ings, garages, underground walkways, moun- sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe- tains and valleys. cially in accidents, causing serious injury. ● In areas with sufficient mobile telephone ● Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre and GPS coverage, the mobile telephone mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo- network of the telecommunications opera- rary spare wheel are safely secured in the tor in question may not be available. luggage compartment. ● In some countries, the emergency call Fig. 33 Underneath the floor panel of the luggage service may not be available due to legal rea- compartment: vehicle tool kit. WARNING sons. There is no valid license for the use of the emergency call service. Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can The vehicle tool kit is located under the floor cause injury or accidents. ● The components of the vehicle required panel in the luggage compartment. To ac- ● Never work with inappropriate or dam- for the emergency phone call are damaged cess the vehicle tools page 131 . ››› aged tools. or do not get enough power. The tool kit includes: ● In some countries, the emergency call Note service may not be available and depending 1 Adapter for the anti-theft bolt* The jack does not generally require any on the location of the vehicle, the control 2 Towing eye, removable lamp LEDs, and even the operation of the maintenance. If required, it should be 3 Wheel spanner* different types of calls, could have a specific greased using universal type grease. behaviour. 4 Crank handle for jack 5 Jack* Note 6 Hook for extracting the central wheel Breakdown service and information calls trims* can incur an additional cost on your tele- 7 Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps phone bill.

43 Emergencies

Tyre repairs WARNING lector lever in P to reduce the risk of accidental vehicle movement. Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the roadside. Please observe the following WARNING The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) rules to minimise the risk of injury: A tyre filled with sealant does not have the will reliably seal punctures caused by the ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- same performance properties as a conven- penetration of a foreign body of up to about ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- tional tyre. 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign rounding traffic to fill the tyre. ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. ● Ensure the ground on which you park is (50 mph). flat and solid. After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking you must again check the tyre pressure ● All passengers and particularly children and fast cornering. about 10 minutes after starting the engine. must keep a safe distance from the work ● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum area. You should only use the tyre mobility set if speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn the tyre. familiar with the procedure and you have the other road users. necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you For the sake of the environment should seek professional assistance. are familiar with the necessary procedures. Otherwise, you should seek professional Dispose of used or expired sealant observing any legal requirements. Do not use the tyre sealant in the following assistance. cases: ● The tyre mobility set is intended for temporary emergency use only until you can Note ● If the wheel rim has been damaged. reach the nearest specialised workshop. You can purchase a new bottle of tyre seal- ● In outside temperatures below -20°C ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre ant in specialised CUPRA dealers or any (-4°F). mobility set as soon as possible. SEAT dealership. ● In the event of cuts or perforations in the ● The sealant is a health hazard and must tyre greater than 4 mm. be cleaned immediately if it comes into Note ● If you have been driving with very low pres- contact with the skin. Take into account the separate instruction sure or a completely flat tyre. ● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of manual of the tyre mobility set* manufac- the reach of small children. ● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by turer. date. ● Always switch off the engine, activate the electronic parking brake and place the se-

44 Self-help

Anti-puncture kit contents* 6 Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated ● With the bottle upside down, empty all of in the inflator tube). the contents into the tyre. 7 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- ● Remove the bottle from the valve. toring system (it can also be integrated in ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- the inflator tube). ing the tool ››› Fig. 34 1 . 8 Tube for inflating tyres 9 12 volt connector Inflating the tyre

10 Bottle of sealant ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube Fig. 34 8 into the tyre valve. 11 Spare tyre valve ››› ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the ››› Fig. 34 6 . lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert ● Start the engine and leave it running. can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part ● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 34 9 into the Fig. 34 Standard representation: anti-puncture kit 11 . vehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 141 . contents. ● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF switch 5 . The anti-puncture kit is located underneath ››› Fig. 34 the floor covering in the luggage compart- Sealing and inflating a tyre ● Keep the air compressor running until it ment. It includes the following components reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar ››› Fig. 34: Sealing the tyre (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use minutes. 1 Valve insert remover the ››› Fig. 34 1 tool to remove the insert. ● Disconnect the air compressor. 2 A sticker to be adhered to the instrument Place it on a clean surface. ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, cluster, within the driver's visual field, to ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. remind that the maximum advisable ››› Fig. 34 10 . speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 34 3 into distributed throughout the tyre. 3 Filler tube with cap the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the 4 Air compressor (depending on the ver- automatically. valve. sion, the model may vary). ● Remove the lid from the filling tube ● Repeat the inflation process. 5 ON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 34 3 and screw the open end of the ● tube into the tyre valve. If the indicated pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop » 45 Emergencies

and request assistance from an authorised overheating! Before switching on the air Changing a wheel technician. compressor again, let it cool for several mi- ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew nutes. What to do first the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and ● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding Check after 10 minutes of driving and in a safe place as far away from traffic as 80 km/h (50 mph). possible. Screw the inflator tube Fig. 34 5 again ● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 34 2 to the in- ››› ● Apply the electronic parking brake. and check the pressure on the gauge 6 . strument cluster, within the driver's visual ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. field. 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: ● Switch on the parking lock by pressing but- ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes ton P. ››› page 46. ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle. WARNING ● You should obtain professional assistance ● Have the vehicle tool kit page 43 and When inflating the wheel, the air compres- ››› . ››› the spare wheel* ready page 312 . sor and the inflator tube may become hot. ››› 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: ● Observe the applicable legislation for each ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. country (reflective vest, warning triangles, ● ● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube etc.). or hot air compressor on flammable mate- again. rial. ● Carefully resume your journey until you ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and wait in a safe place (for instance behind the ● Allow them to cool before storing the de- reach the nearest specialised workshop roadside crash barrier). vice. without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at ● Have the damaged tyre replaced. WARNING least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a WARNING ● Always observe the above steps and pro- good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- tect yourself and other road users. Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance. ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block and can cause accidents and serious injury. the wheel on the opposite side of the car ● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- CAUTION with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi- sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. cle from moving. Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- ● Seek specialist assistance. mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid

46 Self-help

Wheel bolt caps Anti-theft wheel nuts* Loosening wheel nuts

Fig. 35 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps. Fig. 36 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapt- Fig. 37 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts. er. Removal Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools››› Fig. 33 ) car to loosen the wheel nuts. over the cap until it clicks into place ● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*. Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turn ››› Fig. 35. ● Insert the special adapter ››› Fig. 36 1 (ve- before raising the vehicle with the jack. hicle tools page 43 ) onto the anti-theft ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. ››› If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go. on the end of the wheel wrench with your The caps protect the wheel nuts and should ● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and be remounted after changing the tyre. the adapter as far as it will go. take care not to slip during this operation. The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a ● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 47 . special cap. This only fits on anti-theft lock- Loosening wheel nuts ing bolts and is not for use with standard Note ● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go wheel nuts. Make a note of the code number of the an- ››› Fig. 37. ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe ● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a bolt approximately one turn anticlock- new adapter, you can obtain it from the wise ››› . » specialised CUPRA service or the SEAT Of- ficial Service, indicating the code number.

47 Emergencies

Important information about wheel nuts have been tightened to the prescribed tor- Factory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe- que, they could come loose while driving. cially matched during construction. There- ● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct rims with bolted ring trims. wheel nuts with the right length and heads ● If wheel nuts are tightened below the must be used. This ensures that wheels are prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could fitted securely and that the brake system come loose while driving. If tightening tor- functions correctly. que is too high, the wheel nuts or threads In certain circumstances, you should not can be damaged. even use wheel nuts from vehicles of the Fig. 39 Cross member: positioning the jack on the same model. vehicle. Raise the vehicle WARNING ● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm If the wheel nuts are not properly tight- ground. If necessary use a large, strong ened, they could come loose while driving board or similar support. If the surface is slip- and cause an accident, serious injury and pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a loss of vehicle control. rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- ● Use only wheel nuts which correspond to ping ››› . the rim in question. ● Find the support point on the strut (sunken ● Never use different wheel nuts. area) closest to the wheel to be changed ● Wheel nuts and threads should be clean, ››› Fig. 38. free of oil and grease, and it should be pos- ● Turn the jack* crank handle, located below sible to screw them easily. the strut support point, to raise it until the Fig. 38 Jack position points. ● To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only tab 1 ››› Fig. 39 is below the housing provi- use the wheel wrench that came with the ded. car from the factory. ● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” onto ● The wheel nuts should only be loosened the housing provided on the strut and the slightly (about one turn) before raising the mobile base 2 is resting on the ground. The vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident! base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- ● Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or spect to the support point 1 . to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts ● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground. 48 Self-help

WARNING CAUTION ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. ● The factory-supplied jack* is only designed The vehicle must not be raised on the Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the for changing wheels on this model. On no crossbar. Only place the jack* on the points wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di- account attempt to use it for lifting heavier designed for this purpose on the strut. Oth- agonal pairs (not in a circle). vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury. erwise, the vehicle may be damaged. ● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on. ● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. The wheel nuts should be clean and turn If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect could slip or sink, respectively, with the re- Removing and installing a wheel sultant risk of injury. the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These surfaces must be clean before ● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- Change the wheel after loosening the wheel fitting the wheel. plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks, nuts and raising the vehicle with the jack. even those approved for other CUPRA models could slip, with the consequent risk When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim Tightening torque of the wheel nuts may hit and damage the brake disc. For this of injury. The prescribed tightening torque for wheel reason, please take care and get a second ● Only mount the jack* on the support nuts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. Af- person to assist you. points designed for this purpose on the ter changing a wheel, have the tightening strut, and always align the jack correctly. If torque checked immediately with a torque you do not, the jack* could slip as it does Taking off the wheel wrench that is working perfectly. not have an adequate grip on the vehicle: ● Unscrew the wheel nuts using the box Before checking tightening torque, have risk of injury! spanner and place them on a clean surface. any rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to ● You should never place a body limb such ● Take off the wheel. screw replaced and clean the wheel hub as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that threads. is solely supported by the jack. Putting on the spare wheel ● If you have to work underneath the vehi- Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to Check the direction of rotation of the tyre cle, you must use suitable stands addition- the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have . ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of ››› page 49 been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving. accident!. ● Place the spare wheel or temporary spare ● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one wheel into position. side or the engine is running. ● Screw on the wheel nuts in position and Tyres with directional tread pattern ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is tighten them loosely with a box spanner. raised. The vehicle may come loose from ● the jack due to the engine vibrations. To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel Tyres with directional tread pattern have nuts use the corresponding adaptor. been designed to operate best when »

49 Emergencies

rotating in only one direction. An arrow on que wrench ››› page 49 . Meanwhile, drive Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of ro- carefully. Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- tation on tyres with directional tread. Always ● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- observe the indicated direction of rotation in possible. tion. order to guarantee optimum grip and help avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and Note wear. ● The windscreen wiper arms can be If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direc- Changing the windscreen wiper moved to the service position only when tion of rotation, drive with extreme caution, blades the bonnet is properly closed. as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. ● You can also use the service position, for This is of particular importance when the Wiper service position example, if you want to fix a cover over the road surface is wet. Change the tyre as soon windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of as possible or remount it with the correct di- ice. rection of rotation.

Changing the wiper rear wiper blades Works after changing a wheel

● Replace the wheel bolt caps. ● Return all tools to their proper storing location. ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the spare wheel housing, store it safely in the Fig. 40 Wipers in service position. luggage compartment ››› page 130 . Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen. ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly mounted tyre as soon as possible. The wiper arms can be raised when the wipers are in service position ››› Fig. 40 . ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi- Fig. 41 Changing the windscreen wiper blades cator, adjust the pressure and store it in ● Close the bonnet ››› page 290 . memory ››› page 310 . The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as ● Switch the ignition on and off. ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is ● Press the windscreen wiper lever down- nuts checked as soon as possible with a tor- responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si- wards briefly ››› page 119 4 . lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the

50 Self-help noise of the water as it is wiped across the Changing the windscreen wiper blades CAUTION windscreen will be louder. ● Lift and unfold the wiper arms. ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers Check the condition of the wiper blades reg- ● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 41 1 could scratch the glass. ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di- ● If products containing solvents, rough they should be changed if they are damaged, rection of the arrow. sponges or sharp objects are used to clean or cleaned if they are dirty . ››› ● Fit a new wiper blade of the same length the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- If this does not produce the desired results, and design on to the wiper arm and hook it aged. the setting angle of the windscreen wiper into place. ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, arms might be incorrect. They should be ● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind- paint thinner or similar products to clean the windows. checked by a specialised workshop and cor- screen. rected if necessary. ● In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- Damaged windscreen wiper blades should Changing the rear window wiper blade fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it be replaced immediately. These are available ● Separate the wiper arm from the rear win- may help to leave the vehicle parked with from qualified workshops. dow. the wipers in service position ››› page 50 . ● Remove the blade from the holder below Raising and lowering windscreen wiper the centre. During this operation, hold the arms CAUTION wiper arm firmly. ● Place the windscreen wipers in the service ● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the ● Fit the new blade (of the same length and position ››› page 50 . wiper arms, only leave them in the service type) into the housing of the wipe arm by position. ● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas- pressing it in place. When doing so, hold the ● Before driving, always lower the wiper tening point. wiper arm by the upper end. arms. ● Fold the wiper arm and rest it on the win- Cleaning windscreen wiper blades dow. ● Raise the wiper arms. ● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt WARNING Jump start from the windscreen wiper blades. Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re- ● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or duce visibility and increase the risk of acci- Jump leads damp cloth may be used . dent and serious injury. ››› The jump lead must have a sufficient wire ● Always replace damaged or worn windscreen wiper blades or blades that no lon- cross section. » ger clean the windscreen properly.

51 Emergencies

If the engine fails to start because of a dis- Jump start: description solid piece of metal in the engine block, charged battery, the battery can be connec- or to the engine block itself. ted to the battery of another vehicle to start 5. Connect the other end of the black the engine. jump lead D to a solid metal compo- Jump leads must comply with standard DIN nent bolted to the engine block or to 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- the engine block itself of the vehicle tions). The wire cross section must be at with the flat battery. Do not connect it least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least to a point near the battery. 35 mm2 for diesel engines. 6. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any Note moving parts in the engine compart- ● The vehicles must not touch each other, ment. otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. Starting ● The discharged battery must be properly 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the connected to the on-board network. boosting battery and let it run at idling speed. 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the Fig. 42 Diagram of connections for vehicles with flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes Start-Stop system. until the engine is running.

Jump lead terminal connections Removing the jump leads 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles 9. Before you remove the jump leads, . ››› switch off the dipped beam headlights if 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead they are switched on. to the positive + terminal of the vehicle 10. Turn on the heater blower and heated with the flat battery A . rear window in the vehicle with the flat 3. Connect the other end of the red jump battery. This helps minimise voltage lead to the positive terminal + in the peaks which are generated when the vehicle providing assistance B . leads are disconnected. 4. Connect one end of the black jump lead C to a suitable ground terminal, to a 52 Self-help

11. When the engine is running, disconnect terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted Always consider the legal provisions relating the leads in reverse order to the details from the battery could be ignited by sparks. to tow-starting and towing. given above. Danger of explosion. For technical reasons, towing a vehicle Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient ● Never attach the negative cable to fuel with a discharged battery is not allowed. metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter- system components or the brake lines in The jump start should be used instead minals. the other vehicle. ››› page 51. ● The non-insulated parts of the battery If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- clamps must not be allowed to touch. The system, towing is only allowed with the igni- onds, switch off the starter and try again af- jump lead attached to the positive battery tion on! ter about 1 minute. terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is WARNING ● Position the leads in such a way that they towed with the engine switched off and the ● Please note the safety warnings referring cannot come into contact with any moving ignition connected. Depending on the bat- to working in the engine compartment parts in the engine compartment. tery charge status, the drop in voltage may ››› page 290. ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could be so large, even after just a few minutes, ● The battery providing assistance must result in chemical burns. that no electrical device in the vehicle may have the same voltage as the flat battery work e.g. the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the (12V) and approximately the same capacity Note (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply steering wheel could lock ››› . could result in an explosion. The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as ● Never use jump leads when one of the WARNING the positive terminals are connected. batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! A vehicle with no power should never be Even after the battery has thawed, battery towed. acid could leak and cause chemical burns. ● During towing, never switch off the igni- If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. Tow start and towing tion using the start button. Otherwise, the ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- electronic lock of the steering column rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- could suddenly become blocked and it plosion. Failure to comply could result in an Introduction would be impossible to steer the vehicle. explosion. This could cause an accident, serious injury Tow-starting means starting the engine of ● Observe the instructions provided by the and loss of control of the vehicle. » the vehicle while another pulls it. manufacturer of the jump leads. ● Do not connect the negative cable from Towing means one vehicle pulling another the other vehicle directly to the negative that is not roadworthy.

53 Emergencies

● If during towing the vehicle runs out of ● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no power, stop towing immediately and re- converter and damage it during towing. power supply or there is an electric system quest the assistance of specialist fault, the engine must be jump-started to personnel. deactivate the electronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column. Instructions for tow-starting WARNING Vehicle handling and braking capacity Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star- change considerably during towing. Please ted. The jump start should be used instead Towing instructions observe the following instructions to mini- ››› page 51. Towing requires some expertise and experi- mise the risk of serious accidents and in- For technical reasons, towing the following jury: ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both vehicles is not allowed: drivers should be familiar with the difficulties ● As the driver of the vehicle being towed: ● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. involved in towing. For this reason, inexper- – You should depress the brake much ienced drivers should abstain from towing. harder as the brake servo does not op- ● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access During towing, it should be ensured that no crashing into the towing vehicle. locking and ignition system the steering re- impermissible tractive forces or shocks are – More strength is required at the steer- mains locked and the electronic parking generated. When towing on an unpaved ing wheel as the power steering does brake cannot be deactivated nor can the road, there is always a risk of overloading and not operate when the engine is switch- electronic lock of the steering column be re- damaging the anchorage points. ed off. leased if they are activated. During towing, the towing vehicle can signal ● As the driver of the towing vehicle: ● If the battery is flat, it is possible that the the change of direction even with the hazard – Accelerate with particular care and engine control units may not operate cor- warning lights turned on. To do so, at the caution. rectly. same time, the turn signal lever must be op- – Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. erated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, CAUTION the hazard warning lights will go off. When – Brake earlier than usual and more the turn signal lever is returned to the rest smoothly. When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it. position, the hazard warning lights will be automatically reactivated. CAUTION Note ● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam- Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle ple the paint, remove and replace the lid The vehicle can only be jump-started if the ● Leave the ignition on, so that the steering electronic parking brake and, if appropri- and towing eye carefully. is not blocked, and the electronic parking ate, the electronic lock of the steering col- 54 Self-help brake may be deactivated and the turn sig- If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de- otherwise the transmission may be dam- nals and wash/wipe operated. vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted aged. ● More strength is required at the steering if it has been specially designed to be instal- wheel as the power steering does not oper- led on a tow hitch ››› page 276 . Cases where towing the vehicle is not per- ate when the engine is switched off. mitted When the vehicle has to be towed: ● You should depress the brake much harder ● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri- as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid Check whether the vehicle may be towed cant. hitting the towing vehicle. ››› page 55, Cases where towing the vehi- ● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- cle is not permitted. ● Bear in mind the information and instruc- cause the steering remains locked and, if ap- tions in the manual of the vehicle to be tow- The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or propriate, the electronic parking brake can- ed. tow rope in the normal way, with all four not be deactivated or the electronic lock of wheels on the road; it can also be towed with the steering column released. Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle either the front or rear wheels lifted off the ● If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav- road. ● Accelerate with particular care and cau- elled. tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres. ● Switch the ignition on. ● When, for example, after an accident, the smooth rotation of the wheels or the steer- ● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly. ● Move the selector lever to the N ing operation cannot be guaranteed. ● Bear in mind the information and instruc- ››› page 207 position. tions in the manual of the towed vehicle. ● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at When the vehicle is to tow another vehi- speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph). cle: Tow rope or tow bar ● The vehicle must not be towed further ● Observe legal requirements. It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a than 50 km (30 miles). tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A ● Keep in mind the instructions in the man- ● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is ual on towing vehicles. automatic transmission are only allowed to not available. be towed with the front wheels suspended. CAUTION A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri- damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive cant in the automatic transmission the car use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or (4Drive) may only be towed with the driven wheels similarly elastic material. Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be lifted clear of the road, or transported on a Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the ve- special car transporter or trailer. » the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket. hicle is towed with the front or rear axle suspended, the engine must be switched off, 55 Emergencies

Note that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. The vehicle can only be towed if the electronic parking brake and the electronic ● After towing, unscrew the towing eye lock of the steering column are deactiva- clockwise with a suitable object. ted. If the vehicle has no power supply or ● Replace the cover and tighten on its right there is an electric system fault, the engine side until the tab snaps into the bumper. must be jump-started ››› page 51 to deacti- ● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then vate the electronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column. store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.

Fig. 44 Right side of the front bumper: towline CAUTION Front towline anchorage anchorage in position. The towing eye must always be completely The housing of the screw towing eye is on and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be the right side of the front bumper behind a released while towing and tow-starting. lid ››› Fig. 43 . The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle. Bear in mind the instructions for towing ››› page 54.

Fitting the towline anchorage ● Remove the towing eye from the vehicle Fig. 43 On the right side of the front bumper: remove the cover. tool kit in the luggage compartment ››› page 43. ● Remove the cover by pressing down on its base and leave it hanging from the vehicle ››› Fig. 43. ● Screw the towing eye in the housing by turning it as far as it will go anticlockwise ››› Fig. 44 ››› . Use a suitable object

56 Self-help

Rear towline anchorage screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case, CAUTION the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal- ● led and used for towing ››› page 276 , ››› . The towing eye must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could Bear in mind the instructions for towing be released while towing and tow-starting. ››› page 54. ● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with- a tow bar if this has been specially designed out a factory-equipped towing bracket) to be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuit- ● Remove the towing eye from the vehicle able tow bar is used, both the tow hitch and tool kit in the luggage compartment the vehicle may be damaged. Instead, a tow rope should be used. ››› page 43. Fig. 45 On the right side of the rear bumper: re- ● Press the upper side of the lid ››› Fig. 45 to move the cover. unclip it. ● Remove the lid and let it hang from the vehicle. ● Screw the towing eye in the housing by turning it to the maximum anticlockwise ››› Fig. 46 ››› . Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. ● After towing, unscrew the towing eye clockwise with a suitable object. ● Replace the cover and press until the tab Fig. 46 On the right side of the rear bumper: tow- snaps into the bumper. line anchorage in position. ● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along The housing of the screw towing eye is on with the other vehicle tools. the right side of the rear bumper behind a lid ››› Fig. 45. Vehicles equipped as standard with a towing bracket do not have any housing for the

57 Emergencies

Fuses and bulbs perage (same colour and markings) and Fuses inside the vehicle size. ● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- Fuses ple or similar.

Introduction CAUTION In general, a fuse can be assigned to various ● To prevent damage to the vehicle’s elec- electrical components. Likewise, an electri- trical system, before replacing a fuse always cal component can be protected by several turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec- fuses. trical elements. ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- Only replace fuses when the cause of the vent the entry of dust or humidity as they problem has been solved. If a newly inserted Fig. 47 On the driver's side dashboard: fuse box can damage the electrical system. fuse blows after a short time, you must have cover. the electrical system checked by a special- Opening and closing the fuse box situated ised workshop as soon as possible. Note below the dash panel ● One component may have more than one WARNING fuse. ● Open: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 47 . The high voltages in the electrical system ● Several components may run on a single ● Close: push back the cover it in until it can give serious electrical shocks, causing fuse. clicks into place. burns and even death! ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the those indicated in this chapter. Identifying fuses below the dashboard by ignition system. colours ● Take care not to cause short circuits in Colour Amp rating the electrical system. Light brown 5

WARNING Brown 7.5

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or Red 10 bridging a current circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury. Blue 15

● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only Yellow 20 replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

58 Fuses and bulbs

Colour Amp rating To open the engine compartment fuse box Recognise a blown fuse ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 290 . A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured White or transparent 25 ● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse ››› Fig. 49. Green 30 box cover Fig. 48 . ››› ● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has Orange 40 ● Then lift the cover out. blown. ● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. CAUTION Push the locking tabs down until they click To replace a fuse ● Always carefully remove the fuse box audibly into place. ● Remove the fuse. covers and refit them correctly to avoid ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an problems with your vehicle. identical amperage rating (same colour and ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to Replace a blown fuse markings) and identical size. avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and ● Replace the cover again or close the fuse humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam- box lid. age to the electrical system.

Fuse placement Fuses in the engine compartment Fuses in the vehicle interior No. Consumers/Amps

3 Trailer 25

Fig. 49 Image of a blown fuse. 4 SCR, Adblue 20

Preparations 5 Automatic gearbox lever 25 ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri- 6 Interior light 30 cal equipment. 8 Sunroof 20 ● Open the corresponding fuse box Fig. 48 In the engine compartment: fuse box cov- 7 Heated seats 30 er. ››› page 58, ››› page 59 . 9 Left door 30

11 Trailer 15 » 59 Emergencies

No. Consumers/Amps No. Consumers/Amps No. Consumers/Amps

12 Right lights 40 37 Electric rear lid 30 66 Rear window wiper 15

13 Central locking 40 39 Heated steering wheel 10 67 Heated rear window 30

14 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 30 40 Alarm horn 7.5 In-line fuse/Amps 16 Airbag 7.5 41 Gateway 7.5 230 V rear power sockets 30 17 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10 42 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5 Electric driver's seat 15 18 KESSY 7.5 Air conditioning and heating control 43 panel, rear window heating, AA com- 10 Fuse arrangement in engine compartment 19 Instrument panel 7.5 pressor No. Consumers/Amps 20 Connectivity Box 7.5 Diagnosis, handbrake switch, light 44 switch, reverse light, interior lighting, 7.5 2 Engine control unit 7.5 21 Rear camera 7.5 lit-up door sill 3 Fuel pump control unit, CNG 7.5/10/20 24 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15 45 Steering column 7.5 4 Left headlight 15 25 RGS+EBSS front seat belts 25 46 Radio display 7.5 5 Right headlight 15 26 Right door 30 47 Driving mode. 10 7 Automatic gearbox pump 30 27 RGS+EBSS front seat belts 25 48 USB 7.5 8 Brake servo 40 PHEV. Switching off the high voltage 52 12V socket 20 28 system for rescue tasks. Identified by 10 9 Horn 15 a yellow label Parking sensors, parking assist con- 58 7.5 trol unit, front camera, radar 10 Front windscreen washer 30 29 Trailer 15 Reverse switch, clima sensor, elec- 11 PHEV Climate 7.5 59 7.5 30 Radio 30 trochromic mirror 12 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30 31 Trailer 25 Diagnosis, headlight control unit, 60 7.5 headlight adjuster 13 ESP control unit 25 34 230V socket 30 61 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5 14 Standheizung 20 35 Left lights 40 65 Sound amplifier 10 15 ESP control unit 40 36 Air conditioner fan 40

60 Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumers/Amps ● Some of the equipment listed in the tables below pertain only to certain versions 16 PHEV, Automatic gearbox unit of the model or are optional extras. 17 PTC 40 ● Please note that the above lists, while correct at the time of printing, are subject 18 PTC 40 to change. 20 Front electronic differential 15

21 Engine control unit 7.5

22 Starter motor 30 Changing bulbs

Engine control unit (diesel/pet- 23 15 Changing bulbs rol)

24 Engine sensors 7.5/10 Full-LED headlights Full-LED headlights handle all light functions 25 Engine sensors 7.5/10 (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam 26 Engine power supply 7.5/10 and route light) with light emitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source. 27 Lambda probe 10/15 Full-LED headlights are designed to last the 28 Engine 10/20 lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be 29 Fuel pump control unit 15/20/30 replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced. 30 Pressure pump 1.0 10

33 PTC 40 Fog lights, rear lights, license plate light, side turn signals and additional brake light Note Taking into account that they use LED bulbs, ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than they should be replaced at a technical serv- those indicated in this chapter. These ice centre. should only be changed by a specialised workshop. ● Positions not containing a fuse do not appear in the following tables.

61 Operation

Fig. 50 Instruments and controls.

62 Controls and displays

– Windscreen wipers and wash- Note Operation er ...... 119 ● Some of the equipment listed in this sec- – Wipe and wash system ...... 119 tion is only fitted on certain models or are Controls and displays – On-board computer ...... 69 optional extras. 8 Infotainment system ...... 156 ● The arrangement of switches and controls on right-hand drive models* may be Interior view 9 Glove compartment ...... 139 slightly different from the layout shown in 10 Front passenger airbag ...... 26 ››› page 62. However, the symbols used to Overview 11 Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . 27 identify the controls are the same. 1 Door handle 12 Hazard warning lights ...... 115 2 Air vents ...... 148 13 USB type-C ports ...... 200 3 Control lever for: 14 Connectivity Box* ...... 198 – Turn signals and main beam 15 DSG automatic gearbox lever ...... 207 headlights ...... 112 16 Central locking switch ...... 93

4 Switches for: 17 Electronic parking brake switch . . . . 254

– Driver assistance systems ...... 79 18 Auto Hold switch ...... 255

– On-board computer ...... 78 19 Starter button ...... 201

– Controls for radio, telephone, 20 Adjustable steering column...... 15 navigation and voice control sys- 21 Fuse box ...... 58 tem ...... 87 22 Bonnet lock release ...... 291 5 Steering wheel with horn and 23 Control for lighting and demisting – Driver airbag ...... 26 windows ...... 110 – Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- 24 Button to open rear lid1) ...... 102 shift (automatic gearbox) ...... 209 25 Control for the electric adjustment 6 Instrument panel ...... 64 of the exterior mirrors ...... 121 7 Control lever for: 26 Electric windows ...... 106

1) Valid for the Leon Sportstourer. 63 Operation

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Instrument panel

Introduction

After switching the engine on with a 12-volt battery that is heavily discharged or newly changed some system settings (such as the time, the date, the personalised comfort settings and the programming) might be altered or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. ● Do not operate the instrument panel controls when driving. ● To reduce the risk of accident and injury, only make adjustments to the instructions on the screen of the instrument panel and to the instructions on the screen of the In- fotainment system when the vehicle is stationary.

64 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Digital instrument panel (Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 51 Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments: screen. It has a 5 views accessible using the ● CUPRA button  of the multifunction steering 1 Control and warning lamps ››› page 80 wheel. By selecting different information All views will display information on the 2 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- profiles, indications other than the classic screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi- nute the engine is running page 75 . 1) 1) ››› circular instruments can be displayed, such cle status, navigation and driving aids . 3 Gear engaged or position of the selec- as navigation data, multimedia information tor lever currently selected or travel data. Information profiles 4 Screen display ››› page 67 The  /  buttons on the multifunction The 6 views are: steering wheel can be used to browse 5 Speedometer ● Classic through the different Digital Cockpit infor- 6 Digital speed display ● Dynamic mation. 7 Information Profile page 65 . ››› ● Assistance systems Information on the vehicle status, travel data The Digital Cockpit is a digital instrument ● Navigation* and assistants will be displayed on the left panel with a high-resolution TFT colour side. » ● Night

1) Depending on the version. 65 Operation

On the right side information will be dis- Classic View Information that may be displayed in the played on audio, telephone, compass* and The revolutions per minute and speedome- central area of the Digital Cockpit rev navigation* manoeuvres. ter needles appear in full length by a long counter Depending on the view in the central area of press on the button  on the multifunction ● Consumption and average consumption. the Digital Cockpit information about the steering wheel, regardless of the menu dis- By pressing the arrow on the left of the mul- following will be displayed: played in the central area ››› Fig. 51 . tifunction steering wheel, you can switch between the different memories of the travel With another long press on the button , ● Classic View and Dynamic View: Initial da- data. ta, date, distance travelled and autonomy. the display will returns to the previous view. ● Autonomy (fuel tank level). Turn the right thumbwheel on the multifunc- Or looking in the instrument panel menu for ● tion steering wheel: navigation map*, traffic the  Close option using the right hand Lubricating oil and coolant temperature signs*, travel data (by clicking on , it thumbwheel on the multifunction steering ● Average speed. By pressing the arrow on changes between the different memories). wheel, and then press . the left of the multifunction steering wheel, ● Assists View: This is accessed by pressing you can switch between the different memo- the button  or the button  on the multi- Information that may be displayed in the ries of the travel data. function steering wheel. By turning the right central area of the Digital Cockpit speed- ● Other travel data: km travelled and driving thumbwheel on the multifunction steering ometer time. By pressing the arrow on the left of the wheel the different aids are displayed, press ● Audio multifunction steering wheel, you can switch  to select the desired aid. between the different memories of the travel ● Telephone ● Navigation View: By pressing the button  data. ● Compass* on the multifunction steering wheel and ● Assist systems. ● Navigation indications* (the most recent then turning the thumbwheel you can view ● Engine power and torque. the map in a larger or smaller view. If you destinations are displayed by pressing the ar- ●   pressed the button  again, the map returns row on the right of the multifunction steering > (close classic view). to automatic scale. wheel) CUPRA view ● Night View: The speed is displayed in digital ● G-force meter. format. ●  >  (close classic view). Turning the right hand thumbwheel on the multi-function steering wheel scrolls through ● CUPRA view: The Centre Clock, RPM and the following information displayed in the Speed are displayed. middle of the rev counter:

● Speed. ● Lap timer.

66 Instruments and warning/control lamps

The following information is displayed out- ● Speed warning ››› page 69 in some cases, the gear engaged in each side the rev counter circle: ● Speed warning for winter tyres case is shown on the instrument panel display . ● Right-hand area: G-force meter. ● Start-Stop system status display page 205 ● Left-hand area: engine power and torque. ››› Outside temperature indicator ● Signals detected by the traffic signal detec- If the outside temperature is lower than ap- tion system and warning that the maximum proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystal allowed speed* has been exceeded Status display symbol”  on the outside temperature dis- page 72 ››› play also lights up. This symbol remains lit Possible indications on the instrument ● Indication of active cylinder management until the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C ® panel display status (ACT ) ››› page 219 (+43 °F) ››› . ● Low consumption driving  Different pieces of information can be dis- When the vehicle is stationary, when the played on the screen of the instrument pan- ● Identifying letters on engine (LDM) auxiliary heater is switched on or when driv- el, depending on the features of the vehicle. ● Driver assistance system display ing at very low speeds, the outside tempera- ● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open ››› page 221 ture indicated may be higher than the actual temperature due to the heat produced by ● Warning and information messages ● Copyright the engine. ● Odometer The margin of measurement ranges from ● Time ››› page 75 Doors, bonnet and rear lid open -45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F). ● Indications of the radio and navigation sys- When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv- tem ing, the instrument panel display shows if any of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are Gear-change recommendation ● Indications of the phone opened and, in some cases, it is also indica- While driving, the instrument panel of cer- ● Outside temperature ted by an audible warning. The display may tain vehicles may indicate a gear recommen- ● Indications of the compass vary according to the type of instrument dation for saving fuel ››› page 213 . panel fitted. ● Selector lever positions Odometer ● Gear recommendation (Triptonic mode) Selector lever positions (DSG® dual clutch ››› page 213 The odometer registers the total distance gearbox) travelled by the car. ● Display of travel data (multifunction dis- The current position of the selector lever is The partial odometer (trip) shows the display) and menus for different settings shown on the side of the lever and on the in- tance travelled since the last time it was reset ››› page 68 strument panel display. When the lever is in to zero. » ● Service interval display ››› page 77 the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, 67 Operation

To reset the trip odometer (trip ) to 0: Identifying letters on engine (LDM) displayed on the infotainment system as ● well. ● When in Travel data select trip. See Service menu ››› page 69 . ● If there are several warnings at the same ● Press and hold the  button of the multi- Copyright time, the symbols will be displayed one af- function steering wheel for approximately 2 Legal text about the property rights and ter the other for a few seconds. The sym- seconds. bols will stay on until you remove the cause. copyrights of the instrument cluster. ● If when switching on the ignition warn- Speed warning for winter tyres WARNING ings are shown about existing faults, it If the maximum set speed is exceeded, this is might not be possible to change the set- displayed on the instrument cluster display Even when the outside temperature is tings or show the information as described. ››› page 68. higher than freezing temperature, some In this case, go to a specialised workshop roads and bridges could be frozen. and request a repair. The speed warning can be adjusted in the In- ● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that fotainment system, by using the function there may be a risk of freezing. button  > Exterior > Tyres ››› page 86 . ● At outside temperatures above +4 °C Instrument panel menus (+39 °F), there may be ice even when the Indications of the compass “ice crystal symbol” is not on. The number of menus and information items Depending on the equipment, when the ig- ● The outside temperature sensor takes a available will depend on the vehicle’s elec- nition is on, the instrument panel display in- guideline measurement. tronics and features. dicates the direction in which you are driving with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest. Some menu options can only be read when Note the vehicle is stationary. When the Infotainment system is on and ● There are different instrument panels there is no route guidance active, the graph- ■ Driving data ››› page 69 and therefore the versions and instructions ■ Assist systems. ic representation of a compass is also shown. on the display may vary. In the case of displays without warning or information texts, ■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 228 Low consumption driving * faults are indicated exclusively by the con- ■ ACC (only display) ››› page 232 Depending on the equipment, when the ve- trol warning lamps. ■ Lane Assist On/Off ››› page 240 hicle is moving  is displayed on the instru- ● Some indications on the instrument pan- ■ Travel Assist On/Off ››› page 242 ment cluster display when the vehicle is in an el screen may be concealed by a sudden ■ Side Assist On/Off ››› page 246 economical consumption status due to ac- event, e.g. an incoming call. ■ Navigation. tive cylinder management (ACT®)* ● Depending on the equipment, some set- ■ ››› page 219. tings and instructions can be carried out or Audio. ■ Telephone. 68 Instruments and warning/control lamps

■ Vehicle status ››› page 70 Restart journey data Changing memory

Select the Reset trip menu and follow the ● Depending on the view, select Trip data instructions on the instrument panel display and press the left arrow or the  button on Service Menu to reset the value. the multifunction steering wheel.

In the Service menu various settings can be Identifying letters on engine (LDM) – Since start: The memory is deleted if adjusted depending on the features. Select the menu Engine code. The identify- the journey is interrupted for more than ing letters of the engine will be shown on the 2 hours. Open the Service menu instrument cluster display at the bottom left. – Since refuelling: Display and stor- ● While in Classic View, go to the Initial age of the journey data and the con- Data screen, press the  button on the mul- Setting the clock sumption values collected. When refu- tifunction steering wheel for about 5 sec- elling, the memory is deleted. Select the Time menu and set the correct onds and release it. time by turning the right thumbwheel of the – Long-term: This memory contains ● Next, the Configuration list menu is multifunction steering wheel. travel data up to a maximum of 19 hours displayed, where you can choose between and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 mi- the Service menu or the View selection Tyre pressure nutes, or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km from where the instrument cluster views can or 9999.9 km. When one of these val- To save the tyre pressure after inflating or be switched on and off. ues is exceeded (varies depending on changing tyres . Follow the in- ››› page 310 the version of the instrument panel), structions on the instrument cluster. Restart the service interval display the memory is deleted. Select the Service menu and follow the instructions on the screen of the instrument Delete journey data presets Driving data indicator (multifunction panel. ● When in Travel data select desired memo- display) ry. Restart the oil service The display of the travel data (multifunction ● Keep the  button on the multi-function Select the Restore Oil service menu and display) shows different values about the steering wheel pressed for approximately 2 follow the instructions on the instrument journey and the consumption. seconds. panel display. Change from one display to another Select the instructions ● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multi- In the Infotainment system, in the menu Ve- function steering wheel ››› page 78 . hicle settings, you can display different travel data ››› page 82 . » 69 Operation

– Current consumption: The current from the engine and the outside tempera- Priority 2 warning (yellow) fuel consumption display operates ture is high, the engine oil temperature may The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- throughout the journey, in litres/100 increase. This does not present any problem companied by audible warnings). Operating   km; and with the engine running and as long as the warning lamps or faults or the lack of operating fluids can the vehicle stopped, in litres/hour. ››› page 293 do not appear on the display. cause damage to the vehicle or a fault. – Average consumption: The average Check the faulty function as soon as possi- fuel consumption is displayed after driv- ble. If necessary, seek professional assis- ing for approximately 300 metres. Warning and information messages tance. – Travelling time: This indicates the (Vehicle status) hours (h) and minutes (min) since the Information message ignition was switched on. The system runs a check on certain compo- It provides information about processes in nents and functions when the ignition is – Range: Approximate distance in km the vehicle. switched on and while the vehicle is moving. that can still be travelled if the same Faults are displayed on the instrument clus- driving style is maintained. Accessing warnings and information ter display as red and yellow warning symbols – Distance: Distance covered in km (m) accompanied with messages and, as appli- ● In the infotainment system, press  >  after switching on the ignition. cable, even an audible signal ››› page 80 . Vehicle info > Vehicle status > Warnings. – Average speed: The average speed The representation of the messages and will be shown after driving for approxi- symbols may vary depending on the version mately 100 metres. of the instrument panel. – Digital speed: Current speed dis- Existing faults can also be checked manually. played in digital format. To do so, open the menu Vehicle info – Eco tips: Recommendations messag- ››› page 85. es are shown to reduce consumption through good driving practices, e.g. Air Priority 1 warning (red) conditioning on: close the win- The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- dow. companied by audible warnings).  Stop driving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi- Oil and coolant temperature indication nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio- The engine reaches its operating tempera- nal assistance. ture when, under normal driving conditions, the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F) and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is required 70 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Driver alert system (break recommen- and depending on the case, is repeated. The ● On roads in poor condition dation)* system stores the last message displayed. ● In unfavourable weather conditions The message on the instrument panel dis- ● When a sporty driving style is employed play can be switched off by pressing the  ● In the event of a serious distraction to the button on the multi-function steering wheel driver ››› page 78. The message can be recalled to the instru- Fatigue detection will be restored when the ment panel display using the multifunction vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, display ››› page 69 . when the ignition is switched off or when the driver has unbuckled their seat belt and opened the door. Conditions of operation Driving behaviour is only calculated on In the event of slow driving during a long period of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the Fig. 52 On the instrument panel display: driver speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to system automatically re-establishes the alert system symbol. around 200 km/h (125 mph). tiredness calculation. When driving at a fast- The Fatigue detection informs the driver Switching on and off er speed the driving behaviour will be recalculated. when their driving behaviour shows signs of Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- fatigue. vated in the infotainment system using the WARNING function button  > Driver assistance > Function and operation Driver Alert System ››› page 86 . A mark in- Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati- gue detection system tempt you into taking Fatigue detection determines the driving be- dicates that the adjustment has been activa- any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, haviour of the driver when starting a journey, ted. sufficient in length when making long jour- making a calculation of tiredness. This is neys. constantly compared with the current driv- System limitations ● ing behaviour. If the system detects that the The driver always assumes the responsi- The Fatigue detection has certain limitations bility of driving to their full capacity. driver is tired, an audible warning is given inherent to the system. The following condi- ● Never drive if you are tired. with a sound and an optic warning is shown tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- with a symbol and complementary message vent it from functioning. ● The system does not detect the tiredness on the instrument panel display ››› Fig. 52 . of the driver in all circumstances. Consult The message on the instrument panel dis- ● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) the information in the section ››› page 71, System limitations. » play is shown for approximately 5 seconds, ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) ● When cornering 71 Operation

● In some situations, the system may incor- The traffic signal detection system is activa- system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain- rectly interpret an intended driving ma- ted whenever the vehicle ignition is switched ment system as well ››› page 82 . on. noeuvre as driver tiredness. Hazard warning signs are not displayed in the ● No warning is given in the event of the ef- The system records the standard traffic signs infotainment system. fect called microsleep! in front of the vehicle with a camera located ● Please observe the indications on the in- on the base of the interior mirror and pro- Road sign detection system messages: vides information about speed limits, hazard strument panel and act as is necessary. There are no traffic signs available warnings and overtaking prohibitions. ● The system is in its start-up phase. Note Within its limitations, the system also displays ● OR: the camera has not recognized any additional signals, such as time-specific pro- ● Fatigue detection has been developed for mandatory or prohibitive sign. driving on motorways and well paved roads hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers page 276 or limitations that only apply in only. ››› Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display the event of rain. Even on journeys without ● If there is a fault in the system, have it ● There is a fault in the system. Have the sys- signs, the system may display any applicable checked by a specialised workshop. tem checked by a specialised workshop. speed limits. The traffic sign detection system does not Speed warning currently unavailable Road signs detection system*1) work in all countries. Keep this in mind when ● The speed warning function of the road travelling abroad. sign detection system is faulty. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. Shown on the display Dynamic Road Sign Display: please In Germany, on motorways and vehicle clean the windscreen. roads, besides speed limits and overtaking provisions the system also displays the end of ● The windscreen is dirty in the camera area. prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the Clean the windscreen. time in other countries is always shown. Dynamic Road Sign Display currently The traffic signs detected by the system are restricted. Fig. 53 On the instrument panel display: examples displayed on the dash panel display ● The navigation system is not transmitting of recognised signals. ››› Fig. 53 and, depending on the navigation data. Check if the navigation system has updated maps.

1) System available depending on the country. 72 Instruments and warning/control lamps

● OR: the vehicle is in a region not included A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. no If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti- on the navigation system's map. overtaking at certain times, may be dis- vated, the system displays the speed limits as played. if there were no trailer hitched. No data available ● The traffic sign detection system does not Speed warning (depending on the instru- No entry sign work in the current country. ment panel) The traffic sign recognition system warns If the system detects that the permitted acoustically and visually in the instrument Display of traffic signs speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver panel when a no entry sign is crossed on a When the traffic sign detection system is with a “gong” and visually with a message on one-way road or an entrance to a motorway connected, a camera located on the base of the dash panel display. or highway. the interior rear-view mirror records the traffic signs in front of the vehicle. After check- Trailer mode Limited operation ing and evaluating the information from the In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket The traffic sign detection system has certain camera, the navigation system and the cur- device from the factory and a trailer that is limitations. The following cases may lead the rent vehicle data, up to two valid road signs electrically connected to the vehicle, it is system to operate with limitations or not at are displayed, with their corresponding addi- possible to activate or deactivate the display all: tional signs: of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trail- ● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, ● First position. The sign that is currently er, such as speed limits or overtaking prohib- rain, fog or intense mist. valid for the driver is shown in the screen. For itions. Activation or deactivation is carried example, a maximum speed limit of 130 out in the infotainment system using the ● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-  km/h (100 mph) ››› Fig. 53 . function button > Driver assistance > on traffic or by the sun. Trailer assist ››› page 86 . ● Second position. A second traffic sign may ● When driving at high speeds. be displayed in the second position, such as For trailer mode, the display of speed limits ● If the camera is covered or dirty. applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal a hazard warning sign, an overtaking prohibi- ● If the traffic signs are out of the camera's provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad- tion or an alternative speed limit. field of vision. justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and ● If the traffic signs are partially or totally working while you are driving, the signal with 130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other ve- the additional rain sign will be shown first, on speed greater than that which is permitted in hicles. the left, as it is the one that is applicable at the country in question for driving with a ● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil the time. trailer, the system automatically displays the the regulations. » usual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h (50 mph). 73 Operation

● In the case of damaged or bent traffic WARNING ● Check that the windscreen is not dam- signs. aged in the area of the camera's field of vi- The driving recommendations and traffic ● sion. In the case of variable messages on over- indications shown on the traffic sign detec- head or gantry signs (LED-based variable tion system may differ from the actual cur- ● The use of outdated maps on the naviga- traffic signs or other lighting units). rent traffic situation. tion system may cause the system to show traffic signs incorrectly. ● If the maps on the navigation system are ● The system may not detect or correctly not up-to-date. show all the traffic signs. ● In the waypoints mode of the navigation system, the traffic sign detection system is ● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have only partly available. that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on priority over the recommendations and dis- lorries. plays provided by the system. ● Failure to heed the control lamps and corresponding text messages when they WARNING light up may result in damage to the vehi- WARNING cle. The technology in the traffic sign detection If messages are ignored, the vehicle may system cannot change the limits imposed stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- by the laws of physics and only works within vere injuries. the system's limits. Do not let the extra Eco-efficient driving assistance ● Never ignore the messages displayed. convenience afforded by the traffic sign detection system tempt you into taking any ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity risks when driving. The system is not a re- and in a safe place. placement for driver awareness. ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit Note visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- To avoid affecting the correct operation of tions. the system, take the following points into ● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and consideration: fog may lead to the system failing to display ● Regularly clean the area of vision of the traffic signs or not displaying them correct- camera and keep it in a clean state, without ly. snow or ice. ● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov- Fig. 54 Eco-efficient driving assistance indication ● Do not cover the field of vision of the ered or damaged, system operation may be (schematic representation). camera. impaired. ● Always replace damaged or worn blades Eco-efficient driving assistance helps you when required to avoid lines on the cam- drive with care and with low energy con- era's field of vision. sumption by following instructions

74 Instruments and warning/control lamps superimposed in the digital cockpit, de- Time celerator before the needle reaches the red pending on the situation. zone ››› . When you approach places such as a junc- Setting the time on the infotainment sys- We recommend that you avoid high revs and tion, a roundabout or a section of road with a tem that you follow the recommendations on the speed limit, the symbol  is displayed along ● Press  /  > Settings. gear-change indicator. Consult the addition- with an event in the digital cockpit ››› Fig. 54 . ● Select the menu option Time and date to al information in ››› page 213, Selecting the set the time ››› page 82 . optimal gear. WARNING The system is not a replacement for driver Setting the time on an analogue instru- CAUTION awareness. ment panel ● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all ● In the classic view ››› page 66 hold the counter needle should only remain in the times to suit visibility, weather, road and button  of the multifunction steering wheel red zone for a short period of time. traffic conditions. pressed when you have selected the date, ● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs route and autonomy information. ● Traffic signs on the road and traffic regu- and heavy acceleration and do not make lations have priority over eco-driving notes. ● Press and turn the button  to make the the engine work hard. adjustments. Note For the sake of the environment ● Changing up a gear early will help you to The appearance of the symbols may vary Revolution counter slightly depending on the equipment and save fuel and minimise emissions and en- model. System updates may modify or ex- gine noise. The rev counter indicates the number of en- pand the symbols. gine revolutions per minute. ● When the system is switched on, eco-efficient driving assistance can also increase Together with the gear-change indicator, recuperation without any indication being the rev counter offers you the possibility of displayed. This can occur in situations such using the engine of your vehicle at a suitable as when the accelerator pedal is released speed. when a vehicle is driving in front. In this The beginning of the red zone of the rev case, energy recuperation is adapted match the speed of the vehicle in front counter indicates the maximum speed in any without any indication being displayed. gear after running-in and with the engine hot. However, it is advisable to move the selector lever to D or lift your foot off the ac-

75 Operation

Fuel gauge ● The steering system and the driver assis- Control and warning lamp tance systems and brakes do not work  It lights up red when the engine is running irregularly or switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-  Do not carry on driving! lar supply thereof. Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too ● Always refuel when there is only one high. quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle to stop due to lack of fuel.  Flashes red

Fig. 55 Fuel gauge located in different positions Fault in the engine coolant system. CAUTION depending on the view. Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and Control lamps irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring let it cool down. and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust ● Check the engine coolant level  It lights up yellow system. The catalytic converter or the par- ››› page 295. ticulate filter may get damaged! Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has ● If the warning lamp does not switch off been reached ››› . Refuel as soon as you have the even if the coolant level is correct, request opportunity. Note assistance from specialised personnel. The display only works when the ignition is The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to CAUTION switched on. the fuel pump symbol points out towards the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine, The fuel range is displayed on the instrument flap. avoid high revs, driving at high speed and panel. making the engine work hard for approxi- You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- mately the first 15 minutes when the engine hicle in the ››› page 329 section. Coolant temperature indicator. is cold. The phase until the engine is warm also depends on the outside temperature. WARNING The coolant temperature view can be selec- If necessary, use the engine oil tempera- ted in the corresponding menu page 66 . ture* ››› page 70 as a guide. When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may ››› ● Additional lights and other accessories in stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef- vere injuries. fect of the coolant. At high outside temper- ● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could atures and high engine loads, there is a risk reach the engine irregularly, particularly of the engine overheating. when driving up or down slopes.

76 Instruments and warning/control lamps

● ● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis- and individual driving styles are considered. Oil change service and inspection tribution of the cooling air when the vehi- The advance warning first appears 20 days due! cle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this before the date established for the corre- can reduce the cooling effect, which could sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re- Consult a service notification maining until the next service are always cause the engine to overheat. Seek special- With the ignition switched on, the engine off rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) ist assistance. and the vehicle at a standstill, the current and the time is given in complete days. The service notification can be read: current service message cannot be viewed Service intervals until 500 km after the last service. Prior to Check the date of the current service on the this, only lines are visible on the display. infotainment system The service interval display appears on the ● Press  /  > Settings. instrument cluster screen and in the info- Inspection reminder ● Select the Applications and services tainment system. If a service or an inspection has to be carried menu option to display information about out soon, a will be dis- There are different versions of instrument service reminder the services. played when the ignition is switched on. panels and infotainment systems, so the versions and instructions on the screens may The figure displayed are the kilometres that Checking the date on the digital instrument vary. can still be travelled or the time until the next panel service. ● The date of the service can only be read CUPRA distinguishes between services with through the Service menu ››› page 69 . engine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and services without engine oil change (e.g. Service due Resetting service interval display Inspection). When the time for a service or an inspection comes, an audible warning will be emit- If the service was not carried out by a speci- In vehicles with Services established by ted when the ignition is switched on and the alised CUPRA dealer or any dealer in the time or mileage, the service intervals are al- fixed key symbol  may appear on the in- SEAT network, the display can be reset as ready pre-defined. strument panel for a few seconds, along with follows: In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- one of the following messages: ● vals are determined individually. Thanks to The service interval display can only be re- technological progress, maintenance work ● Service now! set through the Service menu ››› page 69 . has been greatly reduced. Because of the ● Please have your vehicle inspec- Do not restart the indicator between the technology used by CUPRA, with this service ted. service intervals, otherwise the information you only need to change the oil when the ve- ● Oil change service due! displayed will be incorrect. » hicle so requires. To calculate this variation (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use 77 Operation

If the oil change service is reset manually, The multifunction display can only be con- Operation using the multifunction the service interval display changes to a fixed trolled from the buttons on the multi-func- steering wheel service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible tion steering wheel. oil change service. Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill. Note ● The service message disappears after a WARNING few seconds, when the engine is started or Distracting the driver in any way can lead to when the  button is pressed on the multi- an accident and cause injuries. function steering wheel. ● Never use the menus on the instrument ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in panel display while the vehicle is in motion. which the battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is not possible to calculate the date of the next service. Note Fig. 56 Right side of the multifunction steering Therefore the service interval display may After loading or changing the 12-volt bat- wheel: buttons for using the instrument cluster’s not be correct. In this case, bear in mind tery, check the system settings. If the pow- menus and information displays (depending on the maximum service intervals permitted er supply is interrupted, the system settings versions). page 314. ››› might be incorrect or deleted. ● If you reset the display manually, the next As long as a priority 1 ››› page 70 warning is service interval will be indicated as in vehi- active, it will not be possible to access any cles with fixed service intervals. For this menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and reason we recommend that the service in- hidden with the button  of the multifunc- terval display be reset by an authorised tion steering wheel ››› Fig. 56 . dealer. Select a menu or an informative display ● Switch the ignition on. Using the instrument panel ● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press the button  ››› Fig. 56 ; if necessary, Introduction several times. ● To change menus, use buttons  or  With the ignition switched on, it is possible to ››› Fig. 56. read the different functions of the display by ● To open the menu or the information dis- scrolling through the menus. played, press the button  ››› Fig. 56 or wait 78 Instruments and warning/control lamps a few seconds until the menu or the informa- Button for the driver assistance sys- vate the driver assistance systems displayed tive display opens automatically. tems* in the Assistance systems menu .

Changing menu settings Activating or deactivating a driver assis- ● In the menu displayed, turn the right tance system using the turn signal lever thumbwheel of the multifunction steering and main beam headlight wheel ››› Fig. 56 until the desired option of ● Briefly press the ››› Fig. 57 1 button to the menu is highlighted. The option appears open the Assistants menu. framed. ● Select the driver assistance system and ac- ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 56 to make the tivate or deactivate it ››› page 78 . A mark in- required modifications. A mark indicates that dicates that driver assistance system is the system or function is activated. switched on. ● Next, confirm the selection by pressing Back to menu selection Fig. 57 On the turn signal and main beam lever: the  button on the multi-function steering button for driver assistance systems (depending wheel. Press the button  or . on versions).

Activating or deactivating a driver assistance system using the multifunction steering wheel* ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 58 to open the Aids menu. ● Select the driver assistance system and activate or deactivate it. A mark indicates that driver assistance system is switched on. ● Next, confirm the selection by pressing the  button on the multifunction steering Fig. 58 Left side of the multifunction steering wheel. wheel: button for driver assistance systems (depending on versions). The driver assistance systems can also be switched on and off in the infotainment sys- With the turn signal and main beam head- tem, in the menu Vehicle settings light lever button, you can activate or deacti- ››› page 86.

79 Operation

Control lamps  Driver or passenger has not fastened seat  Particulate filter blocked ››› page 288 . belt ››› page 16 . Fault in the steering system . Control and warning lamps  Engine cooling fluid ››› page 76 .  ››› page 215

The control and warning lamps are indicators  Engine oil pressure ››› page 293 .  Tyre pressure monitor system ››› page 310 . of warnings ››› , faults or certain functions.  Alternator abnormality ››› page 300 . Fuel tank almost empty page 76 . Some control and warning lamps come on  ››› when the ignition is switched on, and switch  Press the foot brake ››› page 232 . Fault in airbag system and seat belt tension- off when the engine starts running, or while  ers ››› page 25 . driving. Yellow warning lamps Front passenger front airbag is disa- Depending on the model, additional text Notification central lamp: additional infor-   messages may be viewed on the instrument bled ››› page 25 .  mation on the instrument panel display panel display. These may be purely informa- The front passenger front airbag is activated tive or they may be advising of the need for   Front brake pads worn ››› page 252 .  ››› page 25. action ››› page 64, Instrument panel . Fault in the ESC or the system caused it to Defective cruise control system (GRA) Depending upon the equipment fitted in the switch off; OR ESC or TCS operating   ››› page 226. vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- ››› page 256. times a symbol may be displayed on the in-   Defective speed limiter page 228 strument panel. TCS switched off manually; OR ESC in Sport ›››  mode; OR ESC switched off manually When certain control and warning lamps are Defective active cruise control (ACC) ››› page 256.  lit, an audible warning is also heard. ››› page 237

 Fault in the ABS ››› page 256 . Lane Assist (lane keeping system) Red warning lamps  ››› page 240.  Electronic parking brake faulty. Notification central lamp: additional infor-  Error in the lane assist warning system mation on the instrument panel display  Rear fog light switched on ››› page 110 .   ››› page 240. Parking brake on page 252 .  ››› Fault in the emission control system    Fault in the brake system ››› page 252 . ››› page 288. Lane Assist switched off ››› page 240 .   Fault in the steering system ››› page 215 . Fault in the petrol engine management  Fault in the lighting of the vehicle ››› page 288.  ››› page 110. 80 Instruments and warning/control lamps

 Low engine oil level ››› page 293 .  Main beam assist (Light Assist) ››› page 110 . Hill descent control (HDC) page 214 .  Fault in the gearbox ››› page 213 .  ›››  Service interval display ››› page 77 .  Windscreen cleaning fluid too low ››› page 119.  Mobile phone connected by Bluetooth® .  Mobile telephone battery charge status. Green indicator lamps  Risk of freezing ››› page 67 .  Turn lights or emergency lights on ››› page 110.  Start-Stop system activated ››› page 205 .  Trailer turn signals ››› page 110 . . Start-Stop system unavailable ››› page 205 .  Auto Hold active (lights green), or Auto Hold paused (lights white) ››› page 255 . WARNING  Press the foot brake ››› page 207 . If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, faults may occur in the vehicle, it  Cruise control system (GRA) ››› page 225 . may stall in traffic, or accidents and serious injuries may occur.  Speed limiter ››› page 227 ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text  Adaptive cruise control (ACC) ››› page 233 . messages. ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning  ble. ››› page 240. ● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-  Auxiliary heater* ››› page 152 . dent for the driver and for other road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning Blue indicator lamps lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers. Main beam on or flasher on page 110 .  ››› ● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the engine and allow it to cool. Other warning lamps ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a hazardous area and could cause severe  Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not properly closed ››› page 67 . injuries ››› page 290 . 81 Operation

Infotainment system How to move through the different menus ple, long lists of settings. Press on the scroll and select them bar and pull up or down. ● Switch the ignition on. Introduction Tutorial ● If the infotainment system is off, switch it The infotainment system brings together im- on. The first time you connect the Infotainment portant vehicle functions and systems into a system, a system tutorial will open with a ● The different menus are selected directly single central control unit, e.g. air condition- brief description of the main functions and on the touch screen using texts, icons or ing, menu settings, radio equipment and the how to use it. buttons. navigation system.  Help The actual number of menus available and If the box is checked , the function is acti- the name of the various options will depend vated. In the Help menu can be found more infor- on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment. Pressing the menu button  will always take mation and tips for using the infotainment you to the last menu used. system. General operating information Any changes made using the settings menus WARNING General information on the operation of the are automatically saved on closing those infotainment system, as well as on the warn- menus. Any distraction may lead to an accident, ing and safety instructions that must be tak- with the risk of injury. Operating the Info- en into account, is found in ››› page 156 . Scroll bar: Some menus and functions show tainment system while driving could dis- more content above or below those distract you from traffic. played on the screen at that time, for exam-

82 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Explanation of the function buttons

Fig. 59 Schematic representation: Overview of the possible function buttons on the screen

Top part of the screen Bottom part of the screen E Direct accesses to the functions of the Infotainment system (up to 10 functions, The following information is always visible, D Main menu display mode: 5 + 5, customisable by the user). By even when the infotainment system is turned : main menu with the 6 main functions off››› Fig. 59 : pressing on the icon, you can select/de- divided into 2 screens (3 + 3, customisa- select the functions in question. A Time or Incoming call. ble by the user by pressing on the function). F Direct access to the assist systems and B Climabar ››› page 145 . vehicle settings page 86 .  ››› C Status bar. System customisation based : main menu in mosaic mode (all func- on user and notifications. tions of the Infotainment system)

83 Operation

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 60 Schematic representation: Initial configuration wizard

The initial configuration wizard will help you Function button: Function Function button: Function to set up your Infotainment system the first time you switch it on. A Press to set day and time. Press to select your home address us- E ing your current position or by man- Whenever you switch on the infotainment Press to search and store to memory ually entering an address. system, the initial setup screen will be dis- B the radio stations that have the best played ››› Fig. 60 if any parameters have not reception at that moment. Disables the possibility of changing the settings of the Infotainment sys- been set (marked with “”) or if the Don't Don't show Press to go to the Online Media set- tem. If you wish to perform the initial C again show again function button has not been tings. configuration, you must access pressed. through Help. Press to link your mobile phone to the D Infotainment system. Function button: Function Start Starts up the Configuration Wizard. Once one or more settings have been Closes the Configuration Wizard.  End applied, press to finalise the setup in the main menu of the wizard.

84 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Vehicle information

Fig. 61 Schematic representation: Vehicle information and status

Pressing on  Vehicle info in the main menu opens the Vehicle info menu with the following submenus:

– Driving data. The average consumption, average speed, distance travelled, trip duration and autonomy are shown. It has 3 memories: “From departure”, “Total calculation” and “From refuelling” ››› page 69. – Vehicle status. The warnings regarding faults, incidents, memorisation of the tyre pressure or information of the next inspection service are displayed.

85 Operation

Assist systems and vehicle settings

Fig. 62 Schematic representation: Assist systems and vehicle settings

Press  ››› Fig. 62 A , or Vehicle settings in ■ Park assist ››› page 261 . ■ Ambient lighting ››› page 118 the main menu to open the assistants and ■ Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation ■ Interior settings vehicle settings menu. Next, clicking on any systems and brake assist ››› page 256 . ■ Instrument panel ››› page 67 . of the menus located in the left area B , dis- ■ Activate / deactivate the Start-Stop sys- ■ Lighting ››› page 116 . plays the settings menu or the selected as- tem ››› page 205 . sist systems on the display. ■ Rear view mirrors ››› page 121 . ■ Adaptive cruise control (ACC) ■ Exterior settings The number of assist systems and settings ››› page 232. ■ Closing ››› page 88 . depend on the version and the country in ■ Lane Assist (lane keeping system) ■ Lights ››› page 110 . question. ››› page 240. ■ Windows ››› page 106 . The C points indicate that, by moving your ■ Emergency brake assistance system ■ finger over the screen, from left to right or (Front Assist) ››› page 228 . Tyres ››› page 310 . vice versa, the rest of the assist services that ■ Fatigue detection ››› page 71 . the model is fitted with will be shown. ■ Traffic sign recognition ››› page 72 . ■ Driver assistance ■ Lane assist ››› page 246 . ■ Automatic parking brake activation ■ Emergency Assist ››› page 244 . ››› page 254. ■ Drive Profile ››› page 215 86 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Multifunction steering wheel* the audio, telephone, navigation, voice con- Symbol Function trol and assist functions without the driver needing to be distracted from the road. Connect/disconnect the Cruise con- Functions  trol system ››› page 225 / ACC Buttons available depending on the version ››› page 232 / Speed limiter ››› page 226 Symbol Function : Activate ACC / Cruise control sys- Turn: Turn volume up/down tem / Limiter 1 Press: Mute volume   : Reset programmed ACC speed or cruise control system Turn: Search in the instrument panel menu. In Navigation mode, turn to : Increase programmed speed zoom in/out of the map in the Digital   : Decrease programmed speed 2 Cockpit Press: Select the highlighted option in  Switching Travel Assist on and off the instrument panel ››› page 242 Radio: Search for the previous/next  Open the drive assist menu in the in- station. strument panel Fig. 63 Controls on the steering wheel.   Media: Short press: previous/next track; long press: fast forward/rewind  Modify the programmed ACC distance

Activate phone menu (answer call, end  Driving profile selection ››› page 215  call)   Starting and stopping the engine Switch between media and radio sour- ››› page 201  ces 

Change the instrument panel menu   (previous/next)

 Enable/disable voice control  Digital Cockpit: Change digital panel views ››› page 65 Fig. 64 Controls on the steering wheel.  Activate or deactivate steering wheel heating ››› page 150 The steering wheel includes multifunction modules from where it is possible to control 87 Operation

Opening and closing 2 Lock the vehicle held down for a longer period it will flash sev- 3 Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button eral times, such as for convenience opening. until all the turn signals on the vehicle If the vehicle key control lamp does not light Set of vehicle keys flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open up when the button is pressed, replace the the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it key's battery ››› page 90 . Vehicle key will lock again. In addition, the lamp on the key flashes. Key socket 4 Control lamp There is a key socket near the start button 5 Alarm button*. Only press in the event of ››› Fig. 66 . Warning! Do not confuse with an emergency! When the alarm button is the location for the emergency start pressed, the vehicle's sounds and the ››› page 203. turn signals light up for a short time. Press again to disconnect. Spare key

With the vehicle key the vehicle may be To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, locked or unlocked remotely ››› page 91 . the vehicle ID number is required. The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- Each new key contains a microchip which Fig. 65 Vehicle key tery. The receiver is in the interior of the ve- must be coded with the data from the vehi- hicle. The range of the vehicle key with re- cle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will mote control and new battery is several me- not work if it does not contain a microchip or tres around the vehicle. the microchip has not been encoded. This is also true for keys which are specially cut for If it is not possible to open or close the vehi- the vehicle. cle using the remote control key, this should be re-synchronised ››› page 90 or the bat- The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be tery changed ››› page 90 . obtained from a specialised CUPRA dealer or SEAT Official Service, a specialised workshop Different keys belonging to the vehicle may or an approved key service qualified to cre- be used. ate this kind of key. Fig. 66 Centre console: vehicle key socket. Control lamp on the vehicle key New keys or spare keys must be synchronised before use ››› page 90 . Key to ››› Fig. 65 When a button on the vehicle key is briefly 1 Unlock the vehicle pressed, the indicator lamp flashes 4 ››› Fig. 65 once briefly, but if the button is 88 Opening and closing

WARNING also possible even when you are outside the Pull out the key blade radius of action. ● Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they ● Key operation can be greatly influenced may not be able to leave the vehicle or by overlapping radio signals close to the ve- manage on their own. hicle working in the same range of frequencies, for example, radio transmitters or mo- ● An uncontrolled use of the key could bile telephones. start the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing ● Obstacles between the remote control risk of accident. The doors can be locked and the vehicle, bad weather conditions using the remote control key. This could and discharged batteries can considerably become an obstacle for assistance in an reduce the range of the remote control. emergency situation. ● If the buttons of the vehicle key are ● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. pressed or one of the central locking but- Fig. 67 Vehicle key: remove the key blade. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could tons ››› page 93 is pressed repeatedly in result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore short succession, the central locking briefly The central locking remote control has the always take the key with you when you leave disconnects as protection against over- key blade inside it for use in case of emer- the vehicle. loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock gency locking/unlocking of the driver's door it if necessary. ● Never remove the key from the ignition if ››› page 100. the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the ● Spare remote control keys are available at ● If you press button Fig. 67 1 once the steering could suddenly block and it would your Technical Service, where they must be ››› key blade is unlocked and a ring appears as a be impossible to steer the vehicle. matched to the locking system. key ring. ● Up to five remote control keys can be ● Press and hold the button 1 and at the CAUTION used. same time pull on the ring in the direction of All of the vehicle keys contain electronic arrow ››› Fig. 67 2 to completely remove the components. Protect them from damage, key blade. impacts and humidity.

Note ● Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is

89 Operation

To change the battery Changing the battery ● When fitting the battery, check that the ● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key polarity is correct. ››› page 89. ● Insert the key blade into the slot ››› Fig. 68 , For the sake of the environment press it in the direction of arrow 1 and de- Please dispose of your used batteries cor- tach the cover by levering it 2 . rectly and with respect for the environ- ● Extract the battery from the compartment ment. using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 69 . ● Insert the new battery and press it into the battery compartment ››› . Synchronize the vehicle key ● Place the cover and press it into the vehi-  Fig. 68 Vehicle key: opening the battery compart- cle key housing until it clicks into place. If the button is pressed frequently outside ment cover. of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- WARNING hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked using the key. In this case, the key must be Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame- resynchronised as described below: ter or any other button battery can cause serious and even fatal injuries within a very ● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key short time. ››› page 88. ● Keep the vehicle key and key fobs with ● Press the  button on the vehicle key. For batteries out of reach of children. this, it must remain with the vehicle. ● If you suspect that someone may have ● Open the vehicle within one minute using swallowed a battery, seek immediate medi- the key blade. The key has been synchron- cal attention. ised. Fig. 69 Vehicle key: removing the battery. ● If necessary, fit the cap. CAUTION CUPRA recommends you ask a specialised ● If the battery is not changed correctly, workshop to replace the battery. the vehicle key may be damaged. The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage cle key, under a cover. the vehicle key. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications.

90 Opening and closing

Central locking resulting in serious injuries and illness or Self-locking system to prevent involuntary even death, particularly for young children. unlocking Introduction ● Never leave individuals locked in a closed It is an anti-theft system and prevents the and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, unintentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the Central locking functions correctly when all they may not be able to exit the vehicle by vehicle is unlocked and none of the doors the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. themselves or get help. (including the boot) are opened within 30 If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot seconds, it re-locks automatically. be locked with the key. Unlocking one side of the vehicle only The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked Description for a long period (e.g. in a private garage) When you lock the vehicle with the key, the Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid may run down and fail to start the motor. doors and the rear lid are locked. When you and the tank flap to be unlocked centrally: open the door, you can either unlock only the driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To WARNING ● From outside, using the vehicle key select the required option, use the Infotain- The incorrect use of the central locking page 92. ››› ment system setting ››› page 92 . system may cause serious injuries. ● From outside with the Keyless Access ● The central locking system will lock all ››› page 94 system, Automatic locking (Auto Lock)* doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can ● From inside, by pushing the central locking prevent any non-authorised individual The Auto Lock function locks the doors and button page 93 . from opening the doors and accessing the ››› the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph). vehicle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency Various functions are available to improve or accident, locked doors will complicate the vehicle safety: The vehicle can be unlocked via the central access to the vehicle interior to help the locking switch or by pulling one of the door passengers. ● Security system “Safe” ››› page 97 handles. ● Never leave children or disabled people ● Self-locking system to prevent involuntary In the event of an accident in which the air- alone in the vehicle. The central locking unlocking button can be used to lock all the doors bags inflate, the doors will be automatically ● from within. Therefore, passengers will be Selective unlocking system unlocked to facilitate access and assistance. locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked ● Automatic speed dependent locking and in the vehicle can be exposed to very high unlocking system (Auto Lock) Turn signals or very low temperatures. ● Emergency unlocking system The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- ● Depending on the time of the year, tem- hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- is locked. » cle can be extremely high or extremely low 91 Operation

If it does not flash, this indicates that one of Central locking settings Unlock and lock from the outside the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not closed correctly. Central locking settings can be changed in the Infotainment system. Accidental lock-out The central locking system prevents you Unlocking doors from being locked out of the vehicle in the ● Press the function button  > Exterior > following situations: Closing > Door unlocking.

● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can- You can choose to unlock all the doors or not be locked with the central locking switch only the driver door when you unlock the ››› page 93. vehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is also unlocked. Fig. 70 Remote control key: buttons. Lock the vehicle with the remote control key, when all the doors and the rear lid have been With the Driver setting, when you press the ● Lock: press the  Fig. 70 button. closed. This prevents the accidental locking  button on the remote control key once, ››› of the vehicle. only the driver door is unlocked. If that but- ● Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se- ton is pressed twice, the rest of the doors curity system: push the  button again and Note and the rear lid will be unlocked. hold for 2 seconds. ●  ● Never leave any valuable items in the ve- If the  button is pressed, all the vehicle Unlock: press the button. hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- ● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the  not a safe. mation signal* is heard. button for at least 1 second. ● If the LED on the driver door sill lights up The vehicle will be locked again automatical- for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked, the central locking system or anti- ly if you do not open one of the doors or the theft alarm* is not working properly. You rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the should have the fault repaired at a special- car. This function prevents the vehicle from ised CUPRA dealer, SEAT Official Service or remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is specialised workshop. pressed by mistake. This does not apply if  ● The vehicle interior monitoring of the an- you press the button for at least one sec- ti-theft alarm* system will only function as ond. intended if the windows and the sunroof* are closed.

92 Opening and closing

● Selective unlocking system ● Other functions of the remote control You can open the doors individually from The selective unlocking system allows you to key ››› page 106, Convenience open/close the inside by pulling the inside door handle. only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank function. ● In the event of an accident in which the flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain airbags inflate, doors locked from the inside locked. will be automatically unlocked to facilitate Unlocking and locking from the inside access and assistance. Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap: ● Press (once) the  button on the remote WARNING control key or turn the key once in the open- ● The central locking switch also works ing direction. with the ignition switched off, except when the “safe” system is activated. Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the ● The central locking switch does not oper- tank flap simultaneously: ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside ●  Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but- and the security system is switched on. ton on the remote control key, or turn the ● Locked doors could delay assistance in an key twice within 5 seconds in the opening di- emergency. Do not leave anyone, especial- rection. ly children, in the vehicle. The Safe* security system and the anti-theft Fig. 71 In the centre console: central locking alarm* deactivate immediately when only switch Note the driver door is opened. ● Lock: press the  ››› Fig. 71 button. Your vehicle will lock automatically when it reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph) In vehicles with Infotainment system, you can ● Unlock: Press the  button again (Auto Lock) ››› page 91 . You can unlock the programme the security central locking sys- ››› Fig. 71. tem directly ››› page 92 . vehicle again using the  button on the Please note the following when using the central locking switch. WARNING central locking switch to lock your vehicle: Observe the safety warnings in Lock- ››› ● It is not possible to open the doors or the ing system “Safe” on page 97. rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights). Note ● The LED in the central locking switch lights ● Do not use the remote control key until up when all the doors are closed and locked. the vehicle is visible.

93 Operation

Unlock and lock the vehicle with Depending on the equipment, the vehicle If the vehicle is not unlocked for an extended Keyless Access may have the Keyless Access system. period, the function is deactivated. The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via Configure the Keyless Access system the front doors only. When doing so, the re- The behaviour of the Keyless Access system mote control key must be no further than can be adjusted in the Vehicle settings approx. 1.5 m away from the door handle. menu of the Infotainment system. It does not matter where you carry the key, If the Keyless Access function is disabled, its e.g. in your jacket pocket. operation is limited. Once the doors have been locked, they can- Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- not be opened again immediately. This will tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle enable you to check that the doors are prop- without actively using its key. For this, it is on- erly closed. ly necessary that there is a valid vehicle key in Fig. 72 Keyless Access: proximity zones. If you wish you may unlock only the corre- the detection area corresponding to the at- sponding door or the entire vehicle. The tempted access to the vehicle. necessary adjustments can be performed in vehicles with a driver information system Unlock the vehicle ››› page 86. ● Touch the surface of the sensor located inside the handle A . All turn signals will flash General information twice. If a valid key is in the proximity of the car If the sensor surface is touched twice, the ››› Fig. 72, the Keyless Access locking and entire vehicle will unlock. starting system gives the key entry as soon as one of the sensor surfaces on the front door handles is touched. Fig. 73 Door handle: sensor surfaces Automatic vehicle unlock The vehicle can be unlocked automatically. The following features are then available ››› Fig. 73 To do this, the function must be activated in without having to use the vehicle key active- A Unlocking sensor surface on the inside the Infotainment system and the vehicle key ly: of the door handle. must be in the proximity zone of the vehicle. ● Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle using B Locking sensor surface on the outside If the key is in the proximity zone, the vehicle the handles of the front doors or the soft- of the door handle. is automatically unlocked. touch/handle on the rear lid.

94 Opening and closing

● Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using the ››› Fig. 73 A (arrow) of the handle and the Unlocking and locking the boot hatch sensor of the driver or passenger door han- vehicle unlocks. When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- dle. ● Open the door. matically unlocks on opening if there is a val- ● Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving id vehicle key in the proximity zone one foot below the rear bumper On vehicles with selective opening or info- ››› Fig. 72. ››› page 104. tainment system configuration, pulling the door handle twice will unlock all doors. Open or close the rear lid normally. ● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine with the starter button ››› page 201 . After closing, the hatch locks automatically. In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys- If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear The central locking and locking systems op- tem: closing and locking the doors lid will not lock automatically after closing it. erate in the same way as a normal locking (Keyless-Exit) and unlocking system. Only the controls ● Switch the ignition off. What happens when locking the vehicle change. ● Close the driver's door. with a second key Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a ● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and it is locked from the outside with a second double flash of the indicator lights; locking ››› Fig. 73 B (arrow) on one of the front door by a single flash. handles. The door that is used must be vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked for engine ignition page 201 . In If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and closed. ››› order to enable engine ignition, press the  the rear lid are closed leaving the last key button on the key inside the vehicle. used inside the vehicle and none outside, In vehicles with the “Safe” security system: the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the closing and locking the doors (Keyless- Automatically disabling sensors vehicle's indicator lights will flash four times. Exit) The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if ● Switch the ignition off. If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a you do not open any door or the rear lid. long period of time, the proximity sensors on ● Close the driver's door. the passenger doors are automatically disa- The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- ● Touch (once) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 73 bled. onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to B (arrow) on one of the front door handles. If one of the sensor surfaces on the door open any door or boot hatch. The vehicle locks with the “Safe” security handles is often activated in an unusual man- system ››› page 97 . The door that is used ner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the Unlocking and opening the doors must be closed. (Keyless-Entry) branches of a bush rubbing against it), all ● Touch (twice) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 73 proximity sensors are disabled for a certain ● Grip one of the front door handles. When B (arrow) of one of the front door handles period of time. you do this, you touch the sensor surface to lock the vehicle without activating the “Safelock” security system ››› page 97 . Sensors will again be enabled: » 95 Operation

● After a time. The next time the door is locked/unlocked, Note ● Keyless Access will be active again. OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- ● If the vehicle battery has little or no  ton on the key. charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost Keyless Access permanent disconnection ● OR: if the boot is opened. or entirely out of charge, you will probably function* not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with You can deactivate the vehicle unlock with with the Keyless Access system. The vehicle the key. Keyless Access permanently in the infotain- can be unlocked or locked manually ment system so that others cannot unlock or ››› page 100. Keyless Access temporary disconnection start the vehicle. ● To control the proper locking of the vehi- function* cle, the release function is disabled for ap- You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Convenience functions prox. 2 seconds. Access unlocking for one locking and un- To close all the electric windows and the ● If the message Keyless access system locking cycle. sunroof using the comfort function, keep a faulty is displayed on the screen of the dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the ● Move the gear lever to position P since finger for a few seconds on the locking sen- operation of the Keyless Access system. otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked. sor surface ››› Fig. 73 B (arrow) of the door handle until the windows and roof have Contact a specialised workshop. To do so, ● Close the door. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised closed. ● Push the central locking button  on the CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership. remote control and touch the locking sensor How the doors open when touching the ● Depending on the function set on the in- surface of the driver door handle sensor surface on the door handle will de- fotainment system for the mirrors, the ex- pend on the settings that have been activa- ››› Fig. 73 B within the following 5 seconds. terior mirrors will unfold and the surround Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the ted in the infotainment system, using the lighting will come on when unlocking the vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also function button  > Exterior > Closing. vehicle using the sensor surface on the possible if the vehicle is locked through the driver and passenger door handles driver’s door lock. CAUTION ››› page 121. ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle ● To check that the function has been deac- The sensor surfaces on the door handles or the system fails to detect one, a warning tivated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull could engage if hit with a water jet or high will display on the dash panel screen. This on the door handle. The door should not pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key could happen if any other radio frequency open. in the proximity. If at least one of the electric windows is open and the sensor surface signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. The next time the door can only be unlocked ››› Fig. 73 B (arrow) on one of the handles is from a mobile device accessory) or if the key is covered by another object (e.g. an via the remote control or the lock cylinder. activated continuously, all windows will close. aluminium case).

96 Opening and closing

● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe” WARNING layer of salt, the correct functioning of the security system. Do not leave anyone (especially children) in sensors on the door handles may be affec- ● Press the locking button  once on the ve- the vehicle if it is locked from the outside ted. In this case, clean the vehicle. hicle key. and the “Safe” security system* is activa- ● The vehicle can only be locked if the se- ted, as the doors and windows cannot then lector lever is in the P position. Lock the vehicle without activating the be opened from the inside. Locked doors ● To improve the safety of your vehicle, the “Safe” system. could delay assistance in an emergency. remote control of the system is equipped ● Press the locking  button on the vehicle with a position sensor. If this remote con- key twice. trol does not detect movement for a certain length of time, the system will con- ● OR: touch the sensor surface on the out- Anti-theft alarm system* clude that the vehicle cannot be opened side of the door handle twice ››› Fig. 73 B. (e.g. on a night table) so it will be disabled. Description ● If, when trying to block the vehicle, the When the “Safe” security system is disa- last used key is still inside, all the turn sig- bled, the following needs to be taken into The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult nals will flash 4 times. account: to break into the vehicle or steal it. The sys- ● The vehicle can be unlocked and opened tem will initiate acoustic and optical warning from the inside using an door handle. signals when your vehicle is tried to be Locking system “Safe”1) ● The anti-theft alarm is activated. forced. ● The vehicle interior monitoring system and The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned When the vehicle is blocked, the “Safe” se- the anti-tow system are disabled. on when the vehicle is locked with the key. curity system puts the door handles out of The system is immediately activated and the operation and prevents unauthorised per- “Safe” status turn signal light located on the driver door sons for entering. The doors cannot be will flash along with the turn signals, indicat- The flashing frequency of the diode in the opened from inside ››› . ing that the alarm and the locking security door sill immediately confirms the process. system (double lock) have been turned on. Depending on the vehicle, when switching Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence the ignition off, a warning may be displayed for a brief period, then it stops for approxi- If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, on the control panel screen stating that the mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues they will not be included in the protection “Safe” security system is activated. flashing slowly. zones of the vehicle when the alarm is connected. If the door or the bonnet are »

1) Available depending on market and version. 97 Operation

subsequently closed, they will be automati- ● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles Note cally included in the protection areas of the with interior monitoring ››› page 99 ). ● After 28 days, the indicator light will be vehicle and the turn signals will flash accord- ● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with switched off to prevent the battery from ingly when the doors close. anti-tow system ››› page 99 ). exhausting if the vehicle has been left ● The turn signal light will flash twice on ● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with parked for a long period of time. The alarm opening and deactivating the alarm. anti-tow system ››› page 99 ). system remains activated. ● The turn signal light will flash once on clos- ● When the vehicle is transported on a ferry ● If, after the audible warning goes off, an- ing and activating the alarm. or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the vehicle interior monitoring ››› page 99 ). rear lid is opened after a door has been opened), the alarm is triggered again. When does the system trigger an alarm? ● When a trailer connected to the anti-theft ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated alarm system is disconnected. The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered when the vehicle is locked from within us- for about 30 seconds alongside a sound and ing the central locking button . optical (flashing) warning signals and will be How to turn OFF the alarm ● If the driver door is unlocked mechani- repeated about ten times when the vehicle is ● Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button cally with the key, only the driver door is locked and the following unauthorised ac-  of the key. unlocked, the rest of the doors remain tions are attempted: ● OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key. locked. Only when the ignition has been turned on will the other doors be available - ● Opening a door that is mechanically un- If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanically but not unlocked - and the central locking locked using the vehicle key without switch- using the key, the ignition must be turned on button will be activated. ing on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in within 15 seconds of opening the door. ● certain markets, such as the Netherlands, If the vehicle battery is run down or flat then the anti-theft alarm will not operate there is no 15 second waiting time and the Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. correctly. alarm is activated immediately on opening and the ignition will be blocked. the door). ● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working ● CAUTION A door is opened. for any reason. If the anti-theft security system is switched ● Opening the bonnet. ● off, the vehicle interior monitoring and the The alarm is triggered immediately if one ● The rear lid is opened. tow-away protection are automatically dis- of the battery cables is disconnected while ● When the ignition is switched on with a connected. the alarm system is active. non-authorised key. ● Undue manipulation of the alarm. ● Disconnection of the vehicle battery.

98 Opening and closing

Interior monitoring and the anti-tow The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- The following cases may cause a false system* tow system are automatically switched on alarm: again next time the vehicle is locked. ● Open windows (partially or fully). It is a monitoring or control function incor- If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior ● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially porated in the anti-theft alarm* which de- monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must or completely). tects unauthorised vehicle entry by means of be done each time that the vehicle is locked; ● Movement of objects inside the vehicle, ultrasound. if not, they will be automatically switched on. such as loose papers, items hanging from The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc. sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- tow system should be switched off if animals ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, Note on. In order to activate it, all the doors and their movements will trigger the alarm) or ● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is the rear lid must be closed. when, for example, the vehicle is transported activated without the volumetric sensor If the “Safe” security system* ››› page 97 is or has to be towed with only one axle on the function, relocking will activate the alarm switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring ground. with all its functions, except the volumetric and the tow-away protection are automati- sensor. This function is reactivated when cally disconnected. Deactivation through the infotainment the alarm is switched on again, unless it is system deliberately switched off. Activation ● Turn off the ignition and press the function ● If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by ● It is automatically switched on when the button  > Exterior > Closing > Interior a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver anti-theft alarm is activated. monitoring. door when the vehicle is opened. The flash ● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehi- is different to the flash indicating the alarm Deactivation cle interior monitoring and the tow-away is activated. protection are switched off until the next ● Open the vehicle with the key, either me- ● The vibration of a mobile phone left in- time the door is opened. chanically or by pressing the  button on the side the vehicle may cause the vehicle inte- remote control. The time period from when rior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both the door is opened until the ignition is False alarms sensors react to movements and shakes in- turned on should not exceed 15 seconds, Interior monitoring will only operate correct- side the vehicle. otherwise the alarm will be triggered. ly if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ● If on activating the alarm, any door or the ● Press the  button on the remote control observe related legal requirements. rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti- twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and will be deactivated. The alarm system re- the anti-tow system will only be activated » mains activated. 99 Operation

once all the doors are closed (including the ● Open and close the doors and the rear lid relating to the anti-theft alarm system rear lid). only when there is nobody in the way. ››› page 97. ● Remove the key blade from the vehicle key CAUTION ››› page 88. Doors When opening and closing in an emergen- ● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder cy, carefully disassemble components and to unlock or lock the vehicle. then reassemble them carefully to avoid Introduction damage to the vehicle. Special characteristics The doors and rear lid can be locked man- ● The anti-theft alarm will remain active ually and partially opened, for example if the when vehicles are unlocked. However, the key or the central locking is damaged. Emergency unlocking or locking of alarm will not be triggered ››› page 97 . the driver’s door ● After the driver door is opened, you have WARNING 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once Opening and closing doors carelessly can this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. cause serious injury. ● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im- ● If the vehicle is locked from outside, the mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and doors and windows cannot be opened from deactivates the anti-theft alarm system. the inside. ● Never leave children or disabled people Note alone in the car. They could be trapped in The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the car in an emergency and will not be the vehicle is locked manually using the key able to get themselves to safety. shaft ››› page 91 . ● Depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a locked and closed vehi- Fig. 74 Driver door handle: locking cylinder. cle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or If the central locking system should fail to even death, particularly for young children. operate, the driver door can still be locked and unlocked by turning the key in the lock. WARNING As a general rule, when the driver door is locked manually all other doors are locked. Getting in the way of the doors and the rear When it is unlocked manually, only the driver lid is dangerous and can lead to serious indoor opens. Please observe the instructions jury. 100 Opening and closing

Emergency lock of doors without lock Childproof locks anti-clockwise for the right hand side cylinders doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock – Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose childproof lock you want to deactivate.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 76 and clockwise for the right hand side doors. Fig. 76 Childproof lock on the left hand side door. Fig. 75 Locking the door manually. Once the childproof lock is activated, the The childproof lock prevents the rear doors door can only be opened from the outside. If the central locking system should fail to from being opened from the inside. This sys- work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder tem prevents minors from opening a door will have to be locked separately. accidentally while the vehicle is running. Rear lid The emergency lock is located on the front This function is independent of the vehicle of the front passenger's door and the rear electronic opening and locking systems. It Introduction doors. It can only be seen if the door is open. only affects rear doors. It can only be activated and deactivated manually, as described ● Pull the cap out of the opening. below: WARNING ● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it Careless and unsuitable locking, opening to the right as far as it will go (if the door is on Activating the childproof lock and closing of the rear lid can cause acci- the right side) or to the left (if the door is on – Unlock the vehicle and open the door in dents and serious injury. the left side). which you wish to activate the childproof ● The rear lid must not be opened when ● Replace the cap. lock. the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the tail lights. – With the door open, rotate the groove in Once the door has been closed it can no the door using the ignition key, clockwise ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it longer be opened from the outside. Pull the for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 76 and down with your hand on the rear window. interior door handle once to unlock and The glass could smash. Risk of injury! » open the door. 101 Operation

● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing Opening and closing the rear lid If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while locked. driving. ● Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious in- Rear lid with electric opening and jury to you and to third parties. Make sure closing* that no one is in the path of the rear lid. ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning! ● Never leave the vehicle unattended or allow children to play inside or next to it, es- Fig. 77 Rear lid: opening from outside. pecially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment, The rear lid opening system operates electri- close the rear lid and become trapped. A cally. It is activated by exerting slight pressure locked vehicle can reach extremely high on the handle ››› Fig. 77 . and low temperatures, depending on the To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the  or Fig. 78 Rear lid: button to close the rear lid. time of year, thus causing serious injuries,  illness or even death. buttons of the vehicle key. A warning appears on the instrument panel CAUTION display if the rear lid is open or not properly closed.* An audible warning is also given if it Before opening or closing the rear lid, make is opened while the vehicle is moving faster sure that there is enough space to open or than 6 km/h (4 mph)*. close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a garage. Opening and closing

Note ● To open: place slight pressure on the handle. The rear lid opens automatically. Before closing the rear lid, make sure that ● To close: hold one of the handles on the the key has not been left inside the luggage Fig. 79 On the driver’s door: button to open and compartment. inner trim and close it by moving it down- close the rear lid. wards, or press the button on the rear lid* ››› Fig. 78. 102 Opening and closing

Opening the rear lid of the vehicle must not be further away than Particular features if towing a trailer ● Unlock the vehicle ››› page 91 and briefly 1.5 m from the boot or inside the vehicle. If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri- press the handle of the rear lid. On vehicles ● OR: manually move the rear lid in the di- cally connected to a trailer ››› page 276 , the with Keyless Access you can directly press rection of closing until it closes automatical- electric rear lid can only be opened or closed the handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un- ly. with the buttons on the rear lid itself. locked if an authorised key is recognised in ● The rear lid goes down automatically to the the proximity of the vehicle. final position and also closes automatically Acoustic warnings ● OR: depending on the features, pull the  ››› in Introduction on page 101. Throughout the process of opening or clos- button on the driver door upwards ››› Fig. 79 . ing the rear lid, acoustic warnings can be The button also works when the ignition is Interrupting opening or closing heard. Exception: when the rear lid is switched off. After beginning to open or close the rear lid, opened manually using the handle or the ● OR: press and hold the  button of the the action can be halted by pressing one of Easy Open function with the movement of vehicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehi- the  buttons. the foot or closed using the button on the cle is locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the rear lid itself ››› Fig. 78 . Continue opening or closing the rear lid by doors remain locked). hand. To do this, some force will have to be Modifying and memorising the opening ● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and used. angle sensor-controlled opening you can open the rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the If you press one of the  buttons again, the If the space behind or above the vehicle is sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy rear lid will move again in the original direc- less than the travel area of the rear lid, you Open ››› page 104 ). The rear lid will be auto- tion. can change the opening angle of the rear lid. matically opened. If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob- To memorise a new opening angle, the rear stacle during the automatic opening or clos- lid must be open at least halfway. Closing the rear lid ing, opening or closing will be interrupted ● Briefly press the  button on the rear lid immediately. For the closing process, the ● Interrupt the opening process in the de- ››› Fig. 78 ››› in Introduction on page 101. rear lid opens again slightly. sired position. ● Press the  button Fig. 78 on the rear ● OR: depending on the features, pull the  ● Check why it has not been possible to ››› lid for at least 3 seconds. button on the driver door upwards ››› Fig. 79 . open or close the rear lid. ● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press ● Try to open or close the rear lid again. The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa- and hold the  vehicle key button until the ● If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or tion is indicated by blinking of the hazard rear lid is closed, or move one foot into the closed by hand using reasonable force. warning lights and an audible warning. » area of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy Open) ››› page 104 . The key 103 Operation

Resetting and memorising the opening Emergency unlocking If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity angle ››› page 105 of the rear lid, it is possible to unlock and For the rear lid to reopen completely, the open or close it moving one foot in the area opening angle must be reset and memorised WARNING of the sensors located under the rear bumper. again. If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it is heavily loaded, the rear lid may not open ● ● Release the rear lid and open it to the Switch the ignition off. or, after opening, it may lower by itself due memorised height. ● Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the to the extra weight and cause serious in- middle. ● Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. To jury. do this, some force will have to be used. ● With a brisk movement, bring your foot ● Do not open the rear lid when there is a and lower leg as close as you can to the ● Press the  button ››› Fig. 78 on the rear lot of snow on it or when carrying a load lid for at least 3 seconds. (e.g. on a rack). bumper. The lower part of the leg needs to be close to the upper sensor area and your ● ● Before opening the rear lid, remove the This resets and memorises the factory-set foot must be close to the lower sensor area opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by snow or the load. ››› Fig. 80 1 . blinking of the hazard warning lights and an ● audible warning. Quickly remove your foot and lower leg from the sensor areas ››› Fig. 80 2 . The rear Rear lid with sensor-controlled open- lid will be automatically opened. Automatic protection against overheating ing and closing (Easy Open) ● If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro- If the system is operated repeatedly in a cedure after a few seconds. short space of time, it automatically switches off to prevent overheating. The rear lid can be closed with another foot Once the system is cool again, the function movement similar to the opening one (provi- can be reused. Until then, the rear lid can ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of only be opened and closed by hand using the rear lid). reasonable force. When closed, the rear lid automatically locks If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery is if the vehicle has been locked beforehand disconnected ››› page 299 or the corre- and there is no valid key inside. sponding fuse burns out ››› page 58 , the sys- While the rear lid is in motion (either open- tem will have to be reset. This requires clos- Fig. 80 Rear lid with sensor-controlled opening ing or closing), it can be stopped with anoth- ing the rear lid completely once. (Easy Open). er foot movement similar to the opening one (provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of the rear lid). 104 Opening and closing

The Easy Open feature is not available or on- situated in its area of operation or cause The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in ly has limited availability in the following sit- material damage. the event of an emergency (e.g. no battery). uations (examples): ● Therefore, always make sure that there is There is a groove in the luggage compart- ● If the rear bumper is very dirty. no unsupervised valid key in the area near ment allowing access to the emergency the rear lid. opening mechanism. ● If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, ● e.g. after having driven on gritted roads. Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work on the vehicle, always disable Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug- ● If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is not the Easy Open feature via the infotainment gage compartment covered. system. ● Using the key blade, break the pre- ● If the vehicle has been equipped at a later ● Before washing the vehicle, always disa- punched sheet push it out towards the inside time with a tow bracket. ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain- of the luggage compartment. ment system. In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open ● Insert the key blade into the slot and move ● Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail- feature may take a little longer to open the the key in the direction of the arrow until the er, ››› page 276 , always disable the Easy boot or may deactivate automatically, to lock unlocks Fig. 81 . Open feature via the infotainment system. ››› avoid the boot opening by accident, e.g. because of the running water. The Easy Open function can be permanently Emergency unlocking of the rear lid connected and disconnected in the infotainment system using the  > Exterior > Clos- ing button.

WARNING If there is a valid key in the proximity of the rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open function may be accidentally activated and the rear lid will open, for example, when sweeping under the rear bumper, when directing a water jet or high pressure steam to the area or when carrying out maintenance Fig. 81 work or repairs in that area. If accidentally Detail of the luggage compartment: emergency unlocking opened, the rear lid could injure somebody

105 Operation

Window controls The front and rear electric windows can be ● OR: First unlock the vehicle using the  operated by using the controls on the driver button on the remote control key and then door. The other doors each have a switch for keep the key in the driver door lock until all Electrically opening and closing the their own window. the windows and the sunroof* have reached windows the required position. Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended ››› . Convenience closing: You can use the electric windows for approx. ● Press and hold button  on the remote 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if control key until all the windows and the sun- neither the driver door nor the front passen- roof* are closed ››› . ger door have been opened. ● OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock" position until all the windows and the Safety switch * sunroof* are closed. The safety control ››› Fig. 82 5 on the driver ● OR by means of the Keyless Access* (only door can be used to disable the electric win- closing): Press and hold the locking sensor dow buttons on the rear doors. surface ››› Fig. 84 (arrow) on the door han- Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear dle for several seconds to close the windows doors are activated. and the sunroof*. If you release the sensor Fig. 82 Detail of the driver's door: window con- surface, the closing movement stops. trols. Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated. During convenience closing, first the win- ● Opening the window: press the button . dows and then the sliding sunroof will be The safety control symbol  lights up in yel- closed. ● Closing the window: pull the button . low if the buttons on the rear doors are switched off. In the infotainment system different settings Buttons on the driver door can be adjusted using the function button  1 Window on the front left door Convenience open/close function > Exterior > Windows> Convenience opening. 2 Window on the front right door The electric windows can be opened or closed from outside using the vehicle key: 3 Window on the rear left door One-touch opening and closing 4 Window on the rear right door Convenience opening: The one-touch automatic opening and clos- 5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric ● Press and hold the  button on the remote ing is used to open or close the windows window buttons in the rear doors. control key until all the windows and the sun- completely. It will not be necessary to hold roof* have reached the desired position. 106 Opening and closing the button of the corresponding electric ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can Note window. result in injury. If the window is not able to close because it For the automatic raising function: pull the ● Never close the rear lid without observing is stiff or because of an obstruction, the button for the corresponding window up- and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise window will automatically open again wards until it reaches the second position. could cause serious injury to you and third ››› page 107. If this happens, check why the parties. Make sure that no one is in the path window could not be closed before at- For the automatic lowering function: push of a window. tempting to close it again. the button for the corresponding window ● If the ignition is switched on, the electric upwards until it reaches the second position. equipment could be activated with risk of Stop automatic movement: push or pull on injury, for example, in the electric windows. Window anti-trap function the button of the corresponding window. ● The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- Resetting one-touch opening and closing obstacle for assistance in an emergency sit- jury when the electric windows close. The one-touch opening and closing function uation. ● If a window is obstructed when closing au- is not active after the vehicle battery has ● Therefore always take the key with you tomatically, the window stops at this point been disconnected or is flat and will have to when you leave the vehicle. and lowers immediately . be reset. ● The electric windows will work until the ››› ignition has been switched off and one of ● Next, check why the window does not ● Pull the button of the corresponding win- the front doors has been opened. close before attempting it again. dow and hold it for one second in this posi- ● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- ● If you try within the following 10 seconds tion. ble the rear electric windows. Make sure and the window closes again with difficulty or ● Release the button and pull upwards and that they have been disabled. there is an obstruction, the automatic clos- hold again. The one-touch function is now ● For safety reasons, you should only use ing will stop working for 10 seconds. ready for operation. the remote control open and close func- ● If the window is still obstructed, the win- tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. The automatic one-touch electric windows dow will stop at this point. To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the can be reinitialised individually or several at a ● windows when pressing the button to close If there is no obvious reason why the win- time. them. The windows stop moving as soon as dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by the button is released. pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- WARNING dow closes with maximum force. The roll- back function is now deactivated. » Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- duction on page 100.

107 Operation

● If more than 10 seconds pass, the window ● Open or close the sunroof and the sun regularly cleaned away either by hand or will open fully when you operate one of the blind only when no one is in their path of with a vacuum. buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated. movement. ● If the sunroof does not work correctly, ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle the anti-trap function will not work either. WARNING when exiting. Contact a specialised workshop. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Elec- ● Never leave a child or any other person trically opening and closing the windows on who may need help in the vehicle, especial- page 107. ly if they have access to the vehicle key. If Operating the sunroof ● The roll-back function does not prevent using they key unattended, they could lock fingers or other parts of the body getting the vehicle, start the engine, switch on the pinched against the window frame. Risk of ignition and activate the sunroof. accident. ● After switching off, it is still possible to open or close the sunroof during a short space of time provided that neither the driver nor passenger door is opened. Sunroof* CAUTION Introduction ● To prevent damage, during winter tem- The sunroof consists of two glass parts. The peratures remove any ice or snow that rear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al- might be on the car roof before opening Fig. 83 On the interior roof lining: sunroof button. the sunroof or adjusting the tilt position. so has a sun blind. ● Before leaving the vehicle or in case of Functional area  can be operated in two The sunroof only works when the ignition is rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the ways: sliding and pressing. switched on. Once the ignition has been sunroof open or in a tilted position, water Sliding: The roof is opened or closed totally switched off, you can still open or close the can enter the interior and can cause con- or partially. sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver siderable damage to the electrical system. door and the front passenger door are not As a result, other damage can occur in the Pressing: The roof is raised, opened or opened. vehicle. closed totally or partially. Press again to stop the automatic movement. WARNING Note If the sunroof is used negligently or without ● Leaves and other loose objects that ac- paying due attention, it can cause serious cumulate on the sunroof rails should be injury. 108 Opening and closing

Raising, opening and closing the sunroof Convenience function to open or Using the Keyless Access* system (only Opening the sunroof: close the sunroof* closing) ● ● Automatic movement: slide your finger Press and hold the locking sensor surface back over the functional area  ››› Fig. 84 (arrow) on the door handle to close the sunroof. If you release the sensor ››› Fig. 83 A . surface, the closing movement stops. ● Manual movement: slide back over the functional area  and keep it there.

Closing the sunroof: Anti-trap function of the panoramic ● Automatic movement: slide your finger sunroof and sunshade forward over the functional area  A . The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of ● Manual movement: slide forward over the injury when closing the sunroof and the sun functional area  and keep it there. Fig. 84 Door handle: sensor surface. blind ››› . If the sunroof or sun blind en- Raising the sunroof: counter resistance or an obstacle when clos- The sunroof can be opened and closed with ing, they reopen immediately. ● The sunroof can only be raised if it is the convenience function, just like the win- closed. dows. ● Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not ● Automatic movement: press briefly in the close. centre of the functional area  B Using the door lock* ● Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again. ● Hold the key in the door lock of the driver ● Closing the sunroof when raised: If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be door in either the unlocking or locking posi- closed due to an obstacle or some resist- ● Automatic movement: slide your finger tion to open or close the roof in the tilted ance, it stops at the corresponding position forward over the functional area  A or position. Release the key to interrupt this and then opens. For automatic closing, a press briefly in the centre of the functional function. new closing attempt might take place. area  B . ● If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to Using the remote control Stop the automatic opening or closing close, close it without the anti-trap function. movement: ● Keep the locking or unlocking button ● Press again on the functional area . pressed to open or close the roof. If you re- Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap lease the button is the opening or closing will function stop. ● Before approx. 5 seconds after activation of the anti-trap function, slide your finger »

109 Operation

forward over the functional area  Lights Several warning and control lamps light up ››› Fig. 83 A and keep pressed until the sun- for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- roof is fully closed. ed on, signalling that the function is being ● The sunroof closes without the anti-trap Vehicle lighting verified. They will switch off after a few sec- function intervening! onds. ● Control lamps If the sunroof will still not close, visit a spe- WARNING cialised workshop.  It lights up Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- WARNING trol and warning lamps on page 81. Driving light totally or partially faulty. Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the anti-trap function can cause serious in- Fault in the cornering light system. juries. Lighting and visibility buttons ● Always be careful when closing the sun-  It lights up roof and sun blind. Rear fog light switched on. ● No person should ever remain in the way of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when It lights up closing without the anti-trap function.  ● The anti-trap function does not prevent Left or right turn signal. fingers or other parts of the body from be- The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn sig- coming trapped against the roof frame and nal is faulty. injuries occurring. Hazard warning lights on ››› page 115 .

 It lights up Fig. 85 Dash panel: lights control. Trailer turn signals By clicking on the button   you can select between (the corresponding indicator  It lights up lights up): Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 112 .  Switching on the dipped beam headlights.

 It lights up Automatic control of dipped beam head-  lights and daytime running lights. The Light Assist system is on ››› page 113 . 110 Lights

●  Switching on the side lights. automatically switch on in the following sit- Activation: when going above 110 km/h uations ››› : (68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip- Additionally, the following light functions can ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- ● The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex- be activated by pressing on the correspond- er's visibility distance. ample, when driving through a tunnel. They ing symbol. ● Deactivation: when reducing the speed of switch off when adequate lighting is detec- the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the When the function is activated, the corre- ted. dipped beam immediately returns to its nor- sponding symbol lights up. To deactivate it, ● The rain sensor detects rain and activates mal position. you will need to press on the symbol again. the wipers. They switch off when the wipers have not been activated for a few minutes. Audible warnings to advise the driver that  Turning the fog lights* on or off the lights have not been switched off  Daytime running lights If the ignition is not connected and the driver The daytime running lights consist of individ- door is open, an audible warning signal is  Turning the rear fog lights on or off. ual lights, integrated in the front headlights.  heard in the following cases: this will remind The daytime running lights come on every you to turn the light off.  Connecting or disconnecting the wind- time the ignition is switched on if the lamps ● When the parking light is on ››› page 112 .  screen demisting function ››› page 146 . are off or the lamp  is alight, if the light sensor does not detect darkness. The day- ● When the lamp  or  is on.  Connecting or disconnecting the heated light running lights turn off when the ignition  rear window ››› page 146 . is turned off. WARNING When the lamp  is alight, a light sensor If the road is not well lit and other road The driver is personally responsible for the automatically switches dipped beam on and users cannot see the vehicle well enough or correct use and adjustment of the lights in all at all, accidents may occur. off (including the control and instrument situations. lighting) or the daytime running lights de- ● The automatic dipped beam control pending on the level of exterior lighting. ( ) only switches on the dipped beam Automatic dipped beam headlight control when there are changes in light conditions * but not, for example, when it is foggy. Motorway light* The automatic dipped beam control is mere- The motorway light is available on vehicles ly intended as an aid and is not able to recog- equipped with LED High lights. WARNING nise all driving situations. The side lights or daytime running lights are The function is connected and disconnected When the lamp  is alight, the vehicle not bright enough to illuminate the road » via the corresponding Infotainment system lights and the instrument panel and controls menu. 111 Operation

ahead and to ensure that other road users Turn signal and main beam lever wards and release the lever. The turn signal are able to see you. will flash three times. ● Always use your dipped beam head lights The convenience turn signals are activated if it is raining or if visibility is poor. and deactivated in the infotainment system ● Never drive with daytime lights if the road by means of the function button  > Exteri- is not well lit due to weather or lighting or > Lights > Convenience turn signals conditions. ››› page 86. In vehicles that do not have the correspond- WARNING ing menu, this function can be deactivated in If the headlights are set too high and not a specialised workshop. used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or Parking light  distracting other road users. This could re- Fig. 86 Turn signal and main beam lever (depend- sult in a serious accident. ing on the version). The parking lights will only work with the ig- ● Always make sure that the headlights are nition off. If said light is on, an audible warn- correctly adjusted. More the lever to the required position: ing will sound while the driver door is open.

1 Right turn light or right-hand parking ● Switch the ignition off. Note light (ignition switched off). ● Move the turn signal lever up or down. ● The legal requirements regarding the use 2 Left turn light or left-hand parking light of vehicle lights in each country must be (ignition switched off). When the parking light is switched on, the observed. front side light and the tail light on the corre- 3 Turning main beam headlights on: con- ● sponding side of the vehicle turn on. The dipped beam headlights will only trol lamp  lit up on the instrument pan- work with the ignition on. The side lights el. come on automatically when the ignition is Parking light on both sides turned off. 4 The headlight flasher comes on while we pull the lever. Control lamp  lit up. ● Switch the ignition off. ● The rear fog light can dazzle drivers be- ● Press the button   to select . hind you. You should use the rear fog light Place the lever in rest position to turn off the only when visibility is very poor. ● Lock the vehicle from the outside. corresponding function. In doing so, only the side lights of both head- Convenience turn signals lights light up, and additionally the tail lights When the ignition is switched on, move the will do so partially. lever as far as possible upwards or down-

112 Lights

WARNING lights also work when the ignition is switch- mental and traffic conditions, as well as the ed off. speed ››› . Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, or forgetting to deactivate them can con- ● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the Switching the main beam assist on fuse other road users. This could result in a control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn  serious accident. signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash ● Turn on the ignition and select the mode at double speed. ● Always give warning when you are going  in the lights panel ››› Fig. 85 . to change lane, overtake or when turning, ● The main beam headlights can only be ● From the base position, press the turn sig- activating the turn signal in good time. switched on if the dipped beam headlights nal and main beam headlights lever forwards are already on. ● As soon as you have finished changing ››› Fig. 86 3 When the lamp  is displayed lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn ● In cold or damp weather conditions, the on the instrument panel display, the main signal off. headlights, tail lights and turn signals may beam assist is switched on. mist up inside temporarily. This is normal and in no way effects the useful life of the WARNING Switching the main beam assist off  vehicle lighting system. ● Disconnect the mode  in the lights Incorrect use of the headlights may cause ● The parking light does not activate auto- panel Fig. 85 . accidents and serious injury, as the main matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig- ››› beam may distract or dazzle other drivers. nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec- ● OR: while the main beam is on, pull the ted. turn signal light and main beam headlights Note lever forwards ››› Fig. 86 4 . ● ● When you turn the ignition off without OR: push the turn signal and main beam having turned the turn signals off, an Main beam assist (Light Assist)* headlight lever forwards to manually turn on acoustic signal sounds while the driver door the main beam. The main beam assist will is open. This is intended as a reminder to The main beam assist automatically prevents then be deactivated. switch off the turn signal, unless you wish to glare from vehicles moving in the opposite leave the parking light on. direction or ahead in the same direction. In System limitations ● If the convenience turn signals are oper- addition, the main beam assist detects illu- In the following cases, the main beam head- ating (three flashes) and the other conven- minated areas and disconnects the main light must be switched off manually because ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- beam headlight when passing, e.g. by popu- the main beam assist will not disconnect it tive part stops flashing and only flashes lated areas. on time or disconnect it at all: once in the new part selected. Within its limitations, the assist system auto- ● On roads with insufficient lighting with very ● The turn signal only works when the igni- matically connects or disconnects the main reflective signs » tion is switched on. The hazard warning beam headlight depending on the environ-

113 Operation

● If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. ● When the field of vision of the camera is Fog lights with cornering light func- pedestrians or cyclists. dirty, covered or damaged, operation of tion ● On closed curves, when the traffic in the the main beam control may be affected. opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro- This also applies when changes are made to The cornering light function is an additional nounced slopes or inclinations. the vehicle lighting system, for example, if function to the dipped beam headlights to additional headlights are installed. ● On roads with traffic in the opposite direc- improve lighting of the side of the road when tion and with a central reservation barrier taking a sharp turn at low speed. where the driver can see over it e.g. lorry CAUTION The cornering light function works when the drivers. To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- dipped beam headlights are already on and it ● In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain tem, take the following points into consid- is activated when driving at speeds below ap- eration: proximately 40 km/h (25 mph). ● In the event of dust or sand storms ● Clean the field of vision of the camera ● ● If the windscreen is damaged in the cam- regularly and make sure it is free of snow If the steering wheel is turned or the turn era's field of vision. and ice. signal is switched on, the front fog light gradually turns on. After the turn, the cornering ● If the camera's field of vision is misted up, ● Do not cover the field of vision of the light function is gradually switched off. dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice. camera. ● When engaging reverse gear, both front ● If the camera is damaged or if the power ● Check that the windscreen is not dam- supply has been cut off. aged in the area of the field of vision of the fog lights turn on. camera. WARNING The convenience features of the main Note “Coming home” and “Leaving home” beam assist should not encourage the tak- function ● The headlight flasher can be turned on ing of risks. The system is not a replace- and off manually at any time with the turn ment for driver concentration. The “Coming home” and “Leaving home” signal and main beam lever ››› page 112 . ● You are always in control of the main function lights up the vehicle’s immediate ● If there are objects that radiate light in beam and adapting it to the light, visibility proximity when getting into and out of it in the camera's area of influence, e.g. a porta- and traffic conditions. the dark. When switched on, the front posi- ble navigation system, this may affect the tion and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li- ● It is possible that the main beam head- operation of the main beam assist system. cense plate light come on. light control does not recognise all driving situations and is limited under certain cir- The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a pho- cumstances. tosensor.

114 Lights

In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain- Activating the “Leaving Home” function Hazard warning lights ment system you can adjust the duration of ● Unlock the vehicle using the remote con- the light switch-off delay, and activate and trol. deactivate the function. ● The “Leaving Home” function is only activated when the lights are in  mode and Activating the “Coming Home” function the light sensor detects darkness. For vehicles with light and rain sensors. ● Turn off the vehicle and turn off the igni- The “Leaving Home” lighting switches off tion with the lights in  ››› page 110 mode. in the following cases: ● The automatic “Coming Home” function is ● Automatically, when the “Leaving Home” only active when the light sensor detects switch-on time ends (default 30 sec). darkness. ● When the vehicle is locked using the re- Fig. 87 Dash panel: hazard warning lights switch mote control. For vehicles without light and rain sensors. ● If the light panel lamps are off ››› page 110 . The hazard warning lights are used to draw ● Switch the ignition off. the attention of other road users to your ve- ● With the ignition is switched on. ● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi- hicle in emergencies. mately 1 second. Note If your vehicle breaks down: When the driver door is opened, the “Com- To activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav- 1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from ing Home” lighting comes on. The headlight ing Home” functions, the  lamp on the moving traffic. turning off time counts from when the last main switch of the lights should be on and 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard door or rear lid are closed. the light sensor should detect darkness. warning lights ››› . The “Coming Home” lighting turns off in 3. Switch the ignition off. the following cases: 4. Apply the electronic parking brake. ● Automatically, once the headlight turning off time has elapsed. 5. Move the selector lever to position P. ● Automatically, when a vehicle door or the 6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at- rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting tention of other road users to your vehi- the engine. cle. ● If the light panel lamps are off ››› page 110 . 7. Always take the vehicle key with you when ● With the ignition is switched on. you leave the vehicle. » 115 Operation

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the Note that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is hazard warning lights are switched on. The normally necessary to cover part of the two turn signal turn signal lamps   and the ● The battery will run down if the hazard headlight bulbs with stickers or to change warning lights are left on for a long time, turn signal lamp in the switch  will flash at the adjustment of the headlights to avoid even if the ignition is switched off. the same time. The simultaneous hazard dazzling other drivers. warning lights also work when the ignition is ● The use of the hazard warning lights de- In such cases, the regulations specify certain switched off. scribed here is subject to the relevant statutory requirements. light values that must be complied with for designated points of the light distribution. Emergency braking warning This is known as “Tourist light”. If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu- The light distribution of the headlights allows ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 Dynamic headlight range control the specific “tourist light” values to be met mph), the brake light flashes several times The headlight range is automatically adjus- without the need for stickers or changes be- per second to warn the vehicles driving be- ted according to the vehicle load status ing made to the settings. hind. If you continue braking, the hazard when they are switched on. warning lights will come on automatically Note when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They WARNING switch off automatically when the vehicle “Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If starts to move again. Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that you are planning a long stay in a country the headlights dazzle and distract other that drives on the other side, you should WARNING drivers. This could result in a serious acci- take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical dent. Service to change the headlights. ● The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard ● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load warning lights and a warning triangle to status so that it does not blind other driv- draw the attention of other road users to ers. Interior lights your stationary vehicle. ● Due to the high temperatures that the Lighting of the instrument panel, dis- catalytic converter can reach, never park in Driving abroad an area where the catalytic converter could plays and switches come into contact with highly inflammable The light beam of the dipped beam lights is materials, for example dry grass or spilt asymmetric: the side of the road on which Depending on the model, the lighting of the petrol. This could start a fire. you are driving is lit more intensely. instrument cluster and controls can be adjusted in the infotainment system, using the When a car that is manufactured in a country  > Interior > Light ››› page 86 function that drives on the right travels to a country button. 116 Lights

With the ignition switched on and without  Turning the interior lights on or off. on when the doors are opened and will de- switching on the lights, the lighting dims as crease in intensity while driving. This intensity the exterior light decreases. In some cases, Door contact connection. can be adjusted through the infotainment e.g. when driving through a tunnel without The interior lights come on automatically system menu using the function button  > when you unlock the vehicle, open a door the  function active, the instrument pan-  Interior > Light page 86 ). or disconnect the ignition. ››› el lighting may even switch off. The objective  The light goes out a few seconds after of this function is to provide the driver with a closing all the doors, when locking the ve- Note visual indication that he or she should acti- hicle or connecting the ignition. The reading lights go out when the vehicle vate the dipped beam. is closed and locked or after a few minutes If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in- Reading light of turning the ignition off. This prevents the battery from discharging. strument cluster (Digital Cockpit), the fol- The reading light is tactile, each lens is lowing message will appear Turn on the turned on and off individually by pressing in lights on the instrument cluster. the respective central area. In addition, the intensity of the light can be adjusted according to the pressure exerted. Interior and reading lights If you want to turn on the two lenses together you must press the symbol  ››› Fig. 88 .

Glove compartment and luggage compartment lighting* When opening and closing the glove compartment on the front passenger side and the rear lid, the respective light will automatically switch on and off.

Footwell lighting*

Fig. 88 Detail of roof lining: front lighting of the The lights in the footwell area below the dash passenger compartment. (driver and front passenger sides) will switch

117 Operation

Ambient light*

Fig. 89 Schematic representation: Ambient light

The ambient light lights up the area of the centre console, the footwell area and, depending on the version, the front door panels and the instrument panel line. There are predefined Ambient Light versions ››› Fig. 89 . The intensity of the lighting can be adjusted using the function button :

● Automatic: lights up the interior of the vehicle depending on the selected driving mode. ● Manual: to adjust the intensity of the ambient light in each of the areas as well as to change the colour in the versions that have lighting on the front door panel and the instrument panel line. ● Off: turns off the ambient light. 118 Visibility

Visibility More the lever to the required position: screen may damage the wiper and the windscreen wiper motor. Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. ● If necessary, remove snow and ice from Windscreen wiper and rear 4  Hold the lever down for more time to increase the wipe frequency. the windscreen wipers before starting your window wiper systems journey. Windscreen washer. The windscreen ● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if washer function is activated by pushing 5 Window washer lever  the lever towards the steering wheel, the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the and the wipers operate simultaneously. windscreen wipers while dry can cause damage. Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper ● In icy conditions, always check that the 6  will wipe the window approximately every six seconds. wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before using the wipers. In cold weather, it The rear window wash function is activa- may help to leave the vehicle parked with 7  ted by pressing the lever, and the rear the wipers in service position ››› page 50 . wiper starts simultaneously. Note WARNING ● The windscreen and window wipers only In cold conditions you should not use the function when the ignition is switched on wash/wipe system unless you have warmed Fig. 90 Operating the windscreen wiper and rear and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are the windscreen with the heating and venti- wiper. closed. lation system. The windscreen washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen ● The rear wiper is automatically switched More the lever to the required position: and obscure your view of the road. on when the windscreen wiper is on and the car is in reverse gear. 0  Windscreen wipers off. CAUTION Wiper intervals. Use control Fig. 90 A to set the in- If the ignition is switched off while the 1 ››› Wiper functions  terval (vehicles without rain sensor), or windscreen wipers are switched on, they the sensitivity of the rain sensor. complete their wipe and return to the rest Windscreen wipers performance in differ- position. When the ignition is switched Slow sweep adjustable by using control ent situations 2  back on, the windscreen wiper will contin- ››› Fig. 90 A . ue to operate at the same wiping level. Ice, ● If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen Fast sweep adjustable by using control snow and other obstacles on the wind- wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically 3  ››› Fig. 90 A . change to a lower position speed. The set »

119 Operation

speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls Rain sensor 0 Rain sensor off. away. 1 Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- ● The air conditioner comes on for approxi- sary. mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode A Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor when the windscreen washer is activated,  – Set control to the right: high sensitivity. to prevent the smell of the windscreen washer fluid entering the inside the vehicle. – Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

● When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary When the ignition is switched off and then according to the speed. The higher the vehi- back on, the rain sensor remains active and cle speed the shorter the intervals. starts operating again when the windscreen wipers are in position 1 and the vehicle is Note travelling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph). Fig. 91 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A. ● The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen. The wiper Modified behaviour of the rain sensor will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- path. Remove the obstacle and switch the ings on the sensitive surface Fig. 92 of the wiper back on again. ››› rain sensor include: ● The windscreen will be wiped again approximately 5 seconds after the windscreen ● Damaged wipers: a film of water on the washer has been activated, provided the damaged blades may lengthen the activation vehicle is moving (“drip” function). If you time, reduce the washing intervals or result in activate the wipers less than 10 seconds af- a fast and continuous wipe. ter the “drip” function, a new wash se- ● quence will begin without performing the Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger the windscreen wiper. last wipe. For the “drip” function to work Fig. 92 Rain sensor sensitive surface again, you have to turn the ignition off and ● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on then on again. The rain sensor controls the frequency of the roads may cause an excessively long the windscreen wiper intervals, depending wipe when the windscreen is almost dry. on the amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity ● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus of the rain sensor can be adjusted manually. effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may Manual wipe ››› page 119 . reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor Move the lever to the required position or make it react more slowly, later or not at ››› Fig. 91: all. 120 Visibility

● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone Mirrors Note will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the ● If the light incident in the interior rear vision mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun reduction in the sensitive surface area and Interior mirror anti-dazzle function blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz- with automatic setting will not operate per- sensor will vary with the size of the damage zle function* fectly. caused by the stone. The anti-dazzle function is activated every ● When the interior lights are on or reverse WARNING time the ignition is switched on. gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle The rain sensor may not detect enough rain When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, position. to switch on the wipers. the interior rear vision mirror will darken au- ● If you have to stick any type of sticker on ● If necessary, switch on the wipers man- tomatically according to the amount of light the windscreen, do not do so in front of the ually when water on the windscreen ob- it receives. The anti-dazzle function is can- sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti- structs visibility. celled if reverse gear is engaged. dazzle function from working well or even from working at all. WARNING Note In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle ● Regularly clean the sensitive surface of rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- the rain sensor ››› Fig. 92 (arrow) and check Adjusting the exterior mirrors id may leak. This could cause irritation to for possible damage to the wiper blades. the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you ● To remove wax and coatings, we recom- come into contact with this liquid, it must mend a window cleaner containing alcohol. be rinsed with large quantities of water. If ● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in necessary, get medial help. front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sensor disruption or faults. CAUTION In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid may leak. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possible. Fig. 93 Detail of the driver's door: control for the exterior mirror. »

121 Operation

Turn the control to the corresponding posi- Tilt function for front passenger exterior Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the tion: mirror* vehicle*

L/R Turning the knob to the desired posi- When parking backwards, and in order to be In the infotainment system, using the func-  tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir- tion button > Exterior > Mirrors, the exte- side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, ror can be automatically tilted towards the rior mirrors can be selected to fold in when right) to the direction desired. passenger to provide a better view of the the vehicle is parked and locked ››› page 86 . kerb. The control must be in the position R1) When the vehicle is locked with the remote  Depending on the equipment fitted on for this feature to be operational. the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated control, the exterior mirrors are retracted according to the outside temperature. The mirror returns to its original position as automatically. When the vehicle is opened soon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h with the remote control, the exterior mirrors Folding in mirrors.  (9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re- are deployed automatically. turns to its original position if the position of Synchronized regulation of the exterior the control is adjusted. WARNING mirrors Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors In the infotainment system, the function but- Storing the rear view mirror settings for give a larger field of vision. However, they ton  > Exterior > Mirrors can be used to the tilt function make objects look smaller and further away select the exterior mirrors for synchronised ● Switch the ignition on. than they really are. If you use these mirrors adjustment. to estimate the distance to vehicles behind ● In the infotainment system, select  > Ex- you when changing lane, you could mis- ● Turn the knob to position L1). terior > Mirrors ››› page 86 . judge the distance. Risk of accident! 1) ● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The ● Select the R position on the control. right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the ● Select reverse gear. WARNING same time (synchronised). ● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking ● If necessary, correct the right-hand rear- so that you can see, for example, the kerb care to avoid injuries. 1) view mirror: rotate the control to position R . area well. ● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror ● Release the reverse gear. when there is no-one in the way of the mir- ● The adjusted position for the rear view mirror. ror is stored.

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym- metrical. 122 Visibility

● When moving the mirror, take care not to Sun protection WARNING trap fingers between the mirror and the Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility. mirror bracket. sun blind ● Always store sun blinds and visors in their housing when not in use. CAUTION ● If for any reason (e.g. a bump when ma- Note noeuvring) one of the rear view mirrors is knocked out of position, the mirrors must The light above the sun visor automatically first be fully retracted with the electric con- switches off after a few minutes in certain trol. The rear view mirror must not be conditions. This prevents the battery from placed by hand in the starting position, as discharging. the folding mechanism can be damaged. ● Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, please make sure to fold the exterior mirrors in to prevent them Fig. 94 Sun visor from being damaged. Electrically retractable exterior mirrors must not be folded in or Options for adjusting driver and front pas- out by hand, always use the electrical pow- senger sun visors er control. ● Lower the sun visor towards the windscreen. Note ● The sun visor can be pulled out of its ● If the electrical adjustment should fail to mounting and turned towards the door operate, both of the mirrors can be adjus- ››› Fig. 94 1 . ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass. ● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon- gitudinally backwards. ● The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors will not activate at speeds over There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with 40 km/h (25 mph). a cover. When the cover is opened 2 a light comes on. The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed back up.

123 Operation

Seats and headrests WARNING Electric driver's seat adjustment* Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to acci- Adjusting seats dents and severe injuries. ● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is Manual adjustment of the front seats stationary, as the seats could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion and you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur- thermore, an incorrect position is adopted when adjusting the seat. ● Adjust the height, position and inclina- tion of the front seats only when their movement area is empty. ● Make sure there are no objects in that area. ● Make sure that the movement and locking areas of the seats are clean. Fig. 96 Driver's seat: electric seat settings.

A Adjust the lumbar support: press the WARNING button according to the desired position. Fig. 95 Front seats: manual seat settings. Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov- B Seat forwards/backwards: press the but- ers might cause an accidental activation of ton forwards/backwards. 1 Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and the electrical seat adjustment system and Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the move the seat. The seat must engage make it move unexpectedly while driving. button up/down. To adjust the angle of when the lever is released! This might cause loss of control of the vehicle and thus accidents or injuries. More- the seat cushion, press the front of the 2 Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push over, the electrical components of the button up/down. down (several times if necessary) from its front seats might be damaged. C Backrest further upright/further re- home position. ● Never attach or place seat upholstery or clined: press the button forwards/back- 3 Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel. covers on the electric controls. wards. 4 Lumbar support: move the lever until the ● Never use upholstery or seat covers that The position will be saved automatically in required position is achieved. have not been explicitly authorised for the the CUPRA Connect Active user when the seats of the vehicle. ignition is switched off.

124 Seats and headrests

WARNING Headrest WARNING ● If the electric front seats are used negli- If travelling with the headrests removed or gently or without paying due attention, it Introduction improperly adjusted, the risk of severe or can cause serious injury. fatal injuries in the event of accidents and ● The front seats can also be electrically The possibilities for the adjustment and dis- sudden braking or manoeuvres increases. adjusted when the ignition is switched off. assembly of the headrests are described be- ● Always travel with the headrest correctly Never leave a child or any other person who low. Always make sure that the seats are cor- installed and adjusted. may need help in the vehicle. rectly adjusted ››› page 13 . ● To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in ● In the event of an emergency, electrical All seats are equipped with a headrest. The the event of an accident, adjust the head- adjustment can be stopped by pressing any central rear headrest is only intended for the rest correctly based on your height, always control. central seat of the rear bench. Therefore, do making sure that its upper edge is at the not install it on any other seat. same height as the top of the head, but CAUTION never below eye level. Keep the back of your head always as close to the headrest as Correct adjustment of headrest To avoid damaging the electrical compo- possible and centred. nents of the front seats, please refrain from Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is ● Never adjust the headrest while the vehi- kneeling on the seat or applying sharp at the same level as the top of your head and cle is in motion. pressure at a single point to the seat cush- under no circumstances below eye level. ● Under no circumstances should the rear ion and backrest. Keep the back of your head always as close passengers travel while the headrests are in to the headrest as possible. the non-use position. Note Adjusting the headrest for short people ● It may not be possible to electrically ad- CAUTION just the seat if the vehicle battery is very Lower the headrest completely, even if your low. head is below its upper edge. In the lowest When assembling and disassembling the headrests, do not let them meet the top ● If the engine is started while the seats are position, there may be a small distance be- lining of the vehicle, the back rest of the being electrically adjusted, the adjustment tween the headrest and the backrest. front seat or other parts of the vehicles. If will stop. not, this could damage the vehicle. ● When changing user a warning will be Adjusting the headrest for tall people shown on the infotainment system's screen Push the headrest up as far as it will go. during the time that the seat is moving to the saved position. This movement can be stopped by pressing the stop button on the screen.

125 Operation

Adjusting the headrests ● The headrest must lock correctly in one ● Move the headrest upwards until it arrives position. to the top. ● Press button ››› Fig. 99 1 , while simultaneously pressing on the security hole 2 with Removing and fitting the headrests a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the headrest. ● Move the backrest until it engages properly ››› in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 129.

Fitting the rear headrests To mount the external headrests, the corre- Fig. 97 Front seat: headrest adjustment. sponding backrest must be partially folded forward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 128 . Fig. 99 Rear headrest: removal. ● Insert the headrest bars into the guides until they perceptibly engage. It should not Removing and fitting the front headrests be possible to remove the headrest from the ● Move the headrest upwards until it arrives backrest. to the top. ● Move the backrest until it engages properly ● Press the side button ››› Fig. 97 1 and re- ››› in Folding down and raising the rear move the headrest. seat backrest on page 129. ● Fig. 98 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment. To refit, insert the headrest into the holes in the backrest, pushing it down until it en- WARNING Adjusting the height of the headrests gages. Remove the rear headrests only when it is ● Grab the sides of the headrests with both necessary to fit a child seat. After removing Removing the rear headrests hands and push upwards to the desired posi- a child seat, refit the headrest immediately. tion. To lower it, repeat the same action, To remove the headrest, the corresponding pressing the 1 ››› Fig. 97 ››› Fig. 98 button backrest must be partially folded forward. on the side. ● Unlock the backrest ››› page 128 .

126 Seats and headrests

Seat functions warning sound will confirm they have been changed to a position other than R stored. ››› page 121.

Memory function* Storing the passenger rear view mirror set- To activate the memory function of the tings while driving in reverse vehicle key ● Apply the electronic parking brake. Condition: a position must be memorised in ● Move the gearshift to the neutral position. the memory. ● Switch the ignition on. ● Open the driver-side door. ● Press the required memory button. ● Press and hold any memory button. ● Select reverse gear. ● Within three seconds of the move being ● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror completed, push the open button  on the vehicle key. An audible warning confirms the Fig. 100 On the outer side of the driver's seat: so that you can see, for example, the kerb settings have been activated. memory buttons. area well. ● The new position of the mirror will be stor- Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving and Memory buttons ed automatically and allocated to the vehicle assigning driver seat settings to a vehicle The memory buttons can be used to save key that was used to unlock the vehicle. key and turn on settings for the driver seat and the exterior mirrors. Activating settings ● Activate the memory function of the vehicle key ● With the vehicle stopped and the ignition Save the settings of the driver seat and the switched on, press and hold the correspond- ● With the ignition switched on, adjust the exterior mirrors while driving forward ing memory button until the saved position is exterior mirrors and the seat. ● Apply the electronic parking brake. reached. ● An audible warning confirms the saved po- ● Move the gearshift to the neutral position. ● OR: With the ignition switched off and the sition, both when turning off the ignition and driver's door open, briefly press the corre- locking the vehicle. The settings are as- ● Switch the ignition on. sponding button. signed to the vehicle key. ● Adjust the driver seat and the exterior mir- ● The front passenger side exterior mirror rors. To deactivate the memory function of the automatically changes from the position vehicle key ● Press for longer  than 1 second stored for reversing as soon as the vehicle ››› Fig. 100. moves forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h Condition: a position must be memorised in ● Press the memory button in which to store (10 mph) or when the gear selection lever is the memory. » the settings within approx. 10 seconds. A 127 Operation

● Press and hold the  button ››› Fig. 100 . Note ● Within the following 10 seconds, push the If the driver door is opened approx. 10 mi-  open button on the vehicle key. An audi- nutes after the vehicle was unlocked or lat- ble warning confirms the settings have been er, the driver seat and the exterior mirrors deactivated. do not move automatically.

Initialising the seat position memory The position memory system must be restar- Folding down and raising the rear seat ted if, for example, the driver seat has been backrest changed. Fig. 102 Rear seat: folding the backrest. Restarting deletes all memories and assign- ments for the seat with position memory. The rear seat backrest is split and each part The memory buttons can then be reprog- be lowered separately to extend the luggage rammed and the vehicle keys re-assigned. compartment.

● Open the driver door and do not get into Folding the backrest forwards the vehicle. ● Place the side seat belts in the trim clip ● Operating the seat settings from outside Fig. 101. the vehicle. ››› ● Completely lower the rear headrests ● Move the angle of the seat backrest com- page 126. pletely forwards. Fig. 101 Rear seat: clip to hold the seatbelt in ››› place. ● Press the unlock button Fig. 102 1 for- ● Release the control to set the angle and ››› wards and at the same time fold the backrest then press again until an audible warning is down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged heard. when the red marking of the button 2 is visible. WARNING Adjust the memory function only when the Converting the table to a seat vehicle is stationary. ● Raise and lock in the back rest. The red marking on the tab 2 should no longer be visible when the backrest is properly secured.

128 Seats and headrests

WARNING rest is lowered or lifted without due care The rear seat backrest is not engaged when and attention. the red marking of the button ››› Fig. 102 2 Serious injuries can be caused if the rear is visible. seat backrest is lowered or lifted without ● Before lowering the rear seat backrest, due care and attention. always adjust the front seats so that neither the head restraints nor the cushions of the ● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest rear backrest can hit them. Front centre armrest while driving. ● Do no trap or damage the seat belt when raising the rear seat backrest. ● When lowering or lifting the rear seat Unlock the seat backrest with the backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and cord other body parts out of its path. ● For the rear seat belts to offer the necessary protection all the parts of the rear backrest must be properly engaged. This is particularly important in the case of the centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a seat whose backrest is not properly engag- Fig. 104 ed they will fly forward, along with the Front centre armrest backrest, during an accident or a sudden To raise the armrest, pull it fully up in the di- driving or braking manoeuvre. rection of the arrow ››› Fig. 104 up or step by ● A red signal on the button 2 warns that step depending on the desired opening. the backrest is not engaged. Always check Fig. 103 In the luggage compartment: levers to that the red marking is not visible when the unlock the rear backrest. To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest backrest is in the upright position. position. Then lower it down. ● Lower the head restraint properly. ● When the rear seat backrest is lowered or To move the armrest horizontally, move it is not properly engaged nobody else can ● Open the rear lid. forward ››› Fig. 104 or backward as much as travel in the corresponding seats (not even ● Pull the remote release lever of the left possible in the direction of the correspond- a child). part ››› Fig. 103 1 or right part 2 of the ing arrow. » backrest in the direction of the arrow. The CAUTION released part of the rear seat backrest is fol- Serious damage can be caused to the vehi- ded automatically down and forwards. cle and other objects if the rear seat back- ● If this occurs, close the rear lid.

129 Operation

WARNING ● In vehicles equipped with tyre pressure Transport and practical control system, adjust to the new load status The front centre armrest may obstruct the if necessary ››› page 310 . driver's arm movements, which could cause equipment an accident and severe injuries. WARNING ● Keep the storage compartments of the Storing objects Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri- centre armrest closed at all times while the ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring vehicle is in motion. Positioning the luggage and cargo or braking or in case of an accident. Partic- ● Never let anyone sit on the centre arm- ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy- rest while the vehicle is in motion, not even It is possible to carry objects and luggage in ing and they are thrown across the inside of a child. This position is incorrect and may the vehicle, in a trailer ››› page 276 and on the vehicle. Please observe the following cause severe injuries. the roof ››› page 136 . When doing so, please rules to minimise the risk of injury: consider all legal provisions. ● Place all objects inside the vehicle safely. ● Secure all objects, little and large. Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely ● Place the objects in the cabin in such a ● Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly way that they can never reach the airbag as possible. deployment areas while the vehicle is in ● Always place equipment and heavy objects motion. in the boot ››› . ● Keep the storage compartments closed ● Position heavy items in the boot as far for- at all times while the vehicle is in motion. ward as possible. ● Place the objects in such a way that they ● Take into account the maximum author- never force any occupant of the vehicle to ised weight per axle, as well as the maximum sit in an incorrect position. authorised weight of the vehicle ● When transporting objects that take up a ››› page 329. seat, never let anyone use that seat. ● Secure the objects to the fastening rings of ● Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects the boot using appropriate chains or belts loose in open storage compartment of the ››› page 134. vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat or on the dashboard. ● Also place small objects safely. ● Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects ● Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin account the pressure adhesive of the tyres and store them safely. ››› page 306. 130 Transport and practical equipment

WARNING WARNING Luggage compartment The transport of heavy object changes ve- ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es- hicle handling and increases braking dis- pecially when the rear lid is open. Children Luggage compartment shelf tance. Heavy objects that are not properly could climb into the luggage compartment, placed or secured may cause loss of control closing the door behind them; they will be of the vehicle and thus severe injuries. trapped and run the risk of death. ● Never put too much load in the vehicle. ● Close and lock all the doors and the rear Both the carrying capacity as well as the lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you distribution of the load in the vehicle have lock the vehicle, make sure that there are effects on the driving behaviour and brak- no adults or children in the vehicle. ing ability. ● When transporting heavy objects, the CAUTION driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due to the displacement of the centre of gravi- Electrical wires or, depending on the fea- ty. tures, the antenna embedded into the rear windows could be damaged, even irrepara- Fig. 105 In the luggage compartment: removing ● Always distribute the load in the vehicle bly, if they are in contact with objects. and fitting the shelf. as evenly and horizontally as possible. ● Always place heavy objects in the boot Note before the rear axle and as far away from it as possible. Straps for securing the load to the fastening ● Objects in the luggage compartment that rings are commercially available from ac- are unsecured could move suddenly and cessory shops. modify the handling of the vehicle. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Accelerate with particular care and caution. Fig. 106 In the luggage compartment: removing and fitting the shelf. ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. ● Brake earlier than usual. Removing ● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 105 B from their hooks A . » 131 Operation

● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup- ● If the luggage compartment is overloa- ports ››› Fig. 106 by pulling it upwards and ded, remove the tray. then take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un- Note der the luggage compartment double floor Ensure that, when placing items of clothing ››› page 132. on the luggage compartment cover, rear visibility is not reduced. Fitting ● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “recess” fits onto the axis of the supports Store the rear shelf Fig. 108 In the luggage compartment: fitting the ››› Fig. 106 and press down until it engages. rear shelf. ● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 105 B to the rear lid. Depending on the equipment, once the luggage compartment shelf has been removed, WARNING it can be stored under the boot floor. Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car- ● Remove the left and right covers ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in- ››› Fig. 107. jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or ● Place the rear shelf in the corresponding braking or in case of an accident. housing ››› Fig. 108 . ● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy objects ● or in bags on the rear shelf. Put the left and right covers in their original Fig. 107 In the luggage compartment: covers for position. ● Never transport animals on the rear shelf. storing the rear shelf.

CAUTION ● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted. ● An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seated and it may be bent or damaged.

132 Transport and practical equipment

Variable luggage compartment floor Variable floor in the tilted position When the variable floor is tilted you can access the spare wheel or anti-puncture kit area.

● Lift the variable floor in the high position using handle ››› Fig. 109 1 , pull it up and push it towards the backrest of the rear seats until it folds along the hinge line and the movable part of the floor is resting on itself. Fig. 110 Variable luggage compartment floor: in- ● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 110 clined position. (arrows).

Variable floor in high position WARNING ● To move from the low position to the high ● Always secure objects, even when the position, lift the floor using the handle luggage compartment floor is properly lif- ››› Fig. 109 1 , and pull it back until the front ted. of the floor has fully passed the supports ● Only objects that do not protrude more ››› Fig. 109 2 . than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- ● Move the floor forward over the supports ried between the rear seat and the raised as far as the rear seat backrest and then low- luggage compartment floor. er the floor with the handle 1 . ● Only objects that do not weigh than ap- Fig. 109  Variable luggage compartment floor: proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between raised position;  lowered position. Variable floor in low position the rear seat and the raised luggage compartment floor. ● To move from the high position to the low position, lift the floor using the handle ››› Fig. 109 1 , and pull it back until the front CAUTION of the floor has fully passed the supports ● The maximum weight that can be loaded ››› Fig. 109 2 . on the luggage compartment variable floor ● Now let the front part fall to the floor and in the top position is 100 kg. slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat ● Do not let the luggage compartment backrest; lower the floor at the same time floor fall when closing it. Always carefully » with the handle 1 . 133 Operation

guide it downwards in a controlled manner. ● Tighten the belts and straps in a cross lay- Net bag* Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the out over the load placed on the boot floor luggage compartment could be damaged. and secure them to the fastening rings safely. ● Never exceed the maximum tensile load Fastening rings* of the fastening rings when securing objects. ● Make sure that, particularly for flat objects, the upper edge of the load is higher than the fastening rings. ● Depending on the features, take into account the instruction panels on the boot on how to place the load. Fig. 112 In the luggage compartment: net bag hooked up at floor level. ● Never secure a child seat to the fastening rings.

Fig. 111 In the luggage compartment: fixed and deployable fastening rings. Note ● The maximum tensile load that the fas- There are fastening rings Fig. 111 on the ››› tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN. front and rear of the boot to secure loose objects and luggage with fastening belts and ● Belts, straps and securing systems for the cords. appropriate load can be obtained from specialised dealerships. To do so, CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA WARNING dealer or any SEAT dealership. If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining Fig. 113 In the luggage compartment: rings 1 straps are used, they could break in the and hooks 2 for attaching the net bag. event of braking or an accident. Objects could then be launched across the passen- The luggage compartment prevents light ger compartment and cause serious or fatal luggage from moving. The net bag has a zip injuries. and can be used to store small objects. ● Always use belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition. The net bag can be hooked up to the luggage compartment in different ways.

134 Transport and practical equipment

Hooking the net bag into the luggage fastening rings when hooking or unhooking WARNING compartment floor them. Never use the hooks to hang luggage or If necessary, the front eyes must be unfolded ● On hooking or unhooking them, protect other objects. In case of sudden braking or first ››› page 134 . your eyes and face in case the hooks are re- an accident, the hooks could break. leased suddenly. ● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings ● Always hook up the net bag hooks in the 1 and 2 Fig. 112 . The bag zip ››› ››› described order. If a hook is unfastened should be facing upwards. suddenly, this may cause injuries.

Hook the net bag next to the load threshold Bag hooks ● Secure the short net hooks to the fastening rings ››› Fig. 113 1 ››› . The bag zip should be facing upwards. ● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bag The hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Release the net bag from the fastening rings. ● Store the net bag in the luggage compartment. Fig. 114 In the luggage compartment: bag hooks.

WARNING There may be hooks for hanging bags on both sides of the luggage compartment To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten- Fig. 114. ing rings of the boot it must be stretched ››› out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net The retaining hooks have been designed to bag is hooked up or unhooked incorrectly secure light shopping bags. the hooks could cause injuries. ● Always secure the bag hooks properly so that they do not suddenly release from the

135 Operation

Trapdoor for transporting long ob- To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects Roof carrier jects* should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before they are inserted through the tailboard. Introduction When the armrest is down, nobody may travel in the centre rear seat. The vehicle roof has been designed to optimise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross Opening the tailboard bars or conventional roof carrier systems ● Lower the centre armrest. cannot be secured to the roof water drains. ● Pull the release lever in the direction of the As the roof water drains are integrated in the arrow and push the tailboard cover roof to reduce air resistance, only CUPRA- ››› Fig. 115 1 down and forwards. approved cross bars and roof carrier systems can be used. ● Open the rear lid. Fig. 115 In the rear seat backrest: opening the ● Insert the long objects through the gap Cases in which cross bars and the roof car- trapdoor. from the luggage compartment. rier system should be disassembled. ● Secure the objects with the seat belt. ● When they are not used. ● Close the rear lid. ● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. ● When the vehicle height exceeds the max- Closing the tailboard imum height, for example, in some garages. ● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The red mark on the luggage compartment side WARNING should never be visible. ● Always secure the load properly using ● Close the rear lid. belts or retaining straps that are suitable ● Lift the centre armrest if necessary. and in a good condition. Fig. 116 In the luggage compartment: opening ● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a the trapdoor. Note negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen- The tailboard can also be opened from the tre of gravity and driving performance. On the rear seat, behind the central armrest, luggage compartment. To do so, press the ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. there is a tailboard for transporting long release lever down, in the direction of the ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all items in the interior, such as skis. arrow, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 116 . times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

136 Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION Securing the crossbars and the roof cm and the distance between the crossbars carrier system and the brackets of the roof railings B must ● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri- be 15 cm. er system before entering a car wash. ● Vehicle height is increased by the instal- WARNING lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- and the load secured on them. For this pur- bars and the roof carrier system may cause pose, check that your vehicle's height does the whole system to detach from the roof not surpass the headspace limit, for exam- and cause an accident and injuries. ple, for underpasses or for entering garage doors. ● Always take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account. ● Cross bars, the roof carrier system and the load secured on them should not inter- ● Check threaded joints and attachments fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path travelling and if necessary tighten them af- of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid. ter you have travelled a short distance. When making long trips, check the threa- ● On opening the rear lid make sure that it Fig. 117 Attachment points for the roof railings for ded joints whenever you stop for a rest. does not knock into the roof load. the roof carrier system. ● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or roof carrier system. For the sake of the environment The crossbars are the basis of a series of special roof carrier systems. For safety rea- When cross bars and a roof carrier system Note are installed, the increased air resistance sons, special fixtures must be used to safely means that the vehicle uses more fuel. transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards Always read the assembly instructions that or boats on the roof. The appropriate acces- come with the crossbars and the roof carri- sories can be purchased at specialised CU- er system carefully and keep them in the PRA dealers or any SEAT dealership. vehicle. Always secure the crossbars and the roof carrier system properly. Always take the assembly instructions that come with the Loading the roof carrier system crossbars and the roof carrier system in question into account. The load can only be secured if the crossbars and the roof carrier system are properly in- The crossbars are assembled on the roof stalled ››› . » railings. The distance between crossbars ››› Fig. 117 A should be between 70 and 90 137 Operation

Maximum authorised cargo on the roof ● Never exceed the load capacity of the cover behind the rear seats, or inside The maximum permissible roof load is 50 kg. cross bars and the roof carrier system, even pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi- This figure comes from the combined weight if the maximum authorised roof load has cle. of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the not been reached. ● Keep the storage compartments closed load itself on the roof ››› . ● Secure heavy items as far forward as pos- at all times while the vehicle is in motion. sible and distribute the vehicle load uni- Always check the weight of the roof carrier formly. system, the cross bars and the weight of the WARNING load to be transported and weigh them if Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi- WARNING necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- cult the use of the pedals. This may cause thorised roof load. If the load is loose or not secured, it could loss of control of the vehicle and increases If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier fall from the roof carrier system or cause the risk of severe injuries. accidents and injuries. with a lower weight rating, you will not be ● Make sure that nothing prevents you from able to carry the maximum authorised roof ● Always use belts or retaining straps that using the pedals at any time. load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- are suitable and in a good condition. ● Always secure the mat in the footwell. mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is ● Never place other mats or other type of listed in the fitting instructions. covers on the factory-fitted mat. Storage compartment ● Ensure that no objects can fall into the Distributing a load driver's footwell while the vehicle is in motion. Distribute loads uniformly and secure them Introduction correctly ››› . ● When the vehicle is stationary, remove Use the storage compartments only for small the objects in the footwell. Check attachments or light items. Once the cross bars and roof carrier system WARNING have been installed, check the bolted con- WARNING If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they nections and attachments after a short jour- Objects inside the vehicle that are not se- might be damaged or lit inadvertently. This ney and subsequently with a certain fre- cured could be thrown across the cabin in could lead to severe burns and damage to quency. the event of sudden braking or manoeu- the vehicle. vring. This may cause severe injuries as well ● Before moving a seat, make sure there WARNING as loss of control of the vehicle. are no lighters in the moving part area of ● Never exceed the maximum authorised ● Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or the vehicle. load on the roof and on the axles or the ve- heavy items in open storage compartments hicle's maximum authorised weight. of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the 138 Transport and practical equipment

● Before closing a storage compartment, Glove compartment Storage compartment under front make sure there are no lighters in the clos- seats* ing area. ● Never leave a lighter inside a storage compartment or any other surface of the vehicle as it could ignite due to the high temperatures on such surfaces, particularly during the summer.

CAUTION ● Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive objects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat and cold could damage them or render Fig. 118 On the front passenger side: glove compartment. them useless. Fig. 119 Storage compartment under the front seats. ● Objects made from transparent materials Opening and closing the glove compart- left inside the vehicle, such as glasses, ment Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handle magnifying glasses or transparent suction and take the drawer out. pads stuck to the windows can concentrate Opening: Pull the handle ››› Fig. 118 and sunlight and damage the vehicle. open the glove compartment. Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until Closing: Press the glove compartment up- it engages. wards. Depending on the equipment, under the driver's seat there may be a magazine hold- WARNING er* (about the size of the instruction man- If the glove compartment is left open, the ual) instead of the storage compartment. risk of causing severe injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu- WARNING vring increases. If the drawer is left open, it could prevent ● Always keep the glove compartment use of the pedals. This may cause serious closed while the vehicle is in motion. accidents and injuries. ● Always keep the drawer closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer »

139 Operation

and any objects in it could fall into the driv- When the drink holder is no longer in use, lift damage the vehicle and its electrical sys- er's footwell and obstruct the pedals. the armrest again. tem.

WARNING CAUTION Note Incorrect use of the bottle holders may The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most. cause injuries. The inside elements of the drink holders can be extracted for cleaning. ● Never put hot drinks in the drink holders. In the event of sudden braking or an acci- Drink holder dent while driving, hot beverages in the bottle holders might spill and cause burns. Other object holders ● Ensure that no bottles or other objects are dropped in the driver footwell while You will find more object holders, compart- driving, as they could get under the pedals ments and supports in other parts of the ve- and obstruct their working. hicle: ● Never place glasses, food or other heavy ● In the centre console. objects drink holders. These heavy objects ● may be thrown across the cabin in the In the upper part of the glove compart- event of an accident and cause serious in- ment. The load of the compartment should juries. not exceed 1.2 kg. ● Other storage compartments are found in Fig. 120 In the rear central armrest: drinks holder. WARNING the rear seat, to the left and the right of the seats. The storage compartments of the driver and Closed bottles may explode inside the vehi- passenger doors contain a bottle holder. cle due to cold or heat. There are hangers on the struts of the doors ● Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle and the rear. Front drink holders if the temperature inside is very high or very low. WARNING There are two cup holders in the centre console ››› Fig. 120 . Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's CAUTION visibility, which may cause serious accidents and injuries. Drinks holder in the rear central armrest Do not leave open cans in the drink holders when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is ● Always hang clothes from hangers in such Use: Lower the centre armrest. spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may a way that the driver's visibility is not affected.

140 Transport and practical equipment

● Only hang light pieces of clothing from Maximum power consumption the hangers of the vehicle. Never leave Maximum power con- heavy, hard or sharp objects in the pockets Power socket sumption of these pieces of clothing. ● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up 12 Volts 120 Watts the clothing, as this could interfere with the 150 watts (300 watts - maximum function of the head-protection airbags. 230 Volts 2 minutes)

Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12 volt power socket. Power sockets Fig. 122 On the right side of the luggage compartment: 230 volt power socket. Make sure that the maximum power con- Vehicle power sockets sumption displayed on each outlet is not ex- In the front armrest ceeded. The power consumption of devices is shown on the model plate. ● Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 121 . ● Insert the plug of the electrical appliance When connecting two or more electrical de- into the power socket. vices at the same time, make sure that their total consumption never exceeds 190 watts . USB power sockets ›››

Depending on the equipment and the coun- 230 volt power socket* try, the vehicle may also have USB connections exclusively for charging or as a power With the engine running, the power socket Fig. 121 12 volt power socket: 1 inside the front socket. ››› Fig. 122 activates automatically as soon as armrest. a connector is plugged in. If there is enough These USB ports are located at the rear of power available, the socket can still be used the console, between the front seats . These while the engine is off ››› connectors can work at a maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port. Connect an electrical device: Open the cover and insert the plug into the power socket They are not intended for file playback. as far as possible to unlock the built-in child lock. The socket only supplies power once the child lock is unlocked. »

141 Operation

LED on the power socket ● Do not spill liquids onto the socket. – The built-in overload disconnect func- ● Do not plug adapters or extension cords tion prevents any electrical devices Steady green The childproof lock is unlocked. that require a high start-up current light: The socket is ready to operate. into the 230 volt power socket. Otherwise, the integrated child lock will be unlocked from turning on. In this case, unplug The ignition is switched off, but and the power socket will operate. the electrical device's power supply and there is enough power available re-try the connection after about 10 ● Do not insert conductive objects (a knit- to continue supplying the socket seconds. with current for a maximum of 10 ting needle, for example) into the 230 volt Flashing green minutes. If the connector is un- power socket. light: plugged before this time elapses, Note the socket is disconnected and WARNING ● The use of electrical appliances with the cannot be used again until the ig- engine switched off will cause a battery dis- nition is switched on again. The power socket works only when the ig- charge. nition is on. Improper use may cause seri- There is an anomaly, e.g. discon- ous injury or even fire. Children should ● Should the connected appliance over- Flashing red light: nection due to a current surge or heat, immediately switch it off and discon- overheating. therefore not be left in the vehicle unattended if the button is also left behind. Other- nect it from the socket. wise there is a possibility that they may be ● Before switching the ignition on or off, Disconnection due to overheating injured. unplug the appliances from the USB ports When the temperature exceeds a certain to protect them from any damage caused by fluctuations in voltage. value, the 230 volt socket inverter is auto- CAUTION matically disconnected. The disconnection ● Some appliances may not work properly prevents overheating when the power con- Always use the correct type of plugs to when connected to the 230 volt sockets avoid damaging the sockets. sumption of the connected devices is exces- due to a lack of power (watts). sive or the ambient temperature is very high. The 230-volt power supply can be used once CAUTION again after a cooling time. First unplug the ● 230 volt power socket: connector of the connected device and – Do not leave devices or connectors that then plug it back in again. This prevents the are too heavy (e.g. a transformer) electrical device from being switched on hanging directly from the power sock- again if this is not wanted. et. WARNING – Do not connect neon lamps. – Only connect devices to the socket if The electrical system is under high voltage! the device and socket voltage match.

142 Air conditioning

Air conditioning Dust and pollen filter WARNING The dust and pollen filter with its activated Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and Heating, ventilation and cool- charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against reduce driver concentration possibly re- impurities in the air taken into the vehicle in- sulting in a serious accident. terior. ing ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or The dust and pollen filter must be changed use the air recirculation for long periods of Introduction regularly so that air conditioner performance time; the air in the vehicle interior will not is not adversely affected. be refreshed. Climatronic of 3 zones: heats, ventilates, If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due cools and dehumidifies the passenger com- to use in areas with very high levels of air pol- CAUTION partment considering it as 3 independent air lution, the filter must be changed more fre- ● conditioning areas (driver, front passenger To replace the pollen filter, always visit a quently than stated in the Service Schedule. service centre. and rear seats). ● Switch the air conditioner off if you think There are several ways to switch on the air WARNING it may be broken. This will avoid additional conditioning: Reduced visibility through the windows in- damage. Have the air conditioner checked creases the risk of serious accidents. by a specialised workshop. ● Press AUTO on the climabar ››› Fig. 123 A ● ● Repairs to the air conditioner require ● OR: Press  in the air conditioning menu Always ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow, and that they are not fogged, specialist knowledge and special tools. CU- page 146 or in the air conditioning widg- ››› so as to maintain good visibility of every- PRA recommends going to a specialised et. thing outside. CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service. ● OR: Press  in the air conditioning menu ● Only drive when you have good visibility. ››› page 146 or in the air conditioning widg- Note et. ● Always ensure that you use the air conditioner and heated rear window to maintain ● When the cooling system is turned off, air ● OR: Change the desired temperature. good visibility. coming from the outside will not be dried. To prevent fogging of the windows, CUPRA The Climatronic operates most effectively ● Never leave the air recirculation on for a recommends leaving the cooling system with the windows and the sunroof* closed. long period of time. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode (compressor) turned on. To do this, press Some functions and menu tabs depend on switched on, the windows can mist over the function button . The icon should the equipment. very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. light up. ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it ● The maximum heat output required to is not required. defrost windows as quickly as possible is »

143 Operation

only available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature. ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the windows from misting over. ● The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in the luggage compartment designed for this purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob- structing these slots with any kind of object. ● Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air conditioning system leaves residue on the evaporator, producing a permanent unpleasant odour. ● It is advisable to turn on the air conditioning at least once a month, to lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling capacity is detected, a Technical Service should be consul- ted to check the system. ● When the engine is under extreme strain, switch off the compressor for a moment.

144 Air conditioning

Climatronic control

Fig. 123 Schematic representation: air conditioning functions

A Climabar Press on the same numbers to access the Temperature setting submenu Fixed bar at the top of the Infotainment Sys- temperature adjustment submenu. Submenu where the following functions are tem ››› Fig. 123 A screen, (even if it is dis- Or: use the touch zones 1 and 2 (blue / found: connected) where the following Air Condi- red) to adjust the temperature of the Air tioning functions are located: Conditioning ››› Fig. 123 . .°C Slide your finger from left to right or vice ver-    sa over the bar, or, press  or  to adjust Shows fan status/speed. By pressing it, you Access the seat heating* submenu the desired temperature. can access the Air conditioning menu ››› page 149. ››› page 146.   Synchronizes the temperature on the driver's  °C . Switching air recirculation on and off side with the other zones. Slide your finger from left to right or vice ver- ››› page 149 sa over the numbers to adjust the desired temperature. 145 Operation

Air conditioning percentage reached Once reached, 100% will be displayed on function* the screen. There is one indicator for the driver's area and another for the passenger Shows how long it will take to reach the set area. comfort temperature as a percentage.

Air Conditioning Menu

Fig. 124 Schematic representation: Air conditioning menu.

Within the Air Conditioning menu, the fol-  The colour represented by the arrows does lowing submenus are found depending on Connect/disconnect the Climatronic not indicate the outlet temperature of the the equipment: air, but the requested temperature depend- ››› Fig. 124 A . ing on the surrounding conditions. Front Submenu Air diffuser outlets (arrows)  Submenu for the air conditioning in the front Selection of the air distribution to one or of the passenger compartment where the more of the following areas: feet, upper body Manual adjustment of fan speed by pressing   following functions are found: or windscreen. or .

146 Air conditioning

  .°C Activate or deactivate the steering wheel Switching the cooling and demisting system Adjusting the temperature of the rear area by heating*. on/off. pressing on the icons  or . It also shows its status (on/off).  iClimate submenu You may also use the multifunction steering In  mode, the selected temperature will Submenu where different smart and/or au- wheel to manage the heating levels in addi- remain constant. Fan speed and air distribu- tomatic functionalities are located: tion to turning it on/off page 150 . ››› tion are automatically adjusted.  Warm hands: automatically adjusts for a  The  mode will be deactivated when the certain time the air conditioning to heat fan speed and/or the air distribution are The defrost/demist function of the Clima- the steering wheel area. modified manually. tronic removes ice and condensation from  Cool feet: automatically adjusts for a the windscreen. The air is dehumidified and Fan speed in  mode can be adjusted in certain time the air conditioning to cool the fan is set high. the Climaprofile (low, medium or high) by the footwell area. successive presses on the function button When this function is switched on, the rear Defog the windows: automatically ad- .  air conditioning remains switched off. justs for a certain time the air condition- Climaprofile adjustment is also possible in ing to defog the windscreen.  the Settings submenu.  Warm feet: automatically adjusts for a The heated rear window only works when certain time the air conditioning to heat the engine is running and switches off auto- Rear Submenu the footwell area. matically after a maximum of 10 minutes. It Submenu for the air conditioning in the rear  Fresh Air: automatically adjusts the air should be switched off as soon as the glass is of the passenger compartment where the conditioning for a certain time to venti- demisted. following functions are found: late the passenger compartment. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.  AirCare Climate submenu Connect/disconnect the Climatronic A. The air conditioning system contains a filter To avoid possible damage to the battery, an that can reduce the penetration of allergenic automatic temporary disconnection of this contaminants. » function is possible, coming back on when  normal operating conditions are re-estab- With the icon lit up, it is not possible to adjust lished. the temperature from the rear area.

147 Operation

When the Air Care function is activated, the closed. However, if the passenger compart- Special characteristics recirculation mode is on and the air is regula- ment has heated up after standing in the sun If the humidity and temperature outside the ted automatically and continuously, as long for some time, the air inside can be cooled vehicle are high, condensation can drip off as there is no detection of fogging hazard. more quickly by briefly opening the windows the evaporator in the cooling system and and the sunroof*. ● Press on  to activate/deactivate the form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak! AirCare function. Change the temperature unit (Climatron- ●  Press to access the information on the ic) Note status of the AirCare system. The temperature display can be changed After starting the engine, any residual hu- from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the Infotain- midity in the air conditioner could mist over Settings submenu ment system screen using the function but- the windscreen. Switch on the defrost Submenu where the following settings are ton  > Settings > Units. function as soon as possible to clear the located: windscreen of condensation. The cooling system cannot be activated ● Automatic recirculation: to switch automatic air recirculation on and off If the air conditioning system cannot be ››› page 149. switched on, this may be caused by the fol- Air vents lowing: ● Climaprofile: To adjust the fan speed (low, To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-  medium or high) during operation in ● The engine is not running. lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents mode. ● The fan is switched off. must remain open. ● The air conditioner fuse has blown. ● To close the air vents on the left side, move Climate control usage instructions ● The outside temperature is lower than ap- the corresponding diffuser vent lever fully to proximately +3°C (+38°F). the right. To close the air vents on the rights The interior cooling system only works when ● The air conditioner compressor has been side, move the corresponding diffuser vent the engine is running and fan is switched on. temporarily switched off because the engine lever fully to the left. coolant temperature is too high. ● Change the air direction using the ventila- Economic use of the air conditioning ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air tion grille lever. When the air conditioning is switched on, conditioner checked by a specialised work- There are other additional, non-adjustable the compressor consumes engine power shop. air vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and has influence on fuel consumption. and in the rear area of the passenger com- The air conditioning operates most effec- partment. tively with the windows and the sunroof* 148 Air conditioning

Note impurities drops to within a normal range, re- If the ignition is switched on again in approx. circulation mode is switched off. the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heating Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen- is automatically turned on to the level set the sitive objects should never be placed in The system is unable to detect unpleasant last time. front of the air outlets as they may be dam- smells. aged or made unsuitable for use by the air. ● Automatic air recirculation is activated and Cases in which the heat seating should not deactivated in the air conditioning settings be switched on menu. An A will be displayed next to the re- Air recirculation  Do not switch the seat heating on if any of circulation icon  on the Climabar, indicat- the following conditions are met: ing that the function is active ››› page 145 Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient ● The seat is not occupied. air from entering the interior. ● The seat has a cover. When the outside temperature is very high, Front seat heating* ● A child seat has been installed on the seat. selecting manual air recirculation mode for a ● short period refreshes the vehicle interior With the engine on, the front seat cushion The seat cushion is wet or damp. more quickly. and backrest can be heated electrically. ● The outdoor or indoor temperature is greater than +25°C (77°F). For safety reasons, the air recirculation is disconnected when  is pressed. Control seat heating WARNING Press the icon  on the Climabar Switching the manual air recirculation ››› Fig. 123 A to view the seat heating menu. People who cannot perceive pain or tem- mode on and off perature because of medications, paralysis ● Press the left or right seat icon to connect or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have a ● Press the button  to connect or discon- the seat heating to maximum power. limited perception of these, may suffer nect manual air recirculation. ● Press the left or right seat icon repeatedly burns to the back, buttocks or legs when using seat heating. until the desired level is adjusted. Climatronic automatic air recirculation ● People with limited pain and temperature ● To switch off seat heating, press the corre- mode thresholds must never use seat heating. sponding seat icon several times until no LED With the automatic air recirculation mode is on. ● If an abnormality in the device's tempera- activated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin ture control is detected, have it checked by ● interior is enabled. If the system detects a You can also adjust the seat heating level a specialist workshop. » high concentration of hazardous substances by using two fingers to press the sensor field in the ambient air, air recirculation mode is ››› Fig. 123 1 or 2 (left or right seat). switched on automatically. When the level of

149 Operation

WARNING Steering wheel heating* ● Press the function button repeatedly to set the desired level. If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can Steering wheel heating works only with the ● adversely affect the operation of the seat To switch off steering wheel heating, press engine running. heating, increasing the risk of burns. the function button several times until no LED is on. ● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to Steering wheel heating levels using the seat heater. The selected flywheel heating level will be Automatic off ● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is displayed on the instrument panel display. wet or damp. The steering wheel heating will be switched off automatically when any of the following ● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp Level control is carried out using the  but- conditions are met: on the seat. ton on the multifunction steering wheel:

● Do not spill liquid on the seat. ● Brief press (less than 1 second): the heat- ● Power consumption is too high. ing is switched on at maximum level. Press ● The steering wheel heating system is faulty. CAUTION the steering wheel button repeatedly until ● If the ignition is switched off. the desired level is adjusted. To switch off ● To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on steering wheel heating, press the steering wheel button repeatedly until the heated the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single Parking ventilation* point on the seat cushion or backrest. steering wheel OFF icon is displayed on the instrument cluster. ● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating With the parking ventilation function, the materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can ● Long press (more than 1 second): the heat- passenger compartment can be ventilated in damage the seat heating. ing is switched off directly from the level that spring/summer. ● In the event of smells, switch off the seat is currently operating. If the steering wheel The power required for parking ventilation heating immediately and have it inspected button is pressed again for a long period, the will be provided by the vehicle's 12V battery. by a specialised workshop. heating is switched on directly at the last level saved before switching off. The ventilation function is controlled For the sake of the environment through the CUPRA CONNECT mobile App Heating levels can also be controlled or the MyCUPRA website. The seat heating should remain on only through the infotainment system's air condi- when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces- tioning menu: Connecting parking ventilation sary fuel waste. ● Press the steering wheel heating function The function will be switched on as follows: button  . The heating is switched on at its maximum level.

150 Air conditioning

● The parking ventilation function can be Before programming the departure time, you switched on/off instantly using the on/off must check that the date and time of the car button in the MyCUPRA App or website. are correctly set. ● By programming a departure time. When programming a departure time, the car automatically calculates, depending on In the event of low level charge of the 12V the environmental conditions, the necessary battery, the parking ventilation will not turn operating time of the parking ventilation. on. CAUTION Disconnecting parking ventilation Foods sensitive to heat or cold, medica- The parking ventilation will turn off in the fol- tions and other objects can be damaged by lowing situations: the airflow. ● When the operating time selected by the ● Do not place any type of food, medicines user in the MyCUPRA App or website for the or other temperature sensitive items in instant on/off mode has elapsed. front of the ventilation slots. ● The parking ventilation function can be switched off instantly using the instant Note on/off button in the MyCUPRA App or web- If parking ventilation works repeatedly for site. long periods of time, the 12V battery ● When the scheduled departure time has charge level will drop. It is advisable to take been reached. the vehicle for a long drive to recharge the battery. The maximum operating period of the parking ventilation is 60 min.

Programming a departure/trip start The activation of the parking ventilation for a scheduled time is only valid for a single ventilation process. The departure time must be for each newly programmed ventilation process.

151 Operation

●  Auxiliary heating (additional ● Never programme the auxiliary heater so Press the immediate on/off button in the that it switches itself on and is running in an infotainment system (while the vehicle is heating)* enclosed space or an area with no ventila- switched off). tion. ● Press button  on the remote control Introduction ››› page 153. WARNING ● Automatically scheduling a departure time The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the in the auxiliary heater menu in the infotain- vehicle's tank and can be used while you are The components of the auxiliary heater are ment system, or on the MyCUPRA App or driving and when the vehicle is stationary. extremely hot and could cause a fire. portal page 154 . ● Always park your vehicle so that no part ››› The auxiliary heating can be controlled of the exhaust system can come in contact through the CUPRA CONNECT mobile app, with easily flammable materials that might Disconnection the MyCUPRA website or with the remote be below the vehicle, such as dried grass. The independent heating can be switched control. off in the following ways: In winter, with the auxiliary heater switched CAUTION on, you can defog the windscreen and leave ● The supplementary heating function will Never place food, medicines or other tem- it free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be- be turned off immediately using the on/off perature-sensitive objects close to the air fore you start driving. button in the App or MyCUPRA website. vents. Food, medicines and other objects ● Press the immediate on/off icon  in the If the outside temperature is very high, the sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged infotainment system (while the vehicle is vehicle interior can be ventilated with the or made unsuitable for use by the air com- switched off). engine off using the auxiliary heater. ing from the vents. ● Press button  on the radio-operated re- The maximum operating period of the park- mote control ››› page 153 . ing ventilation is 60 min. Switching the auxiliary heater on and ● Automatically at the scheduled departure WARNING off time or after the programmed operating time has elapsed . The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain Connection ● Automatically when the control lamp  carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can The independent heating can be connected (fuel level indicator) lights up ››› page 286 . cause people to lose consciousness. It can in the following ways: ● Automatically when the 12-volt battery also cause death. charge drops too low ››› page 299 . ● Press the immediate on/off button in the ● Never switch on the auxiliary heater or App or on the MyCUPRA website. leave it running in enclosed spaces or areas with no ventilation. 152 Air conditioning

Things to note out of range or when the control lamp is It lights up for approx. 2 seconds Once switched off, the auxiliary heater will flashing. ● In orange (then in green or in red): The re- continue to operate for a short period of To switch on and off the independent heat- mote control battery is almost flat. However, time in order to burn the fuel remaining in ing, the button must be pressed and held for the on or off signal has been received. the system and also to expel the exhaust approximately 1 second. ● In orange (then flashes green or red): The fumes. remote control battery is almost flat. No on Control lamp on the remote control or off signal has been received. When the buttons are pressed, the control Flashes for around 5 seconds Radio-operated remote control lamp on the remote control 1 provides the ● In orange: The remote control battery is user with different information: flat. No on or off signal has been received. It lights up for approx. 2 seconds Changing the battery of the radio-operat- ● In green: The auxiliary heater has been ed remote control switched on using the button.  When pressing the buttons, if the control ● In red: The auxiliary heater has been lamp of the remote 1 flashes for approx. 5 switched off con with button . orange or does not light up, the batteries must be replaced. Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds The battery is located beneath a cover on ● In green: No on signal has been received. the back of the remote control. Fig. 125 Auxiliary heating: radio-operated remote The remote control is out of range. Move control. closer to the vehicle. ● To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bot- ● In red: No off signal has been received. The tom and slide it down. Fig. 125 remote control is out of range. Move closer ● Remove the old battery.  Switch the auxiliary heater on to the vehicle. ● Insert the new battery. When doing so,  Switch the auxiliary heater off Flashes quickly approx. 2 seconds take into account the polarity and use batteries of the same type . 1 Control lamp ● In green: The independent heating is ››› blocked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is al- ● Replace the battery cover by inserting the If the buttons of the remote control are most empty, the 12-volt battery charge is tabs at the top and pressing the bottom. » pressed unnecessarily, it could switch on the very low or there is a fault. auxiliary heater involuntarily, even when it is

153 Operation

Range For the sake of the environment tion. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless The receiver is inside the vehicle. The re- ● Please dispose of your used batteries and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide mote control, when fitted with new batteries, correctly and with respect for the environ- can cause people to lose consciousness. It has a range of several hundred metres. Ob- ment. stacles between the remote control and the can also cause death. ● The remote control battery may contain vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis- perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions charged batteries can considerably reduce regarding disposal. the range of the remote control. ● Care should be taken so as not to operate Usage instructions the remote control unintentionally so as to WARNING The auxiliary heater exhaust system located prevent the auxiliary heater being switched Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame- on accidentally. below the vehicle must be kept clear of ter or any other button battery can cause snow, mud and other objects. The exhaust serious and even fatal injuries within a very fumes must be able to exit freely. The emis- short time. sions generated by the auxiliary heater are Programming the auxiliary heater* removed via an exhaust pipe fitted under- ● Always keep the remote control, keyrings neath the vehicle. with batteries, the spare batteries, button The activation of the parking ventilation for a batteries and all other batteries over 20 scheduled time is only valid for a single venti- On heating the vehicle interior, depending mm out of reach of children. lation process. The departure time must be on the outside temperature, the warm air is ● If you suspect that someone may have for each newly programmed ventilation first directed at the windscreen and then to swallowed a battery, seek immediate medi- process. the rest of the vehicle interior through the air cal attention. vents. Directing the diffusers – towards the Before programming the departure time, you windows for example – can affect air distri- must check that the date and time of the car CAUTION bution. are correctly set. ● The radio frequency remote control con- When programming a departure time, the When the auxiliary heater is not switched tains electronic components. Therefore, on avoid getting it wet and exposing it to car automatically calculates, depending on knocks or direct sunlight. the environmental conditions, the necessary ● The auxiliary heater requires about as operating time of the parking ventilation. ● The use of inappropriate batteries may much power as the dipped beam headlights. damage the radio frequency remote con- If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, the WARNING trol. For this reason, always replace the auxiliary heater switches off automatically used battery with another of the same volt- Never programme the auxiliary heater so and cannot be switched on. This avoids age, size and specifications. that it switches itself on and is running in an problems when starting the engine. enclosed space or an area with no ventila- 154 Air conditioning

● The heating must be activated every time you want to set off. Similarly, the departure time must reactivate each time. ● The control lamp  (fuel level indicator) lights up.

Note ● Noises will be heard while the auxiliary heater is running. ● When the air humidity is high and the inside temperature low, condensation from the heating and ventilating system may evaporate when the auxiliary heater is switched on. In this case, steam may be released from underneath the vehicle. This does not mean that there is a vehicle malfunction. ● If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater may be restricted if the fuel tank level is low (just above the reserve level). ● If the auxiliary heater is used a number of times for a long period of time, the 12-volt battery will lose its charge. To recharge the battery, the vehicle must be driven for a number of kilometres from time to time. As a guideline: the journey should last approximately as long as the heater was connected. ● At temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the auxiliary heater may switch itself on automatically when the engine is switched on. The auxiliary heater is switched off again after a certain time. 155 Infotainment system Infotainment system Current documentation attached Radio stations and owners of data media and For using infotainment and its components, audio sources are responsible for the infor- take into account, together with this instruc- mation they transmit. Introduction tion manual, the following documentation: Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tall buildings, mountains or due to the operation ● Supplements to your vehicle’s on-board of other electrical devices, such as chargers, First steps documentation. can also interfere with the reception of the ● Instruction Manual of the mobile phone radio signal. Introduction device or audio sources. Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on the ● Operating instructions for data media and Infotainment functions and settings depend antenna and on the window panes can inter- external players. on the country and equipment fere with radio reception. ● Manuals for the Infotainment accessories Before first use subsequently installed or used additionally. WARNING Before the first use, bear in mind the follow- ● Description of services when running CU- The infotainment central computer is in- ing points, to take full advantage of the func- PRA CONNECT services. terconnected with the control units moun- tions and settings offered: ted on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a serious danger of accident and injury if the ● Observe the basic safety warnings Safety instructions central computer is repaired or disassem- ››› page 156. bled and reassembled incorrectly. ● Reset the Infotainment factory settings. Some function areas may include links to ● Never replace the central computer with another used, recycled or from another ve- ● third-party websites. CUPRA is not the owner Search and store favourite radio stations on hicle at the end of its useful life. the preset buttons so you can tune them of the third-party websites accessible ● The repair or disassembly and reassembly quickly. through the links, and assumes no liability for their content. of the central computer should only be car- ● Use only suitable audio sources and data ried out at specialised workshops. To do so, media. Some function areas may include outside in- CUPRA recommends going to a specialised formation from third-party providers. CUPRA ● Pair a mobile phone to use phone man- CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership. is not responsible for such information being agement through the Infotainment system. correct, up-to-date or complete, or for en- ● Use current maps for navigation. suring it does not infringe the rights of third WARNING ● Register in CUPRA CONNECT to run the parties. The factory assembled radio with integra- corresponding services. ted software is interconnected with the control units mounted on the vehicle.

156 Introduction

Therefore, there is a serious danger of acci- at all times (e.g. emergency services si- vice is connected to the telephone inter- dent and injury if the radio is repaired or rens). face of the vehicle, inside it there is an “un- disassembled and reassembled incorrectly. ● Hearing may be impaired if using too high locked” SIM card with sufficient balance to ● Never replace the radio with another ra- a volume setting, even if only for short peri- make calls and with sufficient network sig- dio that is used, recycled or from another ods of time. nal coverage. vehicle at the end of its useful life. ● The repair or disassembly and reassembly WARNING WARNING of the radio should only be carried out at Read and observe the operating instruc- specialised workshops. To do so, CUPRA The following circumstances may result in an emergency call, phone call or data tions provided by the manufacturer in recommends going to a specialised CUPRA question when using mobile phone devices, dealer or any SEAT dealership. transmission not being made or being interrupted: data media, external devices, external audio and multimedia sources. ● When in areas with zero or insufficient WARNING mobile telephony or GPS signal. Also in Any distraction affecting the driver in any tunnels, confined areas between very tall WARNING way can lead to an accident and cause inju- buildings, garages, underpasses, mountains Position the connection cables of the audio ries. Reading the information on the screen and valleys. sources and external devices so that they and managing the infotainment system can ● When in areas with sufficient mobile do not interfere with the driver. distract your attention from traffic and phone or GPS signal, the telephony net- cause an accident. work of the telecommunications provider WARNING ● Always drive as carefully and responsibly has interference or is not available. as possible. ● When the vehicle components necessary When changing or connecting an audio or to make emergency calls, phone calls and multimedia source may cause sudden changes in the volume. WARNING to transmit data are damaged, do not work or do not have sufficient electrical power. ● Lower the volume before connecting or Connecting, inserting or removing an audio switching to audio or multimedia sources. source or data media while driving can dis- ● When the battery of the mobile phone tract your attention from the traffic and device is discharged or its charge level is in- cause an accident. sufficient. WARNING If mobile phone and radiocommunication WARNING WARNING devices are used without connection to an In some countries and some telephone external antenna, the maximum electro- Select volume settings that allow you to magnetic radiation levels inside the vehicle easily hear signals from outside the vehicle networks it is only possible to make an emergency call, if a mobile telephone de- might be surpassed, thus posing a risk to the health of the driver and passengers. » 157 Infotainment system

This is also the case if the external antenna WARNING ● When the speakers and the vehicle com- has not been correctly installed. ponents necessary for radio reception are The centre armrest may obstruct the driv- damaged, do not work or do not have suffi- ● Keep a distance of at least 20 centime- er's arm movements, which could cause an cient electrical power. tres between the antennas of the mobile accident and severe injuries. phone device and an active medical device, ● When the infotainment is switched off. ● Keep the storage compartments of the such as a pacemaker, as mobile phones centre armrest closed at all times while the might alter the functioning of these devi- vehicle is in motion. WARNING ces. ● Do not carry a mobile phone switched on Switch off mobile phone devices in areas very close or directly on top of an active WARNING with a risk of explosion! medical device, for instance in a chest If the light conditions are not good and the pocket. screen is damaged or dirty, the indications WARNING and information displayed on the screen ● Immediately turn off the mobile phone if The driving recommendations and traffic may not be read or be read incorrectly. you suspect it is causing interferences in an indications shown on the navigation system active medical device or any other medical ● The indications and information dis- may differ from the current traffic situa- device. played on the screen should never induce tion. to take any risk that compromises safety. ● Traffic signs, signalling systems, traffic The screen is not a replacement for driver WARNING regulations and local circumstances prevail awareness. Mobile phones, external devices and acces- over driving recommendations and naviga- sories that are loose or not properly se- tion system indications. cured could move around the passenger WARNING ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit compartment during a sudden driving or Radio stations can transmit disaster or haz- visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- braking manoeuvre or an accident and ard announcements. The following conditions. cause damage or injury. tions prevent such notices from being re- ● Certain circumstances can significantly ● Set mobile phone devices, external devi- ceived or issued: initially planned lengthen both the dura- ces and their accessories outside the air- ● When in areas with zero or insufficient ration of the trip and the route to the desti- bag deployment areas or store them se- dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas nation, or even temporarily prevent naviga- curely. between very tall buildings, garages, under- tion to it, for example, if a road is closed to passes, mountains and valleys. traffic. ● When the frequency bands of the radio station have interference or are not availa- Note ble in areas with sufficient radio signal re- In areas where special regulations apply or ception. the use of mobile phones is forbidden, the 158 Introduction mobile device in question must be switched off at all times. The radiation produced by a mobile phone device when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment.

Note If the playback volume is excessive or distorted, the speakers may be damaged.

159 Infotainment system

Overview and controls

Connect System

Fig. 126 Overview: control unit and indication in the 10-inch version

1 Touch screen. The infotainment func- 5 Touch zones (to raise and lower the air tions can be used through the screen. conditioning temperature). 2 HOME button. 6 Touch zones (to raise and lower the vol- : main menu with widget views. ume). : main menu in mosaic mode. 3 Direct access button to the assist systems and vehicle settings. 4 Touch zone (to turn the infotainment system on or off). 160 Introduction

General instructions for use ● If a function button is missing on the ● In some countries, the infotainment sys- screen, it is not a device defect, but corre- tem automatically shuts off when the engine sponds to the specific equipment of the is switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt bat- Operating indications country or version. tery charge level is low.

● The infotainment needs a few seconds for ● Some infotainment functions can only be ● On vehicles with park assist, the audio the complete start-up of the system and selected when the vehicle is at a standstill. In source volume is automatically lowered during that time it does not react to inputs. some countries the parking lock must also when reverse gear is selected. The volume Only the image of the rear view camera* sys- be enabled (button P ) or the selector con- reduction can be adjusted. tem can be displayed during system start-up. trol must be in the neutral position N. This is ● Information about the included software not a malfunction, but is due to compliance ● The display of all indications and the exe- and the license conditions can be found in with legislation. cution of functions only takes place once the Settings > Copyright. infotainment system has finished booting. ● Restrictions on the use of devices using ● When selling or lending the vehicle, make The duration of the system booting depends Bluetooth® technology may apply in some sure that all saved data, files and settings on the number of infotainment functions countries. For further information, contact have been deleted and, if necessary, exter- and may take longer than normal in the the local authorities. nal audio sources and data media have been event of very high or very low temperatures. ● If you disconnect the 12-volt battery, turn removed. ● When using the infotainment system and on the ignition before restarting the infotain- corresponding accessories, e.g., head- ment system. Note phones, bear in mind country-specific regu- ● If the setup is changed, this may change You will find more information and tips for lations and legal provisions. the display on the screen and in some cases, using the infotainment system in the Help ● Some functions of the infotainment system the infotainment system may behave in a menu. require an active CUPRA CONNECT user ac- manner different to that described in this in- count and an Internet connection for the ve- struction manual. hicle. The data transmission must not be ● Ensure that any repairs or modifications HOME screen limited to perform the functions. that need to be carried out on the infotain- ● To use the infotainment system, simply ment system are carried out by a specialised In the control and display unit you can set up lightly press a button or touch the screen. workshop. To do so, CUPRA recommends the views and representation on the home going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any screen or use the factory setting templates. ● For the correct operation of the infotain- SEAT dealership. ment system it is important that it is switched If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not a on and that, if necessary, the time and date ● Using a mobile phone device inside the ve- device defect, but corresponds to the spe- of the vehicle are set correctly. hicle may cause noise in the speakers. cific equipment of the country or version. »

161 Infotainment system

The following menus can be included as an Depending on the equipment, the infotain- Depending on the equipment, customise icon on the home screen: ment system has different controls: menus and views. ● Touch screen. Main menus on the home screen Increasing and reducing images or map ● Touch zones outside the screen, for exam- sizes  Navigation ››› page 187 ple, Volume (+ -). Tip: use your thumb and index finger.  Radio/Multimedia ››› page 180 Opening the Quick Guide ● Press on the map with both fingers at the  Telephone ››› page 194 You will find more information and tips for same time and leave them on the screen.  Full Link ››› page 172 handling in the Quick Guide of the infotain- ● To enlarge views, slowly separate one fin- ment system. ger from the other. To reduce views, slowly  Setup ››› page 163 bring one finger towards the other. ● Press HOME > .  Vehicle ››› page 86 Note Connecting and disconnecting the info-  Data page 85 ››› tainment system If you turn on the infotainment system manually with the ignition off, it will auto-  Air conditioning page 143 ››› The infotainment system turns on when the matically turn off after about 30 minutes. ignition is switched on, unless it has been  Sound manually turned off beforehand.  Users The infotainment system starts-up with the Customising the infotainment system a) Privacy mode ››› page 171 last set volume, provided that this does not exceed the preset maximum start-up vol- Customise the menus and infotainment  Store ume. views to quickly access your favourite or  Legal The infotainment system automatically turns most frequently used functions. off when the driver's door is opened, provi- The main menu contains function buttons Help  ded the ignition has been switched off be- for accessing all of the Infotainment apps. a) Depends on the selected privacy mode. forehand. Configuring customised menus Moving objects and adjusting volume In all views (except Main Menu, StandBy, Managing the infotainment system Move objects on the screen to adapt set- Parking, Speller and Full Link), you will find tings, for example, with scrollable buttons or shortcuts to customizable system functions Execute the functions and settings with the to move the areas of a menu. infotainment controls. 162 Introduction in the lower part of the screen. Use the set- ● For some function buttons, more func- Symbol and its meaning tings to delete or replace them, or change tions are available than those seen at first their order. sight in the additional window. To find all  To open a drop-down list. the functions, in the additional window ● Press and hold one of the icons (or press To increase a setting value. slide the screen to the left or right.  on the icon of an empty position) to display ● To increase a setting value. an additional window. For the drop-down menu, more functions  are available than those seen at first sight in ● Select one of the icons from the apps bar. the additional window. To find all the func-  To go back step by step. tions, in the additional window slide the ● Press  to delete an icon.  To go forward step by step. screen to the left or right. ● Click on an icon in the additional window To change a setting value with the scrol- to replace the value. ● The shortcut bar cannot be edited when  the vehicle is moving. lable button without adjusting. ● Hold your finger on one of the icons and drag it to the desired position. Sound settings ● To close the edit mode, press  in the ad- Settings (system and sound) Access the sound settings: HOME >  ditional window. In the sound settings there may be the fol- The selection of possible settings varies de- lowing functions, information and setting Adapting customised menus pending on the country, the equipment in options: ● Press a function button in a customised question and the equipment of the vehicle. menu and keep your finger on the screen ● Equaliser until an additional window is displayed. Modifying settings ● Position. ● Press the function button to which you The meaning of the following symbols are ● Settings. want to add a function. valid for all system and sound settings. ● Click close to return to the custom menu. All changes are automatically applied when System settings the menus are closed.  Note Access the system settings: HOME > . ● At least two customised menus are always Symbol and its meaning In the system settings there may be the fol- available. These cannot be deleted. lowing functions, information and setting    The setting is selected and activated or options: ● You can add a maximum of two more cus- connected. tomised menus (in total, a maximum of four ● Screen. customised menus).    The setting is not selected, disabled or disconnected. ● Time and date. »

163 Infotainment system

● Language. Clean the screen necessarily mean that the term in question ● Additional keypad languages. can be used freely. Remove persistent dirt carefully and without ● Units. Other product names are registered trade- using aggressive cleaning products. To clean marks or trademarks of the respective rights ● Voice control. the screen we recommend that: holders. ● Wi-Fi. ● The infotainment system is switched off. ● Applications and services ● Manufactured under license from Dolby ● Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with wa- Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym- ● Manage mobile devices. ter ››› page 317 . bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ● Reset factory settings. ● In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt by ● Manufactured under license from Dolby ● System information. moistening with a little water. Then carefully Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym- ● Copyright. remove with a clean, soft cloth. bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ● ● Android Auto™ is a trademark of Google Configuration wizard. CAUTION Inc. Adjust the volume of external audio sour- Cleaning the screen with inappropriate ● Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of Apple ces cleaning products or when dry, may dam- Inc. age it. If you need to increase the playback volume ● Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of ● When cleaning, only press lightly. for the external audio source, first lower the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.iPod®, iPad® and volume on the infotainment system. ● Do not use aggressive cleaning products iPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc. or that contain solvents. Such products ● If the sound from the connected audio may damage the equipment and “darken” MirrorLink™ and MirrorLink Logo are certi- source is very low, increase the output vol- the screen. fied trademarks of Car Connectivity Consor- ume on the external audio source. If this is tium LLC. not enough, change the input volume to ● Windows® is a registered trademark of Mi- medium or high. Trademarks, licenses and copyrights crosoft Corporation, Redmond, USA. If the sound from the connected external ● MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology audio source is too loud or distorted, lower Registered trademarks and licenses and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS. the output volume on the external audio Certain terms in this manual bear the symbol ● This product is protected by certain Micro- source. If this is not enough, change the in- ® or ™. These symbols indicate that it is a soft Corporation industrial and intellectual put volume to medium or low. trademark or a registered trademark. The property rights. The use or commercializa- absence of this symbol, however, does not tion of technology of this type outside the

164 Introduction configuration of this product, without a li- ■ Buttons on the multifunction steering ■ 7 speakers: Balance + Fader (left / cence from Microsoft or an authorised Mi- wheel. right / front / rear). crosoft branch is prohibited. ■ Proximity sensors and gesture control. ■ Sound optimisation by zones (valid for the 7 speaker system): Copyright Vehicle and comfort functions ■ Manual (Driver and All) As a general rule, audio and video files stored ■ Driver assistance system settings. ■ Automatic depending on the seats oc- on data media and audio sources are subject ■ Heating and air conditioning settings. cupied. to intellectual property protection in accord- ■ Lights and visibility function settings. ance with the national and international pro- Optional sound system visions applicable in each case. Please bear ■ Vehicle comfort settings. The infotainment system can be extended in mind all legal provisions! ■ Parking and manoeuvring settings. with an optional sound system as follows: ■ 10 speakers in different locations and with Technical data Sound system different power levels (watts). ■ External amplifier (340 W Ethernet), which Central computer with control and display Basic equipment: processes the audio signals sent by the 1) unit (10") The infotainment system that is supplied central computer. ■ Excitation of speaker channels through The factory-mounted central computer in from the factory is equipped as follows: class AB final stages. the vehicle includes country-specific com- ■ Speakers in different locations and with ■ ponents and software for connectivity and different power levels (watts). Audio signal processing in digital internal signal processor (DSP). for the execution of vehicle, comfort and in- ■ Internal amplifier depending on the sys- ■ fotainment functions. tem: Independent subwoofer in the luggage compartment. The corresponding indications are shown on ■ 7 speakers: 5 x 20 W ■ Setting options: the control and display unit screen and partly ■ Setting options: ■ User equaliser: 5 bands. on the instrument panel. ■ Equaliser, depending on the system: ■ Equaliser settings predefined by BEATS® ■ Capacitive colour screen: ■ 7 speakers: 5 frequency bands or pre- (Signature, Active, Immersive and Voice). ■ Using the equipment with: defined settings. ■ Sound distribution: Balance + Fader ■ ■ Sound distribution, depending on the Touch zones Touch operation. (left / right / front / rear). system: ■ Sound optimisation by zones: »

1) Equipment name: Connect System. 165 Infotainment system

■ Manual (Driver, Front and All) free and a third device connected to the ■ Automatic depending on the seats oc- Bluetooth® as a music player. cupied. When a mobile phone is connected to the ■ Subwoofer volume. telephone management system, a data ex- ■ Surround settings. change takes place via one of the Blue- tooth® profiles.

● Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the Connectivity HFP can be used to manage calls through the infotainment system. Wi-Fi ● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows ■ Wi-Fi conforming to IEEE 802.11 b/g/n. audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It ■ Transfer in 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz. may require connecting other profiles for ■ Two Wi-Fi modes at the same time: managing and controlling playback. ■ Tethering (2.4 GHz). ● Phone book access profile (PBAP): Al- ■ 2.4 GHz access point. lows phone book contents to be downloa- ■ Simultaneous connection of up to 8 Wi-Fi ded from the mobile telephone. devices. ● Message profile (MAP): It allows short ■ Internet connection via Wi-Fi: messages (SMS) to be downloaded and ■ Tethering through the customer's synchronised. phone. ■ Customer access point (clients) in the vehicle. ■ Apple CarPlay and Android Auto over Wi- Fi. ■ Pairing process simplified by WPS or QR code.

Bluetooth® profiles There can be a maximum of two mobile devices connected to the Bluetooth® hands-

166 Data transfer

Data transfer CUPRA CONNECT's voice recognition or ● Malicious software on data storage devi- search technology does not recognise or of- ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones. fer results for all words. CUPRA CONNECT There are CUPRA CONNECT services for which registration is mandatory and others Services portfolio Introduction for which it is not mandatory. The initial service allocation shown here cor- To use it, CUPRA CONNECT must first be ac- Description of services responds to the third generation of CUPRA tivated online by entering into a CUPRA CONNECT services and represents the maxi- CONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A. and is Before running CUPRA CONNECT services, read and take into account the description of mum services portfolio. The maximum pos- subject to a temporary use limitation de- sible portfolio is only available on some vehi- pending on the country. the corresponding services. Descriptions are updated from time to time and are available cle models. During the useful life of the vehi- Both the CUPRA CONNECT service portfo- online at myCUPRA.com. cle, you can change the assignment shown lios offered by CUPRA and individual services here. ● Always use the most up-to-date version of can be modified, cancelled, deactivated, re- After activating the services management in the corresponding service description. activated, renamed and extended, even the infotainment system you can check if the without prior notification. vehicle has services and what they are. WARNING You can create the user account, see the de- In some countries and in the event of a con- In areas with insufficient mobile phone and scription of services and more information at tract renewal, the services offered may be myCUPRA.com. GPS coverage, neither emergency calls or phone calls can be made, and data cannot combined differently than indicated here. The execution and availability of the CUPRA be transmitted. Change location if possible. They may also vary depending on the year of CONNECT services and service portfolios production of the vehicle. The aforemen- may vary depending on the country, as well tioned services correspond to the third gen- CAUTION as the vehicle, its equipment and connectivi- eration of CUPRA CONNECT. ty. The vehicle may be damaged by factors outside CUPRA’s control. These may be CUPRA CONNECT services and functions Connectivity statuses specifically: that do not require activation ● Misuse of mobile terminals  (white) Full connectivity, all services active The following services also work without ac- ● Data loss during transmission. tivating CUPRA CONNECT: Limited connectivity, some services ● Unsuitable or defective third party appli-  (grey) may not be available. ● Public emergency call service. cations. no icon No connectivity, no services available. ● Privacy mode. » 167 Infotainment system

● Legal. ● Parking lots CUPRA CONNECT individual options ● Online infotainment system update ● In-Car Applications. These applications CUPRA CONNECT services ● Online route calculation can be purchased and installed directly in The CUPRA CONNECT services are: the infotainment system through the In-Car ● Information on risks store. ● Private emergency call ● Dictation ● Full Link. ● Public emergency call ● Natural voice control for infotainment, me- ● Data package. Pay per use data rates for ● Roadside assistance call dia and radio apps the use of online functions, for example, 2 ● Customer support ● Natural voice control for destinations and GB per month. ● Service appointment planning addresses ● Online system update ● Online radio Note ● Customisation ● Online media ● The public emergency call service is available regardless of whether the info- ● ● Online route import Activating CUPRA CONNECT tainment system is logged in. ● Online destination import ● Private mode (deactivation of services) ● Customisation and purchase of In-Car ● Delete user / Reset factory settings ● Remote auxiliary ventilation applications requires logging into the infotainment system, but it is not necessary to ● Remote independent heating ● Parking position activate the vehicle in a CUPRA CONNECT ● Privacy mode ● Remote opening account. ● Horn and turn signals ● Legal ● Vehicle status incl. doors and lights CUPRA CONNECT services for hybrid vehi- Activating CUPRA CONNECT and S- ● Driving data cles ● PIN Vehicle status report Available only in electric and hybrid vehicles. ● Anti-theft alarm warning Activating CUPRA CONNECT ● Remote air conditioning ● Zone warning The following steps are necessary to activate ● Electrical power manager ● Speed warning CUPRA CONNECT (including registration): ● Departure times ● Online map update ● plus all CUPRA CONNECT services in the ● Create a user account at myCUPRA.com or ● Search for points of interest previous section ››› page 168 . directly through the infotainment system in ● Petrol stations the User Management menu. ● Online traffic information 168 Data transfer

● Place the CUPRA CONNECT order and ac- of birth. You can change the S-PIN in the ● Press the unlock button on the first vehicle tivate it. CUPRA CONNECT user account in “Account key. ● Add the vehicle to your user account. settings”. ● Press the unlock button on the second ve- ● Prove ownership. The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to pro- hicle key. tect your user profile or to run a CUPRA ● Prove your identity. It is only necessary if Once the infotainment system has pro- CONNECT service relevant to the security of you are to run CUPRA CONNECT services cessed the orders by radiofrequency, the ac- your vehicle. relevant to security. creditation of the ownership will have been ● You can activate it at myCUPRA or directly You must manage this S-PIN with absolute completed. You can control the current sta- through the infotainment system. To activate confidentiality. If you reveal the S-PIN to tus on the CUPRA CONNECT website. it through the infotainment system, proceed third parties, for security reasons you must as follows: HOME > Manage users > Become change it immediately. How is ownership accredited? primary user. Infotainment 2-Key method. Follow the rest of the indications and the in- Ownership and identity accreditation CUPRA CONNECT web- No, it is not possible formation shown in the infotainment system. site During activation, you may be asked to cre- Become primary user ate an S-PIN. CUPRA CONNECT ap- No, it is not possible To become a main user and thus prove own- plication ership of the vehicle, you need both of the Update option vehicle’s physical keys. Ownership accredita- Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident) Infotainment yes tion takes place in the vehicle during regis- Identity accreditation must be completed tration or, if you already have a CUPRA CON- CUPRA CONNECT website yes before you can use CUPRA CONNECT serv- NECT user account, you must log in through ices that are relevant to security, such as the CUPRA CONNECT application yes the infotainment system and then go to “Remote Opening” service. Identity accredi- Manage users tation can be done in two ways: More information at myCUPRA.com/faqs ● Switch on the ignition and the infotainment ● In person at a specialised CUPRA dealer or system. S-PIN any SEAT dealership. ● In the infotainment system, register in CU- The S-PIN is a sequence of several digits, ● You can find more information about SEAT PRA CONNECT. which can be selected when the CUPRA Ident on the CUPRA CONNECT website at CONNECT registration is completed. ● Or: open the menu Manage users > Set- myCUPRA.com. tings > Become primary user and follow the When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to- instructions. guess number sequences and known dates 169 Infotainment system

Legal provisions CONNECT website and in the CUPRA CON- ready be activated and the previous user may NECT app. still be able to access the data registered When using CUPRA CONNECT services, in- through CUPRA CONNECT and control cer- Therefore, before moving off, ask all the ve- formation is transferred and processed on- tain functions of your vehicle. hicle occupants if they agree with the activa- line through the vehicle. Such data can also ted services. If they do not, deactivate the In the infotainment system you can check if provide (at least indirectly) information service in question (if possible) or do not al- your vehicle is assigned to a person as the about the driver in question, for example, low the occupants to use the vehicle. main user. In this case, you can register your- driving behaviour and location. As a con- self as the main user of the vehicle and thus tracting party in the CUPRA CONNECT con- GPS tracking: marking automatically delete the previous main user. tract with SEAT, S.A., you must ensure that Alternatively, through the infotainment sys- when your vehicle is used by other drivers If the vehicle has a factory-assembled con- tem you can directly and permanently delete (for example, family or friends), data protec- trol unit that transmits the its current geo- the previous user as the main user, as well as tion and personal rights are respected. graphical position and speed, the vehicle put the vehicle in offline mode and thus limit Therefore, you must inform drivers in ad- usually has this GPS marking (e.g., on the both the communication of your vehicle with vance that the vehicle transfers and receives roof console). The absence of the marking the SEAT, S.A. data server and the processing data online, and that you can access such on the vehicle does not guarantee that the of personal and vehicle data. data. control unit does not transmit the vehicle’s current geographical position and speed. Not taking into account this obligation to inform, can infringe certain rights of the occu- Personal information Deactivating CUPRA CONNECT serv- pants. CUPRA protects your personal data and only ices Users can manage data sending and trans- uses them, as long as the law allows it or you The following functions are available in the fers through the privacy mode at any time. have given your consent on the occasion of infotainment system to deactivate and acti- For more information visit: a use. You will find detailed information on vate CUPRA CONNECT services: myCUPRA.com/faqs data processing in relation to CUPRA CON- NECT services in the Privacy Policy, which ● Central deactivation or activation Follow-up services: ask all occupants you can access in its corresponding current ● Individual deactivation or activation The follow-up services need geographical version on the CUPRA website. and vehicle data to determine whether the You can rerun the corresponding services af- vehicle is being used within defined speed Permanent transfer of the vehicle ter cancelling their deactivation in the info- ranges, where it has been parked or if it is be- If another person has left you the vehicle for tainment system. ing used in an established geographical area. permanent use (for example, if you buy a This information is displayed on the CUPRA used vehicle), CUPRA CONNECT may al-

170 Data transfer

Note ● When in areas with zero or insufficient mo- privacy mode option if you want to deacti- bile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for exam- vate all of the services at the same time. The services required by law and their data ple, in tunnels, confined areas between very transmission, such as the public emergency tall buildings, garages, underpasses, moun- Privacy mode call system, cannot be disconnected or de- tains and valleys. activated. Allows you to deactivate or activate the serv- ● External information from third party sup- ices depending on the selected privacy level. plies available with limitations, incomplete or incorrect, e.g. representations of maps. Main users and co- Faults  Share location. ● Countries and regions where CUPRA CON- users can view position data on the CU- Tracking PRA CONNECT website or app. Even if the prerequisites for the use of CU- NECT is not offered. PRA CONNECT services are met, there may  Use location. Position, vehicle, and be factors beyond the control of CUPRA that Location user data are used for services. interfere with the execution of such services Service management or prevent them. These may be specifically:  No location. Only the vehicle data and Open the settings in Users and go to Privacy Personal user data are used for services. ● Maintenance, repair, deactivation, soft- settings and services. You can do the fol- Maximum privacy. Your services are ware update and technical expansion of tele- lowing in the infotainment system:  communication equipment, satellites, serv- disabled. Only services required for le- Incognito gal reasons use data. ers and data banks. ● Check which CUPRA CONNECT services are currently available in the vehicle. ● Change of the mobile telephony standard Setting options are not available in all mar- for the transmission of mobile data by the ● The number of CUPRA CONNECT services kets or in all vehicle models. telecommunications service provider, for that are activated or deactivated. example, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS. ● Activate or deactivate CUPRA CONNECT Note ● Disconnection of an existing mobile phone services. If you deactivate all CUPRA CONNECT serv- standard by the telecommunications service ices, the OCU may continue to transmit da- Find out more information at: provider. ta. myCUPRA.com. ● Interference, disturbance or interruption in the reception of the mobile phone and GPS Privacy and Services Settings signal due to aspects such as high-speed driving, solar storms, meteorological influen- CUPRA CONNECT services can be activated ces, topography, blocking equipment and and deactivated individually. To do this, just the intensive use of mobile phones in the ra- check the box corresponding to the service dio cells in question. you want to activate or deactivate. Use the 171 Infotainment system

Full Link ● View : click on Full link Full Link from now on without the USB con- ● View : click on Menu > Full Link nection. Introduction ● OR: press APP. If pop-up menus are rejected during the connection process, Wireless Full Link will With Full Link it is possible to view and use Configure Wireless Full Link not be available. In this case, CUPRA recom- the contents and functions that are shown mends removing the devices in both the In order to use Wireless Full Link, you must on the mobile phone device on the infotain- iPhone settings and the infotainment sys- first pair the mobile phone device with the ment screen. tem, and restarting the connection process. infotainment system. To do this, proceed as To do this, the mobile phone device must be follows: WARNING connected with the infotainment system through a USB interface. Connect a mobile phone device for the first The use of applications while driving can time. distract your attention from the traffic. Any Some technologies can also be used by ● Unlock the mobile phone device. distraction affecting the driver in any way Wireless Full Link through the Bluetooth® in- can lead to an accident and cause injuries. terface and a Wi-Fi connection. ● Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth® on ● Always drive as carefully and responsibly the mobile phone device. as possible. The following technologies may be availa- ● Connect the mobile phone device to the ble: infotainment system using a USB cable or via WARNING ● Apple CarPlay™ Bluetooth®. Any applications that are not suitable or ● Apple CarPlay™ Wireless ● Access the Full Link main menu, unless it appears automatically. execute incorrectly may cause damage to ● Android Auto™ the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. ● Select the mobile phone device and the ● MirrorLink® ● Protect the mobile phone device and its technology you want. applications from inappropriate use. The availability of the technologies that Full ● Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mo- ● Never carry out modifications to the ap- Link includes depends on the country and bile phone device to grant the necessary au- plications. the mobile phone device used. thorisations to the infotainment system. ● Follow instructions in the instruction You can find more information on the CU- ● Disconnect the USB connection and con- manual for the mobile phone device. PRA website. nect with the infotainment system again via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®. Wireless Full Link is now CAUTION Access the Full Link main menu configured. CUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam- Browsing the Full Link main menu depends The pairing has concluded. The connected age caused to the vehicle as a result of the on the infotainment system used. mobile phone device can also use Wireless 172 Data transfer

use of applications that are of poor quality vary. Some applications also depend on the sion are suitable for the use of Apple Car- or are defective, the inadequate program- availability of third-party services. Play™. ming of the applications, the insufficient It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica- ● The USB cable used must be an original coverage of the network, the loss of data tions offered will work on all mobile phone Apple™ cable. during transmission or the improper use of devices or with all their operating systems. mobile phone devices. Apple CarPlay™ Wireless: Bluetooth® and The applications offered by CUPRA can be Wi-Fi must also be activate on the iPhone™. modified, cancelled, deactivated, reactiva- Note ted and extended without prior notification. Establish connection ● Wireless Full Link may not be compatible with all technologies. To avoid distracting the driver while driving, When you first connect an iPhone™, follow only certified applications can be used. the instructions on the infotainment system ● Wireless Full Link (Android Auto ™ and screen and on the iPhone ™. Apple CarPlay ™) is disabled in countries whose radio frequency regulations do not The requirements must be met to use Apple allow it to operate. Full Link symbols and settings CarPlay™.

 To show more information Launch Apple CarPlay™: Applications (apps)  To open the Full Link settings menu ● Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full Link main menu. With Full Link, the display of the contents of ● OR: press APP to access the Full Link main CUPRA applications and other providers in- Apple CarPlay™ menu. stalled on mobile phone devices can be ● Press Apple CarPlay™ to establish a con- transferred to the infotainment screen. In order to use Apple CarPlay, the following nection with the iPhone™. In the case of third-party applications, there requirements must be met: may be compatibility problems. ● The iPhone™ must be compatible with Disconnecting Apple CarPlay™. Applications, their use and the necessary ● In Apple CarPlay™ mode, press the CUPRA mobile phone connection may be pay per ● Voice control (Siri ™) must be active on the icon to access the Full Link main menu. iPhone™. use. ● Press  to interrupt the active connection. ● Apple CarPlay™ must be active without The offer of applications can be varied and limitations in the iPhone™ settings. The representation of function buttons on designed for a vehicle or a specific country. the screen may vary. » The content and volume of applications, as ● The iPhone ™ must be connected to the well as the companies that offer them, may infotainment system via a USB connection. Only USB connections with data transmis- 173 Infotainment system

Special characteristics voice control ● The USB cable used must be an original During an active Apple CarPlay™ connec- ● Press  briefly to start voice control using cable provided by the smartphone manufac- tion, the following characteristics are appli- the infotainment system. turer. cable: ● Press this button for a long time to start Establish connection ● Bluetooth® connections between the voice control (Siri™) of the connected iPhone™ and the infotainment system are iPhone™. When you first connect a smartphone, follow not possible. the instructions on the infotainment system screen and on the smartphone. ● If there is an active Bluetooth® connec- Note tion, it is automatically interrupted. ● The availability of technologies depends The requirements must be met to use An- droid Auto™. ● The phone functions are only available on the country and may vary. through Apple CarPlay™. The functions de- ● You will find information about technical Launch Android Auto™: scribed for the Infotainment system are not requirements, compatible iPhones, certi- ● Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full available. fied applications and their availability on the CUPRA and Apple CarPlay ™ websites, Link main menu ● The connected iPhone™ cannot be used at specialised CUPRA dealerships or at any ● OR: press APP to access the Full Link main as a multimedia device in the Media main SEAT dealership. menu. menu. ● Press Android Auto™ to establish a con- ● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga- nection with the smartphone. tion system and the Apple CarPlay™ naviga- Android Auto™ tion system at the same time. The last route Disconnecting started interrupts the one that was previously Requirements for Android Auto™ active. ● In Android Auto™ mode, press Exit to ac- In order to use Android Auto™, the following ● Depending on the infotainment system cess the Full Link main menu. requirements must be met: you use, on the instrument panel screen you ● Press  to interrupt the active connection. can view data from the Telephone mode. ● The mobile phone device, called smartphone from here on, has to be compatible ● The instrument panel screen does not dis- Special characteristics with Android Auto™. play any indication to turn. During an active Android Auto™ connection, ● The smartphone must have an Android ● With the multifunction steering wheel you the following characteristics are applicable: Auto™ application installed. can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as ● An active Android Auto™ device can be ● The smartphone has to be connected end an ongoing telephone conversation. connected at the same time via Bluetooth® through the USB connection with data trans- (HFP profile) with the infotainment system. mission with the infotainment system.

174 Data transfer

● It is possible to use the phone’s functions Note Establish connection through Android Auto™. If the Android Au- When you first connect a mobile phone de- to™ device is connected at the same time via ● The availability of technologies depends on the country and may vary. vice, follow the instructions on the infotain- Bluetooth® with the infotainment system, ment system screen and on the mobile ● You will find information about technical the telephone function of the infotainment phone device. can also be used. requirements, compatible mobile phone devices, certified applications and their The requirements must be met to use Mir- ● An active Android Auto™ device cannot be availability on the CUPRA and Android Au- rorLink™. used as a multimedia device in the Media to™ websites, at specialised CUPRA dealer- main menu. ships or at any SEAT dealership. Launch MirrorLink®: ● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga- ● Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full tion system and the Android Auto™ naviga- Link main menu. tion system at the same time. The last route MirrorLink® ● OR: press APP to access the Full Link main started interrupts the one that was previously menu. active. Requirements for MirrorLink® ● Press to establish the connection with the ● On the instrument panel screen you can In order to use MirrorLink™, the following re- mobile phone device. view data from the Telephone mode. quirements must be met: ● The instrument panel screen does not dis- ● The mobile device must be compatible Disconnecting play any indication to turn or the Media with MirrorLink™. mode. ● In the MirrorLink® mode, press the APP ● The mobile phone device must be con- icon to access the Full Link main menu. ● With the multifunction steering wheel you nected to the infotainment system via a USB ●  can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as OR: press to access the MirrorLink® connection that is suitable for data transmis- end an ongoing telephone conversation. main menu. sion. ● Press  to interrupt the active connection. ● voice control The USB cable used must be an original cable provided by the mobile phone device Special characteristics ● Press  briefly to start voice control using manufacturer. the infotainment system. During an active MirrorLink® connection, the ● Depending on the mobile phone device following characteristics are applicable: ● Press this button for a long time to start used, a Car-Mode application that is suitable voice control on the connected smart- for using MirrorLink® must be installed. ● An active MirrorLink® device can be con- phone. nected to the infotainment system at the same time via Bluetooth®. ● If the MirrorLink® device is connected to the infotainment system via Bluetooth®, the » 175 Infotainment system

telephone function of the infotainment sys- Note mobile phone rate, particularly if you are tem can be used. abroad (for example, roaming rates). You will find information about technical ● You cannot use an active MirrorLink® de- requirements, compatible mobile phone vice as a multimedia device in the Media devices, certified applications and their main menu. availability on the CUPRA and MirrorLink® Configuration for sharing a connec- ● On the instrument panel screen you can websites, at specialised CUPRA dealerships tion over WLAN view data from the Telephone mode. or at any SEAT dealership. ● The instrument panel screen does not dis- Establishing the connection with the wire- play any indication to turn or the Media less network (WLAN) mode. WLAN access point* ● Press the HOME >  button. ● With the multifunction steering wheel you ● Activate the wireless network. To do so, can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as Introduction press the WLAN function button. end an ongoing telephone conversation. 3 Not available for model: Media System ● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the device that is to be connected. If neces- Function buttons The infotainment system can be used to sary, refer to the manufacturer’s instruction Function buttons and their function: share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi- manual. ces page 176, Configuration for sharing APP Return the Full Link main menu. Here ››› ● Activate the mobile device assignment in a connection over WLAN. you can end the MirrorLink® connec- the infotainment system. To do so, press the tion, connect another mobile phone The infotainment system can also use the Enable WLAN connection button and acti- device or select another technology. WLAN hotspot of an external device to pro- vate the checkbox.  Press to close the open apps. Then vide Internet to the devices connected to ● Enter and confirm the network key dis- press the apps to be closed or the Close the hotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 177 . played on the device. all function button to close all the open applications. Note The following settings can also be made on the menu Share connection:  Press to display the mobile phone de- ● Data transmission may incur charges. Due to the high volume of data exchanged, vice screen on the infotainment system ● Security level: WPA2 encryption automat- CUPRA recommends the use of a flat rate screen. ically generates a network key. tariff for data transmission. Mobile phone  To open the MirrorLink® settings. operators can provide the relevant infor- ● Network key: Network key automatically  Press to return to the MirrorLink® main mation. generated. Press the function button to menu. ● The exchange of data packages may generate additional costs, depending on your 176 Data transfer manually change the network key. The net- ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN de- The wireless (WLAN) connection is estab- work key must have a minimum of 8 charac- vice. The wireless (WLAN) connection is es- lished. To complete the connection, it may ters and a maximum of 63. tablished. be necessary to enter other data into the de- ● SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of vice. Repeat this process to connect other devi- 32 characters). ces. Note The wireless (WLAN) connection is estab- Due to the large number of devices on the lished. To complete the connection, it may market, it is not possible to guarantee fault- be necessary to enter other data into the de- Configure Internet access free operation of all functions. vice. The infotainment system can use the WLAN Repeat this process to connect other devi- hotspot of an external device to establish an ces. Internet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire- Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) less network (WLAN) 3 This depends on the equipment and the ● Activate and check the wireless hotspot on country in question. the external device. If necessary, refer to the manufacturer’s instruction manual. Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create a ciphered local wireless network quickly and ● Press the HOME >  button; OR access simply. the Media mode and press the Settings menu. ● Establish the connection with the wireless ● Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLAN network (WLAN). connection and check the verification box. ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN router ● Press the Find function button and select until the warning light on the router starts the device you want from the list. flashing. If the WLAN router does not support WPS the network must be configured ● If necessary, enter the network key of the manually. device in the infotainment system and confirm with OK. ● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the WLAN router until the WLAN light on the Manual settings: router starts flashing. ● To manually enter the network settings of an external (WLAN) device. 177 Infotainment system

The other languages of the infotainment sys- Connect and disconnect the activation Infotainment operation tem do not offer Online Commands, air con- word ditioning control or natural interaction. ● In HOME press Settings > Voice control > voice control* Activate/ deactivate activation word. Requirements ● Introduction Online* and offline: voice control with the Activation word: Hola Hola corresponding infotainment mounted on the vehicle. The voice control works both online* and Commands offline taking into account what is indicated ● Current online* CUPRA CONNECT Plus For voice control to recognise commands in page 178, Languages available depend- contract. ing on the market. In online* mode, com- reliably, bear in mind the tips for the commands are recorded more accurately, as Note mands to work properly. more data is available. ● Voice control only recognises commands Tips for the commands to work correctly: Voice control understands questions and ex- in the language that is set in the infotain- ● Pronounce clearly. Confusing commands pressions without having to learn com- ment system. are not recognised. Talk in a normal tone of mands. Commands can be formulated freely ● Test the voice control with the vehicle voice. Speak a little louder if you are driving and can be colloquial. You will find proposals stopped before starting to move to familiar- at high speed. for commands in the infotainment system. ise yourself with its operation. ● Avoid outside noises. Open windows and Functions are reduced in offline mode. doors can interfere with voice control. ● Avoid other secondary noises, such as Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle can Activation word and commands cause malfunctions, as well as confusing conversations in the vehicle. Do not direct phrases and answers. the air flow from the outlets towards the mi- Voice control activation words crophone or the interior lining of the roof. If you have connected the voice control via Languages available depending on the ● Do not use a very strong accent or dialec- the activation word, the connected infotain- market tal. ment responds with How can I help you?. It Online* and offline: German, American Eng- then scans the words spoken in the vehicle ● Do not make long pauses. lish, British English, French, Italian, Spanish after the activation word. and Czech. These languages have advanced  Voice control is active and recognises the functions such as Online Commands, air Voice control starts when the infotainment words pronounced. conditioning control, natural interaction, etc. recognises the activation word.

178 Infotainment operation

Note Start and stop voice control In some cases you can also start voice control of the connected mobile phone device, ● When the activation word is disconnec- Depending on the equipment, you can start by pressing and holding the voice control ted, the infotainment system cannot be ac- voice control in different ways. button. tivated by means of the activation word. Voice control is still available via the  button on the multifunction steering wheel. Start voice control Manually ending voice control ● Availability depends on country and ● Voice control activation: say the word that Voice control can be cancelled with the equipment. activates voice control. Cancel command. ● ● Depending on the content of the phone Multifunction steering wheel: press the ● Multifunction steering wheel: press the  book and to ensure reliable recognition of voice control button . voice control button  twice in a row, or a the names of the phone book, it may be long press. useful to change the order of the first and The voice control ends automatically, if you last name of the contact in question. use infotainment functions, if the parking system is activated or by incoming calls.

179 Infotainment system

Radio/Multimedia

Radio mode

Fig. 127 Schematic representation: Radio view

In Radio mode you can tune in the available Access the settings ● You have a corresponding data package radio stations in different frequency bands ● Press HOME >  > . acquired from the In-Car store or have a data and memorise your favourites on the preset volume for your own mobile phone device buttons to access them quickly. Online* functions in Radio mode via Wi-Fi access point. The types of reception and frequency bands Online* functions in Radio mode are only Note available depend on the equipment and the available under the following conditions: country. In certain countries, frequency ● For streaming services you need to have bands may stop broadcasting or not be avail- ● CUPRA CONNECT or CUPRA CONNECT an account with the provider in question. able again. Plus equipment. ● Radio stations are responsible for the ● You have an active CUPRA CONNECT user content of the information they transmit. Access the RADIO menu account. Additional electrical equipment connected to the vehicle can cause interference in the ● Press HOME >  >  Fig. 127 . ● Add the vehicle is assigned to your user ac- ››› reception of the radio signal and noise in count. the speakers.

180 Infotainment operation

 ● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to TP Next to the name of the station, moni- Show online radio stations whose pro- the windows may affect reception on vehi- toring of active traffic information sta- gramme belongs to the desired musical cles with a window aerial. tions (TP). genre.

Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency band Radio equipment and symbols  To display the frequency band for man- Selecting, tuning and saving a station ual selection of the FM frequency. Only The functions, as well as the types of recep- possible when the summary station list Select the frequency band tion and frequency bands available depend is disconnected. Before selecting a station you have to select on the equipment and the country.  DAB not available. a frequency band or a type of reception. Dif- ferent stations are available depending on  DAB stations support presentations (sli- ● AM* tuner. the frequency band selected or the type of deshow). ● Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna). reception.

● Summarised FM station list. Symbols on the AM frequency band The types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the ● Fusion of DAB* and FM stations into one  Manually updating the station list. list. country.  To display the frequency band for man- ● Fusion of all stations stored in preset but- ual selection of the AM frequency. ● Select the frequency band or type of re- tons into one list. Maximum 36 favourite sta- ception: AM*, FM/DAB, FM (for devices that tions. Menus in Online* radio mode do not have DAB), Online* radio. ● Station logos.  Show station selection. ● DAB presentation (slideshow). Images that Search and select a station  Open text search. are emitted sequentially. You can select radio stations in different Show the last online radio stations ● Online* radio.  ways. The options vary depending on the heard. frequency band and the type of reception.  Universal symbols in Radio mode Show the 100 most played radio stations and podcasts. Select via the frequency band (AM and FM) AM To select the desired AM frequency band.  Show available online radio podcasts. ● Activate the frequency band. FM/DAB To select the desired FM/DAB fre-  Show online radio stations, grouped by ● Click on the cursor, scroll through the frequency band. country. quency band and release it when you reach the frequency band you want. » Online radio* To select the type of Online*  Show online radio stations by the de- radio reception. sired language. 181 Infotainment system

● OR: press on a point on the frequency ● OR: press  to start the text search. The ● OR: press the station on the station list and band. The cursor will automatically jump to input field is displayed. keep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis- the corresponding frequency. ● Enter the name of the station you want. played. The list of the stations found is updated while ● Press the preset button. The station of the set frequency is tuned. entering the text. The station is stored in the selected preset ● Press the station you want. Select from the station list (AM and button. FM/DAB) The selected station is tuned. If a station was already stored in the preset The station list shows the stations that are button, it is overwritten with the new station. currently tunable. In the AM frequency band, Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB) you may have to update the station list if you In SCAN mode the stations are automatically are no longer in the area where you last ac- tuned in a sequential manner and each of cessed the station list. In the FM/DAB fre- Special functions in Radio mode them is played for approx. 5 seconds. quency band, the station list is automatically Traffic information (TP) updated. ● To start the SCAN mode press SCAN. The TP function monitors the announce- ● Open the station list SCAN mode starts and the station currently ments of a station with traffic information ● Press the station you want. tuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it is and automatically reproduces them in the a SCAN function button. Radio mode or in the multimedia playback The selected station is tuned. In the case of that is active. To do this, you have to be able FM/DAB and if the station is available, the ● To select a station press SCAN. to tune into a station with traffic information. best quality reception is automatically selected. SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned. Some stations without their own traffic infor- The SCAN function button is hidden. mation support the TP function by broadcasting traffic information from other sta- Search and filter stations (Online* radio) Storing the station on the preset buttons tions (EON). In Online Radio mode, stations can be filtered by categories and can be searched by You can store up to 36 stations of different In the AM frequency band or in the Multime- text. frequency bands and reception types as fa- dia mode, a station with traffic information in vourites using the preset buttons. the background is automatically tuned while ● Open the station list. it is possible to tune into a station with traffic ● Tune the station you want. ● Select the category by which the stations information. ● Access the preset buttons. are to be filtered. If no station with traffic information can be ● Press the preset button and keep it press- tuned in, the device automatically searches ed until the station is stored. for stations with tunable traffic information. 182 Infotainment operation

Stations with traffic information are not avail- system. The use of online radio can generate In the Online radio mode, the infotainment able in all countries. expenses due to the transmission of data system accesses the station logos of the on- from the Internet. line database and automatically assigns Activating and deactivating the TP func- them to the stations ● tion In Online radio mode, press and set the audio quality to high or low to tune the online Assign station logos manually ● In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, press radio. ● In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos. Settings > Traffic station (TP). ● Press on the  icon and then select the Station logos Online* radio station to which a station logo is to be as- In the case of some frequency bands, station signed. Online radio is a type of reception for Inter- logos may already be pre-installed in the in- ● Select the station logo. If desired, repeat net radio stations and podcasts that are infotainment system. dependent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks to the same process with other stations. Internet transmission, reception is not limi- If in the FM/DAB frequency band settings ● OR, via the menu Settings > Station logos. ted to the region. the automatic selection of station logos is activated, station logos are automatically as- Online radio is only available through the In- signed to the stations. ternet connection of the active infotainment

183 Infotainment system

Media Mode

Fig. 128 Schematic representation: Multimedia view

In Media mode you can play multimedia files You can also use streaming services. The damaged. Please bear in mind the manufac- from data media and streaming services availability of streaming services depends on turer’s indications. through the infotainment system. the equipment and the country. Quality differences between data media pro- Depending on the equipment, the following To use streaming services you need to have duced by different manufacturers can cause data media can be used: your own user account in the streaming multimedia playback malfunctions. service in question. ● USB storage support (for example, a USB Incorrect configuration on a data media may cause the data media to be unreadable. stick, a mobile phone connected via USB). Access the MEDIA menu ● Bluetooth® device (for example, a mobile Playlists only specify a playback order and re- ● Press HOME >  >  ››› Fig. 128 . phone or a tablet). fer to the storage location of the multimedia Access the settings files within the folder structure. In a playlist Depending on the equipment, the following there are no multimedia files saved. To play a ● Press HOME >  > . types of multimedia files can be played: playlist, multimedia files have to be found in the storage places of the data media to ● Audio files. Limitations and indications of data media which the playlist refers. ● Video files (depends on the system). Data media may not work if they have been exposed to high temperatures or have been

184 Infotainment operation

Equipment features. Audio, multimedia ● Select the connected media source to be the multimedia files that are in it are also and connectivity: used for playback. added to the playback. ● Multimedia playback and control via Blue- ● If a playlist is played, all available titles in tooth®. Playing audio and video files the playlist are added to the playback. ● Audio playback in these formats: AAC, You can search and play multimedia files ● Close your selection with . ALAC, AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA. from an available multimedia source in different ways. ● Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1 Select favourites and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4, In favourites you can save titles, music gen- Search in the folder structure DivX 3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264 res, artists and albums individually for play- (.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video Multimedia files can be catalogued by cate- back. 10 (.wmv, .asf). gories (for example, album, artist, title). In My media this category view is always displayed. ● Access favourites . ● Playlists on any type of device. The classic folder structure of individual USB ● Press the favourite you want. ● Multimedia streaming (online*). data media is also found in My media. ● Multimedia search. Depending on your selection, all the titles ● Activate the folder structure. belonging to the favourite are added to the Note ● The folder structure of the selected multi- playback. CUPRA assumes no liability for any deterio- media source is displayed. When My media ration or loss of files on data storage devi- is selected, the categories (music, videos, Configure streaming services ces. playlists) and connected multimedia sources Depending on the equipment you can use are displayed first. streaming services directly through the info- ● Search for the title you want in the folder tainment system. For this you need to have a Select and play a multimedia source structure. premium user account of the streaming ● Or: press  to start the text search. The in- service in question and you have to log in Select multimedia source put field is displayed. with it in the infotainment system. You also need to be connected to the Internet. Before playing multimedia files you must first ● Enter the name of the desired title. The list connect a multimedia source. of the titles found is updated while entering ● Select  Streaming as the multimedia the text. To use streaming services you must be con- source. nected to the Internet. ● Press the desired title. ● A list of available streaming services is dis- ● If at the beginning of the playback your se- played. ● Connect an external multimedia source. lection is in a folder of a multimedia source, ● Select the streaming service you want. »

185 Infotainment system

● Follow the steps indicated by the infotain- ● Playlist. Video mode ment system. The selection is saved instead of the previ- When in video mode, a video can be played ● The streaming service is added to the list ously selected favourite. If the favourite was on the infotainment screen if this is stored on of multimedia sources as a new function already assigned, the previously saved fa- a data media, in My media or is sourced from button. vourite is overwritten. a streaming service. In this case, the video sound is played through the vehicle's speak- Save favourites The selectable options in the selection list ers. depend on the data attached to the multi- Only multimedia files in My media of the in- media file. If the music genre is not indicated The image is only displayed if the vehicle is fotainment system can be saved as favour- in the music files, for example, you cannot stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the ites. You can save up to a maximum of 30 ti- save the music genre as favourite. infotainment screen turns off. The sound of tles, albums, artists and music genres indi- the video can still be heard. vidually as favourites. If a video file is playing, only that video can be saved as favourite. A stable Internet connection is required for ● Start playback. playback from a streaming service. In this case, telephony costs may be generated. ● Access favourites. ● Tap a favourite that is not assigned. Playing entertainment content in the ● Or: click on an existing favourite and press infotainment system and hold for approx. 3 seconds. Depending on the infotainment system, vid- ● Select from the selection list: Title, Album, eos can be played. Artist, Musical genres.

186 Infotainment operation

Navigation*

Introduction

Fig. 129 Schematic representation: Navigation view

A global satellite system determines the cur- ble on the screen when travelling above a If the exact destination cannot be reached rent position of the vehicle and the sensors certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is because, for example, it is in a non-digitised mounted on the vehicle analyse the routes due to compliance with legislation. area, indications relating to the address and taken. All measured values and possible traf- the distance to the destination are displayed fic events are compared with the available Navigation announcements on the screen. maps to allow optimal navigation to the des- Navigation announcements are acoustic in- During dynamic route guidance, you will re- tination. dications for driving referred to the current ceive information about reported traffic Navigation announcements and graphic rep- route. congestion on the route. An additional navi- resentations will guide you to your destina- gation announcement is provided if the The type and frequency of navigation an- tion. route is recalculated due to traffic conges- nouncements depend on the driving situation. Navigation management is carried out on tion, for example, starting the guide to the the screen. destination, driving on the motorway or on a While a navigation announcement is playing, roundabout and the settings. its volume can be adjusted. The following » Depending on the country, some functions of the infotainment system will not be availa- 187 Infotainment system

navigation announcements provided will be Zoom in the view (tip: use your index fin- map backward, move your fingers down- played with the newly adjusted volume. ger). wards. ● To increase the view in a certain position, Limitations during navigation double-click on the map. Rotate view (tip: use your index and middle fingers). If the infotainment system cannot receive Zoom out the view (tip: use your index and ● Press on the map with both fingers at the data from GPS satellites, for example, in a middle fingers). same time and keep them pressed. tunnel or in an underground garage, navigation continues using the vehicle's sensors. ● Press on the map with both fingers at the ● To rotate the map view, turn your fingers same time. clockwise anticlockwise. In areas that are not digitised or are only partially digitised on the infotainment memory, Change view (tip: use your index finger). Saved data the infotainment system will still attempt to ● Press twice on the map and keep your fin- The infotainment system saves certain data, provide route guidance. ger pressed on the screen. for example, frequent routes and position In the case of missing or incomplete naviga- ● To zoom out the view of the map, move data, to make the entry of the destination tion data, it may not be possible to deter- your finger upwards. To zoom in the view of more agile and optimise the route guidance. mine the exact position of the vehicle. This the map, move your finger downwards. may mean that navigation is not as precise as Delete saved data Change view (tip: use your index and middle usual. ● Press Settings > Basic function settings > fingers). Roads and streets are subject to constant Delete and then OK ● change (e.g. new roads, road works, roads Press on the map with both fingers at the closed to traffic, changes to street names same time and keep them pressed. WARNING ● and building numbers). If the navigation data To zoom out the view of the map, move Select the settings, enter the destination is obsolete, this may lead to errors or inac- one finger towards the other. To zoom in the and the modifications for navigation only curacies during the route guidance. view of the map, move one finger away from with the vehicle at a standstill. the other. Managing the navigation map Tilt the view (tip: use your index and middle Note To allow an optimal view, you can also man- fingers). ● If a detour is passed during route guid- age the navigation map with additional finger ● Press on the map with both fingers at the ance, navigation may recalculate the route. movements. same time and horizontal to each other, ● The quality of the navigation recommen- Move the map (tip: use your index finger). keep them pressed. dations given by the Infotainment system depends on the navigation data available ● Move the map with your finger. ● To tilt the view of the map forward, move your fingers upwards. To tilt the view of the and any reported traffic congestions. 188 Infotainment operation

 ● Navigation announcements are not emit- Current position Other symbols ted if the sound is muted in the infotain-  Search for destinations.  Entering the detailed destination for an ment system.  Destinations along the route. address.  Final destination  Search for destinations.   Frequent destinations. Navigation functions and symbols Home address  Work address  Last destinations. Navigation  Favourite destinations  Favourite destinations Navigation functions depend on the equip-  Additional window with more options.  Back ment and country. Additional window with route options.  Symbols in the route details Functions Centre the map on the current position.  Current position. ● Entering destination and route calculation   (offline and online*).  Change view: 2D oriented to the north, Destination of the current guidance. ● Indication of two navigation maps at the or 2D oriented to the direction of travel, POI symbols (points of interest) same time (screen and instrument panel*). or 3D to the direction of travel. POIs (points of interest) are shown on the ● Update of online* maps. | Information about the current route guidance. map, provided the navigation has said data. ● Predictive navigation.  Map scale. Click on the desired POI (point of interest) to ● 3D urban maps. start a route guidance ››› page 190 . ● Online* traffic information Symbols in the additional window  Petrol station. ● Dynamic POIs (points of interest) ● To open the additional window, press .  Parking lot. Symbols on the map  Repeat the last navigation announce-  Tourist information offices. ment. The buttons and indications depend on the  Train station.  Volume of navigation announcements. settings and the current driving situation.  Restaurant.  Map lighting in Automatic, Day or Night Symbols for traffic events and points of inter- mode. est (POIs) are displayed on the map, for ex- Traffic information.  ample, petrol stations, train stations or inter- Offer new guidance routes. POIs (points of interest) are shown on the esting stopovers, provided navigation has  360° operating range display (hybrid ve- map, provided the navigation has said data such data ››› page 192 . hicles) ››› page 192. »

189 Infotainment system

Click on a traffic event to open an additional Using obsolete data may lead to errors dur- WARNING window with further details ››› page 192 . ing navigation. Current routes cannot be traced or the route guidances will lead to If you update the navigation data manually while driving, it may cause accidents with  Slow traffic. mistaken destinations. serious injuries. Traffic jam.  Ensure navigation data is updated at all ● Update the navigation data only with the times. vehicle at a standstill.  Accident. Online* updating of navigation data  Broken down vehicle. Note The navigation data of the regions through Automatic update of the navigation data is  Slippery surface (ice or snow). which you travel frequently is automatically subject to the privacy settings. In “Incogni- updated in the background if the Internet Road closed to traffic. to” mode, no update is carried out.  connection is established and the privacy  Slippery road hazard. settings are valid.  Danger. ● With the ignition switched on, the naviga- Start route guidance tion data is updated automatically.  Road works. Depending on the country and equipment, Manual update of navigation data different functions are available to enter des-  Strong wind. Current navigation data for large regions, for tinations.  Reduced visibility. example Western Europe, can be downloa- The different functions for entering destina- ded from www.seat.com and stored on USB tions are found in the navigation main menu. data devices. Navigation through USB data Navigation data devices is not possible. Opening the Navigation main menu ● Download the navigation data to a USB da- ● Press HOME > . The Infotainment system is equipped with a ta device. built-in navigation data memory. Depending Select the destination and start navigation ● Turn on the ignition of the vehicle. on the country, the necessary navigation da- 1. Press . ta may already be pre-installed. ● Connect the USB data device to the infotainment system. Navigation data is auto- 2. Select the desired destination. You can To provide correct route guidance and make matically updated in the background. chose from  Frequent destinations, the most of the functions offered, the info-  Last destinations and  Favourite tainment system should be updated on a The map version is displayed in HOME >  > destinations. regular basis. System information.

190 Infotainment operation

OR: press  and enter the address in To save a destination as a favourite press  Start navigation the input screen. in the split screen when entering the desti- ● Press . nation. OR: detailed address. ● Move the view on the map until the desired 3. Press Start. Select the destination and start navigation position can be selected. The navigation map can be used by means of additional fin- 1. Press  and then .  Frequent destinations ger movements ››› page 188 . 2. Press the desired destination. The destination synopsis uses recorded data ● Press the desired destination on the map. 3. Press Start. to propose possible destinations. ● Press Route. Note Select the destination and start navigation Offroad navigation* 1. Press  and then . Enter the destination as accurately as pos- “Offroad navigation” calculates routes to se- sible. If you enter a destination incorrectly, 2. Select the desired destination. The the route guidance will not be able to start lected destination points using unknown da- route guidance starts automatically. or it will guide you to an incorrect destina- ta. When a destination point is outside the known roads or position data, navigation Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold tion. finds the route to the next point of the the desired destination for a few seconds. known road and completes the path to the next destination point with a direct connec-  Last destinations Start route guidance by selecting from tion. Navigation saves the last destinations to the map make them available for a route guidance. Start navigation The navigation map includes active areas at ● Move the view on the map until the desired Select the destination and start navigation many points that are suitable for entering the position can be selected. The navigation 1. Press  and then . destination. To do this, press the desired po- map can be used by means of additional fin- sition or place on the map. If there is map 2. Press the desired destination. ger movements ››› page 188 . data at this point, you can start a route guid- ● Press on any point on the map without po- 3. Press Start. ance. sition data. Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold Whether it is possible to enter the destina- ● Press Route. the desired destination for a few seconds. tion through the navigation map depends on the state of the data and it is not possible for  Favourite destinations all positions. Save up to 20 destinations as favourites. To start “offroad navigation”, press an empty area without position data. 191 Infotainment system

Start route guidance using contact With an active route guidance, traffic inci- Function descriptions details dents that are on the current route are shown in the route details. Such traffic inci- Route details dents can be avoided page 192 . Start route guidance with the saved address ››› The route details contain information on all data of a contact. Contacts saved without incidents, for example, the starting point, address data cannot be used for route guid- Hazard information stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destina- ance. Hazard information is shown on the navigation, provided the navigation has such data. tion map with symbols in the same way as If you press on an incident, an additional win- Start navigation traffic incidents. In this case, the source of dow opens providing more options. The ● Press . this information is another vehicle that has available options depend on the incident detected the hazard and has uploaded the ● Press on the contact you want. and the current settings. information to the service provider. ● Press Route. The hazards shown are: accident, broken Open and close the route details Note down vehicle and slippery road surface. ● To open, press | or swipe it. If the address details of a contact are obso- ● To close, press or swipe it. lete, the route guidance will nevertheless Traffic flow indication | take you to the registered address. Check The navigation map shows traffic flow ac- that the contact address is updated. cording to current traffic events, highlighting Edit route guidance the road network in colour. To edit route guidance, move the stopovers to the destination in the TripView view. ● Traffic information Orange: Slow traffic. ● Red: Traffic jam. ● Hold the desired destination pressed until The infotainment system receives detailed it is visibly highlighted. traffic information automatically if the Inter- Note ● Move the destination to the desired posi- net connection is established. This informa- Traffic information receipt is subject to the tion. tion is shown with symbols and highlighting privacy settings. In maximum Privacy ● Remove your finger from the screen. The the road network in colour on the map. mode, no traffic information is received. route will recalculate. Tracking or Location level setting is neces- Traffic incidents sary. Avoid traffic incidents Traffic incidents, for example, traffic jams or The details of the route show the current congested traffic, are shown on the naviga- traffic incidents if the navigation has such tion map using symbols.

192 Infotainment operation data. Avoid traffic incidents by editing route Functions in the additional window: ternative routes are available, provided navi- details ››› page 192 . gation has such data. Stopping route Ends the current route guidance. ● Press on a traffic event. guidance You can activate and deactivate the function whenever you want. ● Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.  Close the additional window. Enable and disable learning usage pattern Split screen  Add a destination to favourites. The setting is in the corresponding naviga- When handling navigation functions, an ad- tion menu  > Basic function settings. ditional window with other options may Learn usage pattern open. Possible options depend on the func- When the vehicle is in motion, navigation ● To activate the function, activate Learn us- tion being used. saves routes and destinations used to auto- age pattern. matically generate destination proposals. ● Close the additional screen To disable the function, disable Learn us- Destinations are learned based on the time age pattern. ● Press on an empty area outside the addi- of day and the day of the week. tional window. ● To delete saved data, press Delete usage Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at the pattern. ● OR: press . same time. The proposed routes may be dif- ● OR: press Accept. ferent from the routes of the normal route 360° operating range display guidance. 3 Valid for: plug-in hybrid vehicles Functions in the additional window: If one of the proposed destinations is selec- The 360° operating range display shows the Show on map Show what is selected on the map. ted, the guide to that destination is started. possible range with the current charge level Add stopover Add a stopover to the route guid- The route guidance follows the selected of the high voltage battery. ance. route until the vehicle deviates from it. In that case, the route is recalculated and takes Switch on the 360° operating range display Direct route Starts direct route guidance. you back along the most direct path to the ● Open the additional map window and Delete Delete a stopover from the route initially selected destination. press the symbol . guidance. Important traffic jams are taken into account Avoid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re- in the route guidance, and are avoided if al- calculate.

193 Infotainment system

Telephone interface

Introduction

Fig. 130 Schematic representation: Phone view

You can use the telephone interface to con- Note Telephone interface equipment and nect your mobile to the infotainment system symbols and operate phone functions through it. The ● As a general rule, pairing a device (for example, a mobile phone device) is only nec- sound is played through the vehicle's speak- essary once. You can restore the device Equipment features ers. connection via Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi with ● Hands-free function. You can connect up to two mobile phone the infotainment system whenever you ● Use up to two phones at the same time. devices simultaneously to the infotainment want without having to pair the device system. again. ● Phone book with a maximum of 5,000 ● contacts. High speeds, poor weather or road condi- The availability of some telephone functions will depend on the mobile phone con- ● Text message functions via Bluetooth®*: tions and a noisy ambience (even outside of nected to the infotainment system. reading Text message, writing Text message the vehicle), as well as the quality of recep- (including templates), Text message play- tion can all affect the quality of a telephone back, message history. conversation in the vehicle.

194 Infotainment operation

● E-mail functions via Bluetooth®*: reading  Get help in case of breakdown. Places with special regulations E-mail, writing E-mail.  Obtain information on the CUPRA ● Connection to wireless charging option. brand and selected additional services Switch off the mobile telephone and the telephone interface in places with a risk of ex- ● Connection to the microphone mounted related to traffic and your travel. plosion. These places are not always clearly on the vehicle.  Voice mail. marked. They include, for example:

Symbols in the main menu Call list symbols ● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks  Contacts. ● To open the call lists, press . ● The lower decks of boats and ferries.  List of incoming and outgoing calls. ●  Incoming call. In the proximity of vehicles that run on liq- Enter telephone number. uefied gas (such as propane or butane).   Outgoing call. ● places where the air is laden with chemi-   Text messages (SMS and emails).* Missed call. cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal  Telephone interface settings.  Telephone number (company). powder.  Telephone number (private). ● All other places where the vehicle engine Symbols for calls  Mobile telephone number (company). or telephone must be switched off. The symbols may be different depending on the infotainment system.  Mobile telephone number (private). WARNING  Fax (private). Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a  Start a call or bringing it to the fore- risk of explosion! ground.  Fax.  End or reject a call. Symbols for text messages* Note  Open contact list. The symbols may be different depending on In areas where special regulations apply or  Enter telephone number. the infotainment system. the use of mobile phones is forbidden, it must be switched off at all times. The radia-  Mute the sound of the hands-free ● To open the text messages, press . tion produced by the mobile phone when  Hold call. switched on may interfere with sensitive  Activate voice control input  Continue call. technical and medical equipment, possibly ››› page 178. resulting in malfunction or damage to the  Start conference call.  Templates for text messages. equipment.  Pass call to private mode  Make an emergency call.

195 Infotainment system

Pair, connect and manage ● Optional: confirm the data transfer mes- Connect a mobile phone device sage on the mobile phone device. Requirement: the mobile phone device is Requirement for pairing: paired with the infotainment system. Active and passive connection ● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile ● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone device. To use the functions of the telephone inter- phone device. face, there must be at least one mobile ● Bluetooth® is activated on the infotain- phone device connected to the infotain- Establish an active connection ment system. ment system. If there are several mobile ● Depending on the mobile device, it will be phone devices connected to the infotain- Requirement: several mobile phone devices necessary to have the Bluetooth® menu ment system, you can switch between active are connected to the infotainment system at open or activate the Visibility option so that and passive connections. To use the tele- the same time. the device is visible from the infotainment phone interface with the desired mobile ● Select the desired mobile phone device system. phone device, establish the active connec- from the drop-down menu. All other mobile tion with the infotainment system. phone devices are automatically in the pas- Pair a mobile phone device suitable for tel- sive connection. ephony with the infotainment system to use Difference between connection types the telephone interface functions. On the The mobile phone device is paired and User profiles first connection, the mobile phone device is connected. The functions of the tele- Primary For each of the paired mobile phone devices paired with the infotainment system. Doing phone interface are performed with the so saves a user profile ››› page 196 . data of said mobile phone device. an individual user profile is automatically cre- ated. In the user profile, data from the mo- The pairing can take a few minutes. The The mobile phone device is paired and bile phone device is stored, for example, functions available depend on the mobile connected. Calls can be managed but Secondary contact details or settings. A maximum of phone device used and its operating system. the phone book, messages or other functions will not be active. four user profiles can be saved in the infotainment system at the same time. Pair a mobile phone device Paired mobile phone devices are stored in ● Open the list of available Bluetooth® devi- the infotainment system, even if they are not WARNING ces on the mobile phone device and select currently connected. If you perform the pairing while driving, it the name of the infotainment system. could cause an accident or injury. ● Please note and, if necessary, confirm the ● Perform pairing only with the vehicle at a messages that appear on the mobile phone standstill. device and on the infotainment system. If the pairing was successful, the phone data is saved in the user profile. 196 Infotainment operation

Note The Comfort phone interface can be equip- ● OR: press a favourite in the telephone in- ped with the wireless charging function terface main menu to start the call. ● In the pairing of some mobile phone de- ››› page 198. vices, a PIN number is shown on the screen  Calls of the mobile phone device. Enter that In order to use the functions of the wireless number in the infotainment system to com- charging function, you have to place a suita- The telephone interface shows the call list of plete the pairing. ble mobile phone device correctly in the the mobile telephone device. Start a call ● While the infotainment system is in the storage compartment. The mobile phone from the call list. Known mobile phones menu, the wireless device will then connect to the vehicle an- ● Press  > All and press a number on the charging function is disabled. When you tenna. This improves the reception and list to start the call. exit this menu, the wireless charging func- sound quality of calls. tion is activated again. ● OR: press  and filter the call list entries (for example, missed calls or dialled num- To call bers). In filtered list, press a number to start Basic and Comfort Telephony the call. Open the telephone interface  Dial Depending on the equipment, two types of ● Press HOME > . telephone interface can be used: Manually enter a phone number to start a call. While entering the phone number, con- ● Make a call Basic telephone interface. tacts that match that number are shown on Select a phone number to start a call. Differ- ● Comfort telephone interface. the infotainment screen. ent functions are available for selecting a phone number: Basic telephone interface ● Press  and enter the phone number. ● Press  to start the call The Basic telephone interface uses the Blue-  Contacts tooth® HFP profile for transmission. This in- The last call is dialled by pressing and holding terface allows the use of telephone functions If a contact has several registered phone numbers you have to select one. the  button on the multifunction steering through the infotainment system and play- wheel. back through the vehicle's speakers. ● Press  and press a number on the list to start the call. Comfort telephone interface ● OR: press  and enter the contact name in Send messages* Like the Basic telephone interface, the Com- the input field to search for it. Press on the fort telephone interface also uses the Blue- contact to start the call. Depending on the mobile phone device and tooth® HFP profile. the infotainment system used, you can send »

197 Infotainment system

and receive SMS and e-mails through the tel- If conference calls are supported, the phone Note ephone interface. book can be accessed during a call. If there is a saved image for a contact, it can be dis- Favourites are not updated automatically. If you change a contact's phone number, you Send an SMS played in the list next to the entry. have to reassign the speed dial button. ● Press  > Text message > Enter new message and enter the message on the screen. Favourites A speed dial button can be assigned to a ● Enter the contact you want in the search Connectivity Box* bar. phone book favourite up to a maximum of six. If there is a registered photo saved to the ● To send the message press OK. contact, it is shown on the speed dial button.

Send an e-mail All speed dial buttons have to be manually edited and will be assigned to a user profile. ● Press  > E-mail > Enter new message and enter the message on the screen. Assign the speed dial button ● Enter the contact you want in the search ● In the Favourites menu, press the + but- bar. ton, then open the phone book to select a ● To send the message press OK. contact as a favourite. If the contact has several phone numbers, press on the number in the list. Fig. 131 In the centre console: pad for the mobile Phone book, favourites and speed dial phone connection. buttons Edit the speed dial button The Connectivity Box includes different ● To edit or delete a favourite contact press functions that will help to use your mobile In the first connection of a telephone with on the icon  in the Favourites menu device. These are: the infotainment system, the phone book is screen. You can delete one or more favour- saved in the infotainment system. It may be ites. ● Wireless Charger1). necessary to confirm the data transmission ● Signal amplifier / (Mobile Signal Amplifier) on the mobile phone. Call a favourite Each time the phone is reconnected, the ● Press the assigned speed dial button. phone book is updated.

1) It only includes the wireless charge functionality. 198 Infotainment operation

● (Wireless Charger) Place your mobile device in the middle of ● No improvement in reception can be The Wireless Charger allows mobile devices the pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 131 guaranteed if there is more than one mo- with Qi1) technology to be charged without a ››› . bile phone on the pad. cable. Make sure there are no objects between the ● You are advised to keep the engine running to guarantee proper wireless charging. To charge your mobile phone wirelessly: pad and the mobile phone. ● When a telephone with Qi technology is Your mobile phone will automatically be ● Place your mobile device in the middle of connected by USB, it will be charged by the the pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 131 ready to make use of the external aerial. means specified by the manufacturer. ››› . WARNING Make sure there are no objects between the ● The mobile phone may heat up due to pad and the mobile phone. the wireless charging. Think about this be- The mobile phone will start charging auto- fore you pick it up, and take care when re- matically. For further information about moving it. whether your mobile device supports Qi ● There must be no metallic or other ob- technology, check your phone's user manual jects between the mobile phone and the or visit the CUPRA website. housing, to prevent the functionality of the Connectivity Box from being affected. Signal amplifier / (Mobile Signal Amplifier) It allows you to reduce radiation in the vehi- Note cle and have better reception. ● Your mobile device must support the Qi inductive charging interface standard for For safety reasons, it is recommended that proper operation. you pair the system and the mobile using Bluetooth® and place it on the Connectivity ● The charging time and the temperature Box pad, for the best reception without hav- vary in accordance with the device used. ing to handle the mobile phone. ● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W. ● To establish a connection with the vehicle's Qi technology does not allow you to charge more than one mobile device simul- external aerial: taneously.

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile phone wirelessly. 199 Infotainment system

Multimedia Depending on the equipment and the country, the vehicle may also have USB connections exclusively for charging or as a power USB port socket. These USB ports are located at the rear of the console, between the front seats ››› Fig. 133.

Fig. 132 Centre console: USB port.

Fig. 133 Rear part of the centre console: USB connectors with power outlet function.

The USB port can be found in the storage compartment area of the front centre console ››› Fig. 132 .

200 Start and driving

the version, on the multi-function steering Automatic deactivation of the ignition on Driving wheel. vehicles with the Start-Stop system Opening the driver's door when exiting the The ignition is switched off automatically Start and driving vehicle activates the electronic lock on the when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- steering column if the ignition is disabled. matic engine shutdown is active, if:

Starting and stopping the en- ● The driver's seat belt is not fastened, Switching the ignition on/off ● the driver does not step on any pedal, gine If you only want to switch on the ignition (without starting the engine), briefly press ● the driver door is opened. Ignition and start button the start button once without pressing the After automatically turning off the ignition, if brake pedal or the clutch pedal . ››› the dipped beam  is on, the side light re- The    push-button text flashes mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is like a heartbeat when the system is ready for enough charge in the battery). If the driver the ignition to be turned on or off1). locks the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the side light goes out. Automatic ignition disconnection WARNING When the vehicle detects that there is no driver once the engine has stopped, after a When switching on the ignition, do not certain time the ignition is switched off auto- press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise matically. If at that time the dipped beam the engine could start immediately. Fig. 134 Starter button headlights are on, the side lights will stay on for approx. 30 minutes. The side lights can WARNING The engine can be started with a start button be turned off by blocking the vehicle If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- (Press & Drive). For this there must be a valid page 93, or manually page 110 . ››› ››› out due care, this may cause accidents and key inside the passenger compartment. serious injury. The    button is found at the bot- ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle tom of the centre console or, depending on when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or unauthorised person could lock the vehicle, »

1) Valid for versions with the start button on the centre console. 201 Driving

start the engine or connect the ignition and valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to WARNING operate any of the electrical equipment. start. After starting the engine, the lighting of Never use cold start sprays, they could ex- the    button remains fixed indi- plode or cause the engine to run at high cating that the engine is running1). Note revs. Doing this risks injury. ● Once the engine starts, release the start- ● Before leaving the vehicle, always discon- up button. nect the ignition and, if appropriate, take CAUTION into account the instructions on the screen ● If the engine does not start, stop and wait ● The starter motor or the engine may be of the dash panel. for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary, perform an emergency start ››› page 203 . damaged if you try to restart the engine im- ● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time mediately after switching it off. with the engine off and the ignition on, the ● When the engine is cold, you should vehicle battery might be discharged and it WARNING avoid high engine speeds, driving at full might not be possible to start the engine. Do not keep the engine running in confined throttle and over-loading the engine, as ● If during the STOP phase you press the spaces, as there is a risk of poisoning. this could cause engine damage.    button, the ignition is switch- ● The exhaust gases contain carbon mon- ed off and the push-button flashes1). oxide, an odourless and colourless poison- For the sake of the environment ● If the indication is displayed on the in- ous gas that can cause loss of conscious- strument panel display “Start-Stop system ness and death. Do not warm-up the engine by running the deactivated: Start the engine manually”; engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off 1) immediately, driving gently. This helps the the    button will flash . WARNING engine reach operating temperature faster Do not get out of the vehicle with the en- and reduces emissions. gine running, especially if a gear is engag- Starting the engine ed. The vehicle could then suddenly move Note or something strange could happen that ● Vehicles with automatic transmission: put would cause damage, fire or serious injury. ● Electrical components with a high power the selector lever in P or N, press the brake consumption are switched off temporarily pedal and keep it pressed in this position un- when the engine starts. til the engine starts. ● When starting with a cold engine, noise ● Press the starter button ››› Fig. 134 ; do not levels may briefly increase. This is quite press the accelerator. There needs to be a normal, and no cause for concern.

1) Valid for versions with the start button on the centre console. 202 Start and driving

Turning off the engine engine or use power-operated equipment In the key there is a chip that automatically (e.g. the electric windows), which could deactivates the electronic immobiliser. ● Bring the vehicle to a full stop . ››› cause injuries. The electronic immobiliser is automatically ● Switch on the parking lock by pressing but- activated when the key is outside the vehicle. ton P. CAUTION If the following message is shown on the in- ● Apply the electronic parking brake. ● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start- strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle ● Briefly press the start-up button Stop system* switches off the engine, the cannot be started. ››› Fig. 134. ignition remains switched on. Make sure that the ignition is switched off before leav- The engine can only be started using a genuine CUPRA key with its correct code. WARNING ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could discharge. Never switch off the engine while the vehi- Note ● If the engine has been driven at high cle is moving. This could cause loss of con- speed for a prolonged period of time, it A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur- trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in- may overheat when switched off. To avoid ed if genuine CUPRA keys are used. jury. damage, allow the engine to run for ap- ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not proximately two minutes in neutral before work when the ignition is switched off. switching it off. Emergency starting function ● The brake servo does not work with the engine off. Therefore, you need to press Note the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. After the engine is switched off the radiator ● Power steering does not work when the fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if engine is not running. You need more the ignition is switched off. It is also possi- strength to steer when the engine is switch- ble that the fan turns itself on once more if ed off. the coolant temperature increases due to ● If the ignition is switched off, the steering the heat accumulated in the engine com- column could be locked, making it impossi- partment or due to its prolonged exposure ble to control the vehicle. to solar radiation.

WARNING Always take the key with you when you Electronic immobilizer leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor- Fig. 135 In the centre console: emergency start. » tant if there are children in the vehicle, as The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- they might otherwise be able to start the thorised persons from driving the vehicle. 203 Driving

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, Engage position P; the vehicle can When entering the vehicle, the start button an emergency start-up will be required. The move; doors can only close in posi- ››› Fig. 134 flashes to draw attention to it. relevant message will appear in the dash tion P. When the ignition is on/off, the engine start panel display. This may happen when, for ex- ● For safety reasons, this driver message ap- button flashes. With the ignition is switched ample, the vehicle key battery is very low: pears and an audible warning sounds if the off, the start button goes off after a few sec- selector lever of the automatic gearbox is ● Immediately after pushing the start button, onds. not in position P after you switch off the igni- place the key in the drink holder of the cen- tion. Move the selector lever to the P posi- With the engine running, the start button tre console Fig. 135 , as close as possible ››› tion, otherwise the vehicle could move. light stays on, indicating that the engine is to the Kessy logo. running. The time elapsed between the mo- ● The ignition connects and the engine Gear change: selector lever in the ment the user starts the engine with the start starts automatically. drive position! button and the lighting changes from flash- ● This driver message is displayed when the ing to fixed will depend on specific engine selector lever is not in the position P when size characteristics. When the start button is Instructions for the driver on the in- the driver door is opened. Additionally, a used to stop the engine, the button starts flashing again. strument panel display buzzing sound is emitted. Put the selector lever in position P, otherwise the vehicle In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the could roll away. Press the brake “My Beat” function also offers additional information: ● This message appears on vehicles with an Ignition is switched on automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start ● This driver message is displayed and a buz- ● When the engine stops during the Stop the engine without having the brake pedal zer is sounded when the driver door is phase, the light of the start button stays on, pressed. opened with the ignition switched on. as the Start-Stop system remains active even though the engine is off. Select N or P ● ● This message appears if you try to start or When the engine cannot be started again stop the engine when the selector lever of “My Beat” function* with the Start-Stop system, ››› page 205 , and needs to be started manually, the start but- the automatic gearbox is not in position P or 3 Valid for: vehicles with the engine start button ton flashes to indicate this situation. N. The engine can only be started and stop- on the centre console. ped in those positions. For vehicles with a convenience key there is the “My Beat” function. This feature provides an additional indication of the vehicle ignition system.

204 Start and driving

Start-Stop system Description and operation proximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on the vehicle's gearbox).2) The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel Control lamps ● When you take your foot off the brake and reduce CO2 emissions. pedal the engine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off. With the Auto  It lights up In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automatically switch off when the vehicle stops or is Hold system, the engine will not start if you The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en- stopping. The ignition remains switched on. remove your foot from the brake pedal. The gine shutdown is active. The engine automatically switches back on car starts when you press the accelerator when required. pedal. . It lights up    In this scenario, the light of the Basic requirements for the Start-Stop 1) The Start-Stop system is not available or has been dis- button stays lit . mode connected. When the ignition is switched on, the Start- ● The driver door must be closed. Stop function is automatically activated. Instructions for the driver on the instru- ● The driver's seat belt must be fastened. ment panel display More information on the Start-Stop system ● The bonnet must be closed. can be found in the Infotainment system: ● Start-Stop system deactivated. Start press the function button  >  Vehicle in- The engine has reached operating tem- the engine manually fo > Vehicle status ››› page 85 . perature. ● This indication for the driver shows that ● The reverse gear must not be engaged. the Start-Stop system cannot start the en- Stopping and starting the engine ● The vehicle must not be on a very steep gine again. ● Brake until it is stopped, and keep your foot slope. on the brake pedal or activate the Auto Hold Start-Stop system: Fault! Function system so that the vehicle remains braked. The engine does not turn off for various not available The engine will switch off. The warning lamp reasons ● There is a fault in the Start-Stop system.  will appear in the display. The engine can Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri- be stopped before stopping completely (ap- fault repaired. fies whether certain conditions are met. The »

1) Valid for versions with the start button on the centre console. 2) In the mHEV version (semi-hybrid), above 20 km/h. 205 Driving

engine does not switch off, in the following . is displayed on the instrument cluster dis- lever in P, the engine will also remain switch- situations for example: play unit; it is also displayed in the driver in- ed off when you take your foot off the brake formation system*, . pedal. In order to start the engine up again ● The engine has not yet reached the re- the accelerator must be pressed, or another quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode. The engine starts by itself gear engaged or the brake released. ● The temperature selected on the climate When stopped, the normal system mode If the selector lever is placed in R while stop- control has not been reached. may be interrupted in the following situa- ped, the engine will start up again. ● The interior temperature is very high/low. tions. The engine restarts by itself without in- Change from D to P to prevent the engine ● volvement from the driver. Defrost function button activated from accidentally starting when passing page 143. ››› ● The interior temperature differs from the through R. ● The parking aid* is switched on. temperature selected on the climate control. Additional information about vehicles with ● The battery is very low. ● Defrost function button activated Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ● The steering wheel is overly turned or is ››› page 143. being turned. ● The brake has been pressed several times In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will start up again in certain operating conditions ● If there is a danger of misting. consecutively. if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle ● ● After engaging reverse gear. The battery is too low. ahead drives off again. ● In case of a very steep gradient. ● High power consumption. WARNING ● In a traffic jam after stopping for the fifth ● The vehicle rolls forward or backward with ● time, the engine will not stop any more. the engine off. Never switch the engine off until the vehicle is stationary. The operation of the ● With ESC disabled. ● ESC deactivated. brake and steering will not be fully guaran- ● After emergency braking or loss of adhe- ● - The accelerator pedal is ignored. teed. More force will be needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. You could suffer sion. ● The steering wheel is slightly turned. an accident and even serious injuries. ● With a trailer attached. ● When the air conditioning is activated. ● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- ● In a traffic jam after stopping for the fifth Stop system is switched off when working in time, the vehicle will not stop any more. Additional information related to the au- the engine compartment ››› page 207 . ● When the battery charge level is low. tomatic gearbox ● While the particle filter is regenerating. The engine stops when the selector lever is in the positions P, D, N and S in addition to when in Tiptronic mode. With the selector

206 Start and driving

CAUTION Manually connecting and disconnect- DSG automatic transmission The Start-Stop system must always be ing the Start-Stop system switched off when driving through flooded Introduction areas ››› page 220 . Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni- Note cally controlled manual gearbox. Torque between the engine and the gearbox is trans- ● You can control whether the engine mitted via two independent clutches. They should switch off or not by reducing or in- replace the torque converter found on con- creasing the brake force applied. While the ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for vehicle remains stopped, the engine will smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the not stop if the brake pedal is slightly press- vehicle. ed, in traffic jams with frequent stopping and starting for example. As soon as strong The Tiptronic system allows the driver to pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the change gears manually ››› page 209, Chang- engine will stop. ing gear in Tiptronic mode. ● When stopped, the brake pedal must be kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle Fig. 136 On the Infotainment system screen.:  does not move. Start-Stop system connected. View in the main Control lamps menu.  View with the Infotainment system off. ● If the lever is placed in position D, N or S after engaging reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 If you do not want to use the system, you can  It lights up green mph) in a forwards direction must be disconnect it manually through the Infotain- reached for the system to be in a condition The brake is not pressed. to stop the engine. ment system: To select a gear range, press the brake pedal. ● Select  > Driver assistance.  Flashes green When the symbol  appears orange ››› Fig. 136 the system is activated and will The selector lever locking button is not engaged. The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En- stop and start. When the symbol  appears gage the selector lever lock. in white the system is disconnected.

Note The system switches on every time the engine is turned off voluntarily. 207 Driving

Selector lever positions To engage reverse gear R, you must press the Selector lever lock brake pedal simultaneously. The reverse In N, the lever lock prevents a gear range lights switch on when the reverse gear R is from being engaged, and prevents the vehi- selected and the ignition is on. cle from moving off accidentally.

 – Neutral Press and hold the brake pedal with your left foot with the engine running. In this position, the gear is in neutral. As a reminder to the driver, when the lever is Press the brake pedal to move the lever from in position N the following indication will be N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at shown on the screen: speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) ››› . When stationary, apply footbrake  – Permanent forward drive position while selecting a gear. Fig. 137 In the centre console: selector lever. The D/S position enables the gears to be The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly The selector lever position is shown when operated in normal mode (D) or sport mode through position N (e.g. when shifting from R the corresponding sign lights up. The engag- (S). To select Sport mode S, move the lever to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to ed gear is also displayed on the screen in backwards. Pushing the lever again will select “rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” if manual shift positions M, D, S and E (when normal mode D. The selected driving mode it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en- the ECO engine setting is selected in the In- is displayed on the instrument panel screen. gages automatically if the brake pedal is not dividual profile page 215 ). pressed and the lever is in position N for ››› In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the more than about one second at a speed of best gear ratio. This depends on the engine – Parking lock less than 5 km/h (3 mph).  load, the road speed and the dynamic gear When the P button is pressed, the drive control programme (DCP). WARNING wheels are locked. Only press P when the ve- Sport mode (S) should be selected for a hicle is stationary ››› . ● Take care not to press the accelerator sporty driving style. This setting makes use of pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve- To press the P button you must press the the engine's maximum power output. When hicle could start moving immediately (in brake pedal simultaneously. accelerating the gear shifts will be noticea- some cases even if the parking brake is en- ble. gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.  – Reverse gear Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun- ● Never move the lever to R position when Reverse gear must be engaged only when tain roads) it can be advantageous to switch driving. Failure to follow this instruction the vehicle is stationary and the engine is tiptronic mode ››› page 209 , to adapt the could result in an accident or failure. idling ››› . gears to suit the road conditions.

208 Start and driving

● With lever in any position (except P), the – With a 6-speed gearbox: press the Tiptronic gives the driver the option to foot brake must be pushed down whenever brake pedal and release it again. change gears manually. the engine is running. This is because an – With a 7-speed gearbox: press the When you change to the Tiptronic pro- automatic gearbox still transmits power brake pedal. Move the lever to posi- gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently even at idling speed. tion N and subsequently engage a gear. selected gear. This is possible as long as the ● While you are selecting a gear and the ve- ● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicle system is not changing gear automatically hicle is stopped with the engine running, do does not move forwards or back. Proceed due to a traffic situation. not accelerate. Failure to follow this in- to the next mode: struction could result in an accident. – When the vehicle does not move in the Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel ● As a driver you should never leave your required direction, the system may not paddles vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is have the gear range correctly engaged. The gear shift paddles can be used when the engaged. Switch on the electronic parking Press the brake pedal and engage the selector lever is in the position D/S. brake and select the parking lock (P). gear range again. – If the vehicle still does not move in the ● Press the gearshift paddle + to select a Note required direction, there is a system higher gear ››› Fig. 138 . ● If the lever is moved accidentally to N malfunction. Seek specialist assistance ● Press the gearshift paddle – to select a when driving, release the accelerator and and have the system checked. lower gear. let the engine speed drop to idling before ● To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right- selecting gear range D or S again. hand gear shirt paddle towards the steering ● Should the power supply is interrupted Changing gear in Tiptronic mode wheel for approximately 1 second. with the P parking block active, it will not be possible to move the lever. If this should To keep Tiptronic mode permanently switch- happen the manual release can be used. In ed on, move the selector lever to the S posi- this case, you should seek professional as- tion. If the selector lever is in position D and sistance. the gear shift paddles are not operated for some time, the Tiptronic mode will automat- Note ically be switched off. ● If the lever lock does not engage, there is CAUTION a fault. The transmission is interrupted to prevent the vehicle from accidentally mov- ● When accelerating, if a higher gear is not ing. Follow the procedure below in order for selected, it will automatically change short- the lever lock to engage again: Fig. 138 Steering wheel: automatic transmission ly before reaching the maximum permitted levers RPM. » 209 Driving

● Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys- Stopping on a downhill Parking lock manual release mechanism tem will not change until it detects that the Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre- If, in the event of a power failure (e.g. the 12- engine will not reach its maximum RPM. vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary, volt vehicle battery is drained), the vehicle apply the electronic parking brake ››› . must be towed and the parking lock can be released manually. In this case, you should Do not accelerate while a range of gears is seek professional assistance. Driving with an automatic gearbox engaged to prevent the car from rolling downhill ››› . The gearbox changes gear ratios automati- Kick-down cally as the vehicle moves. Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func- The kick-down system provides maximum The engine can only be started with the lever tion acceleration when the gear selector lever is in the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic in the N position and the P button must be lit ● Once you have engaged a gear, take your mode. up (the parking lock remains active). foot off the brake pedal and gently press the accelerator. When the accelerator pedal is pressed right Driving down hills down, the automatic gearbox will shift down Under certain circumstances it may be ad- Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold to a lower gear, depending on road speed vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se- function and engine speed. This takes advantage of the maximum acceleration of the vehicle lect the gear manually according to driving ● Pull on the electronic parking brake but- . conditions ››› . ton. ››› ● Once you have engaged a gear, gently The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed Stop/Park press the accelerator and pull on the elec- until the engine reaches maximum rpm. To park on flat ground, just press the P but- tronic parking brake button. ton ››› Fig. 137 . On slopes the parking brake WARNING should first be applied and then press the P Back-up programme Observe the safety warnings ››› in Selec- button. If all the positions of the lever are shown over tor lever positions on page 208. If the driver door is opened and the P button a light background on the instrument panel ● Never allow the brake to rub and do not has not been activated, the vehicle could display, there is a system fault and the auto- use the brake pedal too often or for long move. The following warning is displayed on matic gearbox will operate in with the back- periods, as the brakes can overheat. This the instrument panel:  Gear change: up programme. It is still possible to drive the reduces the braking power, increases the selector lever in the drive posi- vehicle, however, at low speeds and within a braking distance or even causes a brake system fault. tion!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound. selected range of gears. Driving in reverse gear may not be possible.

210 Start and driving

● If you have to stop on a hill, keep the ve- Launch-control program* ● Only use the Launch control programme hicle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal when road and traffic conditions permit, or parking brake. The Launch-control programme enables and make sure your manner of driving and maximum acceleration from a standstill. accelerating the vehicle does not incon- venience or endanger other road users. WARNING Condition: the engine must have reached operating temperature and the steering ● Make sure that the ESC remains switched Please note that if the road surface is slip- wheel must not be turned. on. Please note that when the TCS and ESC pery or wet, the kick-down feature could are deactivated, the wheels may start to cause the driving wheels to spin, which The engine speed for Launch-control is dif- spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of could result in skidding. ferent on petrol and diesel engines. accident! To use the Launch-control you must discon- ● After moving off, you should activate the CAUTION nect the traction control (TCS) or activate TCS or deactivate the ESC “sport” mode ● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do the ESC Sport or ESC OFF mode, using the again using the Infotainment system: func-  not attempt to stop it from rolling by de- Infotainment system menu: press the function button > Driver assistance. pressing the accelerator when a gear has tion button  > Driver assistance > ESC been selected. This could cause overheat- menu. The warning lamp  will remain on. Note ing and damage the automatic gearbox. ● After using the Launch control pro- ● If you allow the vehicle to roll with the ● Press the brake pedal with your left foot and hold it down for at least one second. gramme, the temperature in the gearbox lever in position N and the engine off, the may have increased considerably. In this automatic gearbox will be damaged by lack ● Turn the selector lever to the S or Tiptronic case, the programme could be disabled for of lubrication. position, or else select the sport driving several minutes. The programme can be ● In certain driving situations or traffic con- mode from the Drive Profile* ››› page 215 . used again after the cooling phase. ditions, the gears could overheat and be ● With your right foot, press the accelerator ● Accelerating with the launch control pro-  damaged! If the warning lamp lights up, down to the full throttle or kick-down posi- gramme places a heavy load on all parts of stop the vehicle as soon as you can and wait tion. The engine speed will stabilise at about the vehicle. This can result in increased for the gearbox to cool page 213 . ››› 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about wear and tear. ● If the gearbox operates with the backup 2,000 rpm (diesel engine). programme, take the vehicle to a special- ● Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The ised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay. vehicle starts with maximum acceleration. Downhill assistant*

WARNING Downhill speed control is activated when the lever is in the D/S position and the brake is » ● Always adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. 211 Driving

applied. An appropriate lower gear is engag- Hill Hold Control (HHC) Stopping inertia mode ed. ● Press the brake or the accelerator pedal. When driving up a slope or using Offroad The assistant attempts to maintain the speed with the lever in position D/S, stopping the To take advantage of the engine's inertia at which the vehicle was travelling when the vehicle switches on the hill hold control. mode, simply remove your foot from the ac- brake was applied, within logical limits. It may celerator. be necessary to correct the speed by press- When the brake pedal is released, the assis- ing the brake. tant keeps the vehicle’s brakes applied for a Applying both the inertia mode (= pro- few seconds to give the driver time to press longed section with less energy) and inertia The assistant can only change down as far as the accelerator pedal and continue driving. disconnection (= shorter section without 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel slopes you may have to switch to tiptronic consumption and emission balance. mode and thus manually change down to 2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of engine Inertia mode With Drive Profile ››› page 215 , the inertia braking and take the load off the brake sys- mode can be activated in the Comfort or In- tem. The inertia mode allows you to travel certain dividual profiles. If the engine is set to Eco in distances without using the accelerator, the Individual profile, it activates when the Downhill speed control is deactivated as which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in- operating conditions are met, regardless of soon as the road levels out again or you press ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”. how smoothly you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. the accelerator. On vehicles with cruise control system* Activation of the inertia mode ››› page 225, downhill speed control is acti- Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less WARNING vated when you set a cruising speed. than 12% and speeds between 20 and 130 ● If the inertia mode has been switched on, km / h (12 and 80 mph). take into account, when approaching an WARNING obstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler- ● Gently take your foot off the accelerator. The downhill speed control cannot defy the ate in the usual manner: risk of accident! laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be The indication will be shown on the instru- ● When using inertia mode while travelling maintained constant in all situations. Al- ment panel , the engaged gear and cur- down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: ways be prepared to use the brakes! rent consumption will disappear and the risk of accident! word Inertia will appear. ● If other users drive your vehicle, warn them about inertia mode. The gears will automatically disengage and the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

212 Start and driving

Note Faults in the gearbox  Gearbox: press the brake and en-  gage a gear again. ● The operation of the inertia mode in Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle ● If the warning was caused by the tempera- combination with hybrid engines (MHEV and place the lever in the position and PHEV) can cause the combustion en- P. ture of the gearbox, this driver message will be displayed when the gearbox has cooled gine to switch off. ● There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the ve- again. ● The inertia mode will be automatically hicle in a safe place and do not continue disconnected on gradients steeper than driving. Seek specialist assistance. 15%.  Gearbox: System fault! You may Gear-change recommendation continue driving. ● Indications on the instrument panel Have the fault corrected by a specialised Selecting the optimal gear workshop without delay. display Depending on the equipment on the instru-  Gearbox: System fault! You can ment panel screen, a recommendation is Clutch continue driving with restrictions. shown with the gear that should be engaged  Clutch overheating! Please stop! Reverse gear disabled to optimise consumption. ● The clutch has overheated and could be ● Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to and have the fault repaired. The lever must be in Tiptronic mode cool with the engine at idling speed and the ››› page 209.  Gearbox: System fault! You can selector lever in position P. When the warn- No recommendation will appear if the opti- continue driving in D until switching lamp and the driver message switch off, mal gear is engaged. The current gear will be ing off the engine have the fault corrected by a specialised displayed. workshop without delay. If they do not turn ● Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek spe- off, do not continue driving. Seek specialist cialist assistance. Display Meaning assistance.  Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your  Optimum gear. driving accordingly ● Continue driving at moderate speeds.    Changing to a higher gear is recommended. When the warning lamp switches off, you can continue driving in a normal manner.    Changing to a lower gear is recommended. »

213 Driving

Information regarding the “cleanliness” of Hill Descent Control (HDC) mum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of the particulate filter 30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, the driver may increase or decrease the speed When the exhaust system detects that the Control lamps particulate filter is close to saturation, this within the limit by pressing the accelerator or system’s self-cleaning function recommends the brake. At this point the function is inter- It lights up white the optimal gear for that function  rupted and, if necessary, it is then reactivated. ››› page 289. Hill Descent Control is active. Even so, it is imperative that the surface WARNING  It lights up grey guarantees sufficient adhesion. For this rea- The gear change recommendation is an son, the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is switch- auxiliary function and in no case should be function when, for example, descending a ed on, but is not adjusting. a substitute for careful driving. slope with a frozen or slippery surface. ● Responsibility for selecting the correct Some control and warning lamps will light up Hill Descent Control is available when the gear, depending on the circumstances, briefly when the ignition is switched on to dash panel display shows the message . rests solely with the driver. check certain functions. They will switch off Hill Descent Control automatically inter- after a few seconds. venes if the following conditions are met: For the sake of the environment WARNING ● Selecting the correct gear can help to save The vehicle engine is running. fuel. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- ● The Offroad driving profile has been se- trol and warning lamps on page 81. lected ››› page 215 . Driving at a speed below Note 30 km/h (18 mph) (the message  is shown on the instrument panel). The indication of the recommended gear ● turns off when the lever is taken out of the Description and operation The slope of the descent is at least 10% Tiptronic position. when driving forward and 9% when driving in Hill Descent Control limits the speed on reverse. steep descents by automatically braking all ● The brake and the accelerator are not four wheels, both when moving forward and pressed. in reverse. As the anti-lock brake system remains active, it prevents the wheels from Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press- locking. ing the brake and the accelerator or if the slope is below 5%. The function can be After starting the descent of a slope below 30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a mini- 214 Start and driving switched off manually in the infotainment Progressive steering  It flashes yellow  system using the > HDC function button. Depending on the vehicle’s features, it may The steering column is jammed. or may not incorporate a progressive steer- WARNING When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc- ing system. tions. Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an ac- In city traffic you do not need to turn so cident could occur and cause injury. OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock. much on parking, manoeuvring or in very Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. Consider the ● Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliary tight turns. messages shown on the instrument panel display. system that in some situations may not suf- Do not continue driving if the steering column re- ficiently brake the vehicle when going On the road or on the motorway, progressive mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek spe- down a slope. steering transmits, for example, in bends, a cialist assistance. ● The speed of the vehicle may increase sportier, more direct and noticeably more despite the intervention of Hill Descent dynamic driving sensation. The control lamp should light up for a few Control. seconds when the ignition is switched on. It should go out once the engine is started. Control lamp WARNING Steering  It lights up red Never ignore the warning lamps or messages. Faulty steering. Information relating to different vehi- ● If the warning lamps and the correspond- Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon as cle processes. possible and in a safe manner. ing messages are ignored, the vehicle may Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have stall in traffic, causing serious damage or Electro-mechanical power steering adapts the fault repaired as soon as possible. accidents and injuries. electronically to the speed of the car, torque ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and steering angle.  It lights up yellow and in a safe place. Even if the power steering fails or the engine Limited steering operation. is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have the the steering wheel as long as the key remains steering checked. in the ignition, but more force must be ap- If the warning light does not come on again after re- Driving modes (Drive Profile)* plied. starting the engine and driving a short distance, it is not necessary to check the steering. Introduction OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and recon- The Drive Profile enables the driver to nected. Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph). choose between the Comfort, Sport, » 215 Driving

Cupra* and Individual profiles, which modi- Engine sound* The acceleration capacity from a standstill fy the behaviour of several vehicle functions, Depending on the selected profile, it modi- will also be modified. providing different driving experiences. fies the acoustic sensation in the vehicle's in- Steering In addition, the 4Drive version features the terior. Depending on the equipment, it also Offroad and Snow profiles. modifies the outside sound levels. It acts on The power steering varies its driving modes several components of the vehicle to and adapts to the profile selected, thus of- The Individual profile can be configured ac- strengthen or weaken the engine and intake fering the best behaviour for each situation. cording to personal preferences. The other noise, as well as the noise from the exhaust profiles have a fixed configuration. system. The configuration is preset for each Air conditioning profile and can be modified in the Individual Climatronic can operate in Eco mode, espe- profile. Description cially restricting fuel consumption. Adaptive chassis control (DCC)* Depending on the equipment fitted in the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* The DCC continuously adapts the damping vehicle, the Drive Profile can operate on the Depending on the driving profile, the per- of the suspension system to the characteris- following functions: formance of the ACC varies, to allow more tics of the road surface and the driving situa- sporty acceleration and braking or a more tion (speed, acceleration and steering wheel Engine respectful fuel consumption. angle) according to the selected driving pro- Depending on the profile selected, the en- file. The vehicle's dynamic behaviour is also PreCrash system gine responds more quickly or smoothly to adapted to improve grip on curves and turn- the accelerator being pressed. ing capacity. Within the Individual profile The PreCrash system adapts according to The behaviour of the transmission is modi- you can also adjust the DCC level in a cus- the selected configuration. The Sport and fied, whenever a gear is changed up and tomised manner. Offroad driving profiles have specific settings to adapt them to driving and terrain down, and at other times. The idle level may In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow- characteristics ››› page 22 . also change depending on the selected pro- ing message is displayed on the instrument file and the selector lever position. screen Fault: shock absorber regula- The Inertia Mode function can also be tion switched on by selecting the Comfort profile, or from the Individual profile by putting Four-wheel drive (4Drive)* the engine into ECO mode. This allows fuel Modify the transmission to adjust the vehi- consumption to be reduced. Other factors cle’s traction capacity to the road surface. can cause it to switch on ››› page 212 .

216 Start and driving

Setting the driving profile ››› Fig. 139 to change the driving profile. Driving pro- Characteristics Press and hold the CUPRA button* to access file the Cupra profile directly. Press and hold again to return to the previous profile. It allows the configuration of vehi-  cle parameters to be personalised The icon of the selected profile is displayed Offroadb) to maintain optimal off-road driv- at all times in the upper central part of the ing. instrument panel and on the Infotainment a) Available in the VZ version. System screen when it is turned off b) Only for 4Drive models. ››› page 82. WARNING Driving pro- Characteristics file When operating the Drive Profile, pay at- Fig. 139 Multifunction steering wheel*: button to tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could change the driving profile. It permits more relaxed and com- cause an accident. fortable driving, for example for There are several ways to select a driving  long motorway journeys. Its main Convenience Note profile using the Infotainment System: characteristic is the soft suspension setting (DCC). ● When the engine is switched off it will ● Press the function button  > Drive Pro- It represents the vehicle's default store the driving profile that was selected file, available profiles will be displayed.  behaviour, suitable for dynamic when the ignition was turned off. When re- Sport ● OR: Press the function button  > Vehicle driving. started, the engine and the gearbox will settings > Drive Profile, available profiles will start in their Normal mode. To return the It gives the vehicle a decidedly engine and gear to your desired mode, re- be displayed.  sportier nature, and makes for Cupraa) select the corresponding driving profile. ● OR: Press the function button , slide your maximum performance. ● When the vehicle is restarted after using finger horizontally across the screen to Drive It allows you to personalise the the Offroad or Snow settings, the system is Profile. Press on  to change the driving pro-  configuration. The functions that always activated in the Sport profile. file or double press on the icon to show the Individual can be adjusted depend on the available profiles. equipment fitted in the vehicle. ● Your speed and driving style must always be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic ● OR: With the Infotainment System turned conditions. off, by pressing on the Drive Profile icon, the available driving profiles will be displayed. ● OR: briefly press the CUPRA button* on the left hand side of the steering wheel 217 Driving

Driving tips until reaching the maximum speed and high important to observe certain safety points engine speeds. ››› .

Running in Running in new tyres and brake pads Winter tyres Please observe the instructions for running- ● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will in new components. ››› page 305. have plenty of traction in winter conditions, ● Information about brakes ››› page 252 . even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, Running-in the engine we still recommend that winter tyres or all- season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to A new engine must be driven through a run- For the sake of the environment give even better braking response. in period during its first 1500 kilometres If the engine is run in gently, the life of the (1000 miles). During its first few hours of engine will be increased and the engine oil Snow chains running, the internal friction in the engine is consumption reduced. greater than later on when all the moving On roads where snow chains are mandatory, parts have bedded down. this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive ››› page 309. How the vehicle is driven for the first Four-wheel drive (4Drive) 1500 km (1000 miles) influences the future Changing tyres engine performance. Throughout the life of On four-wheel drive models, the engine the vehicle, it should be driven at a moderate power is distributed to all four wheels On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four speed (especially when the engine is cold) tyres must have the same rolling circumfer- this will reduce engine wear and increase its General notes ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying tread depths page 305 . useful life. Never drive at extremely low en- On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine ››› gine speeds. Always engage a lower gear power is distributed to all four wheels. The when the engine works “irregularly”. For the distribution of power is controlled automati- Off-roader? first 1000 km or 600 miles, please note: cally according to your driving style and the Your CUPRA vehicle is not an off-roader: it road conditions. Also see page 257 . does not have enough ground clearance to ● Do not use full throttle. ››› be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid The four-wheel drive is specially designed to ● Do not force the engine above two thirds rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as complement the superior engine power. of its maximum speed. possible. This combination gives the vehicle excep- ● Do not tow a trailer. tional handling and performance capabili- WARNING Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 ties, both on normal roads and in more diffi- ● Even with four-wheel drive, you should to 1000 miles), gradually increase power cult conditions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or perhaps especially for this reason), it is always adjust your speed to suit the 218 Start and driving

conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea- Active cylinder management (ACT®)* Reduce idling time tures tempt you into taking any risks when Depending on vehicle equipment, the active In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling driving. Risk of accident! cylinder management (ACT®) may deacti- is automatically reduced. In vehicles without ● The braking capability of your vehicle is vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv- the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no ing situation does not require too much the engine, for example, at level crossings different from a car without four-wheel power. The number of active cylinders can and at traffic lights that remain red for long drive. So do not be tempted to drive too be seen on the instrument panel display. periods of time. When an engine has fast on firm or slippery roads just because ››› page 67. reached operating temperature, and de- the vehicle still has good acceleration in pending on the cylinder capacity, keeping it these conditions. Risk of accident! Foresight when driving switched off for a minimum of about 5 sec- ● On wet roads bear in mind that the front onds already saves more than the amount of If you think ahead when driving, you will wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose fuel necessary for restarting. need to brake less and thus accelerate less. contact with the road if the car is driven too Take advantage of the inertia of the vehicle fast. If this should happen, there will be no The engine takes a long time to warm up sudden increase in engine speed to warn whenever possible, with a gear engaged. when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel This takes advantage of the engine braking tant emissions are also especially high during drive car. For this reason you should always effect, reducing wear on the brakes and this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best choose a driving speed suitable for the road tyres. Emissions and fuel consumption will to drive off immediately after starting the en- conditions. Risk of accident! drop to zero. gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed. Changing gear to save energy Economical and environmentally An effective way of saving is to change in ad- Regular maintenance friendly driving vance to a higher gear. Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even before the engine is started. A well-serviced ● Accelerate gradually and without reaching Fuel consumption, environmental pollution engine gives you the benefit of improved the “kick-down” position. and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres all fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability depend largely on driving style. Consump- and an enhanced resale value. A badly serv- Avoid driving at high speed tion can be reduced between 10-15% with iced engine can consume up to 10% more an efficient driving type. The following sec- Avoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed, fuel than necessary. tion gives you some tips on lessening the im- whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis- pact on the environment and reducing your sion of harmful gases and noise pollution Avoid short journeys operating costs at the same time. multiply as speed is increased. Driving at The engine and catalytic converter need to moderate speeds will help to save fuel. reach their optimal operating temperature »

219 Driving

in order to minimise fuel consumption and Save electrical energy Driving on flooded roads emissions. The engine drives the alternator, thereby To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on A cold engine consumes a disproportionate generating electricity. This implies that any flooded roads, take the following into ac- amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work- increase in power consumption also increa- count: ing temperature after about four kilometres ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices (2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re- ● The water should never come above the that use a lot of electricity includes the blow- turn to a normal level. lower edge of the bodywork. er at a high setting, the rear window heating ● Drive at pedestrian speed. Check tyre pressure or the seat heating*. Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the Note WARNING correct pressures ››› page 306 to save fuel. If After driving through flooded zones, brak- the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump- ● If you have the Start-Stop system, it is ing effectiveness can decrease if the brake tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater recommended that it should not be discon- discs or pads are damp ››› page 252 . rolling resistance, under-inflation also in- nected. creases tyre wear and impairs handling. ● It is recommended that you close the windows when driving at more than CAUTION Do not use all year round as winter tyres 60 km/h (37 mph). they increase fuel consumption by up to ● Driving through flooded areas may dam- ● 10%. Do not drive with your foot resting on the age vehicle components such as the en- clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the gine, transmission or electrical system. plate slip. This causes wear and can damage Avoid carrying unnecessary loads ● Whenever driving through water, the the clutch plate. Start-Stop system* must be switched off Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- ● Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the ››› page 205. crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable brake. The fuel consumption will be lower make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- and you will prevent the clutch plate from Note ing transported. being damaged. ● Check the depth of the water before en- Since the luggage rack increases the aero- ● Use the engine brake on downhills by tering the flooded zone. dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re- changing to the gear that is best suited for move it when not needed. At speeds of the gradient. Fuel consumption will be ● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save “zero” and the brakes will not suffer. or stop the engine. 12% of fuel. ● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direction cause waves that could exceed your vehicle's critical height.

220 Driver assistance systems

● Avoid driving through salt water (corro- Driver assistance systems ● The area in front of and around the radar sion) ››› page 317 . sensor should not be covered with adhesives, additional headlights or similar items, General notes as this could have a negative impact on the operation of the assistants. If the vehicle is Trips abroad Safety advice not properly repaired or structural modifications are made to it, the operation of the ● With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured assistants may be affected. that lead-free petrol is available throughout WARNING ● The repair and adjustment of sensors and the journey page 287, Fuel types . Seek ››› ● Responsibility for driving rests with the cameras requires special knowledge and information about service station networks driver at all times. The driver assistance tools. It is recommended to visit a CUPRA selling unleaded fuel. systems are not a replacement for driver dealership for this purpose. ● In some countries, it is possible that your attention. Focus all your attention on driv- vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may ing and be prepared to intervene at all not be available or the technical services times. System limits may only be able to make limited repairs. ● Use the driver assistance systems only when conditions allow. The driving style CUPRA distributors and importers will pro- must always be suitable for the weather, WARNING vide information about the technical prepa- visibility, road and traffic conditions. ● Driver assistance systems can not over- ration that your vehicle requires and also ● In order for driver assistance systems to come the laws of physics. Depending on about necessary maintenance and repair react correctly, sensors and cameras must the circumstances, a collision may not be possibilities. operate without limitations. Please read avoidable. the notes on sensors and cameras in this ● Warnings, notices and indicator lamps CAUTION chapter. may not be displayed on time, or may be CUPRA does not accept liability for any displayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle ap- damage to the vehicle due to the use of a Note proaches too quickly. lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or ● Keep in mind the specific rules of each ● Corrective interventions by driver assis- the non-availability of genuine spare parts. country, especially when it comes to driv- tance systems (e.g. interventions in the ing, formation of an emergency corridor, steering or brakes) may be insufficient or braking distance, speed, parking position, may never occur, depending on the cir- wheel position, etc. The driver is solely re- cumstances. As a driver, you must be pre- sponsible for always complying with the pared to act at all times. » specific regulations of each country.

221 Driving

Note unavailable or ACC unavailable warning lights come on. ● Due to the system's detection limits in the surroundings, the systems may not give ● Clean the sensor area on the bumper as warnings or intervene on time, or they indicated in ››› page 319, Cleaning the exte- might do so even if it is not desired. In addi- rior . When the radar sensor starts correctly tion, the auxiliary systems may incorrectly detecting again, the message disappears interpret a manoeuvre and, as a result, from the screen and the functions become warn the driver in an unexpected manner. available again. ● When the towing mode is selected, some assist systems may react with limitations, in CAUTION an unusual way or may not be available. Fig. 141 Detection area. ● If the radar sensor is dirty or poorly adjus- Keep in mind the instructions relating to ted, the Front Assist system may give un- the towing mode. A radar sensor may be fitted to the front necessary warnings and apply the brakes bumper of the vehicle Fig. 140 . The front ››› inappropriately. radar detects any objects in its detection zone ››› Fig. 141 and provides support for ● The operation of the radar can be affec- Driver assistance sensors and the following functions: ted by strong reflections of the emitted signal. This may occur, for example, in an en- cameras ● Front Assist ››› page 228 . closed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) used in road works). Front radar ››› page 232. ● The sensor may not be adjusted correctly The radar can have a range of up to 120m if it receives an impact. This may compro- (400ft) depending on road and weather mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it. conditions. If you have the feeling that the radar sensor is damaged or adjusted incorrectly, switch WARNING off the Front Assist and ACC functions to avoid any damage. If this occurs have it ad- The visibility of the radar sensor can be im- justed. paired by dirt or environmental influences such as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insects etc. In this case the Front Assist and ACC functions may stop working. The instru- Fig. 140 On the front bumper: radar sensors. ment panel displays the following message: No sensor vision! And the Front Assist

222 Driver assistance systems

Front camera ● Do not cover the field of vision of the The radar sensors are located on the left and camera. right of the bumper and are not visible from the outside Fig. 143 . The sensors monitor ● Check that the windscreen is not dam- ››› both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- aged in the area of the camera's field of vi- hicle . sion. ››› Fig. 144 They support the following functions:

● Lane departure warning (Side Assist) Rear radar ››› page 247. ● Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ››› page 249 . ● Door opening warning (Exit Assist) ››› page 250. Fig. 142 On the windscreen: field of vision of the Lane Assist system. Automatic deactivation of supported Depending on the equipment, the vehicle functions may be fitted with a front camera on the The rear radar sensors deactivate automati- front windscreen ››› Fig. 142 . This camera cally when, among other reasons, one of the detects lane boundaries (lines) to provide sensors is detected to be permanently cov- support for the following functions: ered. This may be the case if, for example, Fig. 143 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor there is a layer of snow or ice over one of the ● Lane Assist ››› page 240 . zones. sensors. ● Travel Assist page 242 . ››› The relevant text message will appear in the ● Emergency assist ››› page 244 . dash panel display.

CAUTION CAUTION To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- ● The radar sensors on the rear bumper tems, take the following points into consid- may be damaged or shifted in the event of a eration: collision, for example, when entering or ex- ● Clean the field of vision of the camera iting a parking space. This may result in the regularly and make sure it is free of snow system disconnecting itself, or at least pos- and ice. sibly having its functionality diminished. » Fig. 144 Sensor detection zones 223 Driving

● In order to ensure that the radar sensors the function checked by a specialised Rear View Camera work properly, keep the rear bumper free workshop. of snow and ice and do not cover it. ● A number plate or number plate holder ● The rear bumper should only be painted with dimensions that exceed the space for with paint authorised by CUPRA. The lane the number plate, or a cured or deformed departure warning's functions may be limi- number plate can cause false detections or ted or work incorrectly if other paints are a loss of visibility for the sensors. used. ● The visibility of radar sensors may be af- Note fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze or ● dirt, among others. Clean the area in front In order to guarantee good operation, of the sensors. keep the sensors clean, free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with stickers or ● Fig. 145 In the rear lid handle: location of the re- Never use the lane departure warning, other objects. the rear cross traffic alert or the door verse assist camera. ● opening warning if the radar sensors are If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- dirty. ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, A camera installed in the rear lid handle as- unless you do so very briefly, and always sists the driver with reverse parking or ma- keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. noeuvring. This provides support to the fol- ● Fitting certain accessories to the front of lowing function: Ultrasound sensors the vehicle, such as a plate holder with advertising, may interfere with the operation ● Rear View Camera ››› page 273 . The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sen- of the Park Assist. sors to perform the following functions: WARNING ● Park Assist ››› page 261 . Fitting a number plate frame may interfere with the view shown on the screen, as it ● Parking aid Plus page 269 . ››› may reduce the camera’s field of vision. ● Rear parking aid ››› page 272 . CAUTION CAUTION ● In order to guarantee good system opera- ● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, tion, keep the cameras clean, free of snow wheel arch and vehicle underbody can or ice, and do not cover them with stickers modify the orientation of the sensors. This or other objects. can affect the parking aid function. Have

224 Driver assistance systems

● Never use abrasive cleaning products to  It lights up grey ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or clean the camera lens. on roads where the surface is not firm. The cruise control system is switched on, but regula- ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove tion is not active. ● Adapt your speed and safety distance to ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit could damage the camera. the visibility, weather, road and traffic con-  It lights up green ditions. The cruise control system is switched on and regula- ● After use, always switch off the speed tion is active. limiter to prevent the speed being regula- Cruise control system (CCS) ted against your wishes. If there is no speed saved, the instrument ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is Introduction cluster display shows  instead of speed. too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions. The cruise control system (GRA) helps main- Changing gears tain a constant speed set by you. As soon as the clutch pedal is depressed, regulation is suspended and resumes once Operating the cruise control with the Speed range the gear change has been made. multifunction steering wheel The cruise control system is available when driving in forward gear at a speed of over ap- Driving down slopes prox. 20 km/h (15 mph). Shift into a low gear before descending a long hill. This makes use of engine braking Temporarily switching off the cruise con- and relieves the brakes. trol The saved speed can be exceeded at any WARNING time, e.g. for overtaking. The cruise control is If it is impossible to drive with sufficient suspended during acceleration and is then braking distance and at a constant speed, resumed with the saved speed. using the cruise control system may cause accidents and serious injuries may occur. Status display ● Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is Fig. 146 On the multifunction steering wheel: When the cruise control system is switched bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in buttons to operate the speed limiter. on, the instrument cluster display shows the slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice, Connecting saved speed and the system status: rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads. ● Press the  button. »

225 Driving

There is no speed saved and regulation is not The cruise control system resumes the saved ● The vehicle has exceeded the saved speed yet operating. speed and regulates it. for a long time. ● No forward gear has been selected. Start regulation Switching off ● A brake assistance system has intervened, ● When the vehicle is moving, press the but- ● Press and hold the button . e.g. TCS or ESC. ton . The cruise control system switches off and ● Front Assist has braked the vehicle. The cruise control system saves and regu- the saved speed is deleted. ● If the fault continues, disconnect the lates the current speed. Emergency Assist and consult a specialised Switching off the speed limiter workshop. Adjusting the speed ● Press the  button. While the GRA is set, the stored speed can ● Select the speed limiter on the instrument be adjusted: cluster display. Speed limiter  + 1 km/h (1 mph) The cruise control system is switched off.  - 1 km/h (1 mph) Introduction

 + 10 km/h (5 mph) The speed limited helps the driver not to ex-  - 10 km/h (5 mph) Problems and solutions ceed a set speed.

Temporarily switching off the cruise The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac-  Speed range celerating or stopping accelerating. control The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a The control lamp switches on yellow. programmed speed, from 30 km/h (20 mph) Interrupting the adjustment approx. and faster. ● Briefly press the button  on the multi- ● Abnormal operation. Switch off the cruise control system and take the vehicle to a spe- function steering wheel or press the brake By selecting the speed limiter pedal. cialist workshop. The speed limitation can be interrupted at The speed is stored. The adjustment is interrupted unexpect- any time by depressing the accelerator pedal edly fully, beyond the point of resistance. As soon Reinstating the cruise control as the saved speed is exceeded, the green ● If the clutch pedal is pressed for a long indicator light flashes and an audible warning ● Press the  button. time. signal may sound. The speed is stored.

226 Driver assistance systems

The limiter is reactivated automatically after snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed Adjusting the speed returning to less than the set speed. limiter when the status of the road and the The programmed speed can be set: weather conditions allow it. Status display  + 1 km/h (1 mph) When the speed limiter is switched on, the  - 1 km/h (1 mph) instrument cluster display shows the saved Operating the speed limiter with the  + 10 km/h (5 mph) speed and the system status: multifunction steering wheel  - 10 km/h (5 mph)  It lights up grey Interrupting the adjustment The speed limiter is switched on but regulation is not ● Press the  button. active. The speed is stored.  It lights up green Reinstating the cruise control The speed limiter is switched on and active. ● Press the  button.

Driving down slopes The limiter will re-activate as soon as the ve- Shift into a low gear before descending a hicle is moving at a speed lower than the long hill. This makes use of engine braking Fig. 147 On the multifunction steering wheel: saved one. and relieves the brakes. buttons to operate the speed limiter. Switching off Connecting WARNING ● Press and hold the button . ● Press the  button. After use, always switch off the speed limit- The speed limiter switches off and the speed er to prevent the speed being regulated It does not take effect yet. against your wishes. is deleted. ● The speed limiter does not relieve the Start regulation driver of their responsibility to drive at the Switch to cruise control (GRA) or adaptive ● appropriate speed. Do not drive at high When the vehicle is moving, press the but- cruise control (ACC) ton . speed if not necessary. ● Press the  button. ● Using the speed limiter under adverse The current speed is saved as a limit speed. ● Observe the corresponding message on weather conditions is dangerous and can the instrument cluster display. » cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning,

227 Driving

The speed limiter is switched off. Not possible to start regulation First informing the driver, and if there is no or ● The selected driving profile does not allow insufficient reaction, then activating an au- Note regulation to start. Select another profile and tonomous emergency braking or an evasive Depending on the equipment, the speed repeat the procedure. manoeuvre as indicated by the conditions limiter can be found on the multifunction that will be discussed in the following points. steering wheel or on the turn signal lever. The system can be cancelled if the accelerator pedal is pressed or the steering wheel is emergency brake assistance turned firmly. Problems and solutions system (Front Assist)* Depending on the equipment and the country, the Front Assist also includes the follow-   The speed limiter is not active. Introduction ing functions:

The control lamp switches on yellow. The objective of the system is to prevent ● Pedestrian protection ››› page 229 head-on collisions against objects that may ● Cyclist protection ››› page 229 ● Malfunctions Switch off the speed limiter be in the vehicle’s path or minimise the con- ● Dodge assist ››› page 230 and go to a specialist workshop. sequences of such impacts. ● Turn assist ››› page 230 The adjustment is interrupted unexpect- The function is designed to avoid collisions edly against: WARNING ● You have switched off the Electronic Stabi- ● Parked vehicles. ● Front Assist is a driving assistance function that can never replace the driver’s at- lization Control (ESC). ● Vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists that are tention. ● The brakes have overheated. Wait for the travelling in the same lane and direction. ● Front Assist cannot change the laws of brakes to cool down and check the opera- ● Pedestrians and cyclists who transversely tion again. physics or replace the driver in terms of cross the vehicle path. keeping control of the vehicle and reacting ● If the fault continues, consult a specialised to a possible emergency situation. workshop. The Front Assist records the mentioned objects by means of a camera on the top of the ● Following a Front Assist emergency warn- For safety reasons, the speed limiter only windscreen and a radar sensor on the front ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- switches off fully whenever the driver stops of the vehicle ››› page 222 . tion and try to avoid the collision where ap- pressing the accelerator pedal or switches propriate. Depending on several factors and how criti- the system off manually. cal the situation is, the system operates in a staggered manner.

228 Driver assistance systems

Warning levels and brake assist Advance warning Driver emergency braking assistance sys- If the system detects a possible collision with tem the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by If the driver, after the critical warning, starts means of an audible warning and an indica- braking but the system detects that the tion on the instrument panel display  brake is not being applied with sufficient ››› Fig. 148. force, the braking intensity will be increased. This brake assist only occurs if the pedal is The warning moment varies depending on pressed firmly. the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a WARNING possible emergency braking ››› in Intro- Fig. 148 On the instrument panel display: ad- duction on page 228. ● The system cannot prevent a collision, al- vance warning indications. though it can significantly minimise the When Front Assist is connected, the indica- consequences by reducing the speed and Front Assist is active between 5 km/h (3 tions of other functions on the screen may the force of the impact. be hidden. mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph). Depending ● When the Front Assist causes a braking, on different conditions (vehicle speed, the brake pedal is “harder”. speed and type of object recognised, etc.), Critical warning ● Automatic interventions by the Front As- some of the stages described below are If the driver fails to react to the advance sist on the brakes may be interrupted by omitted to optimise the performance of the warning, the system may actively intervene pressing the accelerator or moving the system. in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn steering wheel. the driver of the imminent danger of a colli- ● The Front Assist may brake the vehicle Safety distance warning sion. until it stops completely. However, the If the system detects that you are driving too brake system does not halt the vehicle per- close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the Automatic braking manently. Use the foot brake! driver with this indication on the instrument If the driver also fails to react to the critical panel display . warning, the system may initiate independ- The timing of the warning varies depending ent emergency braking by progressively in- Pedestrian and cyclist recognition on driver behaviour, vehicle speed and rela- creasing the braking in accordance with the tive speed between both. criticality of the situation. The system recognises pedestrians and cyclists who travel in the same lane and direc- The safety distance warning is active be- tion and pedestrians and cyclists who trans- tween approx. 65 km/h (40 mph) and 250 versely cross the vehicle's path. » km/h (155 mph).

229 Driving

Pedestrian and cyclist recognition technolo- Limitations System limitations gy cannot exceed the physically prescribed This system does not react to objects that limits and works exclusively within the sys- cross transversely or to animals. The basic tem’s limits. The responsibility for braking al- limitations of the Front Assist must also be ways depends on the driver. taken into account ››› page 230 . The pedestrian and cyclist recognition can cause undesired warnings and braking interventions, e.g. with a hidden radar sensor or a Turn assist dirty camera field of vision. Turn assist can avoid a collision with a vehicle Be ready to take charge of the vehicle at any approaching in the opposite direction, by time. Fig. 149 On the instrument panel display: initial braking the vehicle itself when the intention system self-calibration indication. The pedestrian and cyclist recognition oper- is to turn. ating speed range is lower than that of the Front Assist has certain limitations inherent This system is active up to 15 km/h (9 mph). Front Assist. to the system. Thus, in certain circumstances, some of the reactions may be inappro- Limitations priate from the driver's standpoint. So pay Dodge assist The turn-off assist function is available if you attention in order to intervene if necessary. have indicated your intention to turn by acti- Dodge assist helps the driver avoid an obsta- vating the turn signal, you have turned the The following conditions may cause the cle in critical conditions. steering wheel and the turning path has star- Front Assist not to react or to do so too ted. late: Once the Front Assist has activated a critical warning, if the driver intends on dodging the It only reacts to vehicles that are in the path ● In the first few instants of driving after object, the dodge assist will help correct the of the vehicle (not to animals, people, etc.). switching on the ignition, due to the system’s initial auto-calibration. During this phase, the trajectory. The driver must start and finish The basic limitations of the Front Assist must instrument panel screen will display the fol- the manoeuvre, as this is an assistance sys- also be taken into account ››› page 230 . tem and not an autonomous one. lowing indication ››› Fig. 149 . Front Assist is active between approx. 30 Unrecognised objects km/h (20 mph) and 150 km/h (90 mph). ● Vehicles travelling outside the reach of the sensors at close range from your own vehicle.

230 Driver assistance systems

● Vehicles that suddenly change to the lane ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- the ignition, the Front Assist may not be on which your vehicle is travelling. trically connected trailer are damaged. available for a short period of time while the ● Pedestrians that cannot be recognised be- ● If the vehicle is reversing. system starts. During this phase, the instrument panel screen will display the following cause they are partially or totally hidden. ● In case of snow or heavy rain. indication ››› Fig. 149 . ● Objects such as walls, posts, fences, trees ● In case of dazzling sun or total darkness. or garage doors. When the Front Assist is disabled, so too are ● Entrances and exits of tunnels. the advance warning and the distance warn- ● Loads and accessories of other vehicles ● In complex driving situations (such as traf- ing functions. CUPRA recommends leaving that protrude over the sides, backwards or fic islands, cut-through roundabouts, etc), the Front Assist activated except in the situa- over the top. Front Assist may issue warnings and inter- tions presented in ››› page 232 . ● Other vehicles crossing the vehicle’s path. vene in braking in an unnecessary manner. ● In the case of pedestrians or cyclists stand- Switching the Front Assist on and off ing or approaching in the opposite direction. For more details, see section ››› page 221 . With the ignition switched on, the Front As- sist can be deactivated or activated as fol- Operating limitations: lows: Manual activation and deactivation of In the following situations, the Front Assist ● the function Select the corresponding menu option us- may work late or in an undesirable manner. ing the button for the driver assistance sys-  The following icon is displayed (in yellow) tems ››› page 79 . in the instrument panel, accompanied by the ● message Front Assist with limita- OR: using the Infotainment system: press  tions. the function button > Driver assistance> Front Assist››› page 86 . ● If the Front Assist or the front camera are disabled or broken. When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indication ››› Fig. 150 will be displayed on the ● If the radar sensor or the front camera are instrument panel. dirty or covered. Each time the ignition is switched on, the ● On taking tight bends or complex paths. Fig. 150 On the instrument panel display: Front Front Assist will reappear as active. ● When pressing the accelerator firmly or at Assist deactivated indication. full throttle. Front Assist indicators appear on the instru- Activating or deactivating the pre-warning ● If the TCS has been disconnected or the ment panel display. (advance warning) ESC is activated in Sport ››› page 259 mode. The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- The advance warning can be activated or ● If the ESC is adjusting or is broken. tion is switched on. At the time of starting deactivated in the infotainment system using » 231 Driving

the function button  > Driver assistance > Activate or deactivate the dodge and turn ● If the windscreen is damaged in an area Front Assist ››› page 86 . assistant that covers the vision of the front camera. The system will store the setting for the next The dodge and turn assistance systems can time the ignition is switched on. be activated or deactivated in the infotainment system using the function button  > CUPRA recommends keeping advance warn- ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* Driver assistance > Front Assist ››› page 86 . ing active. The system will store the setting for the next Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment Introduction time the ignition is switched on. system the advance warning function may Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains a be adapted in the following modes: CUPRA recommends having the dodge and turn assistance systems activated except in constant speed set by the driver. When ● Advance the exceptions described in section approaching another vehicle in front, the ACC detects it and adapts the speed auto- ● Medium ››› page 232. matically, maintaining a distance set by ● Delayed the driver. Deactivating Front Assist temporarily in ● Deactivated the following situations Does my vehicle have ACC? CUPRA recommends driving with the func- In the following situations the Front Assist Your vehicle has ACC if it has a configuration tion in “Medium” mode. should be deactivated due to the system's limitations: menu in the infotainment system ››› page 86 and if it has the ACC function buttons on the Switching distance warning on and off ● When the vehicle is to be towed. multifunction steering wheel ››› Fig. 151 . The safety distance warning can be activated ● If the vehicle is on a test bed. or deactivated in the infotainment system Speed range using the function button  > Driver assis- ● If the radar sensor or the front camera are ACC regulates speeds between 30 km/h (20 tance > Front Assist ››› page 86 . faulty. mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph). The system will store the setting for the next ● If the radar sensor or the front camera The ACC can brake vehicle until it stops time the ignition is switched on. have suffered a violent blow. ● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. completely before a vehicle that stops. CUPRA recommends having the safety dis- ● If the radar sensor or the front camera are tance warning activated except in the excep- Driver intervention prompt tions described in section ››› page 232 . temporarily covered by an accessory. ACC is subject to certain limitations in- ● When the vehicle is going to be loaded on-  herent to the system. This means that to transportation. the driver will have to control the speed

232 Driver assistance systems

and distance from other vehicles in cer- ● The system may not react in time to sta- recommends visiting a specialised CUPRA tain situations. In this case, the instru- tionary obstacles (such as a traffic jam dealer or any SEAT dealership. ment cluster display will tell you to in- queue), particularly at high speeds. React tervene by applying the brake, and an soon enough to avoid a hazardous situa- audio warning will be played. tion. ACC operation ● The system may not react to stopped ve- Radar sensors hicles in the same lane. You must react ear- The ACC uses the front radar technology. ly enough yourself in this case. Read its maintenance instructions and infor- ● The system does not react to people, ani- mation about its limitations ››› page 221 . mals or vehicles that are crossing or approaching in the opposite direction. WARNING ● If you are driving with a spare wheel fit- The ACC’s technology cannot overcome ted, the ACC system could automatically the system's inherent limitations or change switch off. Switch off the system when the laws of physics. If used negligently or starting off. involuntarily, it may cause serious acci- ● Brake immediately if the ACC does not dents and injuries. The system is not a re- slow down enough. Fig. 151 On the multifunction steering wheel: but- placement for driver awareness. ● Brake immediately when a driver inter- tons to operate the ACC ● Always be prepared to brake or acceler- vention instruction is displayed on the in- ate. strument cluster screen. Connecting ● If you press the accelerator pedal the ● If the vehicle continues to move involun- ● Press the  button on the multifunction ACC will stop working. Therefore, it will not tarily after a driver intervention prompt, steering wheel. brake or request any braking intervention. brake the vehicle. ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to ● The brake pedal may move downwards The ACC does not regulate anything yet the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit during braking. Be careful not to position (standby). visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- your foot under the pedal. tions. Start regulation ● Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, or Note Activating the ACC system automatically ac- on roads that are steep, with lots of curves tivates the ESC and ASR. or slippery. If the ACC does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it until it has been ●  ● To start regulation, press the button Never use ACC when driving off-road or checked by a specialised workshop. CUPRA on unpaved roads. ››› Fig. 151. »

233 Driving

The ACC sets the current speed, or the clos- ● Alternatively, press the button  as many Set the default distance setting est speed within the valid range (30-210 times as necessary to set the desired dis- In the Infotainment system, you can pre-se- km/h), as the cruise speed. tance. lect the distance level when connecting the Depending on the driving situation, the fol- Keep in mind each country’s regulations on ACC from: lowing indicator lamps come on: minimum braking distances. ● Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Very long using the Infotainment system:  >  It lights up green Suspend regulation (standby) Driver assistance > ACC ››› page 86 . ACC connected, no vehicle detected in front. ● Briefly press the button  on the multifunction steering wheel or press the brake Changing the driving profile  It lights up green pedal. In vehicles with Drive Profile, the driving profile selected can have an influence on the ACC connected, vehicle detected in front. The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speed and distance are saved. ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour When the ACC is in standby, the indicator ››› page 215. lamps light up grey. Reinstating the cruise control In vehicles without Drive Profile, the behav- ● Press the  button. iour of the ACC can also be affected if any of Setting speed the following drive profiles are selected in To program the speed, press the  or  The ACC regulates to the last speed and dis- the infotainment system in Driver assis- ››› Fig. 151 buttons to the desired speed. The tance setting. tance. ACC settings will be the same as speed is adjusted at intervals of 10 km/h (5 those in the Drive Profile. mph). Switching off WARNING ●  When the ACC is active, the button  can Press and hold the button . The set be pressed to increase the desired speed by speed is cleared. Before driving off, check that the road is clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob- 1 km/h (1 mph). You can then press  to de- stacles on the road. This could cause an ac- crease it by 1 km/h (1 mph). Exceeding the speed regulated by the ACC cident and serious injuries. If necessary, While driving with the ACC switched on, the apply the brake. Setting your distance level driver can increase speed by pressing the accelerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspen- The distance can be set to one of five levels, CAUTION from very short to very long: ded until you release the accelerator pedal ››› . If you increase speed using the accelerator ● Press the button  and then the button  pedal, the ACC may not be able to safely or  ››› Fig. 151 .

234 Driver assistance systems

adjust the speed of the distance due to the of the instrument cluster in a simplified man- the driver, it will brake the vehicle within the limitations of the system. ner. comfort limits of the system to avoid passing it on the right Fig. 153 . ● Be prepared to react if required by the The set speed will be displayed next to the ››› situation. function status indicator described in You can cancel this regulation by changing ››› page 233, Start regulation. the set speed or by pressing the accelerator pedal. Status display The function works at speeds over 80 km/h Special driving situations (50 mph). It may not be available in certain countries.

Overtaking When the turn signal is switched on for overtaking, the ACC reduces the distance from the vehicle in front to help with the overtaking manoeuvre. The set cruising speed will not be exceeded. The function works at speeds over 80 km/h Fig. 152 On the instrument panel display: ACC ac- (50 mph). It may not be available in certain tive. Fig. 153 On the instrument panel display: ACC ac- countries. tive, vehicle detected in an outer lane. 1 Vehicle ahead detected. It will light up if Stop&Go function Be aware of the limitations and warnings de- the distance to the vehicle is adjusted. The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill scribed at the beginning of this chapter. 2 Selected distance level 2. (0 km/h) if the vehicle in front stops. ››› in Introduction on page 233. This information can be displayed on the The ACC remains active and the message central panel of the Assists view, or in the Avoid undertaking on the right1) ACC ready to start is displayed on the in- left hand information profile page 65 . If strument cluster for a few seconds. You can ››› If a vehicle is detected in the left lane that is these views are not selected, it will be auto- extend or reactivate this warning by pressing travelling at a speed slower than that set by matically displayed in the lower central part the button  or, depending on your »

1) Or on the left, in countries that drive on the left hand side of the road. 235 Driving

vehicle’s equipment, by grabbing the steer- ACC system limitations ing wheel. During this time, the vehicle will move off again if the vehicle in front moves forwards.

To move off when the message ACC ready to start is not longer displayed, once the vehicle in front has moved off:

● Press the accelerator pedal. ● OR: press the button  or  on the multifunction steering wheel.

The ACC is deactivated while stopped in the following cases:

● If the vehicle stops for several minutes. Fig. 155  Vehicle changing lanes.  One vehi- ● If a door is opened. cle turning and another stationary. Fig. 154  Vehicle on a bend.  Motorcyclist WARNING ahead, out of range of the radar sensor. The limits of the ACC system mean that it is not appropriate in all situations in In- If the message ACC ready to start is dis- ››› played on the instrument cluster display troduction on page 233. and the vehicle in front moves off, your ve- CUPRA does not recommend using the hicle will move off automatically. In this function in the following cases ››› : case, any obstacles in the road may not be detected. This may cause serious accidents ● Heavy rain, snow or fog. and injuries. ● When going through tunnels. ● Always check the road before moving off, ● In sections with roadworks. and apply the vehicle brakes yourself if necessary. ● On routes with curves, e.g. on mountain roads. ● On off-road routes. ● In covered car parks.

236 Driver assistance systems

● On roads with embedded metal objects ● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direction The ACC does not work as expected such as train or tram tracks. or crossing the road. ● Make sure that the conditions are met for ● On roads with loose gravel. ● Other stationary obstacles the radar sensor to operate properly ››› page 222. Pay special attention when using ACC in the The ACC may not react to stationary vehi- ● following situations: cles. If, for example, a vehicle detected by If the brakes overheat, regulation stops au- the ACC turns or moves over and there is a tomatically. Wait for them to cool down and check the operation again. On curves stationary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to the second vehicle Fig. 155 ● Unusual noises during automatic ACC The ACC may not detect the vehicle in front ››› . braking are normal and do not indicate any on a curve, or may regulate the distance anomalies. from vehicles in other lanes ››› Fig. 154 . WARNING The following conditions may lead the ACC Vehicles outside the sensor zone Using the ACC in the above situations can cause serious accidents and injuries, and not to react: In the following situations the ACC may not you could break the law. ● The accelerator or brake is depressed. react, or may react slowly or inappropriately: ● No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gear ● Vehicles that are not aligned while driving R. or that are outside the sensor's detection Problems and solutions ● The vehicle is reversing. area, such as motorcycles ››› Fig. 154  ● ESC is operating. ● Vehicles that move into your lane, a short  ACC not available distance from your vehicle ››› Fig. 155 . ● The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt. The indicator lamp lights up yellow: ● Vehicles with loads or accessories that ● A vehicle or trailer brake light is faulty. protrude from the sides, rear or roof. ● The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted incor- ● The RPM is too high or too low. rectly. Take into account the warnings de- ● The parking brake is applied. Objects that are not detected scribed at the beginning of this chapter ● Driving on an excessive slope. The ACC function only detects and reacts to ››› page 222 vehicles moving in the same direction. ● There is a fault or defect. Turn off the vehi- Therefore it does not detect: cle's ignition and turn it on again after a few minutes. ● People ● If the problem persists, consult a special- ● Animals ised workshop.

237 Driving

Proactive speed adjustment ● Always be prepared to adjust the speed Limitations of the proactive speed ad- yourself. If the traffic signal detection sys- justment Introduction tem is not working properly or the navigation data is not up to date, the speed may In addition to the limitations of the traffic sig- change unexpectedly and suddenly or may The proactive speed adjustment adapts the nal detection system ››› page 72 and of the not suit the current traffic situation. In ad- speed to the speed limitations detected and limitations of the ACC, proactive speed addition, the speed adjusted by the system justment has the following limitations inher- to the road layout (curves, crossings, round- may not suit your driving style. abouts, etc.). ent to the system: ● Always be prepared to adjust the speed Proactive speed adjustment is an additional yourself. If you drive without any active gui- ● Proactive speed adjustment only recogni- function of the ACC ››› page 232 and uses ded route, if you leave the route calculated ses traffic signals that show a speed limita- the traffic signal detection system by the navigation system or if the position tion. The proactive speed adjustment does ››› page 72 and the navigation data of the in- of the vehicle cannot be determined cor- not take into account, above all, the rules on fotainment system. rectly because the GPS does not provide priority of passage or traffic lights. accurate data, the speed may change un- ● On roads that are not included in the navi- Proactive speed adjustment is available de- expectedly and suddenly or may not adapt gation data, or that are included with little pending on the equipment, although not in to the current traffic situation. all countries. accuracy, proactive speed adjustment is not ● Always use up-to-date navigation data. available. ● Always take into account the maximum WARNING ● If a speed limitation is notified based on permitted speed. In the case of speed limi- the navigation data without it being detected The proactive speed adjustment smart tations that are not included in the naviga- by the traffic signal detection system, the in- technology cannot overcome the limits im- tion data, the maximum permitted speed posed by the laws of physics and it only may be exceeded. dicated speed will be adjusted to the speed works within the limits of the system. Never that was saved the last time. allow the enhanced convenience of this ● Note Proactive speed adjustment is not available function induce you to take any risk that for speed limitations below approx. 20 km/h compromises safety. If used negligently or Also note the information related to the (approx. 15 mph). In this case, a relevant involuntarily, it may cause serious acci- ACC relevant to safety ››› page 232 . message is displayed on the instrument pan- dents and injuries. The system is not a re- el screen. placement for driver awareness. ● Always adapt your speed to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ● Always pay attention to traffic and always keep the vehicle environment in mind.

238 Driver assistance systems

Activating the proactive speed adjust- justment due to the road layout, the vehicle Note ment will accelerate again after leaving the reason for the adjustment behind and the speed will ● When a speed limitation is recognised, the proactive speed adjustment also adapts be adjustment to that which has been saved. In the infotainment system, in the assist serv- the saved speed even if the ACC is switched ices menu, you can individually adjust the The speeds indicated for curves depend on off. However, it will not adjust. type of incident the vehicle should react to the driving profile ››› page 215 . ● If the speed of travel considerably ex- : ››› page 86 ceeds the speed limit detected by the traf- Interrupting speed adjustment ● Response to road layout. fic signal detection system, a relevant warn- ● During the warning, press the button . ing is displayed in the instrument panel dis- ● Reaction at permitted speeds. play. ● During the adjustment, press the button ● In the event of joining a highway without . speed limitation, the recommended speed Driving with the proactive speed ad- is automatically saved as the desired speed. Adjust the announced speed justment If a higher speed has previously been saved The announced speed can only be adjusted for a motorway without a speed limit, this is ● Connect the ACC ››› page 233 . in the event of adjustment due to a speed used instead of the recommended speed. limitation. ● Set distance and speed. ● Activate the proactive speed adjustment. Multifunction steering wheel: Problems and solutions  + 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC is As soon as the system recognises a speed adjusting limitation or a relevant road layout during the A message is displayed indicating that pro- route, a warning will appear on the instru-  - 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC is active speed adjustment is not currently ment panel display. This warning will indicate adjusting available or not in your country. the reason and the speed to which the vehi- + + 10 km/h (5 mph) ● If this message is displayed for a long time cle will adjust due to said limitation. and proactive speed adjustment is available – - 10 km/h (5 mph) in your country, contact a specialised work- Adjustment due to a speed limitation.  shop. If you adjust the indicated speed excessively, Adjustment due to a road layout.  the proactive speed adjustment is interrup- Note ted. In the event of adjustment due to a speed Depending on the anomaly in question, ad- limitation, the detected speed will be saved ditional information may be displayed in as the new desired speed. In the event of ad- Vehicle status ››› page 85 .

239 Driving

● Lane Assist* On tight bends. may be that the system does not intervene ● Temporarily in very sporty driving situa- at all. In these situations, special attention Introduction tions. is required from the driver and, where appropriate, the temporary deactivation of the lane assist warning system: The Lane Assist System helps the driver WARNING stay in his/her lane within the physical lim- The intelligent technology in the Lane As- – In very sporty driving situations. its of the system. This function is not suita- sist system cannot change the limits im- – In adverse weather conditions and ble and is not designed to keep the vehicle posed by the laws of physics and by the very roads in poor condition. automatically in the lane. nature of the system. Careless or uncon- – When passing through areas undergo- trolled use of the Lane Assist system may ing works. Using the camera located in the windscreen, cause accidents and injury. The system is – Before gradient changes of grade and the Lane Assist system detects the limits not a replacement for driver awareness or river beds. (lane lines) dividing the lanes in which the manoeuvres when driving. vehicle is travelling. If the vehicle gets too ● Always observe the vehicle surroundings ● Always adapt your speed and the distance close to the detected lane limits, the system carefully and drive proactively. to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, alerts the driver through a corrective motion weather conditions, the condition of the ● When the area of vision of the camera of the steering wheel. The driver can cancel road and the traffic situation. becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the the steering corrective action at any time. Lane Assist system function can be affec- ● Always keep your hands on the steering ted. No warning is produced with the turn signals wheel so it can be turned at any time. The activated, given that the Lane Assist system responsibility of staying in the lane is always understands that a lane change is required. the driver's. ● The Lane Assist system does not detect Control lamp System limits all road markings. The road surfaces, road Use the Lane Assist system only on large, structures or objects in poor condition can  It lights up green be incorrectly detected as road markings well-maintained motorways and highways. under certain circumstances by the Lane Lane Assist system active and available. The system is not available under the follow- Assist system. Immediately counter any un- ing conditions: wanted intervention of the system.  It lights up yellow ● Please observe the indications on the in- ● The driving speed allowed is below approx. strument panel and act as is necessary if The Lane Assist system intervening with a rectification of the steering. 55 km/h (30 mph). the traffic situation permits. ● The system has not detected any lane ● In the following situations there may be lines. undesired interventions of the system or it

240 Driver assistance systems

2 Lane line detected. The system does not Driver intervention prompt  It lights up yellow intervene.  If the steering is not corrected manually, the system prompts the driver through an indi- Lane Assist system Switching the lane assist system on or off cation on the instrument panel display and In some countries, the Lane Assist System is acoustic warnings. Some control and warning lamps will light up always activated when the ignition is switch- briefly when the ignition is switched on to If no reaction is obtained from the driver, the ed on. The connection status is shown in the check certain functions. They will switch off system switches to a passive state. Driver assistance menu of the Infotainment after a few seconds. system or the driver assistance systems Regardless of the steering manoeuvres, menu after pressing the corresponding but- through an indication on the instrument WARNING ton. The Lane Assist system can be activated panel display and acoustic warnings, the Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- and deactivated in these menus. driver is also prompted to drive through the trol and warning lamps on page 81. centre of the lane if the steering correction The Lane Assist system is ready to actively in- lasts more than reasonable. tervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35 mph) and if it has detected the lane limits Steering wheel vibration Driving with the Lane Assist System (system status: active). The control lamp  emits a green light. When the system inter- The following situations may result in a steer- venes by rectifying the direction, the control ing wheel vibration: lamp  emits a yellow light. ● The lane ceases to be recognised during a If the control lamp of the instrument panel sudden intervention in the direction of the display is off, it means that the Lane Assist system. system is connected but not ready to intervene or it is disconnected. It is also possible to select steering wheel vibration in the Vehicle menu of the infotain- When you activate a turn signal, the system ment system. In this case, when a vehicle temporarily goes into a passive state in order with Lane Assist switched on crosses over a to allow manual lane change. detected lane marking, the steering wheel Fig. 156 On the instrument panel display: indica- An energetic rotation or rectification of the will vibrate. tions of the Lane Assist System. steering wheel by the driver causes the system to temporarily switch to a passive state. 1 Lane line detected. The system intervenes assisting on the represented side.

241 Driving

Troubleshooting distance from the vehicle in front that is How to know if the vehicle is fitted with preselected by the driver and remain in Travel Assist Error message, the system disconnects the preferred position within the lane. The vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if the ● Clean the windscreen. ››› page 317 Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap- multifunction steering wheel has the button  ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist. ››› Fig. 159 . in the area of the camera's field of vision. Therefore, carefully read the information about the ACC ››› page 232 and the Lane As- Driver intervention prompt System behaviour is different than expec- sist ››› page 240 and take into account the If you remove your hands from the steering ted limitations of the systems and the indications wheel, after a few seconds the system asks given in the information. ● Clean the field of vision of the camera reg- you to take over the steering with an indica- ularly and make sure it is free of dirt, snow tion on the instrument panel display and Speed range and ice. acoustic warnings. Travel Assist adjusts at speeds between ap- ● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- prox. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph) and approx. WARNING era. 210 km/h (approx. 130 mph); in the case of The Travel Assist smart technology cannot ● Check that the windscreen is not damaged the adaptive lane guidance function, be- overcome the limits imposed by the laws of in the area of the camera's field of vision. tween 0 km/h (0 mph) and approx. 250 physics and it only works within the limits of ● Do not mount objects on the steering km/h (approx. 155 mph). This range may vary the system. If Travel assist is used negli- wheel. depending on the market. gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a In the event of doubts or queries, go to a Driving with Travel Assist replacement for driver awareness. specialised workshop. Travel Assist automatically controls the ac- ● Bear in mind the system limitations and celerator pedal, the brakes and the steering. the indications regarding the control of the In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limi- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist. Driving Assist (Travel Assist) tations, decelerate the vehicle until it stops behind another that stops and automatically ● Adapt your speed and safety distance to starts again. the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit Introduction visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- You can override assisted adjustment at all tions. The driving assist (Travel Assist) combines times. ● Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is adaptive cruise control (ACC) and adap- bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in tive lane guidance. Within the limitations slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice, of the system, the vehicle can maintain a rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.

242 Driver assistance systems

● Do not use Travel Assist offroad or on Indications on the instrument panel 2 Distance set. roads where the surface is not firm. Travel display In addition, depending on the equipment, Assist has been designed for use on paved control lamps indicate the status of the sys- roads only. tem on the instrument panel display: ● Travel Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or ››› Fig. 158 which approach you head-on in the same A Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- lane. trol and adaptive lane guidance func- ● Brake immediately if Travel Assist does tion are active. not slow down enough. B Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- ● Brake immediately when a braking mes- trol active and adaptive lane guidance sage is displayed on the instrument panel function passive. screen. C Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- ● Brake when, after an indication to brake, Fig. 157 On the instrument panel display: indica- trol passive and adaptive lane guidance the vehicle rolls without it being desired. tion with active adjustment. function active. ● Keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times, to ensure you have control over D Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- the steering at all times. The driver is always trol and adaptive lane guidance func- responsible for keeping the vehicle in its tion are passive. own lane. E Inactive Travel Assist. ● If possible, do not wear gloves while driving. The system could interpret this as no Depending on the equipment, more details driving activity. may be displayed on the instrument cluster, such as dashed lines or other vehicles on the ● If driver intervention is requested on the road. instrument panel display, immediately resume control of the vehicle. Fig. 158 On the instrument panel display: control ● Always be prepared to adjust the speed lamps. yourself. Displays on the screen ››› Fig. 157 1 The adaptive lane guidance function is active. 243 Driving

Operating Travel Assist Making other adjustments Travel Assist disconnects automatically For all else, Travel Assist is operated like the Vehicles without Emergency Assist: You have ACC ››› page 233 . released the steering wheel for a long period.

● Abnormal operation. Contact a specialised Problems and solutions workshop.

Travel Assist is not available or does not The adjustment is interrupted unexpect-  work as expected edly The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele- Vehicles without lane departure warning: vant warning is also displayed on the instru- You have turned on the turn signal. Fig. 159 Left side of the multifunction steering ment panel screen. wheel: buttons for operating Travel Assist. ● There is a fault in the sensors. Check the Connecting causes and solutions described in Emergency Assist ● Press the  button on the multifunction ››› page 222. steering wheel. ● The system limits are exceeded. How it works ● If the fault continues, consult a specialised The control lamp  will light up green. Emergency Assist can detect whether workshop. The following warning is also displayed on there is inactivity by the driver and can au- the instrument panel screen: The Travel As- tomatically keep the car within the lane  Take the wheel sist maintains the current speed and the pre- and stop it altogether if necessary. This set distance from the vehicle in front. At the The warning lamp comes on white or red, way the system can actively help avoid an same time, if it detects road markings it depending on the urgency of the interven- accident or reduce its consequences. keeps the vehicle in the lane by moving the tion. A message is also displayed. Emergency Assist uses the same sensors as steering wheel. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane As- ● You released the steering wheel for a few sist. Therefore, carefully read the informa- Interrupting the adjustment seconds. Take hold of the steering wheel and tion about the ACC ››› page 232 and the take control of the vehicle. ● Briefly press the button  on the multi- Lane Assist ››› page 240 and take into ac- function steering wheel or press the brake ● The system limits have been reached. Take count the limitations of the systems and the pedal. hold of the steering wheel and take control indications given in the information. of the vehicle. The set distance remains saved. 244 Driver assistance systems

If the Emergency Assist detects that the driv- When connected, the Emergency Assist is ● If the fault continues, disconnect the er does not perform any activity, it requests only activated if the following requirements Emergency Assist and consult a specialised that the driver take control of the vehicle. To are met: workshop. do this, it emits optical and acoustic warnings and causes braking jolts. The seat belt is ● The Travel Assist or the Lane Assist are WARNING switched on. tightened (depending on the equipment). The smart technology fitted into the Emer- ● The system slows down the vehicle and The system has detected a road lane mark- gency Assist cannot overcome the limits keeps it in its lane. ing on both sides of the vehicle. imposed by the laws of physics; it only You can cancel the adjustment at any time works within the limits of the system. The Problems and solutions by moving the steering wheel, over-acceler- driver is responsible for driving the vehicle. ating or braking. ● Adapt your speed and safety distance to  Emergency Assist not available the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit While the emergency assistant is in opera- SOS the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- tion, other road users are warned as follows: ditions. The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele- ● The Emergency Assist cannot always ● The hazard warning lights are switched on vant warning is also displayed on the instru- avoid accidents or serious injuries by itself. soon after. ment panel screen. ● The horn sounds (depending on the ● If possible, do not wear gloves while driv- ● speed). The field of vision of the camera is dirty. ing. The system could interpret this as no Clean the windscreen. driving activity. The following happens as soon as the vehicle ● The visibility of the camera is diminished ● If the radar sensor or the camera are cov- stops: due to weather factors, e.g. snow, or deter- ered or have been altered or damaged, the gent residue or some coating. Clean the system may intervene on the brakes or on ● All doors are unlocked. windscreen. the direction in an inappropriate manner. ● The interior lighting comes on. ● The visibility of the camera is diminished ● The Emergency Assist does not react to ● Depending on the equipment, an emer- due to accessories or adhesives. Leave the people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the gency call (eCall) is made. area around the camera’s field of vision free. same lane. ● The electronic parking brake is activated. ● The camera has been altered or damaged, e.g. because of damage caused to the wind- WARNING Connecting and disconnecting screen. Check for visible damage. Emergency Assist can be connected and dis- ● There is a fault or defect. Switch the engine If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inop- portunely, serious accidents and injuries connected in the infotainment system, in the off and on again. may occur. » assist services menu ››› page 86 .

245 Driving

● If the vehicle behaves differently than ex- Lane departure warning (Side ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to pected, interrupt the intervention of the the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit Emergency Assist by over-accelerating, Assist) with rear cross traffic visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- braking or moving the steering wheel. alert (RCTA) and door opening tions. ● Do not use Travel Assist or Lane Assist. ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times Have the system checked by a specialised warning (Exit Assist)* to be ready to intervene in the steering at workshop. any time. Introduction ● Pay attention to the indicator lamps that Note may come on in the external rear view mir- The lane departure warning (LCA) helps rors and on the instrument cluster, and fol- ● Automatic interventions by the Emergen- detect traffic that is at the rear of the vehi- low any instructions they may give. cy Assist on the brakes may be interrupted cle. by pressing the accelerator or brake or by ● The lane departure warning could react moving the wheel. The rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) helps to any special constructions that might be the driver when backing out of a parallel present to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. high ● Hazard warning lights that come on auto- parking spot and when manoeuvring. or irregular dividers. This may cause erro- matically can be switched off by pressing neous warnings. the accelerator or the break, moving the The door opening warning (EWA) alerts ● Never use the lane departure warning on steering wheel or pressing the hazard the occupant of a possible danger ap- warning light switch. unpaved roads. The lane departure warning proaching from behind when opening or has been designed for use on paved roads. ● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may when any of the vehicle’s doors are open. decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- complete stop. WARNING roundings. ● The control lamps of the lane departure ● When the Emergency Assist is activated, The smart technology incorporated into warning may have limited functionality due it is only available again after the ignition the lane departure warning (LCA) with rear to solar radiation. has been switched off and back on again. cross traffic alert (RCTA) and the door opening warning included cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of Note physics; it only works within the limits of the If the lane departure warning with rear system. Accidents and severe injury may cross traffic alert does not work as descri- occur if the lane departure warning or the bed in this chapter, stop using it and con- rear cross traffic alert are used negligently tact a specialised workshop. or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

246 Driver assistance systems

Control lamp It lights up the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. It lights up continuously: the lane departure warning has detected a vehicle in the blind spot. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or messages. Flashes ● Carry out the necessary operations.

A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane and CAUTION the turn signal has been engaged in the direction of the detected vehicle ››› . Failure to heed the control lamps and corresponding text messages when they light For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist up may result in damage to the vehicle. ››› page 240, a warning to switch lanes will also appear even though the turn signal has not been engaged Fig. 160 Control lamp of the lane departure warn- (Lane Assist “Plus” ››› page 248 ). ing. Lane departure warning (Side Assist) The control lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after ap- The lane departure warning uses radar sen- proximately 2 seconds. This is the time taken sors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle for the function check. ››› page 7. The system does this by measur- If there are no indications from the control ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles lamp of the lane departure warning, this and its speed differential. The lane departure means that the lane departure warning has warning will not work at speeds of less than not detected any other vehicles at the rear approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). area ››› . The lane width is not detected individually, When the exterior lighting is low, the intensi- but is rather pre-configured in the system. ty with which the control lamps come on is Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- Fig. 161 Control lamp of the lane departure warn- tween two lanes, the indications may be in- ing. dimmed. The user can modify the intensity of the control lamps with up to 5 levels in the correct. Furthermore, the system can detect infotainment system menu. vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if It lights up there are any), and can also detect stationary It turns on once briefly: the lane departure warning is WARNING objects such as dividers, and thus give an in- activated and ready to operate, i.e. when activating the correct indication. » If the warning lamps and the corresponding system. messages are ignored when they light up,

247 Driving

Light indication Driving situations The control lamp provides an indication on the corresponding side regarding the traffic situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp of the left- hand side ››› Fig. 160 indicates the traffic situation to the rear left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of the right-hand side ››› Fig. 161, indicates the traffic situation to the rear right of the vehicle. Keep the warning lamps zone of the lane departure warning free of objects, adhesives or the likes that may interfere with your visibility.

Lane assist Plus.

The Lane Assist Plus function can be used by  activating the Lane Assist ››› page 240 and Fig. 163 Schematic representation: Situation of an overtaking in the centre lane and then moving Side Assist functions. In this case its func- into the right-hand lane.  Indication of the lane tions are expanded as described below. Fig. 162 Schematic representation:  Passing situation with traffic behind the vehicle.  Indica- departure warning in the control lamp on the right If the driver initiates a lane change manoeu- tion of the lane departure warning in the control side. vre in a potential critical situation: lamp on the left side. In the following situations, an indication will ● The lamp flashes in the corresponding be displayed in the control lamp ››› Fig. 162 rear-view mirror even though the turn signal  (arrow) or ››› Fig. 163  (arrow): has not been activated. ● When being overtaken by another vehicle ● The steering wheel vibrates to warn the ››› Fig. 162 . driver of the risk of collision. ● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 163 ● torque is applied to correct the steering  with a speed differential of approx. and return the vehicle to its lane. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a

248 Driver assistance systems considerably higher speed, no indication will Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) displayed in the form of a red or yellow strip be displayed. at the back of the image of the vehicle on the infotainment system screen. This strip The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon- displays the side of the vehicle towards which er an indication will be displayed in the con- traffic is approaching in transverse direc- trol lamp, because the lane departure warn- tion1). ing takes into account the speed differential with other vehicles. Thus even though the Automatic braking to reduce damages distance from the other vehicle is identical, the indication will appear sooner in some ca- If the rear cross traffic alert detects that ses and later in others. someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehicle and the driver does Physical limitations inherent to the system not step on the brake, the system will engage Fig. 164 Schematic representation of the rear the brakes automatically. In some situations the lane departure warn- cross traffic alert assistant: zone monitored around ing may not interpret the traffic situation the vehicle while leaving a parking space. The parking system helps the driver by auto- correctly. I.e. in the following situations: matically engaging the brakes to reduce any Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rear damage. The automatic intervention on the ● on tight bends; bumper ››› page 222 to monitor the traffic brakes takes place when driving in reverse at ● in the case of lanes with different widths; crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph). After detecting that the vehicle is stationary, the system ● in areas with significant gradient changes; a parallel parking space or as it is being man- oeuvred, for example in very low visibility keeps it that way for around 2 seconds. ● in adverse weather conditions; conditions. After automatically braking to reduce dam- ● in the case of special constructions to the When the system detects a relevant vehicle age, the system will not be able to automati- side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di- on the road that is approaching the rear of cally brake again for approximately 10 sec- viders. the vehicle ››› Fig. 164 , an acoustic alarm onds. may sound if the relevance so requires it. You can interrupt the automatic braking by In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or also informed by means of a visual signal on the brake pedal in order to regain control of infotainment system display. This signal is the vehicle. »

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a parking system. 249 Driving

WARNING The brightness of the door opening warning indication cannot be adjusted. The smart technology incorporated into the rear cross traffic alert cannot overcome When you want to access the vehicle for the the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it first time, with the doors closed and locked, only works within the limits of the system. the function will be available 3 minutes after The parking assistant function should not the first opening of any of the doors. The tempt you into taking any risks. The system function will continue to be available as long is not a replacement for driver awareness. as the vehicle has the ignition connected ● The system should never be used in limi- and is not moving. ted visibility conditions or complicated After switching off the ignition, the function traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when Fig. 166 Door: warning lamp will remain available for approximately 3 mi- crossing multiple lanes. nutes. After that time, the control lamps will ● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi- The door opening warning (Exit Assist) warns occupants of a possible collision when light up indicating the deactivation of the cle's surroundings, since the system often function. fails to detect things such as bicycles or pe- opening the door when the vehicle is sta- destrians. tionary. The system monitors, within the limits of the system itself, the rear and side envi- WARNING ● The rear cross traffic alert itself will not ● brake the vehicle to a complete stop. ronment of the vehicle using the rear sen- Always pay close attention to the traffic sors ››› page 222 . It detects moving objects and the surroundings of the vehicle. The that approach from behind, such as cars door opening warning (Exit Assist) cannot ››› Fig. 165. replace the necessary attention to be paid Door opening warning (Exit Assist) by the vehicle’s occupants. The responsi- If a critical situation is detected when the bility for opening the doors and exiting the door is opened, it will be alerted by an vehicle always lies with the occupants of acoustic signal on the door speaker of the the same. corresponding side Fig. 166 . Additionally, ››› ● The door opening warning (Exit Assist) the control lamp of the lane departure warn- operates continuously as long as the vehi- ing of the corresponding door will flash. If cle ignition is on. Otherwise, the system is the door has already been opened and an- deactivated and the lamps light up briefly. other road user has been detected in a criti- ● It is possible that the traffic situation is cal situation, the control lamp of the lane not interpreted correctly and you cannot departure warning on the corresponding side will light up permanently.

Fig. 165 Graphic example 250 Driver assistance systems

be aware of all the objects that are ap- instrument cluster Assistants menu will be automatically deactivated and will be proaching, such as pedestrians. Always vis- ››› page 68. prevented from reactivating if the factory- ually monitor the traffic and the area sur- mounted tow hook is electrically connected rounding the vehicle. Open the Assistants menu in the infotain- to a trailer or other similar device. ment system. As soon as the driver starts to drive with a ●  Side Assist WARNING trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a ●  Door opening warning message will appear on the instrument panel The door opening warning (Exit Assist) is subject to system limits and cannot warn of ●  Rear cross traffic alert display indicating that the lane departure an imminent collision in all cases: warning, the rear cross traffic alert and the Open the Park Assist > Settings menu in the door opening warning are deactivated. Once ● If your vehicle is too deep in the parking infotainment system. the vehicle trailer has been disengaged, the space and the adjacent vehicles hide it. ●  Door opening warning lane departure warning, the rear cross traffic ● In certain circumstances, objects or peo- alert and the door opening warning will re- ●  Rear cross traffic alert ple who approach, e.g. on a bicycle or turn to the initial state prior to the moment scooter, are not detected. Open the Assistants menu on the instru- the trailer was electrically connected. ● The system does not react to stopped ob- ment cluster jects. If the towing hook is not factory-mounted, ●  Side Assist then the lane departure warning, the rear ●  Rear cross traffic alert cross traffic alert and the door opening warning will have to be deactivated manually Managing the assist systems If the verification box on the instrument pan- when driving with a trailer. el or the infotainment system is checked , Enabling and disabling the assist systems the functionality will be automatically activa- Side Assist, Exit Assist and the Rear Cross ted when switching on the ignition. Traffic Alert (RCTA) can also be switched on When the lane departure warning is ready to and off from the Assistants menu of the in- operate, the indications in the control lamps fotainment system. will turn on briefly as confirmation. Exit Assist and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) When the vehicle is restarted, the last ad- can also be found in the Park Assist Settings justment in the system will remain active. menu.

Side Assist and the Rear Cross Traffic Alert Trailer mode (RCTA) can also be switched off and on in the The lane departure warning, the rear cross traffic alert and the door opening warning 251 Driving

Braking and parking certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi- perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be cle may skid, with the danger of losing con- produced when braking. trol. Stop and seek technical assistance. Braking system ● If the  lamp lights up, alone or accom- Wet roads or road salt panied by a warning message on the instru- In certain situations (for example, on driving Control lamps ment panel display, please go immediately through flooded areas, in severe downpours to a specialised workshop to check the or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-  It lights up red brake pads and to replace them if they are tion could be delayed if the discs and pads worn. are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the Brake fluid level too low ››› page 297 or fault in the brakes should be “dried” by pressing the brake system. brake pedal several times.  Do not carry on driving! Information about the brakes At high speed and with the windscreen wip- It lights up red ers activated, the brake pads will briefly  New brake pads touch the brake discs. This takes place, al- Electronic parking brake ››› page 254 . For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200 though unnoticeable to the driver, at regular The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re- miles), new brake pads have not yet reached intervals to improve the response time of the leased. their maximum braking capacity, and need brakes when they are wet. to be “run in” first. However, you can com- The effectiveness of the brakes can also be  It lights up yellow pensate for the slightly reduced braking ef- temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven fect by applying more pressure on the brake Front brake pads worn. for some distance without using the brakes pedal. Avoid overloading the brakes while Contact a specialised workshop immediately. when there is a lot of salt on the road in win- running them in. ter. The layer of salt that accumulates on the WARNING discs and pads can be removed by gently ap- Wear ● If the brake warning lamp  does not go plying the brakes a few times. out or if it lights up when driving, the brake The rate of wear on the brake pads depends fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there a great deal on how you drive and the condi- Corrosion is a risk of an accident page 297, Brake tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is ››› There may be a tendency for corrosion to fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. a particular problem in urban traffic and form on the discs and dirt to build up on the Obtain technical assistance. short stretches, or with very sporty driving. brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently ● If the brake warning lamp lights up  to- Depending on the speed, the braking force or the brakes are not used very often. gether with the ABS lamp  this could be and the environmental conditions (e.g. tem- due to an ABS fault. When this function If the brakes are not used frequently, or if fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable to 252 Braking and parking clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly to the lack of assistance from the servo ● If the brake is subjected to high stresses, a few times at a moderately high speed ››› . brake. vapour bubbles may form in the brake system's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of Fault in the brake system WARNING the brakes. If the brake pedal travel should ever increase Any anomaly in the brake system can in- ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers suddenly, this may mean that one of the two crease the braking distance, with the re- could restrict the airflow to the brakes and brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to sulting risk of an accident. cause them to overheat. Before purchasing the nearest specialised workshop and have ● New brake pads and discs must be run in accessories please read the relevant in- the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re- and do not have the correct friction during structions. member that you will have to apply more the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced pressure on the brake pedal and allow for braking capacity may be offset by pressing CAUTION longer stopping distances. on the brake pedal a little harder. ● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving ● If you are driving on roads which have your foot on the pedal when it is not neces- Low brake fluid level been salted, braking effectiveness may be sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re- decreased. Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if sulting in longer stopping distances and the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid ● Brakes can overheat if used excessively greater wear. level is monitored electronically. on slopes. Before driving down a long steep ● Before driving down a long, steep gradi- slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se- change down into a lower gear or range. Brake servo lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine Therefore, using the engine brake relieves braking and relieves the brakes. If you still The brake servo increases the pressure you the brakes. have to use the brakes, it is better to brake apply to the brake pedal. It works only when ● Gentle continuous braking causes the firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes the engine is running. brakes to overheat and the braking dis- continuously. tance will increase. Apply and then release Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV) the brakes alternately. Note The electromechanical brake servo only ● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the ● works when the ignition is switched on and brake system only in a suitable traffic situa- If the brake servo is out of action, for example when the car is being towed, you will optimises the force of the foot by increasing tion. Do not put other road users in danger: have to press the brake pedal considerably the pressure that the driver exerts on the there is risk of causing an accident. harder than normal to make up for the lack brake pedal. ● Ensure the vehicle does not move while in of servo assistance. neutral, when the engine is stopped. The If the electromechanical brake servo is not ● braking distance is increased considerably If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac- working, the brake pedal must be pressed when the brake servo is not active. cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel harder, as the braking distance increases due covers, it is important that the flow of air to » 253 Driving

  the front wheels is not obstructed, other- red control lamp on the instrument panel pulling up the ››› Fig. 167 switch when wise the brakes can overheat. is always on. starting off. ● Release the button. The electronic parking brake is not disconnected until the  button is released. This Electronic parking brake (EPB) Disconnecting the electronic parking can facilitate starting off when a heavy load is brake towed ››› page 276 . ● Switch the ignition on. Automatic activation of the electronic ● Press the button  Fig. 167 . At the ››› parking brake when exiting the vehicle in- same time step hard on the brake pedal or, if correctly the engine is running, press the accelerator pedal slightly. In vehicles with automatic transmission, the electronic parking brake is activated auto- ● The control lamp of button ››› Fig. 167 (ar- matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly row) and the red  control lamp on the in- if: strument panel go out. ● The selector lever is in the D/S or R posi- Automatic release of the electronic park- Fig. 167 In the lower part of the centre console: tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate. ing brake upon moving off electronic parking brake button ● AND: the vehicle is stationary. The electronic parking brake is automatically ● AND: the driver door is open. The electronic parking brake replaces the switched off when starting if, after the driv- handbrake ››› . er's door is closed and the driver's seat belt Automatic activation of the electronic fastened, any of the following situations take parking brake when turning the ignition Applying the electronic parking brake place: off The electronic parking brake can be activa- ● A gear range is engaged or switched to an- This function can be deactivated through ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, other one and the accelerator pedal is lightly the Infotainment system ››› page 86 . even when the ignition is switched off. Acti- pressed. vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi- ● Emergency brake function cle. To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are exceptions that allow the automatic parking Only use the emergency brake function if ● Pull and hold the  ››› Fig. 167 button. brake to be released without the driver's seat you are unable to stop the vehicle with the ● The parking brake is activated when the belt being fastened. foot brake ››› . control light of button ››› Fig. 167 and the The parking brake can be prevented from being automatically released by continuously 254 Braking and parking

● Pull and hold the  ››› Fig. 167 button in Note ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri- this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At od of time with the engine running, for ex- the same time, an acoustic warning can be ● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be ample, when going up a slope, when stop- possible to disconnect the electronic park- heard. ped at traffic lights or in heavy traffic with in- ing brake. Use the jump-start ››› page 51 . ● To stop the braking process, release the termittent stops. ● When the electronic parking brake is ap-  button or press the accelerator. plied or released, noises may be heard. When connected, the Auto Hold function automatically prevents the vehicle from roll- ● The system performs automatic and au- WARNING ing when stationary without pressing the dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi- brake pedal. The improper use of the electronic parking cle if some time elapses without the elec- brake can cause accidents and serious in- tronic parking brake being used. After detecting that the vehicle is stationary jury. and the brake pedal has been released, the ● Never use the electronic parking brake to Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. Auto Hold Function driver can lift their foot off the brake pedal. Braking distances can be considerably longer, since, under certain circumstances, When the driver touches the accelerator only the rear wheels brake. Always use the pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv- foot brake. ing, the Auto Hold function releases the ● Never accelerate from the engine when a brake. The vehicle moves according to the gear range or a gear is engaged and the en- slope of the road. gine is running. The vehicle could move, If the vehicle is stationary and one of the even if the electronic parking brake is acti- conditions required by the Auto Hold func- vated. tion is impaired, it disconnects itself and the ● When the electronic parking brake is button's control light goes out ››› Fig. 168 . switched on or off, there is a slight move- The electronic parking brake connects auto- ment of the brake pedal. Be careful not to matically, if necessary, to park the vehicle Fig. 168 In the lower part of the centre console: position your foot under the pedal. safely . Auto Hold function button. ›››

CAUTION The indicator lamp of the Auto Hold Conditions for keeping the vehicle stationary with the Auto Hold function To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally ››› Fig. 168 button remains on when the Au- moving when parking it, first apply the to Hold function is connected. ● The driver door must be closed. electronic parking brake and then remove Once connected, the Auto Hold function as- ● The driver's seat belt must be fastened. your foot from the brake pedal. sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station- ● The engine is running. »

255 Driving

Switching the Auto Hold function on and 2. If the engine is running irregularly or an Stabilisation and brake assis- off anomaly is detected. tance systems Press the Auto Hold button ››› . The con- 3. If the engine stalls. trol lamp on the button goes out when the 4. If the accelerator is pressed Auto Hold function is switched off. Control lamps 5. If any of the tyres has only minimal contact with the ground, e.g. in the case of Automatically engaging and disengaging It lights up axle articulation.  the Auto Hold function Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by If the Auto Hold function was switched on via WARNING the system. the Auto Hold button before switching the The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the ABS The smart technology incorporated into ignition off, the function will remain on the fails, the lamp also lights up. the Auto Hold function cannot defy the following time the ignition is switched on. laws of physics; it only works within the lim- Flashes If the Auto Hold function was not switched its of the system. The greater convenience  provided by the Auto Hold function should on, it will automatically remain off next time ESC or TCS activated. the ignition is engaged. never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The Auto Hold function connects auto-  It lights up ● Never leave the vehicle running and with matically if the following conditions are the Auto Hold function switched on. TCS manually deactivated. met (all points must be met at the same ● The Auto Hold function cannot always time ››› ): Or: ESC in Sport mode ››› page 259 . keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down- 1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on Or: ESC manually deactivated ››› page 259 . brake pedal on a flat surface or on a slippery or frozen surfaces. slope.  It lights up 2. The engine rotates “correctly”. Note ABS faulty or does not work. Before entering a car wash, always switch The Auto Hold function is automatically off the Auto Hold function, because if the The control lamps light up together when turned off if the following conditions are electronic parking brake is automatically the ignition is switched on and should turn met: connected, it may cause damage. off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the 1. If any of the conditions mentioned on time taken for the function check. ››› page 255, Conditions for keeping the vehicle stationary with the Au- to Hold function are no longer met. 256 Braking and parking

Brake assist systems If the running gear or brake system is modi- Tractor-trailer sway mitigation* fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control Electronic Stability Control (ESC) severely limited. the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway. The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the the tendency to skid and improves the stabil- Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC The brake assist system can reduce the re- matically brake the towing vehicle within the detects critical handling situations, such as quired braking distance. The braking force is limits of the system and mitigate the sway. vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheel- automatically boosted if you press the brake Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available spin on the driving wheels. It stabilises the pedal quickly in an emergency. You must in all countries ››› page 282 . vehicle by braking individual wheels or by re- keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan- ducing the engine torque. The warning lamp ger has passed. Electronic engine torque management will flash on the instrument panel when the (XDS)  ESC is intervening . Traction control (TCS) When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system In the event of the wheels spinning, the TCS tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher (ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the reduces the engine torque to adapt to the speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the traction control system (TCS), electronic dif- road condition. This helps the car to start wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re- ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque con- moving, accelerate or climb a gradient. ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel. trol (XDS) and the tractor-trailer sway mitiga- This may mean that in certain situations the tion*. Electronic differential lock (EDL) torque delivered to the inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the oth- ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by chang- When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes er hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower ing the torque. the spinning wheel and directs the power to drive torque than it could transmit. This can the other driven wheel. This function is ac- The TCS can be deactivated when wheel spin cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this tive up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph). is desirable ››› page 259 . case the front axle, which results in under- To prevent the disc brake of the braked steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory. wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out Anti-lock brake system (ABS) The XDS can detect and correct this effect automatically if subjected to excessive loads. ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un- via the sensors and signals of the ESC. The vehicle can still be driven. The EDL will der braking until the vehicle has reached a switch on again automatically when the Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside virtual standstill. You can continue to steer brake has cooled down. wheel and counter the excess driving torque the vehicle even when the brakes are on full. of that wheel. This means that the requested Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do trajectory is much more precise. » not pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal pulsate while the ABS is working. 257 Driving

XDS works in combination with the ESC and Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV) on the selected driving programme and the is always active, even when TCS is switched With the ignition switched on, the electro- level of charge of the high-voltage battery. off, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis- mechanical brake servo supports the force If the braking effect caused by the recupera- connected. of the foot by increasing the pressure that tion is very intense, the vehicle’s brake lights the driver exerts on the brake pedal. When with turn on. The electric engine, when op- Multi-collision brake the brakes are applied by the driver assist erating as an alternator, can generate brak- The multi-collision brake consists of auto- systems, such as those regulated by the ACC ing torque on the front wheels based on the matic braking activated by the Airbag control (adaptive cruise control) or emergency brak- RPM and the temperature and charge level unit. It is activated when, in the event of an ing, the brake pedal may move downwards. of the high-voltage battery. accident, the Airbag control unit detects de- After disconnecting the ignition, the assis- These variable parameters cause fluctuating celerations above the activation level, and tance of the brake servo is progressively re- electric decelerations which are hydraulically braking is managed by the ESC system. duced. Once stopped, immobilise the vehi- compensated according to the driver’s de- cle to prevent it from moving. Please follow In the event of an accident, the multi-colli- sires. This function is called “brake blending” the parking instructions ››› page 260 . sion brake can help the driver by braking to and it combines mechanical braking with the avoid the risk of skidding during the accident If the electromechanical brake servo does engine brake effect. and causing other collisions. not work, the red symbol  indicating failure in the brake system appears in the instru- WARNING The following actions control automatic ment panel. When braking with the faulty braking during the accident: Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet electromechanical brake servo, vibration of ground can result in loss of vehicle control the brake pedal may occur. ● When the driver presses the accelerator, and serious injury to the driver and passen- the automatic braking does not take place. If the electromechanical brake servo is not gers. ● When the braking pressure through press- working, the brake pedal must be pressed ● The ESC, ABS, TCS, EDS and the electron- ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- harder, as the braking distance increases due ic torque control systems cannot exceed tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake to the lack of assistance from the servo the limits imposed by the laws of physics. automatically. brake. Always bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery roads. If you notice the systems ● Multi-collision braking will not be available 1) cutting in, you should reduce your speed if there is an anomaly in the ESC system. Brake blending immediately to suit the road and traffic The brake energy recuperation can generate conditions. Do not be encouraged to take a braking effect. This braking effect depends

1) Valid for hybrid vehicles 258 Braking and parking

● risks by the presence of more safety sys- Connecting and disconnecting the OR: in the infotainment system, press the  tems. If you do, an accident may occur. ESC and TCS function button > Driver assistance > ESC menu page 86 . In vehicles with a driver ● Please remember that the accident risk ››› information system* the corresponding indi- always increases if you drive fast, especially cation will be displayed. in corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow too close behind the vehicle in front When the TCS is disconnected the control of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDS and lamp  lights up on the instrument panel. the electronic torque control system cannot prevent accidents: risk of accidents! Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in ● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur- “Sport” mode faces (for example, icy or snow-covered). Despite the control systems, the driven ● In “Sport” mode, the ESC can be switched wheels could spin, affecting the stability of off and on by briefly pressing the  button on the vehicle: risk of accident! the centre console* ››› Fig. 169 . Fig. 169 In the lower part of the centre console: button to switch the ESC off/on ● OR: in the infotainment system, press the Note function button  > Driver assistance > ESC The ESC is switched on automatically when menu page 86 . In vehicles with a driver ● The ABS and TCS will only operate cor- ››› the engine is started, and only works when information system* the corresponding indirectly if the four wheels have identical tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius the engine is running and includes the ABS, cation will be displayed. of the tyres can cause the system to reduce EDS and TCS systems. When “Sport” mode is connected, the inter- engine power when this is not desired. The TCS function should only be switched ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle, ● The regulating processes of the systems off in situations in which traction is insuffi- and the traction control (TCS) interventions can make noises due to their operation. cient. are limited. In addition, the  control lamp ● If the warning lamp  or  lights up, Depending on the finishes and versions, lights up on the instrument panel. there could be a fault ››› page 80 . there is the possibility of disconnecting only ● Any modifications made to the vehicle the TCS or activating the ESC in “Sport” Disconnecting and connecting the ESC (for example, to the engine, brake system, mode. In some versions of the model, besides the running gear or to the combination of traction control system (TCS), the electronic wheels and tyres) may affect the operation Disconnecting and connecting the TCS stability programme (ESC) can also be of the ABS, TCS and EDS. ● The TCS can be switched on and off by switched off. » briefly pressing the  button on the centre console* ››› Fig. 169 .

259 Driving

● The ESC can be switched on and off by For your safety we recommend that you turn Parking briefly pressing the  button on the centre off the Offroad mode when it is not abso- console* ››› Fig. 169 . lutely necessary. To park the vehicle ● OR: in the infotainment system press  > To disconnect the “Offroad” mode, select a Driver assistance > ESC menu ››› page 86 . different driving mode. When parking your vehicle, all legal require- In vehicles with a driver information system* ments should be observed. the corresponding indication will be dis- WARNING played. Always note the following points when park- The ESC Sport mode should be activated ing the vehicle: When the ESC is disconnected the control only when traffic conditions and the ability warning lamp  lights up on the instrument of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding! ● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› . panel. ● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising ● Connect the electronic parking brake function will be limited to allow for a sporti- ››› page 254. er drive. The driving wheels could spin and ESC in “Offroad” mode ● Switch on the parking lock by pressing but- the vehicle could skid. Select the Offroad profile to switch it on ton P. ● If the ESC is deactivated, the vehicle sta- ››› page 217. The interventions of the ASR, as ● bilisation function is not available. Stop the engine and turn off the ignition. well as of the EDS and the ABS system adapt Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage to irregular terrain. the steering lock. Note In the following exceptional situations it may ● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with make sense to activate the Offroad mode to ● If the TCS is disconnected or the Sport you. allow the wheels to spin: mode is selected, cruise control* will be disconnected. Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines ● When “swinging” the vehicle to get it un- ● In ESC OFF mode, the ESC will be tempo- Before switching off the engine, rotate the stuck. rarily reactivated to assist the driver during steering wheel so that if the vehicle should ● Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces. braking and will then switch back to passive mode when the brake pedal is released (de- move, it will be held by the kerb. ● When driving on rough terrain with much pending on the model version). of the car's weight is lifted off the wheels ● On slopes, turn the front wheels so that (axle articulation). they are against the edge of the kerb. ● Steep descents with braking on unpaved ● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre terrain. of the road.

260 Help with parking and manoeuvring

WARNING Help with parking and ma- WARNING ● Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot The technology used in the park assist sys- exhaust system could ignite inflammable noeuvring tem involves a series of limitations inherent materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, in the actual system and in the use of ultra- spilt fuel or flammable materials. Assisted parking system (Park sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should ● Do not leave passengers inside a closed never tempt you to take any risk that may vehicle, they may not be able to open doors Assist)* compromise safety. The system is not a re- or windows. Locked doors hinder the possi- placement for driver awareness. bility of a rescue. Introduction ● Any accidental movement of the vehicle ● Children should not be left alone in the could result in serious injury. vehicle. They could tamper with the hand- The parking assist system is an additional ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all brake or the gears, which could cause the function of the ParkPilot ››› page 268 and times to suit visibility, weather, road and vehicle to move without control. helps the driver find a suitable parking space traffic conditions. from among the following types: ● Depending on weather conditions, it may ● Certain surfaces of objects and garments become extremely hot or cold inside the ● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen- do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- vehicle. This can be fatal. dicular and parallel spaces, nals. The system cannot detect, at least correctly, these objects or people wearing ● park driving forwards in suitable perpen- such clothes. dicular spaces, ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- ● exit a parking space driving forwards from a ted by external sound sources. In certain parallel space, circumstances this may prevent them from ● park in a suitable space driving forward on detecting people or objects. angle partially entering into the selected ● The ultrasound sensors may have blind parking space. The system will centre the ve- spots in which obstacles and people are not hicle in said parking space. detected. ● Monitor the area around the vehicle at all In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac- times, since the ultrasound sensors do not tory infotainment system, the front, rear and detect small children, animals or certain side areas are represented, and the position objects in all situations. » of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle. The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system and its use requires special attention by the driver ››› . 261 Driving

WARNING not apply it directly unless very briefly and ● To become familiar with the system and always from a distance of more than 10 cm. its functions, CUPRA recommends that you Quick turns of the steering wheel when practice operating the Park Assist system in parking or exiting a parking space with Park ● A registration plate or plate holder on the an area where there is not too much traffic Assist can cause serious injury. front with larger than the space for the registration plate, or a registration plate that is or in a car park. ● Do not hold the steering wheel during curved or warped can cause: manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space until the system requests it. Doing so disa- – False detections. bles the system during the manoeuvre, re- – The sensors to lose visibility. Description of the parking assist sys- sulting in the parking being cancelled. – Cancellation of the parking manoeuvre tem or defective parking. The components of the Park Assist system CAUTION ● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam- are the ultrasonic sensors located in the aged, the area corresponding to that group ● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic front and rear bumpers, the  to switch the sensors do not detect objects such as trail- of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and system on and off and the messages on the er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, cannot be activated until the fault is cor- instrument cluster display. or an open (or opening) rear lid, which rected. However, you can still use the sen- could damage the vehicle. sors of the other bumper as per usual. If there is a fault in the system, consult a spe- Prerequisites for parking ● Retrofitting of certain accessories to the cialist workshop. To do so, CUPRA recom- vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter- ● The traction control (TCS) must be switch- mends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer fere with the operation of the Park Assist ed on ››› page 259 . or any SEAT dealership. system and cause damage. ● Speed when passing next to the parking ● The Park Assist system uses as a refer- space: do not exceed approx. 50 km/h (31 ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob- Note mph). jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels ● In order to guarantee good system opera- ● Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me- are not damaged while parking. If necessa- tion, keep the ultrasound sensors of the tres when driving past the parking space. ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma- bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do ● noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle. not cover them with adhesives or other ob- Space length (parallel parking): vehicle length + 0.8 meters. ● The ultrasound sensors on the bumper jects. may be damaged or shifted in the event of a ● Certain sources of noise, such as rough ● Space width (angle parking): vehicle width collision, for example, when entering or ex- asphalt or paving stones and the noise of + 0.8 meters. iting a parking space. other vehicles can induce the Park Assist ● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn- (4 mph) when parking. The vehicle will per- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do ings. The presence of metal objects can al- form an automatic braking only once if this so affect the manoeuvre. speed is exceeded. If you exceed the speed 262 Help with parking and manoeuvring more than once, the Park Assist system ● TCS or ESC intervene with regulation. Trailer mode switches off. ● The driver door is opened. The Park Assist system cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted towing bracket Requirements for leaving the parking To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that page 276 is electrically connected to a  ››› space (only for parallel parking) none of these things occur and that the trailer. button on the infotainment system is pressed ● The traction control (TCS) must be switch- again. ed on ››› page 259 . After changing a wheel ● Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5 Special characteristics If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops metres. entering and exiting parking spaces correct- The Park Assist system is subject to certain ● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h ly, the circumference of the new wheel may limitations inherent to the system. For exam- (4 mph) when exiting the parking space. be different and the system may need to ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or ex- adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and it a parking space on sharp bends. Prematurely stopping or automatically in- takes place during driving. Making turns terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or While entering or exiting a parking space, a slowly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 exiting a parking space brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to mph]) for a few minutes may contribute to change between forward and reverse gears this adaptation process ››› in Introduc- Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for (depending on the case). In successive mation on page 261. parking or exiting a parking space in any of noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to the following cases: change gears, at the latest, when the contin- ● Press button  in the infotainment system, uous audible signal is given (object present  > Driver assistance > Park Assist system. at a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot. ● When exceeding a speed of approximately When the Park Assist system turns the steer- 7 km/h (4 mph) more than once. ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-  ● The driver takes control of the steering strument panel also displays the symbol . wheel. Keep the brake pedal depressed while the symbol remains on the dash panel display to ● The parking manoeuvre does not end turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. within 6 minutes from the activation of auto- This way, the system will require fewer ma- matic steering. noeuvres to complete the parking action. ● There is a fault in the system (the system is temporarily unavailable). ● The TCS is disconnected.

263 Driving

Selecting a parking type  Reverse angle parking. ● Follow the instructions displayed on the in-  Forward angle parking. strument panel while paying attention to traffic and drive the vehicle past the parking  Reverse parallel parking without driving space. past first: “Help me”.  Forward parking in a parking bay without Reverse parallel parking without driving driving past first. past first (type ) With this type of parking , press button  Selecting a parking type after passing in so that the system resolves the parking that front of the space has already been started. The system will on- After activating the Park Assist system and ly switch on if sufficient progress has been after detecting a parking space, the display made with the manoeuvre (the side sensor Fig. 170 On the instrument panel display: view of on the instrument panel proposes a parking must be able to detect the reference vehi- the parking assist system with reduced view. type. The Park Assist system selects the cle). If it is impossible to successfully com- parking type automatically. The selected plete the manoeuvre that has been started, type is shown on the instrument panel dis- the system itself will drive out of the parking play ››› Fig. 170 and on the Infotainment Sys- space before starting parking in a similar way tem screen. to type .

● The necessary conditions to park with Park Special case of driving forwards into a type Assist have to be met page 262 . ›››  parking bay without driving past first ● Press button  in the infotainment system, ● The necessary conditions to park with Park  > Driver assistance > Park Assist system. Assist have to be met ››› page 262 . ● When the system is connected, the symbol ● Move forward towards the parking space  on the Infotainment System screen is while paying attention to traffic and stop the highlighted. Additionally, the selected park- vehicle with the front part partially inside the ing type is shown on the instrument panel parking space. display. You can change the type of parking on the infotainment system display. ● Press button  once in the infotainment Fig. 171 On the instrument panel display: indica- system,  > Driver assistance > Park Assist tion of parking modes. ● If there are more spaces available, another system. space can be selected by clicking on it on Park assist has 5 parking modes: the infotainment system display. ● When the system is connected, the symbol  on the Infotainment System screen is  Reverse parallel parking. 264 Help with parking and manoeuvring highlighted. Additionally, the selected park- ● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro- ing mode is shown on the instrument panel duction on page 262. display without reduced display.

Parking with the parking assist system

Fig. 172 On the instrument panel display: parallel parking.  Finding a parking space.  Parking position.  Manoeuvring.

Fig. 173 On the instrument panel display: angle parking.  Finding a parking space.  Parking position.  Manoeuvring.

1 Message to move forwards 5 Message to press the brake pedal parking mode must be selected 2 Your vehicle 6 Progress bar ››› page 264. » 3 Parking space detected The necessary conditions have to be met to 4 Message to park park with Park Assist ››› page 262 and the

265 Driving

Parking ● Press the brake pedal until the parking as- Note ● Look at the display on the instrument pan- sist system completes the steering wheel If the manoeuvre is terminated premature- el to see if the space has been detected as turns; OR: until the symbol  goes out on ly during parking, the result may not be the the instrument panel screen. “appropriate” and if the correct position for best. parking has been reached ››› Fig. 172  ● Select first gear. or Fig. 173 . The space is considered ››› ● Move forward until the continuous ParkPi- “appropriate” if the display on the instru- lot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the ment panel shows the message to park 4 . Leaving a parking space with the reverse indication appears on the instrument ● Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, panel display. The Park Assist system steers parking assist system (only for parallel engage the reverse gear, or press the button the vehicle forward and back until it centres parking)  in the infotainment system,  > Driver as- it in the space ››› Fig. 172  or ››› Fig. 173 . sistance> Park Assist system. ● For best results, wait at the end of each ● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro- manoeuvre until the Park Assist system has duction on page 262. finished turning the steering wheel. The ● Please note the following message: Inter- parking manoeuvre ends when a corre- vention in active direction. Watch sponding message is displayed on the instru- your surroundings!. While you keep ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic watch around you, carefully start accelerat- signal sounds. ing up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). Dur- ing the parking manoeuvre, the system only Progress bars takes charge of the steering. You, as the The progress bar Fig. 174 On the instrument panel display: exit a driver, have to accelerate, engage the ››› Fig. 172 6 and ››› Fig. 173 6 on the parallel parking space. clutch if necessary, change gears and screen of the instrument panel displays the brake. relative distance to be covered. The greater 1 Your vehicle in reverse gear ● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- the distance, the fuller the progress bar. 2 Message giving the proposed manoeuvre When driving forward, the content of the nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indication to exit the parking space to move forward appears on the instrument progress bar decreases upwards, and when panel display ››› Fig. 172  or ››› Fig. 173 ; reversing, it decreases downwards. 3 Progress bar to indicate the distance left OR: reverse until the Park Assist finish- to cover ed message appears on the instrument panel display. The progress bar 6 indicates the distance to cover ››› page 266 .

266 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Leaving a parking space (parallel parking) turns; OR: press the brake pedal until the automatically. After automatically activating  The necessary conditions to exit a parking symbol goes out on the instrument cluster the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a space with Park Assist have to be met screen. parking space may continue. ››› page 263. ● Move forward until the continuous ParkPi- The brakes are only automatically activated lot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the once for each attempt to enter or exit a ● Press button  in the infotainment system, reverse indication appears on the instrument parking space. If the speed of approximately  > Driver assistance > Park Assist system. panel display. The Park Assist system steers 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the cor- When the system is connected, the symbol the vehicle forward and back until it can exit responding operation is halted.  on the Infotainment System screen is the space. highlighted. ● The vehicle can exit the space when a cor- Automatic braking to reduce damages ● Turn on the corresponding turn signal to- responding message is displayed on the in- Depending on certain conditions, the Park wards the road you will enter when exiting strument panel and, in some cases, an Assist system can automatically brake the ve- the parking space. acoustic signal sounds. Take charge of the hicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly ac- ● Engage the reverse gear, or press the but- steering with the turning angle set by the tioning and holding down the brake ped- ton  in the infotainment system. Park Assist system. al ››› . Following this the driver must press ● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro- ● Paying attention to the traffic, exit the the brake pedal. duction on page 262. Please note the fol- parking space. Automatic braking intervention to reduce lowing message: Automatic steering en- damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- abled Pay attention to your sur- ishing. roundings. While you keep watch around Automatic operation of the brakes by you, carefully start accelerating up to no the parking assist system WARNING more than 7 km/h (4 mph). When exiting the parking space, the system only takes charge The automatic braking intervention by Park Park Assist helps the driver by automatically Assist should never tempt you to take any of the steering. You, as the driver, have to braking in certain situations. accelerate, engage the clutch if necessary, risk that may compromise safety. The system is not a replacement for driver aware- change gears and brake. The driver is always responsible for braking in time . ness. ● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- ››› ● The Park Assist system is subject to cer- nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrument tain limitations inherent to the system. In panel display shows the forward indication. Automatic braking intervention to avoid exceeding the speed limit certain situations, the automatic braking The progress bar ››› Fig. 174 3 indicates the intervention may only work in a limited way distance to cover ››› page 266 . To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap- or not work at all. » ● Press the brake pedal until the parking as- prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leav- sist system completes the steering wheel ing a parking space, the brakes may activate 267 Driving

● Always be ready to use the brakes your- ● Always keep visual control of the sur- such as high kerbs that could damage the self! roundings: use the mirrors for additional underside of the vehicle are not detected. ● The automatic braking intervention will help. ● If the parking distance warning system is end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After- ignored, the vehicle could suffer consider- wards, brake the vehicle yourself. CAUTION able damage. Parking distance warning system functions ● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, can be affected by different factors that wheel arch and vehicle underbody can can cause damage: modify the orientation of the sensors. This Parking aid parking and ma- can affect the parking aid function. Have ● Under certain circumstances, the system noeuvring (ParkPilot) the function checked by a specialised does not detect or display certain objects: workshop. – Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences, ● Introduction A number plate or number plate holder posts and thin trees. with dimensions that exceed the space for – Objects that are located above the sen- the number plate, or a cured or deformed These assist systems help you when parking sors, such as protrusions in a wall. number plate can cause false detections or and manoeuvring: – Objects with certain surfaces or struc- a loss of visibility for the sensors. – Plus Parking Aid ››› page 269 . It is an as- tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- sistant that gives a visual and audio warning der snow. Note of obstacles detected in front and behind ● Certain surfaces of objects and garments ● the vehicle ››› page 269 . The display on the Infotainment system do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- screen shows a slight time delay. – nals. The system cannot detect these ob- Rear Parking Aid ››› page 272 . An audio ● In certain situations, the system can give and visual assistant that warns of obstacles jects or people wearing such clothes correctly. a warning even though there is no obstacle located behind the vehicle ››› page 272 . in the detected area: ● Sensor signals may be affected by exter- – Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces WARNING nal sound sources. This may prevent them from detecting people or objects. with long grass. ● Always pay attention, by looking directly, ● – External ultrasound sources, such as to traffic and the area around the vehicle. If the system warns you of the proximity of a low obstacle, please note that after be- other vehicles equipped with ultra- Assistance systems are not a replacement sound systems. for driver awareness. Responsibility always ing detected by the system, the obstacle in lies with the driver. question may disappear from the measure- – Heavy rain or snow, hail or dense ex- ment sensors as the vehicle moves closer, haust gases. ● The sensors have blind spots in which ob- and the system will no longer warn of its – If the number plate is not properly se- stacles and people are not detected. Pay presence. In certain circumstances, objects special attention to children and animals. cured to the surface of the bumper. 268 Help with parking and manoeuvring

– Gradient changes. Parking System Plus* B 0.60 m ● In order to guarantee good operation, C 1.60 m keep the sensors clean, free of snow and Description D 0.60 m ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects. As you approach the obstacle, the frequency ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- of the audible signals will increase. The signal ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: unless you do so very briefly, and always Stop! keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. If the separation is maintained, the warning ● Fitting certain accessories to the front of volume is reduced after about 2.5 seconds. the vehicle, such as a plate holder with advertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist. Parking Aid operation ● We recommend that you practice parking in an area without traffic. Fig. 175 Parking aid view on the Infotainment sys- Manually connecting and disconnecting ● The volume and tone of the signals and tem display. the parking aid indications can be changed page 272 . ››› ●  Parking aid plus assists the driver by giving Press the function button > Driver as- ● Please observe information on towing a visual and audio warnings about obstacles sistance> Parking Aid. trailer ››› page 273 . detected in front of and behind the vehicle. Automatic connection of Parking Aid The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When ● Select reverse gear. an obstacle is detected, it is indicated by audible signals and in the Infotainment system ● OR: if you drive forward at a speed of less ››› Fig. 175. than 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter an obstacle, it is detected when it is optically When moving close to an obstacle, it is pos- approx. less than 95 cm. away, or acoustical- sible to know if the obstacle is in front of the ly approx. 50 cm. away. If the automatic con- vehicle or behind it by choosing different nection is activated, a reduced display is sounds. shown. The approximate measurement range of the ● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis- sensors is: tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approx depending on whether or not an obsta- A 1.20 m cle is detected) » 269 Driving

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid Automatic activation ● Switch the ignition on. ● Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster. ● Press the function button  > Driver as- When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto- ● OR: move the selector lever to position P. sistance> Parking Aid. matically, a diagram of the vehicle and the ● Select Automatic activation. If the box is segments will appear on screen. This func- checked, the function is connected. Temporary suppression of sound in Park- tion will be available unless the user has de- ing Aid activated it. If activated automatically, an audible sound ● Press the  function button. It only operates every time the speed is re- warning will only be given when obstacles in ● OR: activate the electronic parking brake. duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap- time. prox. Change from reduced view to full view If disabled using the button  in the info- CAUTION ● Engage the reverse gear if your vehicle is tainment system ( > Driver assistance> equipped with a reversing camera. Parking Aid) to be automatically activated The automatic connection of the Parking Aid only works when you are driving slowly. ● OR: press the car icon on the reduced again, one of the following actions must be If driving style is not adapted to the circum- view. taken: stances, an accident and serious injury or ● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis- ● Switch off the ignition and switch it on damage may be caused. tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm ap- again. prox depending on whether or not an obsta- ● cle is detected). OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph) approx. Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear ● OR: move the lever into position P and View Camera “RVC”) pack again. ● Select reverse gear. ● OR: switch the automatic activation on and off in the Infotainment system. ● OR: press the RVC button on the Infotain- 1) ment System screen . The automatic activation of the parking aid A short confirmation signal will be heard and can be switched on and off in the Infotain- the button symbol will light up when the sys- ment system››› page 82››› page 86 : tem is switched on.

1) The RVC button will only be displayed when reverse gear is engaged. 270 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Visual indication segments If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way, Error messages the corresponding audible warning will sound. If a an error or fault message appears on the instrument cluster in Park Assist, there is a When the penultimate segment is displayed, fault. the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obstacles are repre- If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- sented in red (including those out of the necting the ignition, it will not be indicated path). Stop the vehicle! ››› in Introduction next time the parking aid is connected. on page 268, in Introduction on ››› If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in page 268 ! the areas A and B are displayed ››› Fig. 175 . If a front sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C and D will be displayed. Symbol Fig. 176 Parking aid view on the Infotainment sys- Setting the indications and audio sig-  tem display. is displayed. nals We recommend taking the vehicle to a spe- The optical indication of the segments works cialised workshop to have the fault repaired. as follows: The indications and acoustic signals are set in the Infotainment system: function button – Greysegments: the obstacle is more  > Driver assistance> Parking aid: than approx. 30 cm away from the path Trailer mode or in the direction opposite to travel. Setup They are also displayed when the elec- On vehicles with a factory-mounted trailer Automatic activa- tronic parking brake is activated. On/off hook, when the trailer is connected, the rear tion sensors will not activate when reverse gear is – Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on Volume in the front and rear engaged or button  is pressed in the Info- the vehicle’s path and are at a distance Front volume* area. tainment system ( > Driver assistance > of less than approx. 30 cm away. Parking aid). Therefore, any objects behind – Red segments: obstacles are less than Rear volume* Volume in the rear area. or to the side of the vehicle will not be indi- approx. 30 cm away. When the parking aid is cated on the screen and no audio signals will switched on, the volume of sound. A wake will indicate the anticipated forward Adjust volume the audio source will be re- or backward trajectory, depending on the duced, depending on the se- The screen will only display objects detected engaged gear. lected option. at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.

271 Driving

Manoeuvre braking function* pears on the Parking aid screen of the Info- If the separation is maintained, the warning tainment system. volume is reduced after about 2.5 seconds. The emergency braking function is used to ● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or minimise damage in the event of a collision. bonnet are opened. Parking Aid connection Depending on the equipment, if the Parking ● Select reverse gear. Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring function activates emergency braking when Rear parking aid* Parking Aid disconnection it detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path ● Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster. that could cause a collision, driving forwards ● OR: move the selector lever to position P, or in reverse. Description N or D. The function will not brake if the Parking Aid The rear parking aid is an optical and audi- is activated automatically. For the system to ble assistant that warns of obstacles located Setting the indications and audio signals operate, manoeuvring speed must be be- behind the vehicle. The indications and acoustic signals are set tween 2.5-7 km/h (1.5-4 mph) for the front in the Infotainment system: function button area and between 1.5-7 km/h (1-4 mph) for There are sensors integrated in the rear  > Driver assistance> Parking aid. the rear. bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible and visible warnings on Following an intervention, the braking while the Infotainment system. Setup manoeuvring function will be inactive in the same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once Make particularly sure that the sensors are Rear volume* Volume in the rear area. not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s When the parking aid is the like, as this could affect the system's op- position is changed, the function will be ac- switched on, the volume of tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations ap- eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 318 . Adjust volume the audio source will be re- ply. The approximate measurement range of the duced, depending on the selected option. The braking while manoeuvring function is rear sensors is: set in the Infotainment system: function but- ● Side area: 0.60 m Error messages ton  > Driver assistance> Parking aid. ● Central area: 1.60 m If a an error or fault message appears on the instrument panel in Parking assist, there is a Temporary suppression of emergency As you approach the obstacle, the frequency fault. braking of the audible signals will increase. The signal ● When the function is deactivated with the will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- Braking while manoeuvring button that ap- Stop! ››› in Introduction on page 268, necting the ignition, it will not be indicated ››› in Introduction on page 268! next time the parking aid is connected. 272 Help with parking and manoeuvring

We recommend taking the vehicle to a spe- seen on the screen and could damage the Note cialised workshop to have the fault repaired. vehicle. ● It is important to take great care and pay ● The reverse assist has blind spots where it special attention if the driver is not familiar Towing device cannot see people or objects. Monitor the with the system. vehicle's surrounding area at all times. In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket ● The reverse assist reference lines disap- device from the factory, when the trailer is ● The system is not a replacement for driv- pear when the rear lid is open. connected, the parking aid will not be activa- er awareness. Supervise the parking ma- ted when reverse gear is engaged. noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area at all times. Introduction ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen. Reverse Assist (Rear View Cam- A camera installed in the rear lid handle as- ● The images are only two-dimensional. sists the driver with reverse parking or ma- era)* Protruding objects or holes in the road, for noeuvring ››› page 224 . example, are more difficult to detect or Operating and safety warnings may not be seen at all. The camera image is viewed together with orientation lines projected on the Infotain- ● Vehicle load modifies the representation ment system screen. Part of the bumper can WARNING of the guide lines. The width represented by the lines decreases with vehicle load. be seen at the bottom, which can be used by ● The reverse assist does not make it possi- Pay special attention to the surroundings the driver as a reference point. ble to precisely calculate the distance from when the inside of the vehicle of the lug- obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys- gage compartment are loaded. Reverse assist modes tem's own limits, hence its negligent use ● In the following situations, objects or Depending on the equipment, the following may cause serious accidents and injuries if other vehicles appear to be further away or used without due care. The driver should modes are available: closer than they actually are. Pay special be aware of his/her surroundings at all attention: ● Angle parking: reverse parking perpendic- times to ensure safe driving. – If moving from a flat surface to a slope ular to the road. ● The camera lens expands and distorts the and vice-versa. ● : field of view and displays the objects on the Assistance function for hitching a trailer screen in a way that is different from reality. – If the vehicle is heavily loaded. helps to hitch a trailer. Distance perception is also distorted. – When the vehicle approaches objects ● Cross traffic: traffic is monitored in a trans- ● Due to the screen resolution or light con- that are not on the ground surface or verse direction. ditions, some items may be blurry or not that protrude from it. These objects displayed at all. Take care with thin posts, may be outside the camera angle when fences, railings or trees that might not be reversing. 273 Driving

Connecting and disconnecting  Adjust the display: brightness, contrast Requirements and colour. Connect the reverse assist  Switch to park assist ››› page 268 To park with reverse assist, the following re- ● Select reverse gear. quirements must be met: Display/hide the parking aid view ● OR: in the infotainment system select  > | ● Do not exceed a speed of approx. 15 km/h Driver assistance> Parking aid. (9 mph). Guide lines ● Parking space width: vehicle width + Disconnect the reverse assist Green horizontal lines: extension of the vehi- 0.15 m (without counting the mirrors). Drive forward at least 15 km/h (9 mph). cle. To display a real image, the following require- Yellow lines: vehicle path depending on the ments must be met: steering angle. Shown on the display ● The luggage compartment rear door is Assistance function for hitching a trailer closed. The system’s functions and representations On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing de- ● The surroundings are on a flat surface. may vary depending on the equipment. vice, this function can be used to move the ● The vehicle should not be loaded very The assistant's image view changes when the vehicle close to a tow bar. heavily at the rear. factory-fitted tow hitch is electronically con- Auxiliary lines are shown in the infotainment nected to a trailer . ››› page 282 system.

Reverse assist functions and symbols Green lines: distance to the tow hitch. The distance between the lines is approx. 0.30 m. When the reverse assist is connected, you can make adjustments using the function Orange line: precalculated direction of the buttons. Some adjustments are equipment- tow hitch depending on steering wheel rota- dependent. tion.

 Exit the current display Cross traffic  Switch to angle parking ››› page 275 This visualization helps to monitor traffic behind the vehicle and can be used, for exam-  Switch to the trailer hitching assistance ple, when exiting garages or narrow exits. function  Switch to cross traffic

274 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parallel parking Parking ● The vehicle has some type of damage in ● In the infotainment system select  > the camera area, e.g. due to a parking im- Driver assistance> Parking aid before pass- pact. ing in front of the selected parking space. ● The field of view of the camera is blocked ● With reverse assist connected and in work- by an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier system. ing order, press the function button . ● Changes have been made to the paint in ● Place the vehicle in front of the parking the camera area, or structural modifications have been made to a component such as space ››› Fig. 177 2 . the running gear. ● Reverse while turning the steering wheel so that the yellow lines enter the parking space. Camera with no visibility, fault message, The green and yellow lines must match the the system disconnects side boundary lines 3 . ● Clean the camera or remove possible ad- ● Stop the vehicle when the red line has hesives or accessories from it ››› page 319 . reached the rear boundary 4 . ● Check for visible damage.

Possible solution Fig. 177 Display on the Infotainment system Problems and solutions screen.: parking with reverse assist. ● Temporarily disconnect the system. The system behaves differently than ex- ● Check if one of the causes indicated above Key to the Fig. 177: pected has occurred.  Finding a parking space There can be several causes: ● Once the source of the problem has been  Go to the selected parking space ● The camera is dirty ››› page 319 . In addi- eliminated, the system may be reconnected.  Centre the vehicle inside the parking tion to dirt and snow, camera visibility can be ● If the system still behaves unpredictably, space reduced by detergent residue or any type of have it checked by a specialised workshop. coating. 1 Road ● The system requirements must be met 2 Parking space ››› page 274. 3 Lateral boundary of the parking space ● The camera is covered with water. 4 Rear boundary of the parking space ● The factory-fitted towing bracket must not be electrically connected to a trailer ››› page 282. 275 Driving

the Start-Stop system operates as normal. the trailer with the maximum authorised Towing bracket device* No special characteristics need to be taken drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing into account. bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit. Trailer mode If the system does not recognise the trailer or the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted WARNING Introduction by CUPRA, the Start-Stop system must be disconnected by pressing the corresponding Never use the trailer to transport people, Take into account country-specific regula- button in the lower part of the centre con- since it would put their life in danger and is tions about driving with a trailer and the use sole before driving with the trailer, and it also prohibited. of a towing bracket. should remain off for the rest of the jour- The vehicle has been developed primarily for ney ››› . WARNING carrying people, although it can also be used Undue use of the towing bracket may cause to tow a trailer if fitted with the correspond- Vehicles with driving profile selection injury and accidents. ing technical equipment. This additional load If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use ● Only use the towing bracket if it is in a has an effect on the useful life, fuel con- of the Eco driving profile is not recommen- perfect state of repair and is properly se- sumption and vehicle performance and in ded. You are advised to select another of the cured. some cases can reduce the service intervals. available driving profiles before beginning to ● Never modify or repair the towing bracket Driving with a trailer requires more force drive with a trailer. in any way. from the vehicle, and thus more concentra- ● In order to reduce the danger of injury in Trailer weight/drawbar load tion from the driver. the event of rear-end collisions and to In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists both the vehicle and the trailer. you do not load the trailer up to the maxi- when parking the vehicle, cover or remove mum permitted trailer weight, you can then the tow hook when you are not using a trailer. Maximum vertical load technically permit- climb correspondingly steeper slopes. ● ted on the coupling device The maximum trailer weights listed are only Never fit a towing bracket “with weight distribution” or “load compensation”. The applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above The maximum vertical load technically per- vehicle has not been designed for this type sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en- mitted from the trailer draw bar on the tow- of towing bracket. The towing bracket gine performance and the ability to climb ing bracket's tow ball is 80 kg. could fail and the trailer could be released slopes, the tow load decreases proportional- from the vehicle. Vehicles with the Start-Stop system ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for every If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing 1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate bracket or one that is retrofitted by CUPRA, 276 Towing bracket device*

WARNING system must be disconnected manually Technical requirements whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise Driving with a trailer and transporting the brake system could be damaged and Vehicles that are factory-mounted with a heavy or large objects can affect driving could consequently cause a serious acci- towing device meet all the technical and le- properties and even cause an accident. dent or injury. gal requirements for driving with a trailer ● Always secure the load properly using ● Always disconnect the Start-Stop system ››› page 282. belts or straps that are suitable and in good manually when using a towing bracket that condition. If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing has not been fitted by a CUPRA workshop. bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and the maximum authorised load of the trailer traffic conditions. Note that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity are ● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al- the trailer and must be properly secured to more likely to overturn than those with a ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing low one. ››› page 91. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off. bracket that has been authorised by CUPRA ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. for this vehicle. Always check and take into ● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's ● Take great care when overtaking. account the towing bracket manufacturer's first 1000 km ››› page 218 . ● Reduce speed immediately if you notice instructions. ● CUPRA recommends that, if possible, the that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. tow hook be removed or covered when it is Towing bracket fitted on the bumper ● Never drive at more than 80 km/h not going to be used. In the event of a rear- (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more end collision, the damage to the vehicle Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir- could be greater if the tow hook is fitted. to the area where the bumper is mounted. cumstances). This also applies in countries ● Some retrofitted towing brackets cover The towing bracket should not impair the where driving at higher speeds is permit- the rear towing eye. In these cases, the bumper's function. Do not make modifica- ted. Take into account the speed limit for towing eye should not be used for tow- tions or repairs to the exhaust system or the vehicles with trailers in the corresponding starting or for towing other vehicles. For brake system. Make regular checks to ensure country, as it could be less than the speed this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit- that the towing bracket is secure. limit for vehicles without a trailer. ted with a towing bracket, always keep the ● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it. Engine cooling system vehicle and trailer while accelerating. Driving with a trailer increases the load on the engine and cooling system. The cooling WARNING system should have sufficient coolant and be If the towing bracket has been retrofitted prepared for the additional effort involved in by a non-CUPRA workshop, the Start-Stop driving with a trailer. » 277 Driving

Trailer brakes WARNING Hitching and connecting a trailer If the trailer has its own brake system, please If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is take the relevant legal requirements into ac- not the right one, the trailer could become count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys- detached from the vehicle and cause seri- tem to the vehicle's brake system. ous injury.

Tow cable CAUTION Always use a cable between the vehicle and ● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- the trailer . ››› page 278 rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Trailer tail lights ● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric Fig. 178 Schematic representation: assignment of The trailer's rear lights should comply with current, the vehicle's electronic system the pins of the trailer's electrical socket. the statutory safety regulations ››› page 278 . may be damaged. Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- Pin Meaning to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not tem directly to the electrical connections sure that the trailer's electrical connection is of the tail lights or any other power sour- 1 Left turn signal correct, have it checked by a specialised ces. Only use the connections intended for providing electric current to the trailer. 2 Rear fog light workshop. To do so, CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any 3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 SEAT dealership. 4 Right turn signal

Exterior mirrors 5 Rear light, right If you cannot see the area behind the trailer 6 Brake lights with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehi- 7 Rear light, left cle, additional mirrors will have to be installed in accordance with the regulations of the 8 Reverse lights country in question. The exterior mirrors should be adjusted before you start driving 9 Permanent live and must provide a sufficient field of vision at 10 Live charge cable the rear. 11 Earth for pin 10

278 Towing bracket device*

Pin Meaning that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always However, make sure that the cable does not turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the 12 Unassigned rub on the ground while driving. tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off.

13 Earth for pin 9 Trailer tail lights Trailers with LED tail lights

Power socket for trailer Always check the trailer's rear lights to en- For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED sure they are working correctly and that they rear lights cannot be connected to the anti- The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power comply with the relevant safety regulations. If theft alarm system. socket for the connection between the trail- you connect the trailer to the factory-moun- When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does er and the vehicle. With the engine running, ted system, when you turn on the rear fog not go off when the electrical connection electrical devices on the trailer receive pow- lamp, the fog lamp of the towing vehicle will with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with er from the electrical connection (pin 9 and turn off to turn on the trailer fog lamp. pin 10 of the trailer power socket). light-emitting diodes.

If the system detects that a trailer has been Include in the anti-theft alarm WARNING connected, the consumers on the trailer will The trailer is included in the anti-theft sys- If the cables are improperly or incorrectly receive electricity through this connection tem if the following conditions are met: (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. connected, it may lead to an excessive amount of current supplied to the trailer, This powers, for example, the trailer's interior ● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an which can cause abnormalities in the entire lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in anti-theft alarm and towing bracket. vehicle electronic system, as well as acci- a caravan only receive electrical power if the ● If the trailer is electrically connected to the dents and serious injuries. engine is running (through pin 10). towing vehicle through the trailer power ● Ensure that any repairs that need to be To avoid overloading the electrical system, socket. carried out on the electrical system are you cannot connect the ground wires of pin ● If the electrical systems of the vehicle and carried out by a specialised workshop. 3, pin 11 or pin 13. trailer are in perfect condition and have no ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you faults or damage. tem directly to the electrical connections will need to use an adapter cable. In this case ● If the vehicle is locked with the key and the of the tail lights or any other power sour- the function corresponding to pin 10 will not anti-theft alarm is activated. ces. be available. When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- WARNING gered if the electrical connection with the Tow cable trailer is cut off. Contact between the pins of the trailer The tow rope must always be securely fixed power socket can cause short circuits, to the towing vehicle and loose enough so overloading of the electrical system or »

279 Driving

failure of the lighting system, and conse- Trailer loading Gross combination weight of the towing quently can cause accidents and serious in- vehicle and trailer juries. Technically permissible maximum trailer The gross combination weight is the actual ● Never connect the pins of the trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual power socket to each other. device weight of the loaded trailer. The technically permissible maximum trailer ● Make sure any work on bent pins is car- In some countries trailers are classified into weight is the weight that the vehicle can ried out by a specialised workshop. distinct categories. CUPRA recommends ob- tow. The vertical load on the coupling is ››› taining information from a specialised work- exerted vertically from above on the hook of CAUTION shop regarding which type of trailer is most the towing bracket. suitable for your vehicle. Do not leave the trailer connected to the vehicle when parked; place it on its support The information on the maximum trailer wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or weight and vertical load on the coupling de- Trailer loading falls due, for example, to a variation of the vice contained in the type plate of the towing The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will bracket are experimental values only. The must be balanced. In order to do this, the be placed on the towing bracket and the correct figures for your specific model, load must be as close as possible to the max- trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer which may be lower than these figures, are imum vertical load technically permissible on can be damaged. given in the vehicle documentation. The in- the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis- formation in the vehicle documentation tributed between the back and front of the Note takes precedence at all times. trailer: To promote safety while driving, CUPRA rec- ● In case of anomalies in the electrical sys- ● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy ommends making the most of the maximum tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in objects are as near to the axle as possible or the anti-theft alarm system, have them in- vertical load technically permissible on the above it. spected by a specialised workshop. coupling device ››› page 276 . An insufficient ● Secure the trailer load properly. ● If the trailer accessories consume energy vertical load has a negative influence on the through the power socket to the trailer and behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer. Tyre pressure the engine is turned off, the battery will The vertical load increases the weight on the discharge. rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca- Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac- ● If the vehicle battery is running low, the pacity. cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec- electrical connection with the trailer will be ommendations. automatically cut. When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the towing vehicle with the maximum allowable pressure ››› page 306 . 280 Towing bracket device*

WARNING Specific features of driving with a trailer ● Press the  button once to disconnect the electronic parking brake ››› page 254 . If the maximum permissible axle weight, ● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake ● the maximum load technically permissible gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre- Move the selector lever to the D/S on the coupling point, the maximum au- vent the jerking that can be caused by the ››› page 207position. thorised vehicle weight or the gross combi- locking of trailer wheels. ● Pull out the  button and hold it in that nation weight of the towing vehicle and ● Due to the gross combination weight of position to immobilise the towing vehicle and trailer are exceeded, accidents and serious the towing vehicle and trailer, the braking trailer with the electronic parking brake. injuries may occur. distance increases. ● Release the brake pedal. ● Never exceed the values indicated! ● When going down a slope, go into a lower ● Start driving slowly. ● The actual weight on the front and rear gear (in tiptronic automatic gearbox mode) ● Do not release the  button until the en- axles must never exceed the maximum to take advantage of the braking power pro- gine has sufficient power to start driving. permissible axle weight. The weight on the vided by the engine. Otherwise, the braking front and rear axles must never exceed the system could overheat and even fail. maximum permissible weight. WARNING ● The trailer weight, as well as the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may lead to loss of control of the vehicle and se- WARNING and trailer, change the centre of gravity and rious injury. A shift in weight could jeopardize the sta- the properties of the vehicle. ● Driving with a trailer and transporting bility and security of the towing vehicle and ● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trail- heavy or large objects will change the vehi- trailer, which could lead to accidents and er is loaded, then the load distribution is in- serious injuries. cle handling and braking distances. correct. Under these conditions, drive slowly ● Always drive cautiously and carefully. ● Always load the trailer correctly. and with extra caution. Brake earlier than usual. ● Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good Hill starts with a trailer ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all condition. times to suit visibility, weather, road and Depending on the slope of the hill and the traffic conditions. Slow down, especially combination weight of the towing vehicle when driving down hills or slopes. and trailer, the vehicle might start rolling ● Accelerate with particular care and cau- Driving with a trailer backwards slightly when you first start up. tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu- For hill-starting with a trailer, do the follow- vres. Adjusting the headlights ing: ● Take great care when overtaking. Reduce The front part of the vehicle may be raised speed immediately if you notice that the when the trailer is connected and the light ● Press and hold the brake pedal. trailer is swaying, however slightly. » may dazzle the rest of the traffic. 281 Driving

● ● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing The maximum vertical load technically ● When driving on surfaces with poor grip, vehicle and trailer while accelerating. permissible is not being exceeded on the the trailer can even interfere with the sta- coupling device. ● Take into account the speed limit for ve- bility system. hicles with a trailer, as it could be lower ● The trailer has a rigid draw bar. ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity can than for vehicles without a trailer. ● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equip- tip over without having previously weaved. ped with a mechanical overrun brake. ● If a trailer is not attached, but a connector is plugged into the power socket (e.g. Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and WARNING installation of a bicycle rack with lights), repeated automatic braking may occur in ex- The enhanced safety provided by the elec- trailer combination treme driving conditions. tric stability control of the vehicle and trail- The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer er should not lead you to take any risks that combination is an additional function of the could compromise your safety. electronic stability control (ESC). ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all Electrically unlocking trailer times to suit visibility, weather, road and If the system detects that the trailer is weav- traffic conditions. hook* ing, it intervenes to reduce the swaying of the trailer. ● Accelerate with caution when the road is slippery. Description Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa- ● When adjusting any settings, stop accel- tion requirements erating. ● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a towing bracket or has been retro-fitted with WARNING a compatible towing bracket. The electric stability control for the vehicle ● The ESC and the TCS are switched on. The and trailer may not correctly detect all driv- control lamp  or  is not lit up on the in- ing conditions. strument cluster. ● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili- ● The trailer is connected to the towing vehi- sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al- cle through the trailer power socket. so switched off. ● The stability system does not always de- ● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h Fig. 179 On the left side of the luggage compart- tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise ment: button for unlocking the tow hook. (approx. 37 mph). these correctly.

282 Towing bracket device*

● The towing bracket’s hook is located in the Open the rear lid. ● Never use a tool or instrument while the bumper. Tow hooks for electrical unlocking ● Pull the ››› Fig. 179 button briefly. The tow tow hook is moving. cannot be removed. hook unlocks electrically. ● Never press the ››› Fig. 179 button when There should be no person, animal or object ● Turn the tow hook under the bumper with there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or in the path of the tow hook ››› . your hand until you feel and hear that it en- when a carrier system or other accessories gages and the control lamp on the button re- are mounted on the tow hook. Unlocking the tow hook and removing it mains on continuously. ● If the tow hook is not attached properly, ● Stop the vehicle and connect the electron- ● Close the rear lid. do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised workshop and have the towing bracket ic parking brake page 254 . ››› checked. ● Switch off the engine. The control lamp  ● If you detect any fault in the electrical ● Open the rear lid. ● If the warning light on the button system or in the towing bracket, contact a Fig. 179  flashes, this means that the ● Pull the Fig. 179 button briefly. The tow ››› specialised workshop and ask them to ››› tow hook has not been attached properly or hook unlocks electrically and automatically check it. is damaged. turns outwards. The button's control lamp ››› ● If the ball has a diameter of less than 49 flashes. ● If the warning lamp ››› Fig. 179  remains mm at any one point, do not use the towing on with the rear lid open, the tow hook is bracket under any circumstances. ● Finish remove the tow hook by hand until correctly in place both when extracted and you feel and hear that it has engaged and the when covered. control lamp on the button stays on. CAUTION ● Close the rear lid. The control light of the lamp switches off ap- If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure or steam devices, do not point the jet di- ● Hitching and connecting a trailer proximately 1 minute after closing the read rectly towards the retractable tow hook or page 278. lid. ››› the trailer power socket, as this may dam- WARNING age the joints or remove the grease neces- Retracting the tow hook sary for lubrication. Undue use of the towing bracket may cause ● Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic injury and accidents. parking brake. Note ● Only use the tow hook if it is properly en- ● Switch off the engine. gaged. At extremely low temperatures, the tow ● Unhook the trailer and interrupt the elec- ● Always ensure that no person, animal or hook may be impossible to operate. In this trical connection between it and the vehicle. object is to be found in the path of the tow case, place the vehicle in a warmer location If you are using an adapter, remove it from hook. (for example, a garage). the trailer's power socket.

283 Driving

Fitting a bicycle carrier on the retract- Note Retrofitting a towing bracket able towbar CUPRA recommends removing, as far as possible, all removable parts of the bicycles Description The maximum allowed weight of the carrier before setting off. These parts include, for system, including the load, is 80 kg. The car- example, baskets and saddlebags, child rier system should not protrude more than seats or batteries. This improves aerody- 700 mm backwards from the spherical head. namics and the centre of gravity of the rack Only carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes system. can be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicycles must be mounted as close to the vehicle as possible (tow hook).

WARNING The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bicycle rack mounted on the tow hook can cause accidents and injury. ● Never exceed the maximum weight or the limits indicated above. ● The bicycle rack may not be mounted to the neck of the hook below the ball because, due to the shape of the neck and depending on the rack model, the rack could be incorrectly mounted on the vehicle. ● Always read and take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account.

CAUTION Fig. 180 Limits and attachment points for retrofit- If the maximum weight and limits indicated ting a towing bracket. above are exceeded, the vehicle may suffer considerable damage. CUPRA recommends that towing brackets be ● Never exceed the values indicated! retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For

284 Towing bracket device* example, it may very well be necessary to ad- the entire vehicle electronic system, as well just the cooling system or mount thermal as to accidents and serious injuries. protection plates. To do so, CUPRA recom- ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- mends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer tem to the electrical connections of the tail or any SEAT dealership. lights or any other unsuitable power sour- If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance ces. Only use suitable connectors to con- specifications should always be kept in mind. nect the trailer. ● The towing bracket should be retrofitted The distance between the centre of the ball only at a specialised workshop. head and the road ››› Fig. 180 C must never be less than that indicated. This also applies when the vehicle is fully loaded, including WARNING the technically permissible maximum vertical If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un- load on the coupling device. suitable, the trailer may separate from the vehicle while driving. This could cause seri- 1) Distance specifications››› Fig. 180 : ous accidents and fatal injuries. A Mounting points on the vehicle B 65 mm (minimum) Note C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle) ● Only use towing brackets that have been D 1,043 mm approved by CUPRA for the model in question. E 414 mm ● In some versions, the fitting of a conven- F 634 mm tional towing hook solution is not recom- G 959 mm mended. Please consult your Technical Service. WARNING If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, this may lead to malfunctions in

1) Measurements may vary depending on different chassis combinations. 285 Practical tips

● Practical tips Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as ● If, in exceptional circumstances, you have the pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the to carry a spare fuel canister, please ob- fuel supply. Do not try to put in more fuel af- serve the following points: ter the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the ex- Checking and refilling levels – Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis- pansion chamber in the fuel tank. ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right This could cause an explosion. Always Refuelling as far as it will go. place the canister on the ground to fill ● Close the lid. it. Refuelling – Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi- The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- ble into the spare fuel canister. en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank – If the spare fuel canister is made of flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at metal, the filling nozzle must be in con- ››› page 287. tact with the canister during filling. This The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv- helps prevent an electrostatic charge en in ››› page 329 . building up. – Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the WARNING luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is explosive. Risk of fatal accident! Fuel is highly flammable and can cause serious burns and other injuries. CAUTION Fig. 181 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached. ● When refuelling, turn off the engine and turn off the ignition for safety reasons. ● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the ● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or should be removed immediately. It could vehicle. a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in otherwise damage the paintwork. the vicinity due to the risk of explosion. ● Never run the tank completely dry. The The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked catalytic converter can be damaged. and locked automatically using the central ● Observe legislation governing the use, locking. storage and carrying of a spare fuel canister ● When filling the fuel tank after having run in the vehicle. it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel ● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the ● For safety reasons we do not recommend engine, the ignition must be switched on left side. carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. for at least 30 seconds before starting the engine. When you then start the engine it ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left. In an accident the canister could be damaged and could leak. may take longer than normal (up to one mi- ● Place it in the space on the hinge of the nute) to start firing. open flap ››› Fig. 181 . 286 Checking and refilling levels

For the sake of the environment Fuel types means, for example, a proportion of biodiesel of max. 7%. Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm. Identification of fuels1) 3 Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed Natural Gas. Note There is no emergency mechanism for the Type of petrol manual release of the fuel tank flap. If necessary, request assistance from specialised The correct grade of petrol is listed inside personnel. the fuel tank flap. The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- Note verter and must only be run on unleaded Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective petrol. The petrol must comply with the device that prevents the insertion of the standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels wrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to re- Fig. 182 Identification of fuels according to Euro- with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled fuel with Diesel nozzles. pean Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/ (E10)2). The types of petrol are differentiated ● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if by using the octane numbers (RON) or via it is very small, it is possible that it will not Fuels are identified by different symbols on the anti-knock index (AKI). be able to open the protective device. Be- the pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by The identification serves to prevent confu- Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or turning it, try a different pump or request sion when choosing the fuel. normal 91 octane petrol at least specialist help. 1 Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha- We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- ● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can- nol). The number indicates the percent- tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal ister, the protective device will not open. age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means, 91 octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. very slowly. loss) may be used. » 2 Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio- diesel). The number indicates the percentage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”

1) Depending on country 2) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in. 287 Practical tips

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at least ing or decrease knocking may contain met- should not park your vehicle near a surface You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 al additives that damage the engine and that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard! AKI) at least. catalytic converter. This type of products ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle must not be used. If super is not available, if necessary, use around the area of the exhaust system: Fire ● Do not use fuels shown in the pump as hazard! normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case containing metals. LRP (lead replacement only use moderate engine speeds and a light petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- metal additives. Risk of engine damage! ble. Control lamps ● High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or an octane rating lower than the correct  It lights up super 95 octane petrol at least grade for the engine. Fault in the emission control system. We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest speci- octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super Note alised workshop to have the engine checked. 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power loss). ● Fuel with an octane rating higher than the one required by the engine can be  Flashes If super is not available, if necessary, use used. Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case ● In countries in which there is no sulphur- converter. only use moderate engine speeds and a light free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul- Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest speci- throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- phur content fuel. alised workshop to have the engine checked. ble.  It lights up CAUTION Particulate filter blocked ››› page 289 . ● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. Engine management and emis- E30 - E100 button must not be used. The sions control system fuel system would be damaged.  It lights up ● A single refuelling with leaded fuel or Introduction Fault in the petrol engine management. other metal additives entails a permanent Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a spe- deterioration of the effectiveness of the cialised workshop. catalytic converter. WARNING When the ignition is switched on, the  (Electronic ● Only use fuel additives that have been ● Due to the high temperatures reached by Power Control) lights up and should go off once the approved by SEAT. The products that con- the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you engine has started. tain substances to increase the octane rat- 288 Checking and refilling levels

Note CAUTION Regeneration of the particulate filter While the indicator lamps ,  or  are Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- Requirements for the regeneration journey: on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel cause an irregular fuel supply can cause ig- the engine is at operating temperature. consumption may go up and the engine nition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to en- ● Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h might lose power. ter the exhaust system, which could cause ››› overheating and damage the catalytic con- ● Completely remove your foot from the ac- verter. celerator pedal for a few seconds to let the vehicle roll with the gear engaged. Catalytic converter For the sake of the environment ● Consider the legal speed limits as well as the recommended gears. To maintain the useful life of the catalytic Even when the emission control system is converter working perfectly, there may be a smell of ● Repeat this procedure (accelerate and let ● Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en- sulphur from the gases on occasions. This roll) until the control lamp turns off. gines. depends on the sulphur content of the fuel used. This can quite often be avoided by This procedure involves an autonomous par- ● Never run the fuel tank dry. changing to another brand of fuel. ticulate filter cleaning process and may take ● When changing or adding engine oil, do some time. not exceed the necessary amount If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im- page 294, Topping up the engine oil. ››› Particulate filter mediately to a specialised workshop to repair ● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump the fault. leads if necessary ››› page 51 . The particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas system. Under WARNING If you should notice misfiring, uneven run- normal driving conditions the filter cleans it- ning or loss of power when the car is moving, Always adjust your speed to suit the weath- self. If the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if have the vehicle inspected by a specialised er conditions, roads, braking distance and short journeys are made continuously), it be- workshop. In general, the emissions warning traffic if the particulate filter is in its regen- comes blocked with soot and the following lamp  will light up when any of these symp- eration phase. Route recommendations indication is displayed to the driver:  Par- should never make you disregard each toms occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel ticulate filter: cleaned while the country's specific traffic regulations. can enter the exhaust system and escape in- vehicle is moving. See Manual. The to the atmosphere. The catalytic converter particulate filter needs cleaning (regenera- can also be damaged by overheating. CAUTION tion). ● When the exhaust system detects that the particulate filter is close to saturation, the self-cleaning function of this system »

289 Practical tips

recommends optimal driving for this func- WARNING ● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant tion. expansion tank when the engine is hot. The When work is done in the engine compart- cooling system is under pressure. ● Due to the high temperatures caused by ment, injuries, burns, accidents and even the regeneration of the particulate filter, it fires can occur. ● Protect face, hands and arms by covering is possible that the radiator fan will activate the cap with a large, thick rag to protect ● Turn off the engine, disconnect the igni- after stopping the engine, even it its oper- against escaping coolant and steam. tion e and apply the electronic parking ating temperature has not been reached. brake. Activate the automatic gearbox ● Always make sure you have not left any ● Noise, smells and high idle speeds can parking lock (button P). Wait for the engine objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in occur during regeneration. to cool down. the engine compartment. ● Always use the correct engine oil and the ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam ● If you have to work underneath the vehi- correct fuel to make sure the useful life of or drips of coolant being released from the cle, you must use suitable stands addition- the particulate filter is not affected. Also engine compartment. Wait until no steam ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of avoid making short trips all the time. or coolant can be seen before opening the accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for bonnet. securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury. ● Keep children away from the engine compartment. ● If any work has to be performed when the Engine compartment engine is started or with the engine run- ● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera- ning, there is an additional, potentially fa- tion on the engine compartment, as these tal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such Working in the engine compartment may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool- as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, ant). Always be aware of the danger of injury and etc., and from the high-voltage ignition sys- ● Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec- scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire tem. You should also observe the following: trical system, particularly at the points when working in the engine compartment – Never touch the electrical wiring of the where the jump leads are attached (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). ignition system. ››› page 51. The battery could explode. – Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing Always observe the warnings listed below ● If working inside the engine compart- and long hair do not get trapped in ro- and follow all general safety precautions. ment, remember that, even when the igni- tating engine parts. Danger of death. tion is switched off, the radiator fan may The vehicle's engine compartment is a po- Before starting any work remove jewel- start up automatically, and therefore there tentially hazardous area . lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear ››› is a risk of injury. tight-fitting clothes. ● Never cover the engine with additional – Never accelerate with a gear engaged insulating materials such as a blanket. Risk without taking the necessary precau- of fire! tions. The vehicle could move, even if

290 Checking and refilling levels

● the handbrake is applied. Danger of Opening and closing the bonnet Open the door and pull the lever under the death. dashboard ››› Fig. 183 1 . ● Observe the following additional warn- ● To lift the bonnet, press towards the left on ings if work on the fuel system or the elec- the lever located under the bonnet, in the trical system is necessary: centre ››› Fig. 184 2 . The arrester hooks are – Always disconnect the battery from the released. on-board network. ● The bonnet can be opened. Release the – Do not smoke. bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture designed for this in the bonnet. – Never work near naked flames. – Always keep an approved fire extin- Closing the bonnet guisher immediately available. ● Slightly lift the bonnet. Fig. 183 Release lever in the driver's footwell area. For the sake of the environment ● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support. ● Inspect the ground underneath your vehicle regularly so that any leaks are detec- ● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil so it locks. or other fluids in the area where it was If the bonnet does not close, do not press parked, have your vehicle inspected at the workshop. downwards. Open it again and let it fall as mentioned above. ● Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you should make WARNING regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other Make sure that the bonnet is properly fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a spe- Fig. 184 Lever under the bonnet. closed. If it opens when driving, it can cause cialised workshop. an accident. Opening the bonnet Note The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- CAUTION cle. In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the fluid reservoirs are on the other side of the Before opening the bonnet, make sure that windscreen wiper arms, only open it when engine compartment ››› Fig. 185 . the windscreen wiper arms are in place the windscreen wipers are in place against against the windscreen. the windscreen.

291 Practical tips

Checking levels

Fig. 185 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

From time to time, the levels of the different Note changing oil, use only those oils that comply fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never with VW standards. fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious The layout of parts may vary depending on the engine. We recommend that the oil change be done damage to the engine may be caused. by a technical service or specialised work- 1 Coolant expansion tank ››› page 295 shop. 2 Brake fluid reservoir ››› page 297 Engine oil If the engine oil level is too low 3 Engine oil filler cap ››› page 294 You can get information about the correct 4 Engine oil level dipstick ››› page 294 General notes engine oil for your vehicle at your workshop. 5 Battery ››› page 299 The engine comes with a special, multi- If the recommended engine oil is not availa- 6 Windscreen washer reservoir grade oil that can be used all year round. ble, in the event of an emergency you can ››› page 298 change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- of the next oil until the next oil change: tial for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or 292 Checking and refilling levels

– Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00, km/h and do not travel more than 300 km Warning lamp VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or (approximately). Go to a specialised work- API SN. shop as soon as possible and request an oil  It lights up red change. Otherwise, there is a danger of en- Have the oil changed by a specialised work- gine damage.  Do not carry on driving! shop. Engine oil pressure too low. ● You are responsible for the risk of possi- Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level. CUPRA recommends using original SEAT oil ble damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaust to guarantee high performance of CUPRA system). If in doubt, do not start the engine If this warning lamp  starts to flash, and is accompa- engines. and request assistance from the technical nied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine service centre. and check the oil level. If necessary, add more oil ››› page 294. Engine oil additives ● Do not start the engine if you have top- No type of additive should be mixed with the ped up with a fluid other than engine oil. If the warning lamp  flashes although the oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at engine oil. The deterioration caused by Request assistance from the technical service centre. Danger of engine damage! idle speed! Obtain technical assistance. these additives is not covered by the warranty. Note  It lights up yellow CAUTION Before a long trip, we recommend finding Check the engine oil level as soon as possible. Take the following into account if you have an engine oil that conforms to the corre- Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to do refilled with an engine oil different to those sponding VW specifications and recom- so ››› page 294 . specified in the aforementioned standards, mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, or by your SEAT technical service centre: the correct engine oil will always be availa-  It flashes yellow ble for a top-up if needed. ● There is no way of completely avoiding Fault in the oil level sensor. the danger of causing damage to the en- Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Until gine and particulate filter*. then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you ● You can continue driving with the vehicle refuel. if the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engine oil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon as WARNING possible and request an oil change. Other- Observe the safety warnings in Con- wise, there is a danger of engine damage. ››› trol and warning lamps on page 81. ● If you have topped up more than 0.5 l of engine oil, drive with the engine at low load levels and within the medium RPM range as a maximum. Do not drive at more than 80

293 Practical tips

Checking the engine oil level ● Zone A : do not add oil. Topping up the engine oil ● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level in that zone. ● Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a Fig. 186 Engine oil dipstick. journey. Fig. 187 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap. The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of WARNING Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- the oil. Any work carried out in the engine com- serve the warnings in Working in the partment or on the engine must be carried ››› . Checking oil level out cautiously. engine compartment on page 290 – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. ● When working in the engine compart- Topping up engine oil ment, always observe the safety warnings – Briefly run the engine at idle speed until ››› page 290. ● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening the operating temperature is reached and ››› Fig. 187. then stop. CAUTION ● Carefully add oil in small quantities (no – Wait for about two minutes. more than 0.5 l). If the oil level is above area A , do not start – Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with the engine. This could result in damage to ● To avoid adding too much oil, whenever a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it the engine and catalytic converter. Contact you add a certain amount, wait about 2 mi- in as far as it will go. a Technical Service. nutes and recheck the oil level ››› page 294 . – Then pull it out once more and check the ● If necessary, add some more oil. oil level ››› Fig. 186 . Top up with engine oil ● When the oil level reaches at least zone if necessary. ››› Fig. 186 B , unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully ››› . The oil must leave a mark between zones A and C . It can never go above zone A . 294 Checking and refilling levels

The position of the oil filler opening is shown Engine oil change For the sake of the environment in the corresponding engine compartment ● We recommend that you change the en- illustration ››› page 292 . We recommend that you have the engine oil gine oil and the filter at a technical service changed by a Technical Service. Engine oil specification ››› page 292 . centre. WARNING ● Never pour oil down drains or into the WARNING ground. Only change the engine oil yourself if you Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil ● Use a suitable container when draining have the specialist knowledge required! comes into contact with hot engine com- the used oil. It must be large enough to ponents when topping up. ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- hold all the engine oil. serve the warnings ››› page 290 . CAUTION ● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries. If the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 186 A , ● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, Cooling system do not start the engine. This could result in such as acid burns, caused by splashes of damage to the engine and catalytic con- oil. verter. Contact a specialised workshop. Coolant specifications ● When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to The engine cooling system is supplied from For the sake of the environment help prevent oil from running down your the factory with a specially treated mixture of The oil level must never be above zone arm. water and at least 40 % of the additive ››› Fig. 186 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in ● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture through the crankcase breather and leak contact with engine oil. gives the necessary frost protection down to into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys- -25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy ● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be tem. parts of the engine cooling system against stored in a safe place out of the reach of children. corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con- Note siderably raises the boiling point of the coolant. Before a long trip, we recommend finding CAUTION an engine oil that conforms to the corre- To protect the cooling system, the percent- No additives should be used with engine oil. sponding VW specifications and recom- age of additive must always be at least 40 %, This could result in engine damage. Any mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, even in warm climates where anti-freeze damage caused by the use of such additives the correct engine oil will always be availa- protection is not required. would not be covered by the factory war- ble for a top-up if needed. ranty. If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be »

295 Practical tips

increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise mixed with an inadequate coolant. The antifreeze protection will diminish and this coolant must be changed as soon as possi- will worsen cooling. ble if this is the case! When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of For the sake of the environment the additive G12evo for optimal protection Coolants and additives can contaminate against corrosion. Mixing with G13 G12evo the environment. If any fluids are spilled, (TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G), they should be collected and correctly dis- G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 posed of, with respect to the environment. (green blue) engine coolants decreases protection again corrosion and should be avoi- Fig. 189 Engine compartment: coolant expansion ded. tank cap. Refilling coolant WARNING The coolant tank is located in the engine compartment ››› page 292 . If there is not enough anti-freeze in the coolant system, the engine may fail leading Top up coolant when the level is below the to serious damage.  (minimum) mark. ● Ensure that the percentage of additive is correct for the lowest expected ambient Checking coolant level temperature in the zone in which the vehi- – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. cle is to be used. – Switch the ignition off. ● When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi- – Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- cle would be immobilised. pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the Fig. 188 In the engine compartment: marking on coolant level should be between the marks coolant expansion tank. CAUTION ››› Fig. 188. When the engine is hot, it may be slightly above the upper mark. The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not ap- Topping up coolant proved by SEAT. – Wait for the engine to cool down. ● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example, brown, this indicates that the G12evo additive has been

296 Checking and refilling levels

– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with CAUTION However, if the brake fluid level goes down a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left noticeably in a short time, or drops below ››› . If you run out of coolant in the expansion the  mark, there may be a leak in the brake tank, park the car in a safe place and do not system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning – Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- continue driving. Obtain technical assis- light on the instrument panel display moni- ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you tance. tors the brake fluid level page 80 . could damage the engine. If there is no ››› coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid tinue driving. You should obtain professio- reservoir is on the other side of the engine nal assistance ››› . Brake fluid compartment. – If there is still some coolant in the expan- Changing brake fluid sion tank, top up to the upper mark. Check and refill the brake fluid We recommend that you have the brake fluid – Top up with coolant until the level be- changed by a Technical Service. comes stable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly. WARNING

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle If the brake fluid level is low or unsuitable/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys- specialised workshop to have the cooling tem may fail or braking power may be re- system examined. duced. WARNING ● Check the brake system and the brake fluid level regularly! ● The cooling system is under pressure. Do ● When the brake fluid is used and brakes not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- Fig. 190 Engine compartment: brake fluid reser- are subjected to extreme braking forces, sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of voir cap. bubbles of vapour form in the brake system. burns! The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- These bubbles can significantly reduce ● Store the antifreeze in its original con- gine compartment ››› page 292 . braking power, notably increasing braking tainer and keep it out of reach of children. distance, and could result in the total fail- ● If working inside the engine compart- ure of the brake system. Checking the brake fluid level ment, remember that, even when the igni- ● Be sure to always use the correct brake tion is switched off, the radiator fan may The brake fluid level must be between the  fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly start up automatically, and therefore there and  markings. meets the VW 501 14 standard. » is a risk of injury.

297 Practical tips

● You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake Windscreen washer reservoir Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- fluid at a specialised CUPRA service or at a screen and headlights. We recommend that you always add a product to the windscreen SEAT Official Service. If none is available, Checking the level of the window use only high-quality brake fluid that meets washer fluid. DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA washer tank and refilling it Standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4. Recommended windscreen wipers ● The replacement brake fluid must be ● For the hottest seasons we recommend new. summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor- ● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank: original container in a safe place out of 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa- reach of children. Risk of poisoning! ter). ● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass. CAUTION Approximate proportion of the winter mix- Brake fluid should not come into contact ture, up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concen- with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive. trate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of mixture in the washer fluid tank. Fig. 191 In the engine compartment: window For the sake of the environment washer tank cap. The capacity of the window washer tank can be found in page 329 . Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. The window washer tank is in the engine ››› Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a compartment ››› page 292 . professional to dispose of them. CAUTION Check the water level in the windscreen If the water from the windscreen washer washer reservoir regularly and top up as re- does not contain enough anti-freeze, it quired. may freeze on the windscreen and rear The window washer tank contains liquid de- window, reducing forward and rear visibili- tergent for the windscreen and rear window. ty. ● In winter, ensure the windscreen washer ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 290 . contains enough anti-freeze. ● The window washer tank is marked with ● In cold conditions, you should not use the the  symbol on the cap. windscreen wiper system unless you have ● Check there is enough windscreen water in warmed the windscreen with the ventila- the reservoir. tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on the windscreen and reduce visibility.

298 Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION It is checked as part of the Inspection Serv- are lost. These functions will require reset- ice. Nevertheless, check the terminals are ting after the battery is reconnected. Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other clean and have the correct tightening tor- similar additives with the windscreen wash- When disconnecting the battery from the que, especially in summer and winter. er water. A greasy layer may be formed on vehicle on-board network, disconnect first the windscreen which will impair visibility. All work on batteries requires specialist the negative cable and then the positive ca- ● Use clean water with a window cleaner knowledge. Please refer to a specialised CU- ble. PRA Service, SEAT Official Service or a work- recommended by CUPRA. Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you shop specialising in batteries: risk of burns or ● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm exploding battery! the water in the reservoir. will be triggered. The battery must not be opened. Never try CAUTION to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth- If the vehicle is not used for long periods erwise explosive gas is released from the ● The vehicle has a system for monitoring the Do not mix cleaning products recom- battery that could cause an explosion. mended by CUPRA with other products. current consumption when the engine is left This could lead to flocculation and may Battery warning indications unused for long periods of time ››› page 302 . block the windscreen washer jets. Some functions, such as the interior lights, Wear eye protection. ● When topping up service fluids, make ab-  or the remote door opening, may be temporarily disabled to prevent the battery from solutely certain that you fill the fluids into  Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro- the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu- tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any running flat. These functions will come back ids could cause serious malfunctions and splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water. on as soon as the ignition is switched on and engine damage! the engine started.  Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro- ● Lack of window washer fluid causes the hibited. view through the windscreen to be ob- Winter conditions scured.  The battery should only be charged in a well- During the winter, the starting power may be ventilated zone. Risk of explosion! reduced, and if necessary, the battery  Keep children away from acid and batteries! should be charged ›››

12-volt battery  Always follow the instruction manual. WARNING Always be aware of the danger of injury and General information Disconnecting the battery chemical burns as well as the risk of acci- The battery should only be disconnected in dent or fire when working on the battery The battery is located in the engine com- exceptional cases. When the battery is dis- and the electrical system: » partment and is almost maintenance-free. connected, some of the vehicle's functions 299 Practical tips

● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, the battery! The alarm will otherwise be ● Get a professional service centre to re- skin and clothing from acid and particles triggered. place the 12-volt vehicle battery every four containing lead. ● When disconnecting the battery from the years. ● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear vehicle on-board network, disconnect first protective gloves and eye protection. Do the negative cable and then the positive CAUTION not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid cable. ● through the vents. Do not expose the battery to direct sun- ● Switch off all electrical devices before re- light over a long period of time, as the in- ● Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on the connecting the battery. Reconnect first the tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solution, positive cable and then the negative cable. battery housing. and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid is Never reverse the polarity of the connec- ● swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor im- tions. This could cause an electrical fire. If the vehicle is left standing in cold con- mediately. ditions for a long period, protect the bat- ● Never charge a frozen battery, or one tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be ● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking which has thawed. This could result in ex- damaged. are prohibited. When handling cables and plosions and chemical burns. Always re- electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks place a battery which has frozen. A flat bat- and electrostatic charge. Never short the tery can also freeze at temperatures close battery terminals. High-energy sparks can to 0°C (+32°F). Warning lamp cause injury. ● Ensure that the vent hose is always con- ● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- nected to the battery.  It lights up red leased when the battery is under charge. ● Never use a defective battery. This could Alternator fault. The batteries should be charged in a well- cause an explosion. Replace a damaged ventilated room only. battery immediately. The control lamp lights up when the ignition ● Keep children away from acid and batter- is switched on. It should go out when the en- ies. WARNING gine has started running. ● Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition The 12 volt battery is a subject to wear. A If the control lamp  lights up while driving, and all electrical devices. The negative ca- reduction in battery power can mean that the alternator is no longer charging the bat- ble on the battery must be disconnected. some important safety systems, such as tery. You should immediately drive to the When a light bulb is changed, you need on- power steering, braking intervention, lights nearest specialised workshop. ly switch off the light. or airbag systems, operate with limitations or stop working entirely. This may cause se- You should avoid using electrical equipment ● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un- rious accidents and injuries. To avoid this, it that is not absolutely necessary because this locking the vehicle before you disconnect is necessary to take the following safety will drain the battery. measure:

300 Checking and refilling levels

Checking the battery electrolyte level ing on the charge state and electrolyte level Replacing a vehicle battery of the battery. The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has special There are two different colours: safety features. If the battery must be re- Yellow or colourless: The battery's electro- placed, consult a technical service for infor- lyte level is too low. Go to a specialised mation on electromagnetic compatibility, workshop to have the battery checked the size and maintenance, performance and and replaced if necessary. safety requirements of the new battery in Black: The battery’s electrolyte level is cor- your vehicle before you purchase one. CU- rect. PRA recommends you have the battery replaced by a technical service. Start-Stop systems (››› page 205 ) are equip- Fig. 192 Sight glass on the top of the 12 volt bat- Charging or changing the battery ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must tery (schematic representation). only be replaced with a battery of the same If you often drive short distances or if the ve- specifications. The electrolyte level should be checked reg- hicle is not driven for long periods, the bat- ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun- tery should be checked by a specialised Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent tries and in older batteries. workshop between the scheduled services. power management system to control the distribution of electrical energy ››› page 302 . ● Open the bonnet and then lift the cover If the battery has discharged and you have The power management function ensures that protects the front part of the battery problems starting the vehicle, the battery that the battery is charged much more effi- in Working in the engine compart- ››› might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- ciently than on vehicles without a power ment on page 290. ommend you have the vehicle battery management system. To maintain this func- ● Check the colour display in the "magic eye" checked by a Technical Service where it will tion after replacing the battery, we recom- on the top of the battery. be re-charged or replaced. mend that the replacement battery used is ● If there are air bubbles in the window, tap of the same make and type as the original fit- Charging the battery the window gently until they disperse. ted battery. To make proper use of the power The vehicle battery should be charged by a management function after the battery has The position of the battery is shown in the specialised workshop only, as batteries using been changed, have the battery coded to corresponding engine compartment dia- special technology have been installed and the power management mode at a special- gram ››› page 292 . they must be charged in a controlled envi- ised workshop. » The “magic eye” indicator, located on the ronment. top of the battery changes colour, depend-

301 Practical tips

WARNING may not be enough power available to start from losing too much charge and to ensure the engine. that the engine can be started reliably. ● Always use only maintenance free batteries that do not run flat alone and whose Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent Dynamic power management properties, specifications and size corre- power management system to control the spond to the standard battery. The specifi- distribution of electrical energy. This signifi- While the vehicle is moving, this function cations are indicated on the battery case. cantly improves reliability when starting the distributes the available power to the various ● Before starting any work on the batteries, engine, and also prolongs the useful life of electrical devices and systems according to you must read and observe the warnings the battery. their requirements. The power management ensures that on-board systems do not con- ››› in General information on page 299. The main functions incorporated in the pow- sume more electrical power than the alter- er management system are battery diagno- nator can supply, and thus maintains the For the sake of the environment sis, residual current management and dy- maximum possible battery power level.  Batteries contain toxic substances such namic power management. as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be Note disposed of appropriately and must not be Battery diagnosis ● disposed of with ordinary household waste. Neither is the power management system The battery diagnosis function constantly able to overcome the given physical limits. registers the condition of the battery. Sen- Please remember that the power and use- sors detect the battery voltage, battery cur- ful life of the battery are limited. rent and battery temperature. This enables ● When there is a risk that the vehicle will Energy management the system to calculate the current power not start, the alternator power failure or low level and charge condition of the battery. Optimisation of the starting capacity battery charge level warning lamp will be shown  ››› page 80 . Residual current management The power management controls the distribution of electrical energy and thus helps to The residual current management reduces ensure that there is always enough power power consumption while the vehicle is Flat battery available to start the engine. parked. It controls the supply of power to the various electrical devices while the ignition is Starting ability has first priority. If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys- switched off. The system takes the battery tem is left parked for a long time, the battery diagnosis data into consideration. Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures will gradually lose its charge because certain all place a heavy load on the battery. In these electrical devices, such as the electronic Depending on the power level of the battery, conditions a large amount of power is con- gearbox lock continues to draw current even switch off the individual electrical devices sumed, but only a small amount is supplied. when the ignition is off. In some cases there one after the other to prevent the battery The situation is also critical if electrical devices are in use when the engine is not 302 Wheels running. In this case power is consumed When the engine is running Wheels when none is being generated. Although the alternator generates electrical In these situations you will be aware that the power, the battery can still become dis- power management system is intervening to charged while the vehicle is being driven. Wheels and tyres control the distribution of electrical power. This can occur when a lot of power is being consumed but only a small amount supplied, General notes When the vehicle is parked for long peri- especially if the battery is not fully charged ods initially. – When driving with new tyres, be especially careful during the first 500 km (300 miles). If you do not drive your vehicle for a period To restore the necessary energy balance, the of several days or weeks, the power manage- system will then temporarily shut off the – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar ment will gradually shut off the electrical de- electrical devices that are using a lot of pow- obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as vices one by one or reduce the amount of er, or reduce the current they are consum- possible at a right angle to the obstacle. current they are using. This limits the ing. Heating systems in particular use a large – Check from time to time if the tyres are amount of power consumed and helps to amount of electrical power. If you notice, for damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or ensure reliable starting even after a long pe- instance, that the seat heating* or the rear dents). Remove any foreign objects em- riod. Some convenience functions, such as window heater is not working, they may have bedded in the treads. remote vehicle opening, may not be availa- been temporarily switched off or regulated ble under certain circumstances. These to a lower heat output. These systems will be – Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- functions will be restored when you switch available again as soon as sufficient electrical placed immediately. on the ignition and start the engine. power is available. – Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

You may also notice that the engine runs at a – Replace any missing valve caps as soon as With the engine switched off slightly faster idling speed when necessary. possible. For example, if you listen to the sound sys- This is quite normal, and no cause for con- tem with the engine switched off the battery cern. The increased idling speed allows the – Mark the wheels before taking them off so will run down. alternator to meet the greater power re- that they rotate in the same direction when quirement and charge the battery at the put back. If the energy consumption means there is a same time. risk that the engine will not start, a text will – When removed, the wheels or tyres should appear in vehicles with a driver information be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark system*. place. » This driver indicator tells you that you must start the engine so that the battery can recharge. 303 Practical tips

Low profile tyres Foreign objects inserted in the tyre Speed symbols Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger ● Do not remove foreign bodies if they have The speed rating indicates the maximum wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height. penetrated through the tyre wall! speed permitted for the tyres. Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile. ● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility P max. 150 km/h (93 mph) Low profile tyres may deteriorate more system, where necessary seal the damaged Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph) quickly than standard tyres, for instance due tyre as shown in section ››› page 44 . Use a to strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers specialised workshop for repair or replace- R max. 170 km/h (106 mph) and kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very im- ment. To do so, CUPRA recommends going S max. 180 km/h (112 mph) portant page 306 . to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT ››› T max. 190 km/h (118 mph) dealership. To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive U max. 200 km/h (124 mph) with special care when driving on roads in The sealant at the lower part of the tyre H max. 210 km/h (130 mph) poor condition. tread wraps around the foreign body and provisionally seals the tyre. V max. 240 km/h (149 mph) Visually check your wheels every 3000 km. Z max. 240 km/h (149 mph) If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im- Tyres with directional tread pattern W max. 270 km/h (168 mph) pact or have been damaged, have a special- An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the ised workshop check whether or not it is Y max. 300 km/h (186 mph) direction of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- necessary to change the tyre. ways note the direction of rotation indicated Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for Low profile tyres may deteriorate more when mounting the wheel. This makes sure tyres with a maximum authorised speed quickly than standard tyres. that optimal use is made of tyre properties in above 240 km/h (149 mph). terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise Concealed damage and wear. WARNING Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily ● New tyres do not have maximum grip visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the Subsequent fitting of accessories during the first 500 km. Drive particularly car pulling to one side, this may indicate If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or carefully to avoid possible accidents. that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce wheel trims, we recommend that you con- ● Never drive with damaged tyres. This may speed immediately if there is any reason to sult with a specialised CUPRA Service or cause an accident. suspect that damage may have occurred. In- SEAT Official Service centre for advice re- ● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the spect the tyres for damage. If no external garding current technical recommendations. vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully the vehicle immediately and check the to the nearest specialised workshop and tyres. have the car inspected. 304 Wheels

● Never use old tyres or those with an un- If the type of spare wheel is different form ● For technical reasons it is not possible to known history of use. the normal wheels — e.g. in the case of win- use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases ter tyres or particularly wide tyres — the not even wheels from the same vehicle spare wheel should only be used temporarily model should be used. in the event of a puncture, and the vehicle New wheels and tyres ● Always ensure that the tyres you have should be driven with care. Refit the normal chosen have adequate clearance. When se- road wheel as soon as possible. It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced lecting replacement tyres, do not rely en- by a specialised workshop. There they have In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 tirely on the nominal tyre size marked on the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif- the required knowledge, the special tools wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same fer significantly depending on the manu- and the corresponding spare parts. brand, type and tread so that the traction facturer. Lack of clearance can damage the system is not damaged by a difference in the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, endan- ● Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If number of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in ger road safety. Risk of accident! you have installed new tyres, drive the first the event of a puncture, only a spare wheel 500 km carefully and at a moderate speed. with the same perimeter as normal tyres ● Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in an emergency, and drive with due care. ● All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of should be used. the same type, size (rolling circumference) ● The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper- and, if possible, tread pattern. Manufacturing date ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro- hibited use can cause accidents or can ● When changing tyres, do not change just The manufacturing date is also indicated on damage your vehicle. one; change at least two on the same axle. the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the ● If decorative hubcaps are subsequently wheel): ● If you want to equip your vehicle with a fitted, make sure that they allow enough air combination tyres and rims that are different DOT ... 2218 ... in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci- to those fitted in the factory, inform your dent! specialised workshop before purchasing it means, for example, that the tyre was manufactured in the 22nd week of 2018. ● Models with aerodynamic wheel rims them ››› and/or with bolt-on plastic elements (more closed design) increase the likelihood of ice The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for WARNING and snow accumulating on the inside. This your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu- ● Use only combinations of tyres and rims, should be taken into account, depending mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by on the driving situations, as snow or ice ac- 1) or COC document ). The vehicle documen- CUPRA. Otherwise the vehicle may be cumulated in the wheels can cause vibra- tation varies depending on the country of damaged, causing an accident. tion in the vehicle when it drives at over 40 » residence.

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 305 Practical tips

● km/h. It is advisable to remove ice and Tyre life Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. snow from the inside of the wheels using ● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from hot water. time to time. ● If you drive on dirt or gravel tracks, the likelihood of stones becoming trapped in- Tyre pressure side wheel rims with plastic elements in- The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a creases when driving at high speed or in a sticker on the rear of the front left door sporty manner. If you see that there are frame Fig. 193 . stones trapped between the aluminium ››› wheel rim and the insert, you can attempt Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re- to remove them using pressurised water. duces the useful life of the tyres and adversely affects vehicle performance and ride. For the sake of the environment Correct inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds. Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned. The tyre pressure must be adjusted according to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the Note vehicle is going to carry the maximum load, Fig. 193 Location of the tyre pressure sticker. the tyre pressure should be increased to the ● A CUPRA Service Centre should be con- maximum value indicated on the sticker sulted to find out whether wheels or tyres Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv- ››› Fig. 193. of different sizes to those originally fitted ing habits will increase the useful life of your by CUPRA can be fitted, and to find out Do not forget the spare wheel when check- tyres. about the combinations allowed between ing the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle ● Check tyre pressure at least once a month, inflated to the highest pressure required for (axle 2). and also prior to any long trip. the road wheels. ● Never mount used tyres if you are not ● The tyre pressure should only be checked In the case of a minimised temporary spare sure of their “previous history”. when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the wheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of pressure of warm tyres. 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure label . ● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- ››› Fig. 193 ried by the vehicle ››› Fig. 193 . ● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, save the modified tyre pressure ››› page 310. 306 Wheels

Driving style tyre pressure is indicated on the label Tread wear indicators Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard ››› Fig. 193. braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre ● Check tyre pressures regularly and en- wear. sure they are maintained at the pressures indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low Wheel balance could cause overheating, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres. The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, certain circumstances may lead to ● When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi- should be that indicated on the label brations in the steering wheel. ››› Fig. 193. ● Regularly check the cold inflation pres- Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the as they otherwise cause excessive wear on tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they Fig. 194 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators. steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must are cold. also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted ● Regularly check your tyres for damage or if a tyre is repaired. and wear. ● Never exceed the maximum permitted Incorrect wheel alignment speed or loads specified for the type of tyre Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- fitted on your vehicle. cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, For the sake of the environment you should check wheel alignment at a specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- Service. sumption. Fig. 195 Interchanging tyres. WARNING Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres found on the base of the original tyre treads, may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to ordered at regular intervals and running tread separation or even to a blow-out. across the tread ››› Fig. 194 . The letters ● The driver is responsible for ensuring that "TWI" or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated mark the position of the wear indicators. » to the right pressure. The recommended

307 Practical tips

1) The minimum permitted profile depth have ● The speed has to be adapted accordingly, tightening torque is too high, the wheel been reached when the tyres have worn otherwise there is a risk of losing control nuts and threads can be damaged. down to the wear indicators. Replace the over the vehicle. tyres with new ones ››› . CAUTION Changing wheels around See ››› page 49 to find out the recommen- Wheel nuts ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres steel and alloy rims. the wheels should be changed round from The wheel nuts are matched to the rims. time to time according to the system When installing different wheels (for instance ››› Fig. 195. The useful life of all the tyres will alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is then be about the same time. important to use the correct wheel nuts with Winter tyres the right length and correctly shaped bolt WARNING heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se- – Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels. The tyres must be replaced at the latest curely and that the brake system functions when the tread is worn down to the tread correctly. – Only use winter tyres that are approved for wear indicators. Failure to follow this in- The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easi- your vehicle. struction could result in an accident. ly. – Please note that the maximum permissible ● Particularly in difficult driving conditions A special adapter is required to turn the anti- speed for winter tyres may be lower than such as wet or icy roads. It is important that for summer tyres. the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be theft wheel nuts* ››› page 47 . approximately the same on the tyres of – Also note that winter tyres are no longer both the front and the rear axles. WARNING effective when the tread is worn down. ● The scant driving safety due to insuffi- Wheel nuts should never be greased or – After fitting the wheels you must always cient tread depth is particularly evident in oiled. check the tyre pressures. When doing so, vehicle handling, when there is a risk of ● Use only wheel nuts which belong to the take into account the correct tyre pres- “aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water wheel. sures listed on the rear of the front left and when driving through corners, and ● If the prescribed torque of the wheel nuts door frame page 306 . braking is also adversely affected. ››› is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the In winter road conditions winter tyres will considerably improve vehicle handling. The

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in. 308 Wheels design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- Using winter tyres with V-rating Snow chains pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice Please note that the generally applicable and snow. This applies particularly to vehi- 240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres Snow chains must only be fitted to the front cles equipped with wide section tyres or with the letter V is subject to technical re- wheels, even on vehicles with four-wheel with high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y strictions; the maximum permissible drive. on the sidewall). speed for your vehicle may be significantly ● Check that they are correctly seated after lower. The maximum speed limit for these Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap- driving for a few yards; correct the position if tyres depends directly on the maximum axle proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these necessary, in accordance with the manufac- weights for your car and on the listed weight tyres are specified in the vehicle's docu- turer's fitting instructions. ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or rating of the tyres being used. 1) ● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). COC ). The vehicle documentation varies It is best to contact a specialised CUPRA ● If there is a danger of being trapped de- depending on the country of residence. Service or SEAT Official Service to check the spite having fitted the chains, it is best to dis- Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper- maximum speed which is permissible for the able the traction control (TCS) in the ESC ties when the tread is worn down to a depth V-rated tyres fitted on your car on the basis ››› page 259, Connecting and disconnect- of 4 mm. of this information. ing the ESC and TCS. The performance of winter tyres is also se- WARNING verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is Snow chains will improve braking ability as still much deeper than 4 mm. Exceeding the maximum speed permitted well as traction in winter conditions. for the winter tyres fitted on your car can For technical reasons snow chains may only A code letter indicating the speed limit is cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con- be used with the following wheel rim/tyre stamped on all winter tyres ››› page 304 . trol of the vehicle – risk of accident. combination. » Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds must have an appropriate sticker attached For the sake of the environment so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable When winter is over, change back to sum- stickers are available at specialised CUPRA mer tyres at an appropriate moment. In Services, SEAT Official Service centres and temperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform- specialised workshops. Please note the reg- ance will be improved if summer tyres are ulations to this effect in your country. used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises “All-weather” tyres can also be used instead while driving will all be reduced. of winter tyres.

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 309 Practical tips

Tyres Wheel rim Chains with them. CUPRA recommends the use of WARNING coated snow chains. 215/55 R17 7.5Jx17ET40 Max. link 15 mm Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 81. 225/55 R17 7.5Jx17ET40 225/50 R18 8x18 ET40 Tyre pressure monitor system Max. link 9 mm Tyre pressure monitor indicator 245/45 R18 8x18 ET40 Control lamp 245/40 R19 8x19 ET40

Other dimensions do not allow chains  It lights up

Remove any central wheel trims before fit- The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre has ting snow chains. structural damage. In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text mes- WARNING sage is displayed on the instrument panel screen.  Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any chains could lead to serious accidents and damaged tyres. damage. Fig. 196 Instrument panel: warning of loss of tyre ● Always the appropriate snow chains.  Flashes pressure. ● Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer. System fault The tyre pressure monitoring system com- The control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minute pares the individual speeds of each wheel ● Never exceed the maximum permitted and then lights up permanently. and thus the dynamic radius with the help of speeds when driving with snow chains. If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition off and on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure monitor the ABS sensors. indicator ››› page 311 . If the fault continues, go to a If the rolling circumference of one or more CAUTION specialised workshop. wheels has changed, the tyre pressure moni- ● Remove the snow chains to drive on roads toring indicator will indicate this on the in- without snow. Otherwise they will impair Several control and warning lamps light up strument panel through a warning lamp and vehicle handling, damage the tyres and for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- a warning to the driver Fig. 196 . When on- wear out very quickly. ed on while the function is verified. They will ››› ly one specific tyre is affected, its position ● switch off after a few seconds. Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch- within the vehicle will be indicated. ed if the chains come into direct contact

310 Wheels

 ● Loss of pressure: Check left Switch the ignition on. at a moderate speed and have the tyre tyre pressure! ● Memorise the new inflation pressure in the checked and inflated to the correct pres- Infotainment system: function button  >  sure. Wheel tread change Vehicle info > Vehicle status ››› page 85 . The wheel diameter changes when: ● OR: from the instrument cluster's Service Note menu page 69 . ● Tyre pressure is changed manually. ››› ● Driving for the first time with new tyres at a high speed can cause them to slightly ex- ● Tyre pressure is insufficient. When driving, the system self-calibrates the pand, which could then produce an air tyre pressure provided by the driver and the ● The tyre structure is damaged. pressure warning. wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied ● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a speeds the programmed values are collected ● If excessively low tyre pressure is detec- load. and monitored. ted with the ignition on, an audible warning will sound. In the event that there is a fault ● The wheels on an axle are subject to a With the wheels under very heavy loads, the in the system, an audible warning will heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load). tyre pressure must be increased to the total sound. ● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. recommended tyre pressure before calibra- ● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of ● The temporary spare wheel is fitted. tion ››› Fig. 193 . time or driving in a sporty style can tempo- ● The wheel on one axle is changed. rarily deactivate the TPMS. The control WARNING lamp shows a fault, but disappears when road conditions or the driving style change. There may be a delay in the reaction of the When the tyres are inflated at different tyre pressure monitoring indicator  or it pressures or at a pressure that is too low ● Do not only rely on the tyre pressure may not indicate anything under certain cir- then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a monitoring system. Regularly check your cumstances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-cov- loss of control of the vehicle and a serious tyres to ensure that the tyre pressure is cor- ered or unpaved roads, or when driving with or fatal accident. rect and that the tyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts, tears and im- snow chains). ● If the lamp  lights up, reduce speed impacts/dents. Remove objects from the mediately and avoid any sudden turning or tyres only when they have not pierced the Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring in- braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible, tyres. dicator and check the tyre pressure and status. ● The tyre pressure monitoring indicator After changing the tyre pressure or replacing ● The tyre pressure monitoring system can does not function when there is a fault in one or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni- only operate correctly if all of the tyres are the ESC or ABS ››› page 257 . toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do the inflated to the correct pressure when cold. same, for example, when the front and rear ● If a tyre has not been punctured and it wheels are swapped. does not have to be changed immediately, drive to the nearest specialised workshop 311 Practical tips

Spare wheel ● Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles Location and use of the temporary with BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub- spare wheel woofer)* To remove the spare wheel, you must first remove the subwoofer.

● Vehicles without a variable floor in the luggage compartment: pull the floor of the luggage compartment (carpet) upwards to get it out. Fig. 198 In the luggage compartment: remove the ● Vehicles with a variable luggage compart- subwoofer. ment floor: lift and secure the floor luggage The temporary spare wheel is stored under compartment as explained in ››› page 133 . the floor panel in the luggage compartment ● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 198 1 and is attached by a thumbnut. speaker cable. Fig. 197 In the luggage compartment: load floor The temporary spare wheel has been de- ● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock- raised. signed to be used for short periods of time. wise direction ››› Fig. 198 2 . Have the tyre checked and replaced as soon ● Remove the subwoofer speaker and the as possible at a specialised CUPRA Service, spare wheel. SEAT Official Service or at a specialised ● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place workshop. the subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim The spare wheel must not be switched for a with care. When doing so, the tip of the spare wheel from another vehicle. “FRONT” arrow on the subwoofer should point forward. Removing the temporary spare wheel ● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ● Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove rotate the securing wheel clockwise so that the temporary spare wheel ››› page 133 . the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in place. ● Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise ››› Fig. 197.

312 Wheels

Chains off during the journey. Switch off the sys- For technical reasons, snow chains must not tem when starting off. be used on the temporary spare wheel. If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the temporary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel that you have removed and replace the punctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING ● After fitting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. Failure to do so may cause an accident. The tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left front door frame ››› Fig. 193 . ● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle: risk of accident! ● Never travel more than 200 km using a temporary spare wheel. ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering: risk of accident! ● Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time, risk of accident. ● No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim. ● If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC system could automatically switch

313 Maintenance

Maintenance Service works ● Make sure that any repairs are carried out In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your special- by a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEAT ised CUPRA dealer, SEAT dealership or a dealership or a specialised workshop. Service specialised workshop will document the following information: CAUTION Service intervals ● When each one of the services was carried CUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam- out. age to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts. Service work and the Digital Mainte- ● Whether a specific repair has been sug- nance Plan gested, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near future. Note Log of services performed (“Digital Main- ● If you have expressed a special request for Regular services on the vehicle not only tenance Plan”) the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will maintain its value, but also its correct oper- Specialised CUPRA dealers, SEAT dealer- write the work order. ation and road safety. For this reason, con- duct the services in accordance with CU- ships or a specialised workshop records ● The components or fluids that were PRA guidelines. Service receipts in a central system. Thanks changed. to this comprehensive documentation of the ● The date of the next service. service history, it is possible to reproduce the services performed any time. CUPRA recom- The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until Set Service or Flexible Service Inter- mends requesting a Service receipt after ev- the next inspection. This information is vals ery service carried out containing all the documented in all checks performed. services carried out on the system. Services are classified as oil change service The type and the volume of the service may and inspection. The service interval display Whenever there is a new service the receipt vary from one vehicle to another. A special- on the instrument panel display serves as a is replaced with a current one. ised workshop will be able to provide specific reminder of the next service. The Digital Maintenance Plan is not availa- information on the jobs for your vehicle. ble in some markets. In this case, your spe- Depending on the features, the engine and cialised CUPRA dealer or a SEAT dealer- WARNING the conditions of use of the car, either the Fixed service or the Flexible service will be ship will inform you about the current doc- If the services are insufficient or not per- applied for an oil change service.. umentation of the work. formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic cause an accident and severe injuries.

314 Service

How to know which type of service needs you have to carry out this service, take into If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under to his vehicle account the individual conditions of use and adverse conditions of use, some of the ● Check the tables below: personal driving style. A major component of work must be carried out before the next the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in- service period or even between service in- Oil change servicea) stead of conventional engine oil. tervals. Bear in mind the information about the Conditions of use adverse include: Type of PR No. Service interval specifications of the engine oil according to service ● the VW standard ››› page 292 . The use of fuel with a high sulphur content. Every 5000 km or after QI1 If you do not want to the flexible service 1 yearb) ● Frequent short trips. you can select the fixed service However, a ● Every 7500 km or after fixed service may affect service costs The Letting the engine idle for a long period of QI2 1 yearb) Service Advisor will gladly advise you. time, as in the case of taxis. Fixed ● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. Every 10000 km or after QI3 1 yearb) Service interval display ● Frequent driving with a trailer (depending At CUPRA, the dates of the services are indi- on equipment). Every 15000 km or after QI4 1 yearb) cated by the service interval display on the ● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a instrument cluster ››› page 77 or in the Vehi- lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city). According to the service in- cle settings menu of the infotainment sys- QI6 Flexible ● Using the vehicle mostly in winter. terval display tem››› page 82››› page 86 . a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. The service interval display gives information This applies especially for the following b) Whatever happens first. for service dates that involve an engine oil parts (depending on equipment): change or an inspection. When the time for ● Dust and pollen filter Inspection Servicea) the corresponding service comes, additional work required, such as the change of brake ● Air Care allergen filter According to the service interval display fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out. ● Air filter a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. ● Toothed chain ● Particulate filter Particular characteristics of the Flexible Information about the terms of use Service ● Engine oil The service intervals and groups are usually Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil The Service Advisor of your specialised based on normal conditions of use. change service only has to be performed workshop will gladly inform you about the » when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when 315 Maintenance

need of performing service work between ● Your SEAT dealership service to you, offering the possibility of re- normal service intervals, always considering ● Your specialised workshop placing complete sets, such as: light engine, the conditions of use of your vehicle. gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical Due to technical reasons (continuous devel- components, etc. WARNING opment of components) the sets of services These parts are, approved parts, and are the may vary. Your specialised CUPRA dealer, If the services are insufficient or not per- same as the factory parts, which are also ap- any SEAT dealership or a specialised work- formed and if the service intervals are not proved spare parts. observed, the vehicle may be immobilised shop always receives updated information in traffic and cause accidents and severe about any modifications that are made. injuries. Original accessories ● Make sure that any repairs are carried out by a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEAT Additional service offers We recommend you only use CUPRA Origi- dealership or a specialised workshop. nal Accessories and CUPRA approved acces- Approved spare parts sories for your vehicle. The reliability, safety CAUTION and suitability of these accessories have CUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam- Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- been inspected specifically for this type of age to the vehicle due to insufficient work ceived for their vehicles and approved by vehicle. CUPRA cannot be held liable for the or of lack of availability of spare parts. SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. safety and suitability of parts from other These parts correspond exactly to the man- manufacturers. ufacturer's requirements in terms of design, Service sets accuracy of the measurements and materials. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been Mobility Service (Service Mobility) Sets of services include all the maintenance conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For works needed to ensure the safety and the this reason, we always recommend the use Since the moment you purchase your CU- smooth running of the vehicle (depending of Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be PRA vehicle you will be able to enjoy the on the conditions of use and the features held liable for the safety and suitability of benefits and coverage of the CUPRA Mobility of the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, parts from other manufacturers. Service. or operating fluids). Maintenance services For the first two years after the purchase, are divided into inspection and review serv- your new CUPRA vehicle is automatically ices. Consult the details of the jobs required Approved spare parts covered by the CUPRA Mobility Service with- for your vehicle at: out additional costs. Approved spare parts, following the manu- ● Your CUPRA dealer facturer's requirements, are an additional 316 Vehicle maintenance

If you wish to enjoy this service after this pe- Washing the vehicle riod, you can extend the Mobility Service as Vehicle maintenance long as you carry out the recommended In- The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. spection and Maintenance Services at a spe- Maintenance and cleaning remains of insects, bird excrements, tree cialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official resin or anti frost salt adhered to your vehi- Service. Basic observations cle, the more damage it can cause to the surface. High temperatures, for instance If your CUPRA vehicle is immobilised due to a strong sunlight, further intensify the dam- fault or an accident, our assistance services Regular and careful care helps to maintain age. will help you keep moving. the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may become a prerequisite to demand the war- Before washing the car, soften the dirt using Take into account that the Mobility Service ranty in the event of corrosion damage and plenty of water. differs depending on the country where the deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- vehicle was purchased. For further informa- work. To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, tion, ask your specialised CUPRA dealer, any bird droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water SEAT dealership or visit the CUPRA website Specialised workshops have the necessary and a microfibre cloth. in your country. care products. Please follow the instructions for application on the packaging. Have the underside of the vehicle washed after the end of the anti frost salts in winter. WARNING High pressure cleaning equipment Warranty ● Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- Fault-free operation warranty health if misused. sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- ● Always keep care products in a safe place, structions for the equipment. This applies Specialised CUPRA Services or SEAT Official out of the reach of children. Danger of poi- particularly to the operating pressure and Services ensure the perfect condition of new soning! the distance between the spraying water. Do vehicles. Check the purchase agreement or not aim the jet directly to the side window complementary additional documentation gaskets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun- For the sake of the environment provided by your Technical Service to see roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho- the conditions and the terms of the warran- ● When purchasing car care products, ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or ty. Consult further information in this regard chose products that are compatible with camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least in your specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT the environment. 40 cm. Official Service. ● The waste from car-care products should Do not remove snow and ice with a high- not be disposed of with ordinary household pressure cleaner. » waste.

317 Maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To mirrors must always be folded/deployed in a direct stream or one that has a rotating avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do electrically! jet for forcing off dirt. not apply too much pressure. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. The water temperature must not exceed Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with Risk of damaging the paint job! 60°C. a neutral cleaning product and a soft micro- ● Do not use sponges, abrasive household fibre cloth. sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Automatic car washes Risk of damaging the surface! Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water Spray the vehicle before starting the car and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of ● Vehicle parts with matte paint: wash. water with a leather cloth. – Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of Make sure that the windows and the panor- damaging the surface! WARNING amic sunroof* are closed and the wind- – Never select washing programs that in- screen wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind ● Only wash the vehicle with the ignition clude the use of wax. This could dam- the instructions of the car wash tunnel oper- switched off or according to the specifica- age the appearance of matte paint. ator, especially if your vehicle has detacha- tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk – Do not put stickers or magnets on parts ble parts. of accident! with matte paint, as removing them ● When cleaning the underbody or the in- may damage the paint. Use of car washes without brushes if possi- side of the wheel arches, protect yourself ble. from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of For the sake of the environment cut! Washing by hand The car should only be washed in special ● After cleaning the brakes could act more wash bays. These places are prepared to Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice prevent oily water from getting into the soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci- public drains. ing products that do not contain solvents. dent! In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several Washing vehicles with a matte paint by times. hand Cleaning and maintenance instruc- To prevent damage to the vehicle when CAUTION tions washing it, first remove the thicker dust and ● Before washing the vehicle in an auto- The cleaning and maintenance of individual dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and matic car wash, please make sure to retract components of the vehicle can be checked fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner the exterior mirrors to prevent them from in the following tables. The contents should for matte paint. being damaged. Electric exterior rearview be understood merely as a recommendation. Go to your specialised workshop if you 318 Vehicle maintenance have special questions or parts that are not Wheels Problem Solution listed. Take he general considerations into Problem Solution Have your specialised workshop account ››› in Take special care with... on Corrosion take care of this page 322. Antifreeze salt Water The water does not Brake abrasion Acid-free special cleaning prod- Maintain with hard wax (at least create droplets on dust uct 2 times a year) Cleaning the exterior the clean paint End exhausts Treat with suitable wax and ap- No shine de- Windscreen wipers ply paint preservative afterwards spite sober main- Problem Solution if the wax used does not contain tenance/paint Problem Solution preservative ingredients Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod- Dirt Soft cloth with wipers uct is required Tanks, e.g. insect Immediately soften with water remains, bird drop- and remove with a microfibre Headlights / Tail lights Covers / Trims pings, tree sap, cloth road salt Problem Solution Problem Solution Fat-based dirt, e.g. Delete immediately with a neu- Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a steel cosmetic products tral soap solutiona) and a soft a) solution cleaning product is required or sunscreen cloth a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water in 1 litre of water in 1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses Paint Carbon fibre parts Problem Solution Problem Solution Problem Solution

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol- Check the paint's colour code in Dirt Clean the same way as painted vent-free cleaning product Paint flaws an authorised service and re- parts ››› page 317 » Dirt Camera lenses: soft cloth with store with a touch-up pencil an alcohol-free cleaning product Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Hand brush/Anti frost spray with Apply rust remover and then ap- Snow/ice no solvents Environmental rust ply hard wax. Go you your speci- tank alised workshop if you have any queries

319 Maintenance

Decoration slides Displays/instrument panel Problem Solution

Problem Solution Problem Solution Grease-based dirt, Apply a neutral soap solutiona). e.g. oil, make-up, Absorb the dissolved grease and Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal etc. paint particles drying with an ab- solutiona) display cleaner sorbent cloth, in case you must a) treat it with water afterwards Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum Control panels in 1 litre of water Special dirt, e.g. Special stain remove: dry with an Problem Solution pens, nail polish, absorbent cloth, if applicable, dispersion paint, apply neutral soap solution af- Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with shoe cream etc. terwardsa) Interior cleaning neutral soap solutiona) a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum Windows in 1 litre of water in 1 litre of water Problem Solution Natural leather Seat belts Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and Problem Solution then dry with a cloth Problem Solution Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), allowed Covers / Trims solutiona) to dry before retracting Problem Solution Water-based dirt, Recent stains: absorbent cloth a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum e.g. coffee, tea, Dry stains: stain remover suita- Dirt Neutral soap solutiona) in 1 litre of water blood etc. ble for leather

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather Grease-based dirt, Recent stains: absorbent cloth in 1 litre of water e.g. oil, make-up, and suitable stain remover for Problem Solution etc. leather Plastic parts Dry stains: grease solvent spray Particles of dirt Vacuum cleaner Problem Solution stuck to surfaces Special dirt, e.g. Stain remover suitable for leath- pens, nail polish, er Water-based dirt, Absorbent cloth and neutral Dirt Damp cloth dispersion paint, e.g. coffee, tea, soap solutiona) shoe cream etc. Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if possi- blood etc. ble solvent-free plastic cleaner

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

320 Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution Camera lenses ● The ambient rust deposits must not be re- ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove moved through friction. Risk of damaging Care Apply preservative cream regu- ice or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of the paint job! larly to protect from sunlight. cracking the lens! ● Use a colour preservative if re- Remove cosmetic products and sunlight quired ● To clean the camera lens, never use abra- immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job! sive cleaning products or products with alco- a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum hol. Risk of scratches and cracks! Displays/instrument panel in 1 litre of water ● The screens, the instrument panel and the Carbon fibre parts Windows trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk ● Remove snow and ice from windows and of scratches! Problem Solution exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. ● Make sure that the instrument panel is Dirt Clean like plastic parts To avoid scratches, the scraper should only switched off and cooled down before clean- be pushed in one direction and not moved to ing. and fro. ● Make sure that no liquid leaks between the Take special care with... ● Never remove snow or ice from windows instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam- and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. age! Risk of cracks on the windows! Headlights/tail lights ● To prevent damage to the heating of the Control panels ● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with rear window, do not put stickers over the ● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con- a dry cloth or sponge. heating elements. trol panels. Risk of damage! ● Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks! Covers/trims Seat belts ● Do not use cleaning products or chrome ● Do not remove the seat belts to clean Wheels based cleaning agents. them. ● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive ● Seat belts and their components must products. Paint never be cleaned with chemical products, ● If the protective coating on the paint of the ● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust nor should they be allowed to come into rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, before applying wax or care products. Risk of contact with corrosive liquids, solvents or scratches, etc., the damage should be re- scratches! sharp objects. Risk of damaging the fabric! paired immediately. ● Do not apply wax or care products if the ● If you find any damage to the belt webbing, vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, damaging the paint job! ask your specialised workshop to replace the belt in question. » 321 Maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/microfibre prolonged period in the bright sun, it is best Accessories and modifica- ● Do not treat artificial leather/microfibre to cover the leather. with leather cleaning products, solvents, wax tions to the vehicle polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar WARNING products. Do not use water-repellent coatings on the Accessories, spare parts and ● If the stain is very hard to remove, take the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it as humid weather, darkness or when the repair work removed there. This will prevent damage. sun is in its lowest point, visibility may be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coatings ● Introduction Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard can also cause the windscreen wiper blades sponges, etc. to clean. to make noise. Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the for advice before purchasing accessories seats. Note and replacement parts. ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- ● Remains of insects can be removed much Your vehicle is designed to offer a high ets or belts can damage the surface. more easily with previously treated paint. standard of active and passive safety. For this ● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage ● Regular car care treatments can prevent reason, we recommend that you ask a speci- the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro deposits of ambient rust. alised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Serv- fasteners are closed. ice for advice before fitting accessories or replacement parts. Your Official Service has Natural leather Remove the vehicle from traffic the latest information from the manufacturer ● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe and can recommend accessories and re- cream, spot removers or similar products on If you want to leave your vehicle stationary placement parts which are suitable for your leather. for a long period of time, contact a qualified requirements. They can also answer any ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- workshop. They will gladly inform you about questions you might have regarding official ets or belts can damage the surface. the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- regulations. ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sion protection, Service and storage. We recommend you to use only CUPRA ac- sponges, etc. to clean. Also take into account instructions regarding cessories and Genuine CUPRA parts®. Spe- ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the the vehicle's battery ››› page 299 . cialised CUPRA Services or SEAT Official seats. Services have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that the parts are installed ● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight correctly and professionally. for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a

322 Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a dications and/or work performed incorrectly to inform you about options for installing and rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is in the vehicle. operating radio transmitters with a higher driven, such as a cruise control system or transmitting power. We therefore recommend that all work electronically-controlled suspension, must should be performed by a specialised CUPRA be approved for use in your vehicle and bear Mobile radio transmitters Service or a SEAT Official Service using gen- the e mark (the European Union's authorisa- uine CUPRA® parts. Commercial mobile telephones or radio tion symbol). equipment might interfere with the electron- If any additional electrical devices are fit- WARNING ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. This may be due to: ted which do not serve to control the vehicle Incorrectly performed modifications or itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop other work on your vehicle can lead to mal- ● No external aerial. or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the  functions and cause accidents. sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in ● External aerial incorrectly installed. the European Union). ● Transmitting power more than 10 W.

WARNING Radio telephones and office equip- You must, therefore, do not operate portable ment mobile telephones or radio equipment in- Accessories, for example telephone holders or cup holders, should never be fitted side the vehicle without a properly installed Radio transmitters (fixed installation) on the covers, or within the working range external aerial ››› . of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters Please note also that the maximum range of of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci- in the vehicle require prior approval. CUPRA the equipment can only be achieved with an dent. generally authorises in-vehicle installations external aerial. of approved types of radio transmitters provided that: Business equipment Technical modifications ● The antenna is installed correctly. Retrofit installation of business or private equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- Unauthorised modifications to the electron- ● The aerial is installed on the exterior of the ded the equipment cannot interfere with the ic components, software, wiring or data vehicle (and shielded cables are used to- driver's immediate control of the vehicle and transfer in the vehicle may cause malfunc- gether with non-reflective aerial trimming). that any such equipment carries the  tioning. ● The effective transmitting power does not mark. Any retrofit equipment that could in- exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base. You will appreciate that your specialised CU- fluence the driver's control of the vehicle PRA dealer or SEAT dealership cannot be A specialised CUPRA Service, SEAT Official must have a type approval for your vehicle held liable for any damage caused by modifi- Service or specialised workshop will be able and must carry the e mark. »

323 Maintenance

WARNING Mobile telephones or radio equipment which is operated inside the vehicle without a properly installed external aerial can create excessive magnetic fields that could cause a health hazard.

Note ● The posterior fitting of electric and electronic equipment in this vehicle affects its licence and could lead to the withdrawal of the vehicle registration document under certain circumstances. ● Please use the mobile telephone/radio operating instructions.

324 Information for the user

Data from the driving assist systems are also vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter- Information for the user recorded. This includes data such as wheth- face while the vehicle is switched on. er the systems were inactive or active and if CUPRA will not have access to EDR data un- such action had an impact on the vehicle’s Information for the user less the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the lessee or hirer) gives their consent. There aforementioned situations, accelerating or may be exceptions to this, depending on le- Information stored by the con- decelerating the vehicle. gal or contractual provisions. Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- trol units Due to legal requirements in safety-related cludes data from systems such as: products, CUPRA may use the EDR data for Storage of accident data (Event Data ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) field research and in order to improve vehicle Recorder) system quality. Any data used for the purpo- ● Emergency brake assistance system (Front ses of research will be treated anonymously Assist). Your vehicle has an event data recorder (in other words, no reference will be made to (EDR). ● Park Pilot system the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer). The EDR’s function is to record data in the ● Parking aid system (Park Assist). event of a mild or serious accident. These ● Lane Assist data are used to support the analysis of how Other important information different vehicle systems behaved. The EDR data are only recorded in specific accident situations. No data are recorded in The EDR records, over a reduced time range normal driving conditions. Environmental compatibility (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driving data and data from the restraint systems, No audio or video data inside or around the Environmental protection is a top priority in such as: vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan- the design, choice of materials and manu- ces are personal data such as name, age, or facture of your new CUPRA. ● How different vehicle systems worked. gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties (such as criminal proceedings authorities) ● Whether the driver and the occupants Constructive measures to encourage recy- may relate the contents of the EDR data to were wearing their seat belts. cling other data sources and create a personal ● How hard the acceleration or brake pedal reference in the context of an accident in- ● Joints and connections designed for easy was pressed. vestigation. dismantling. ● Vehicle speed. ● Modular construction to facilitate disman- In order to read the EDR data it is necessary tling. These data will provide a better understand- to access (if legally permitted to do so) the ing of the circumstances of the accident. ● Increased use of single-grade materials. » 325 Information for the user

● ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in Use of systems for the recovery of residual www.cupraofficial.com  accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, ISO 1629. etc.). ● The use of water-soluble paints. Choice of materials Addresses of the manufacturers

● Use of recycled materials. According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part Recycling of electrical or electronic relevant components must include the ad- if its components are not easily separated. devices dress of the manufacturer. ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials The address of the manufacturers of com- All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that originating from renewable sources. ponents that, due to their size or nature, are not permanently fitted in the vehicle ● Reduction of volatile components, includ- cannot include a sticker are listed below, as must be marked with the following symbol: ing odour, in plastic materials. long as it is legally required: ● Use of CFC-free coolants.  Radioelectrical Addresses of the Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions This symbol indicates that EED must not be equipment fitted in manufacturers dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive discarded as home waste but through selec- the vehicle 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, tive waste collection. Della KGaA Hueck & Co. hexavalent chromium. Radiofrequency remote Rixbecker Straße 75 control key 59552 Lippstadt, GERMANY Manufacturing methods Information about the EU Di- Radio frequency remote ● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the control (auxiliary heat- Digades GmbH protective wax for cavities. rective 2014/53/EU er) Äußere Weberstraße 20 ● Use of plastic film as protection during ve- 02763 Zittau, GERMANY Simplified EU compliance declaration Transmitted-Receiver hicle transport. (independent heating) ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. Your vehicle has different radioelectrical de- ADC Automotive Distance ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- vices. The manufacturers of these devices Control Systems GmbH tems. declare that they comply with Directive Peter-Dornier-Straße 10 2014/53/EU when legally required. Radar sensors for assis- 88131 Lindau, GERMANY ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- tance systems dues (RDF). The full text of the EU compliance declara- Robert Bosch GmbH Postfach 16 61 ● tion is available online at the following ad- Improvement in the quality of waste water. 71226 Leonberg, GERMANY dress:

326 Information for the user

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle) 433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW All CUPRA models

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mW Formentor

Transmitted-Receiver (independent heating) 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW Formentor

Bluetooth 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm All CUPRA models

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 21 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 21 dBm

WCDMA FDD VIII: 880-915MHz 21 dBm Connection to the external antenna of the car Leon, Formentor LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm All CUPRA models

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW All CUPRA models »

327 Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

28.2 dBm Leon, Formentor 76 GHz-77 GHz Radar sensors for assistance systems 35.0 dBm Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Ateca

110-120 kHz 10 W Ateca Wireless charging 111-120 kHz 10 W Leon, Formentor

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All CUPRA models

EGSM900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

DCS1800: 1710-1785 MHz 31 dBm

UMTS FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

UMTS FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

UMTS FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 24 dBm

Online Connectivity Unit E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 23.5 dBm All CUPRA models

E-UTRA FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 20: 832-862 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 28: 703-748 MHz 23.0 dBm

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements. Hereby, Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH de- tion of conformity is available at the following clares that the radio equipment type LTE- internet address: MBC-EU2 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declara- http://www.molex.com/doc 328 Indications about the technical data

Vehicle identification data mentation provided to the purchaser of the Technical data vehicle at the time of purchase. Vehicle ID number Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de- Indications about the tech- The vehicle ID number can be found in the pend on the equipment/features of each in- following places: dividual vehicle, as well as on the driving nical data style, road conditions, traffic conditions, en- ● In the infotainment system using the func- vironmental conditions, load or number of  Important information tion button > Interior > instrument clus- passengers. ter > Service. Introduction ● One the vehicle's data label. ● In front, under the windscreen. Filling capacities The values indicated in the technical data ● To the right in the engine compartment. may differ depending on optional equipment Tank level or version of the model, as well as in the case Type plate Vehicles with front-wheel 50 l, 7 l reserve of special vehicles and equipment for certain drive: countries. The type plate is located on the vehicle’s right hand door frame. Vehicles for certain Vehicles with four-wheel 55 l, 8.5 l reserve The information in the official vehicle docu- export countries do not have a type plate. drive: mentation takes precedence at all times. Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con- Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci- Fuel consumption tainer fications section approx. 3 litres kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. Approved consumption values are derived from measurements performed or super- Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly PS vised by certified EU laboratories, according used to denote engine power. to the legislation in force at the time (for Weights more information, see the Publications Of- rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed. Load on the roof fice of the European Union on the EUR-Lex Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque. website: © European Union, http://eur- The maximum authorised load on the roof of your vehicle is 75 kg. » Cetane number, indication of the diesel lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specified CZ combustion power. vehicle characteristics.

Research octane number, indication of The values relating to fuel consumption and RON the knock resistance of petrol. CO2 emissions can be found in the docu- 329 Technical data

Empty weight, total weight, axle loads The empty weight of the vehicle with driver (75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU) 1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can increase the empty weight, which means that the possible useful load decreases pro- portionally.

Trailer weight The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball head of the towing bracket is 80 kg.

WARNING The values indicated for the maximum permitted weights must not be exceeded. There is a risk of accident and damage!

330 Indications about the technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engines 1.5 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 228 (310)/5,450-6,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 400/2,000-5,450

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,498 4/1,984

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ Super 98 / Super 95 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG DSG

Top speed (km/h) a) a) a)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a) a) a)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) a) a) 2,140 a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

331 Technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 199 Dimensions.

››› Fig. 199 Formentor Formentor 4Drive A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 893/877 893/877

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,680 2,680

D Length (mm) 4,450 4,450

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,585/1,559 1,585/1,559

G Width (mm) 1,839 1,839

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,508 1,510

Turning radius (m) 11.4 11.4

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

332 Index

lights ...... 116 requirements ...... 174 Index seats ...... 13 special characteristics ...... 174 seat with memory ...... 127 Anti-lock brake system ...... 257 Numbers and Symbols time ...... 75 Anti-puncture ...... 44, 45 12-volt battery Adjusting the seat belt ...... 20 Anti-puncture kit ...... 43, 44 assisted start ...... 51 Airbags ...... 23 check after 10 minutes ...... 46 charge level ...... 302 activating and deactivating ...... 27 components ...... 45 charging ...... 301 centre ...... 28 inflating the tyre ...... 45 disconnect and connect ...... 77, 299 description ...... 24 sealing the tyre ...... 45 electrolyte level ...... 301 for the head ...... 30 Anti-puncture set ...... 44 energy management ...... 302 for the knees ...... 28 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 97 replacement ...... 301 front ...... 26 trailer ...... 279 winter operations ...... 299 side ...... 29 Anti-trap function 4Drive ...... 218 Airbag system ...... 23 sunroof ...... 109 activation ...... 24 sunshade blind (glass roof) ...... 109 A control lamp ...... 25 windows ...... 107 ABS deactivation of the front airbag ...... 27 Antifreeze ...... 295 see Anti-lock brake system ...... 257 description ...... 24 Apple CarPlay ACC ...... 232 front airbags ...... 25 Disconnecting ...... 173 Accessories ...... 322 how it works ...... 24 establish connection ...... 173 Activating CUPRA CONNECT ...... 168 Air conditioning ...... 143 menu ...... 173 Adapting the playback volume ...... 164 air vents ...... 148 requirements ...... 173 Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 232 controls ...... 145 special characteristics ...... 174 control and warning lamp ...... 233 parking ventilation ...... 150 Applications (apps) ...... 173 malfunction ...... 237 usage instructions ...... 148 Aspects to think about before starting the noise ...... 237 Air recirculation ...... 149 vehicle ...... 12 operation ...... 233 Air vents ...... 148 Assistance systems special driving situations ...... 235 Alternator adaptive cruise control ...... 232 status display ...... 235 warning lamp ...... 300 assisted parting system (Park Assist) ...... 261 Additional heating Ambient lighting ...... 118 Auto Hold function ...... 255 see Auxiliary heating ...... 152 Android Auto™ connecting ...... 79 Adjust Disconnecting ...... 174 cruise control ...... 225 front seats ...... 124 establish connection ...... 174 disconnecting ...... 79 headrest ...... 126 menu ...... 174 door opening warning (Exit Assist) ...... 246 driver alert system ...... 71 333 Index

driving assist (Travel Assist) ...... 242 launch-control program ...... 211 Bluetooth® ...... 166 Emergency Assist ...... 244 operating fault ...... 210 profiles ...... 166 emergency braking (Front Assist) ...... 228 selector lever lock ...... 208 Bonnet ...... 290, 292 front radar ...... 222 selector lever positions ...... 208 opening and closing ...... 291 general notes ...... 221 steering wheel with shift paddles ...... 209 Brake fluid ...... 297 hill descent control (HDC) ...... 214 tiptronic ...... 207, 209 Brakes ...... 252 Hill Hold Control (HHC) ...... 212 towing ...... 54 brake fluid ...... 297 lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . 246 Auxiliary heating ...... 152 brake servo ...... 252 parking aid Plus ...... 269 activate ...... 154 braking assistant ...... 257 PreCrash system ...... 22 connecting ...... 152 electronic parking brake ...... 254 proactive speed adjustment ...... 238 disconnecting ...... 152 emergency brake function ...... 254 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 246 electricity consumers ...... 154 new brake pads ...... 252 rear parking aid ...... 272 programming ...... 154 Braking assistant ...... 257 road sign detection system messages . . . . . 72 radio-operated remote control ...... 153 Braking system safety advice ...... 221 remote control range ...... 154 warning lamp ...... 252 speed limiter ...... 226 special characteristics ...... 153, 154 system limits ...... 221 usage instructions ...... 154 C Tyre pressure monitor indicator ...... 310 Average fuel consumption ...... 65 Camera Tyre pressure monitoring ...... 310 cleaning ...... 73 Assisted start ...... 51 B Lane Assist ...... 240 Audible warning Backrest of the rear seat Care control and warning lamps ...... 80 folding ...... 128 see Cleaning the vehicle ...... 317 lights ...... 110 raise ...... 128 Catalytic converter ...... 289 unbuckled seat belt ...... 16 Bag hooks ...... 135, 140 Central armrests ...... 129 Auto Hold ...... 255 Battery ...... 90 Central locking ...... 91 Auto Hold Function ...... 255 change on the remote control (independ- anti-theft alarm ...... 97 Auto Lock (central locking) ...... 91 ent heating) ...... 153 central locking switch ...... 93 Automatic car wash ...... 318 Before starting the vehicle ...... 12 emergency lock ...... 101 disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . 255 Belt tightening ...... 21 remote control key ...... 92 Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . 111 Bicycle carrier selective unlocking system ...... 92 Automatic gearbox ...... 207 fitting onto the coverable tow hook ...... 284 settings ...... 92 control lamp ...... 207 max. load rating ...... 284 unlock and lock the vehicle (Keyless Ac- downhill assistant ...... 211 Blown bulbs cess) ...... 94 driving tips ...... 210 change a bulb ...... 61 Change a bulb ...... 61 kick-down ...... 210 Change the wiper blades ...... 50 334 Index

Changing a wheel ...... 46 Clutch (lamp) ...... 213 remote control (independent heating) . . . 153 subsequent work ...... 50 Coming Home ...... 114 replacement ...... 207 wheel nuts ...... 47 Connectivity ...... 166 seat belt ...... 16 Changing parts ...... 322 WLAN access point ...... 176 Start-Stop ...... 205 Checking levels Connectivity Box ...... 198 steering column lock ...... 215 engine compartment ...... 292 Connectors TCS ...... 256, 259 Check lists faults ...... 141 tow hook ...... 283 requirements for Android Auto™ ...... 174 Control and warning lamps ...... 80 Travel Assist ...... 244 requirements for Apple CarPlay ...... 173 adaptive cruise control ...... 233 Tyre pressure monitor system ...... 310 requirements for MirrorLink® ...... 175 airbags ...... 27 Controls and displays reverse assist (Rear View) ...... 274 airbag system ...... 25 overview ...... 63 Childproof locks alternator ...... 300 Controls on the steering wheel ...... 87 electric windows ...... 106 anti-lock brake system ABS ...... 256 Convenience close function Child seats audible warning ...... 80 windows ...... 106 group classification ...... 32 braking system ...... 252 Convenience open function ISOFIX system ...... 36 cruise control (GRA) ...... 225 windows ...... 106 safety instructions ...... 33 EDL ...... 256 Cooling ...... 143 securing with the seat belt ...... 40 electromechanical steering ...... 215 Cooling system Top Tether system ...... 36, 38, 39 electronic parking brake ...... 252 check the coolant ...... 296 Cleaning the vehicle Emergency Assist ...... 245 refilling coolant ...... 296 high pressure cleaning equipment ...... 317 emissions control ...... 288 Copyright ...... 164 special care ...... 321 engine coolant ...... 76 Correct sitting position ...... 13 vehicle exterior ...... 319 engine management ...... 288 driver ...... 13 vehicle interior ...... 320 engine oil ...... 293 Cruise control ...... 225 wash the vehicle ...... 317 ESC ...... 256, 259 operation ...... 225 Climate control fuel reserve ...... 76 CUPRA CONNECT ...... 167 auxiliary heating ...... 152 gear change ...... 213 deactivate ...... 170 Clocks hill descent control ...... 214 faults ...... 171 digital ...... 75 Lane Assist ...... 240 legal provisions ...... 170 set the time ...... 75 lane departure warning (Side Assist) ...... 247 Current documentation attached ...... 156 Closing ...... 91 lights ...... 110 bonnet ...... 291 particulate filter ...... 288, 289 D panoramic roof ...... 108 press on the brake ...... 232 Dangers of not using the seat belt ...... 18 rear lid ...... 102 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 247 Data label ...... 329 windows ...... 106 refuelling ...... 76, 286 Data transfer ...... 167 335 Index

Deactivating CUPRA CONNECT services . . . 170 Driving Assist (Travel Assist) ...... 242 connecting ...... 254 Deactivation of the front airbag ...... 27 operation ...... 244 disconnecting ...... 254 Digital Cockpit ...... 65 problems and solutions ...... 244 emergency brake function ...... 254 information profiles ...... 65 status display ...... 243 lamp ...... 252 Disposal Driving data ...... 69 Electronic self-locking ...... 257 seat belt tensioners ...... 21 Driving data indicator ...... 69 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 257 Distance control Driving mode...... 217 Emergencies ...... 42 see Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 232 Driving on flooded roads ...... 220 anti-puncture kit ...... 44 Door cylinder ...... 100 Driving profile ...... 217 changing a wheel ...... 46 Door handle ...... 100 DSG ...... 207 changing the battery ...... 301 Door lock ...... 100 Duplicate keys ...... 88 emergency vehicle towing ...... 54 Doors ...... 100 Dust and pollen filter ...... 143 hazard warning lights ...... 115 child lock ...... 101 Dynamic headlight range control ...... 116 jump leads ...... 51 Downhill assistance function ...... 211 replace a blown fuse ...... 59 Downhill assistant ...... 211 E vehicle tool kit ...... 43 Drawers ...... 139 e-Call ...... 42 Emergency Assist ...... 244 Drink holder Easy Open connecting and disconnecting ...... 245 bottle holder ...... 140 special characteristics ...... 104 problems and solutions ...... 245 front ...... 140 Eco-driving notes ...... 74 see also Emergency Assist ...... 244 in the rear central armrest ...... 140 EDL Emergency brake function ...... 254 Drive Profile ...... 215 see Electronic differential lock ...... 257 Emergency braking assist system ...... 222 Driver Electric activating and deactivating ...... 231 see Correct sitting position ...... 13 windows ...... 106 dodge assist ...... 230 Driver alert system ...... 71 Electrical accessories pedestrian and cyclist recognition ...... 229 Driving see Power sockets ...... 141 status display ...... 229 driving on flooded roads ...... 220 Electric devices ...... 141 system limitations ...... 230 economical ...... 219 Electric windows ...... 106 temporarily deactivating ...... 232 parking on inclines ...... 260 Electrolyte ...... 301 turn assist ...... 230 park on upward slopes ...... 260 Electronic differential lock ...... 257 warnings ...... 229 safe ...... 12 Electronic engine torque management Emergency braking warning ...... 116 trips abroad ...... 116, 221 (XDS) ...... 257 Emergency call ...... 42 with trailer ...... 281 Electronic immobilizer ...... 100, 203 Emergency call service ...... 42 Electronic parking brake ...... 254 Emergency locking of the front passenger automatic connection ...... 254 door ...... 101 automatic disconnection ...... 254 336 Index

Emergency opening Engine coolant ...... 295 ESC driver's door ...... 100 check the level ...... 296 electronic stability control (ESC) ...... 257 rear lid ...... 105 control lamp ...... 76 multi-collision brake ...... 258 Emergency operation G12evo ...... 295 Sport mode ...... 259 front passenger door ...... 101 G12 plus-plus ...... 295 Event Data Recorder ...... 325 Emissions control system G13 ...... 295 Exhaust gases ...... 288 catalytic converter ...... 289 specifications ...... 295 Exterior lighting control lamp ...... 288 temperature indicator ...... 76 change a bulb ...... 61 particulate filter ...... 289 warning lamp ...... 76 Exterior mirrors Energy management ...... 302 Engine failure driving with a trailer ...... 278 Engine control lamp ...... 288 folding ...... 121 assisted start ...... 51 Engine management ...... 288 heated ...... 121 noise ...... 202 control lamp ...... 288 settings ...... 121 running in ...... 218 Engine oil Exterior view ...... 7, 8 Start-Stop system ...... 205 change ...... 292, 295 External antenna ...... 323 start (driver instructions with the mechan- checking the oil level ...... 294 external audio sources ical contact) ...... 204 consumption ...... 294 adapting the playback volume ...... 164 Engine and ignition dipstick ...... 294 automatic ignition disconnection ...... 201 inspection service ...... 292 F emergency start ...... 203 maintenance frequencies ...... 292 Fabrics: clean ...... 320 My Beat ...... 204 refill ...... 294 Factors that have a negative influence on preheat the engine ...... 202 specifications ...... 292 safe driving ...... 12 starting the engine ...... 202 Engine oil pressure Fastening rings ...... 134 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . 202 control lamp ...... 293 Filling capacities switching off the engine ...... 203 Engine specifications ...... 331 fuel tank ...... 329 Engine compartment ...... 290, 292 Environment window washer tank ...... 329 battery ...... 299 ecological driving ...... 219 window washer water ...... 298 brake fluid ...... 297 environmental compatibility ...... 325 Filling the tank ...... 286 coolant ...... 295, 296 refuelling ...... 286 Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . 114 engine oil ...... 294 Environmental tip Four-wheel drive ...... 218 opening and closing ...... 291 refuelling ...... 286 snow chains ...... 218 safety instructions ...... 290 Equipment towing ...... 54 window washer tank ...... 298 telephone interface ...... 194 winter tyres ...... 218 Frequency bands ...... 181 Front airbags ...... 25 337 Index

Front Assist Gear indication ...... 213 before first use ...... 156 see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 228 Glove compartment ...... 139 connecting and disconnecting ...... 162 Front passenger front airbag customise ...... 162 control lamp ...... 25 H customised menus ...... 162 Fuel Handbrake drop-down menu ...... 162 fuel gauge ...... 76 see Electronic parking brake ...... 254 executing functions ...... 162 identification ...... 287 Hangers ...... 140 function buttons ...... 83 petrol ...... 287 Hazard warning lights ...... 115 initial configuration ...... 84 refuelling ...... 286 HDC Internet access ...... 177 saving ...... 219 see Hill descent control (HDC)...... 214 Media mode ...... 184 Fuel consumption Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 18 MirrorLink® ...... 175 inertia disconnection ...... 219 Headlights navigation ...... 187 why does consumption increase? ...... 288 change a bulb ...... 61 operating ...... 162 Fuel gauge ...... 76 trips abroad ...... 116 overview and controls ...... 160 control lamp ...... 76 Headrest ...... 125, 126 Radio mode ...... 180 Fuel tank cap Heating ...... 143 safety instructions ...... 156 opening and closing ...... 286 HHC share a WLAN connection ...... 176 Fuel tank flap see Hill Hold Control (HHC) ...... 212 sound settings ...... 163 opening and closing ...... 286 Hill descent control (HDC). system settings ...... 163 Full-LED headlights ...... 61 control lamp ...... 214 telephone interface ...... 194 Full Link ...... 172 Hill Hold Control (HHC) ...... 212 vehicle information ...... 85 applications ...... 173 Horn ...... 63 vehicle settings ...... 86 settings ...... 173 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) ...... 177 symbols ...... 173 I WLAN ...... 176 Fuses ...... 58 Identification of fuels ...... 287 Infotainment system colour coded ...... 58 Identifying letters on engine (LDM) see Infotainment ...... 82 fuse box ...... 58, 59 display ...... 69 Inspection ...... 292, 314 preparations for replacing fuses ...... 59 Identity accreditation ...... 169 Inspection reminder ...... 77 recognise blown fuses ...... 59 Inertia mode ...... 212 Inspection service ...... 292 replace ...... 59 Information profiles ...... 65 Instrument panel ...... 64 Infotainment ...... 82, 156 control and warning lamps ...... 80 G adapt menus ...... 162 digital (Digital Cockpit) ...... 65 Gear-change recommendation ...... 213 Android Auto™ ...... 174 menu structure ...... 68 Gearbox DSG Apple CarPlay ...... 173 see Automatic gearbox ...... 207 338 Index

service intervals display ...... 77 spare key ...... 88 control and warning lamps ...... 110 status display ...... 67, 68 synchronise ...... 90 control lighting ...... 116 use with the multifunction steering wheel . 78 unlock and lock ...... 92, 100 controlling the lights ...... 110 Instrument panel display ...... 65, 67 vehicle key ...... 88 cornering light ...... 114 Instrument panel lighting ...... 116 Key switch ...... 27 daylight ...... 111 Interior mirror Kick-down dipped beam headlights ...... 110 anti-dazzle ...... 121 automatic gearbox ...... 210 fog light ...... 110 Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system fog light with cornering light function . . . . . 114 activation ...... 99 L headlight range control ...... 116 Interior view ...... 11 Lane Assist ...... 240 instrument lighting ...... 116 Interlock button ...... 208 control and warning lamp ...... 240 interior lights ...... 117 ISOFIX ...... 36 Lane assist Plus...... 248 leaving home ...... 114 ISOFIX system ...... 36 Lane Assist system main beam headlight lever ...... 112 see Lane Assist ...... 240 main beam headlights ...... 110 J Lane departure warning (Side Assist) motorway light ...... 111 Jack ...... 43 control lamp ...... 247 reading lights ...... 117 position points ...... 48 driving situations ...... 248 side lights ...... 110 Jump leads ...... 51 how it works ...... 247 switch ...... 110 Jump start ...... 51 Light indication ...... 248 switching on and off ...... 110 description ...... 52 Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . 211 turn signal lever ...... 112 Leaving a parking space with the parking as- Loading the luggage compartment K sist system ...... 266 fastening rings ...... 134 Keyless Access Leaving Home ...... 114 general advice ...... 130 Press & Drive ...... 201 Legal provisions ...... 170 luggage compartment ...... 102, 130 special characteristics ...... 96 Levels control ...... 329 positioning the load ...... 130 starting the engine ...... 202 Licenses ...... 164 positioning the luggage ...... 130 unlocking and locking the vehicle ...... 94 Lift the vehicle ...... 48 roof carrier system ...... 137 Keys Light Assist ...... 113 trailer ...... 280 assign a key ...... 88 Light range control ...... 116 trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . 136 changing the battery ...... 90 Lights ...... 110 Load on the roof ...... 138 instructions for the driver (mechanical ambient light ...... 118 technical data ...... 138 contact) ...... 204 audible warnings ...... 110 Lock and unlock ...... 94 pull out the key blade ...... 89 AUTO ...... 111 in the locking cylinder ...... 100 remote control ...... 88 change a bulb ...... 61 with the central locking switch...... 93 coming home ...... 114 339 Index

Luggage compartment ...... 102, 130 MirrorLink® learn usage pattern ...... 193 electric opening and closing ...... 102 Disconnecting ...... 175 limitations ...... 188 emergency unlocking ...... 105 establish connection ...... 175 managing the map ...... 188 enlarge ...... 128 menu ...... 175 map ...... 188, 191 features of the electric rear lid ...... 103 requirements ...... 175 navigation announcements ...... 187 luggage compartment lighting ...... 117 settings ...... 173 offroad mode ...... 191 net bag ...... 134 special characteristics ...... 175 Other options ...... 193 opening and closing controlled by sensors Mirrors route details ...... 192 (Easy Open) ...... 104 adjusting the exterior mirrors ...... 121 saved data ...... 188, 193 storing the rear shelf ...... 131 anti-dazzle interior ...... 121 saved destinations ...... 191 variable luggage compartment floor ...... 133 see also Mirrors ...... 121 save destination ...... 191 Luggage compartment floor ...... 133 Mobile ...... 323 split screen ...... 193 Luggage compartment shelf Mobile phones ...... 323 symbols ...... 189 storing ...... 131 Mobile Signal Amplifier ...... 198 use contact details ...... 192 Lumbar support ...... 124 Multi-collision brake ...... 258 use the map ...... 191 Multifunction display ...... 69 use the map to enter the destination . . . . . 191 M Multimedia ...... 180, 200 Net bag Main beam assist ...... 113 favourites ...... 185 luggage compartment ...... 134 Main beam headlight lever ...... 112 play ...... 185 Net for luggage Maintenance select source ...... 185 luggage compartment ...... 134 see Service ...... 314 use streaming services ...... 185 Noise Maintenance frequencies ...... 292 My Beat ...... 204 auxiliary heating ...... 154 Malfunction brakes ...... 252 adaptive cruise control ...... 237 N ESC ...... 257 assisted parting system (Park Assist) ...... 261 Navigation ...... 187 parking brake ...... 254 clutch ...... 213 decrease the navigation map ...... 188 tyres ...... 304, 308 PreCrash system ...... 22 detailed view ...... 193 Number of seats ...... 14 replacement ...... 213 edit route ...... 192 sunroof ...... 108 enter an address for a guide destination . . 190 O towing device ...... 278 favourite destinations ...... 191 Octane (petrol) ...... 287 Mats ...... 16 frequent destinations ...... 191 Odometer ...... 65 Media Mode ...... 184 functions ...... 189 partial ...... 67 Memory function ...... 127 function: entering destination ...... 190 total ...... 67 Microfiber: clean ...... 320 increase the navigation map ...... 188 Oil change ...... 295 last destinations ...... 191 One-touch signalling function ...... 112 340 Index

Online services ...... 167 Panoramic roof ...... 108 parallel parking ...... 265 Opening ...... 91 see also Sunroof ...... 108 parking conditions ...... 265 bonnet ...... 291 Park Assist stop early ...... 262 panoramic roof ...... 108 see the assisted parking system (Park As- Parking distance warning system rear lid ...... 102 sist) ...... 261 see Parking aid ...... 268, 269, 272 tank cap ...... 286 Parking ...... 260 Parking ventilation ...... 150 windows ...... 106 at an angle with the reverse assist ...... 275 ParkPilot Opening and closing ...... 91 automatic gearbox ...... 210 see Parking aid ...... 268, 269, 272 bonnet ...... 291 with the assisted parking system (Park As- Partial odometer ...... 69 by remote control ...... 92 sist) ...... 265 Particulate filter ...... 289 doors ...... 100 Parking aid Pedals ...... 14, 16 in the locking cylinder ...... 100 automatic activation ...... 270 Petrol panoramic roof ...... 108 braking during the manoeuvre ...... 272 additives ...... 287 rear lid ...... 102 fault ...... 271, 272 particulate filter ...... 289 rear lid with electric opening and closing . 102 parking aid plus ...... 269 refuelling ...... 287 tank cap ...... 286 rear parking aid ...... 272 Places with risk of explosion ...... 195 windows ...... 106 see the assisted parking system (Park As- Places with special regulations ...... 195 with the central locking switch...... 93 sist) ...... 261 Power socket Operating fault sensors and camera: clean ...... 319 faults ...... 141 automatic gearbox ...... 210 setting the indications and audio sig- Power sockets ...... 141 Operation in winter nals ...... 271, 272 trailer ...... 279 battery ...... 299 surroundings warning ...... 269 Power steering salt on the roads ...... 120 towing device ...... 273 see Steering ...... 215 snow chains ...... 309 trailer mode ...... 271 PreCrash system ...... 22 tyres ...... 308 visual indication ...... 271 Front Assist monitoring system ...... 22 Original accessories ...... 316 Parking aid system malfunction ...... 22 Original Spare Parts ...... 316 see Parking aid ...... 268, 269, 272 selecting the driving profile ...... 22 Overview (left hand drive) ...... 9 Parking aid system (Park Assist) ...... 261 status display ...... 22 Overview (right hand drive) ...... 10 angle parking ...... 265 Preheat the engine ...... 202 Ownership accreditation ...... 169 automatic brake operation ...... 267 Press & Drive automatic interruption ...... 262 start button ...... 201 P conditions for leaving a parking space . . . 266 starting the engine ...... 202 leaving a parking space (only when parallel Painting the vehicle Proactive speed adjustment ...... 238 parked) ...... 266 care ...... 319 activation ...... 239 malfunction ...... 261 driving ...... 239 341 Index

limitations ...... 238 Rear window wiper ...... 119 Rotation direction problems and solutions ...... 239 Refuelling tyres ...... 49 control lamp ...... 76 Running in R fuel gauge ...... 76 new brake pads ...... 252 Radar sensors ...... 222 opening the fuel tank flap...... 286 new engine ...... 218 Radio ...... 180 Releasing the seat belt ...... 19 new tyres ...... 303 equipment ...... 181 Remote control key frequency bands ...... 181 unlock and lock ...... 92 S preset buttons ...... 181 Remote control (independent heating) . . . . . 153 S-PIN ...... 169 symbols ...... 181 changing the battery ...... 153 Safe ...... 203 Traffic information (TP) ...... 182 Repair work ...... 322 Safe driving ...... 12 tune station ...... 181 Requirements for Apple CarPlay ...... 173 Safe security system ...... 97 Radio-operated remote control Reverse assist (Rear View) ...... 273 Safety see Keys ...... 88 angle parking ...... 275 child safety ...... 31 Radio mode ...... 180 check list ...... 274 child seats ...... 31 Radio screen: clean ...... 320 cross traffic ...... 274 safe driving ...... 12 Radio telephones ...... 323 hitching a trailer ...... 274 Safety equipment ...... 12 Rain sensor ...... 120 requirements ...... 274, 275 Safety instructions ...... 156 function control ...... 120 settings ...... 275 central airbag ...... 28 Raise the vehicle ...... 48 usage instructions ...... 275 head-protection airbags ...... 30 RCTA ...... 249 Reverse (automatic gearbox) ...... 208 seat belt tensioners ...... 21 see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 246 Revolution counter ...... 65, 75 side airbags ...... 29 Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 246, 249 Road signs using child seats ...... 33 control lamp ...... 247 shown on the display ...... 72 using seat belts ...... 17 Rear fog light Road signs detection system ...... 72 Save fuel control lamp ...... 110 how it works ...... 72 inertia mode ...... 212 Rear lid ...... 102, 105 limited operation ...... 73 Screen see also Luggage compartment ...... 102 shown on the display ...... 72 clean ...... 164 Rear mounting speed warning ...... 73 Seat belts ...... 16 towing device ...... 284 trailer ...... 73 adjusting the seat belt ...... 20 Rear parking aid ...... 272 windscreen damage ...... 73 adjustment ...... 19 Rear seat Roof carrier ...... 136 control lamp ...... 16 fold down with the remote unlocking lever .129 fix the crossbars ...... 137 protective function ...... 17 Rear Traffic Alert ...... 249 Roof carrier system ...... 136 purpose ...... 16, 23 Rear View Camera ...... 273 Roof rack ...... 136 342 Index

safety instructions ...... 17 Service Menu Start-Stop system unfastened ...... 18 identifying letters on engine ...... 69 disconnect and connect manually ...... 207 Seat belt tensioners ...... 21 restart the oil service ...... 69 driver indications ...... 205 control lamp ...... 25 restart Trip ...... 69 how it works ...... 205 Seat heating ...... 149 service intervals display ...... 69 lamps ...... 205 SEAT Ident ...... 169 time ...... 69 stopping and starting the engine ...... 205 Seats Service Mobility ...... 316 the engine does not turn off ...... 205 adjusting the headrests ...... 126 Service notification: consult ...... 77 the engine starts by itself ...... 205 backrest of the rear seat ...... 128 Set of vehicle keys ...... 88 Starter button ...... 201 electric settings ...... 124 Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . 209 Start the engine by towing ...... 54 fitting the headrest ...... 126 Signal amplifier ...... 198 special characteristics ...... 53 heating ...... 149 Snow chains ...... 309 Status display ...... 68 incorrect positions ...... 14 four-wheel drive ...... 218 ACT ...... 219 manual adjustment ...... 124 Sound settings ...... 163 adaptive cruise control ...... 235 memory function ...... 127 Sound system ...... 165 compass indication ...... 68 number of seats ...... 14 Spare parts ...... 322 doors, bonnet and rear lid open ...... 67 removing the headrest ...... 126 Spare wheel ...... 312 Drive Profile ...... 215 Selective unlocking system ...... 92 Special characteristics ECO ...... 68 Selector lever lock ...... 208 Android Auto™ ...... 174 Eco-driving notes ...... 74 Selector lever (automatic transmission) Apple CarPlay ...... 174 Emergency brake assistance system (Front positions ...... 208 high pressure cleaning equipment ...... 282 Assist) ...... 229 Selling the vehicle ...... 170 MirrorLink® ...... 175 gear-change recommendation ...... 67 Service towing ...... 53, 55 identifying letters on engine ...... 68 Digital Maintenance plan ...... 314 tow start ...... 53 instrument panel ...... 67 flexible service ...... 314 trailer mode ...... 281 odometer ...... 67 inspection ...... 314 Speed limiter ...... 226 outside temperature ...... 67 oil change service ...... 314 indication on display ...... 226 PreCrash system ...... 22 proof of Service ...... 314 operating ...... 227 road signs ...... 72 services ...... 314 Speed symbol ...... 304 selector lever positions ...... 67, 208 service sets ...... 316 Sport Mode ...... 259 service intervals ...... 77 service works ...... 314 Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer speed limiter ...... 226 set service intervals ...... 314 combination ...... 282 speed warning ...... 68 terms of use ...... 315 Start-Stop ...... 205 time ...... 75 Service interval display ...... 69, 315 Travel Assist ...... 243 Service intervals ...... 77 343 Index

Tyre pressure monitoring ...... 310 Sun protection ...... 123 Temperature indicator warning and information messages ...... 70 Sunroof ...... 108 exterior ...... 67 Steering anti-trap function ...... 109 Time control lamp ...... 215 malfunction ...... 108 adjust ...... 69, 75 electromechanical steering ...... 215 Sunshade blind Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . 207, 209 Steering wheel anti-trap function (glass roof) ...... 109 To change the battery adjust ...... 15 Switching off of the vehicle key ...... 90 controls ...... 87 telephone ...... 195 Top Tether ...... 36, 38, 39 heating ...... 150 telephone interface ...... 195 Top Tether System ...... 36, 38, 39 multifunction ...... 87 System settings ...... 163 Torque shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . 209 wheel nuts ...... 49 Steering wheel heating ...... 150 T Touch screen ...... 160 Storage compartment ...... 138 Tail lights Touch zones ...... 160 drawers ...... 139 change a bulb ...... 61 Towable loads glove compartment ...... 139 TCS loading the trailer ...... 280 glove compartment light ...... 117 see Traction control ...... 257 Tow cable ...... 278, 279 on-board documentation ...... 139 Technical data ...... 329 Tow hook on the front passenger side ...... 139 fuel consumption ...... 329 control lamp ...... 283 other object holders ...... 140 load on the roof ...... 138 unlocking electrically ...... 282 Storage compartment accessories vehicle dimensions ...... 332 Towing device see Storage ...... 138 vertical load on the tow hitch ...... 276 fitting a bicycle carrier ...... 284 Storage of accident data ...... 325 weights ...... 329 fitting later ...... 284 Storing objects ...... 130 Technical modifications ...... 323 malfunction ...... 278 bag hooks ...... 135 Telephone tow hook with electric unlocking ...... 282 fastening rings ...... 134 contacts ...... 198 Towing the vehicle ...... 53, 55 loading the trailer ...... 280 disconnecting ...... 195 automatic gearbox ...... 54, 55 net bag ...... 134 favourites ...... 198 four-wheel drive ...... 54 positioning the load ...... 130 pairing a mobile phone ...... 196 front towline anchorage ...... 56 positioning the luggage ...... 130 Phone book ...... 198 rear towline anchorage ...... 57 roof carrier ...... 136 send messages ...... 197 special characteristics ...... 53, 55 roof carrier system ...... 136, 137 speed dial buttons ...... 198 tow bar ...... 54 trailer ...... 276 to call ...... 197 towing cable ...... 54 trailer mode ...... 281 Telephone interface ...... 194 towing prohibited ...... 54 trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . 136 places with risk of explosion ...... 195 with towing device ...... 54 Sun blind ...... 123 Traction control ...... 257 344 Index

Trademarks ...... 164 Turning off the lights ...... 110 V Traffic information (TP) ...... 182 Turning on the lights ...... 110 Vanity mirror ...... 123 Traffic programme Turn signal lever ...... 112 Variable luggage compartment floor ...... 133 see Traffic information (TP) ...... 182 Tyre Mobility System Vehicle Trailer ...... 276 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 44 data label ...... 329 adjusting the headlights ...... 281 Tyre pressure ...... 306 identification data ...... 329 anti-theft alarm ...... 279 Tyre pressure monitor system ...... 310 identification number ...... 329 connecting ...... 278 Tyre pressure monitor systems lending or selling ...... 170 exterior mirrors ...... 278 Tyre pressure monitor indicator ...... 310 parking on inclines ...... 260 hitching ...... 278 Tyre profile ...... 307 parking on upward slopes ...... 260 LED tail lights ...... 278, 279 Tyre repair kit ...... 43 raise ...... 48 loading ...... 280 see also Anti-puncture kit ...... 44 unlocking and locking (Keyless Access) . . . 94 malfunction ...... 278 Tyre repairs ...... 44 vehicle ID number ...... 329 parking aid ...... 271, 273 Tyres Vehicle care power socket ...... 279 accessories ...... 304 wiper blade service position ...... 50 retrofitting a towing bracket ...... 284 change ...... 46 Vehicle conservation products ...... 317 special characteristics ...... 251 directional tread pattern ...... 49 Vehicle dimensions ...... 332 stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail- foreign objects inserted ...... 304 Vehicle information ...... 85 er combination ...... 282 for winter ...... 308 Vehicle location ...... 170 tail lights ...... 278, 279 new tyres ...... 305 Vehicle maintenance ...... 317 technical requirements ...... 277 speed symbol ...... 304 Vehicle seats ...... 14 towable loads ...... 280 tread wear indicators ...... 307 Vehicle settings ...... 86 towing cable ...... 278, 279 tyre pressure ...... 306 Vehicle tool kit ...... 43 trailer mode ...... 281 useful life ...... 306 Vehicle wallet compartment ...... 139 unlocking the tow hook electrically ...... 282 with directional tread pattern ...... 304 Ventilation ...... 143 vertical load on the tow hitch ...... 276, 280 Tyre tread depth ...... 307 Vertical load on the tow hitch ...... 276 Trailer mode Tyre wear ...... 307 see Trailer ...... 276 loading the trailer ...... 280 Transportation of children ...... 31 U voice control ...... 178 Android Auto™ ...... 175 Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 136 Unlock and lock ...... 94 Siri™ (Apple CarPlay™) ...... 174 Travel Assist by remote control ...... 92 Volume see Driving Assist (Travel Assist) ...... 242 doors ...... 100 set for external audio sources ...... 164 Trips abroad with the central locking switch...... 93 headlights ...... 116 USB ...... 200 petrol ...... 221 USB port ...... 200 345 Index

W Window washer window washer lever ...... 119 Warning symbols Window washer system ...... 298 see Control and warning lamps ...... 80 Window washer water Warning triangle ...... 115 check ...... 298 Warranty ...... 317 filling quantities ...... 298 Washing the vehicle refill ...... 298 conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . 317 Windscreen washer ...... 119 high pressure cleaning equipment ...... 317 Windscreen wipers ...... 119 sensors ...... 261 functions ...... 119 special characteristics ...... 104 lift the blade ...... 50 Weights ...... 329 rain sensor ...... 120 Wheel balance ...... 306 reposition the blade ...... 50 Wheel nuts ...... 47, 308 service position ...... 50 anti-theft device ...... 47 special characteristics ...... 119 caps ...... 47 Winter conditions torque ...... 49 sunroof ...... 108 Wheels trailer ...... 276 change ...... 46, 49 Winter tyres ...... 308 changing ...... 307 four-wheel drive ...... 218 changing a wheel ...... 46 Wiper and rear window wiper blades new wheels ...... 305 cleaning ...... 50, 319 snow chains ...... 309 replacement ...... 50 spare wheel ...... 312 service position ...... 50 wheel nuts ...... 308 Wireless Charger ...... 198 Wheel spanner ...... 43 Wireless charging ...... 198 Wheel trim WLAN ...... 176 remove ...... 47 Wi-Fi ...... 166 X Window controls ...... 106 XDS ...... 257 Windows automatic opening/closing ...... 106 automatic operation ...... 106 convenience closing ...... 106 convenience opening ...... 106

346

Vehicle identification da a Confirmation of eceipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.20 (11.20) Inglés 5FF012720BC FORMENTOR

(11.20)

FORMENTOR

5FF012720BC Owner’s manual

Inglés